GPS1200

GPS1200
Technical Reference Manual

Version 2.0
English
Introduction GPS1200 I
Introduction
Purchase Congratulations on the purchase of a GPS1200 Series instrument.
) To use the product in a permitted manner, please refer to the detailed safety directions in the
User Manual.
Product identification The model and the serial number of your product are indicated on the type plate.
Enter the model and serial number in your manual and always refer to this information when
you need to contact your agency or Leica Geosystems authorized service workshop.
Type: _________________________
Serial No.: _________________________
Software-Version: _________________________
Symbols The symbols used in this manual have the following meanings:
Type Description
) Important paragraphs which must be adhered to in practice as they enable

the product to be used in a technically correct and efficient manner.
Trademarks Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation

CompactFlash and CF are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Table of Contents
In this manual Chapter Page
1 How to Use this Manual 1-1
2 Equipment Setup 2-1
3 Antenna Heights 3-1
4 Using GPS1200 without RX1200 4-1
5 Configurable Keys 5-1
6 Main Menu 6-1
7 Manage...\Jobs 7-1
8 Manage...\Data 8-1
9 Manage...\Codelists 9-1
10 Coding 10-1
11 Manage...\Coordinate Systems 11-1
12 Manage...\Configuration Sets 12-1
13 Manage...\Antennas 13-1
14 Convert...\Export Data from Job 14-1
15 Convert...\Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job 15-1
16 Convert...\Copy Points Between Jobs 16-1
Table of Contents GPS1200 II

Table of Contents GPS1200 III
17 Config...\Survey Settings... 17-1
18 Config...\Instrument Settings... 18-1
19 Config...\General Settings... 19-1
20 Config...\Interfaces... - General 20-1
21 Configuration of Devices 21-1
22 Config...\Interfaces... - Controlling Devices 22-1
23 Tools...\Format Memory Device 23-1
24 Tools...\Transfer Objects... 24-1
25 Tools...\Upload System Files... 25-1
26 Tools...\Calculator 26-1
27 Tools...\File Viewer 27-1
28 Tools...\Licence Keys 28-1
29 STATUS 29-1
30 MapView Interactive Display Feature 30-1
31 Update Setups 31-1
32 NTRIP via Internet 32-1
33 Reference Station 33-1
34 Application Programs - General 34-1
35 Survey - General 35-1
36 Survey - Auto Points 36-1
37 Survey - Hidden Points 37-1
38 Stakeout 38-1
39 COGO 39-1
40 Wake-Up 40-1
41 Reference Line 41-1
42 Reference Plane 42-1
43 Determine Coordinate System - General 43-1
44 Determine Coordinate System - Normal 44-1
45 Determine Coordinate System - One Point Localisation 45-1
Appendix A Menu Tree A-1
Appendix B Memory Types B-1
Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device C-1
Appendix D Pin Assignments and Sockets D-1
Appendix E Cables E-1
Appendix F NMEA Message Formats F-1
Appendix G Event Input Notify Message Format G-1
Appendix H Seismic Record Format H-1
Table of Contents GPS1200 IV

Table of Contents GPS1200 V
Appendix I PPS Output Notify Message Format I-1
Appendix J AT Commands J-1
Index i-1
Table of Contents GPS1200 VI
How to Use this Manual GPS1200 1-1
1 How to Use this Manual
)
Path
It is recommended to set up the product while reading through this manual.
Main Menu: Manage...\Data stands for this working sequence:

From the Main Menu select Manage... and then select Data.
Screen CONFIGURE General Menu describes the name of the screen.
Page Screens can have more than one page. Units page describes a specific page of a screen.
For example: ...in CONFIGURE Units & Formats, Units page....
Fields and options Fields displayed on the screen are described as <Coord System:> or <Coord System:
Swiss>, if Swiss is the selected coordinate system.
XX The characters XX are used as placeholders for screen names or multiple options that are
all covered by a general description of appearance or functionality.
Example 1: STAKEOUT XX Stakeout indicates that the explanation provided is valid for
the screens STAKEOUT Polar Stakeout and STAKEOUT Orthogonal
Stakeout.
Example 2: In REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line, Reference page, <Task: XX
Line> indicates that the explanation provided is valid for the options <Task:
Measure to Line>, <Task: Stake to Line> and <Task: Gridstake Line>.
Keys Two different types of keys can be found on the instrument. These are fixed keys and
softkeys.
Type Description
Fixed keys Keys which can be pressed on the keyboard, for example:
Function keys F1-F6.
Function keys F7-F12.
Alphanumeric keys.
ESC, USER, PROG,CE, ENTER, SHIFT.
Arrow keys.
Softkeys Displayed on the screen, can be selected by using the assigned fixed key.
For example CONT (F1). The assigned fixed key is shown in brackets.
) Throughout the manual, stepwise instructions are used. Keys to be pressed within these
instructions are indicated as for example ENTER, CONT (F1) or SHIFT INDIV (F5).
Index The index is at the back of the manual.

Menu tree The menu tree helps finding a topic graphically.
MAIN MENU
|
| SURVEY
|
|
| PROGRAMS...
|
|
| MANAGE...
|
| |
| | JOBS
) Keys, fields and options on the screens which are considered as self-explanatory are not
explained.
Validity of this manual This manual applies to all GPS1200 instruments. Differences between the various
models are marked and described.
The RX1200 is available as RX1210 or RX1220 and with touch screen functionality as
RX1210T or RX1220T. The names RX1210 and RX1220 are used throughout the manual
and may also represent the T models. Only use the supplied stylus on the touch screens
of the T models.
Illustrations For the purpose of the illustrations, a GX1230 model has been selected which is represent-
ative for all models.
Available
Name of documentation Description
documentation
GPS1200 User Manual Provides an overview of the system together with technical data
and safety directions.
Name of documentation Description

GPS1200 System Field Describes the general working of the system in standard use.
Manual Intended as a quick reference field guide.
GPS1200 Application Describes specific onboard application programs in standard
Programs Field Manual use. Intended as a quick reference field guide.
GPS1200 Technical Refer- Overall comprehensive guide to the system and program func-
ence Manual tions. Included are detailed descriptions of special soft-
ware/hardware settings and software/hardware functions
intended for technical specialists.
Format of the documen- The GPS1200 CD contains the entire documentation in electronic format. All manuals are
tation also available in printed form except for the GPS1200 Technical Reference Manual.

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-1
2 Equipment Setup
In this chapter Topic Page

2.1 Receiver Ports 2-2
2.2 Post-Processed Static Reference on Pillar 2-6
2.3 Post-Processed Static Reference on Tripod 2-10
2.4 Post-Processed Kinematic, Pole and Minipack 2-14
2.5 Post-Processed Kinematic, All-on-Pole - Option 1 2-19
2.6 Post-Processed Kinematic, All-on-Pole - Option 2 2-23
2.7 Real-Time Reference, Single Tripod 2-26
2.8 Real-Time Reference, Two Tripods 2-30
2.9 Real-Time Rover, Pole and Minipack 2-34
2.10 Real-Time Rover, Pole, Minipack and SmartAntenna 2-40
2.11 Real-Time Rover, All-on-Pole - Option 1 2-45
2.12 Real-Time Rover, All-on-Pole - Option 2 2-48
2.13 Using the Minipack 2-51
2.14 Checking and Adjusting the Circular Level on the Tribrach 2-54
2.1 Receiver Ports
Description All receiver ports of GPS1200 are part of the receiver front panel.
Ports on the receiver GX1210, GX1220, GX1230, GX1200 with PPS/Event option, GRX1200 Classic and
front panel GRX1200 Lite
a h
b i
c
d
P
P
E1 E2 S
e R
j
P
3 X
f k
P
W P
R 2
g l
A
N P
T 1
GPS12_001a
a) Port E2: Event input 2, on GX1200 with g) Port ANT: GPS antenna in. 8 pin LEMO for
PPS/Event option GTX1230.

b) Port E1: Event input 1, on GX1200 with h) Battery compartment B, not for GRX1200 Pro
PPS/Event option
c) Battery compartment A i) Port PPS: PPS output, on GX1200 with
with CompactFlash card compartment PPS/Event option
d) LED indicators j) Port RX: RX1200 in/out or remote interface
in/out. 8 pin LEMO
e) Port P3: Power out, data in/out, or remote k) Port P2: Power out, data in/out, or remote
interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO
f) Port PWR: Power in. 5 pin LEMO l) Port P1: Power out, data in/out, or remote
interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO
GRX1200 Pro
a h
b i
c
d
P
P
E1 OSC S
e P
j
R
3 X
f k
P
W P
R 2
g l
A
N P
T 1
GPS12_001b
a) Port OSC: External oscillator, in g) Port ANT: GPS antenna in

b) Port E1: Event input h) Port NET: Ethernet/LAN data in/out, or remote
interface.
c) Battery compartment i) Port PPS: PPS output
with CompactFlash card compartment

in/out. 8 pin LEMO
e) Port P3: Power out, data in/out, or remote k) Port P2: Power out, data in/out, or remote
interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO
f) Port PWR: Power in. 5 pin LEMO l) Port P1: Power out, data in/out, or remote
interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO
Cables Refer to "Appendix E Cables" for information on cables.
Ports to connect equip-

Equipment Port
ment
RX1210 without cable Direct clip on the receiver
RX1210 using a cable Port RX
GPS antenna Port ANT
Radio in a housing, without cable Port P1 or port P3
Radio without housing, using a cable Port P1, port P2 or port P3
Radio in a housing of System500, using a Port P1, port P2 or port P3
cable
External power Port PWR
2.2 Post-Processed Static Reference on Pillar
Use The equipment setup described below is to be used for static operations on fixed surveying
pillars.
Description The receiver and the RX1200 if used can be assembled to make one unit. One connection
is needed to connect the GPS antenna which is mounted on the pillar to the receiver. The
receiver and the RX1200 can be kept in the container. Note that the receiver can be
programmed with the RX1200 prior to use which can then be omitted from the setup.
) GPS antenna is mounted directly using screw fitting. If using stub and adapter, proce-
dures may vary slightly.
GPS antennas are AX1201 or AX1202. Procedures may vary if AT504 is used.

Equipment setup
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
GPS12_012
a) GPS antenna f) Receiver GX1210/GX1220/GX1230

AX1201/AX1202/AT504
b) Carrier g) Two batteries
c) Tribrach h) 2.8 m antenna cable
d) Pillar plate if required i) CompactFlash card
e) RX1210 if required j) Transport container
Equipment setup step-
Step Description
by-step
1. If a pillar plate is being used, locate the pillar plate on the pillar.
2. Screw the tribrach to the pillar plate or the pillar.
3. Level the tribrach.
4. Place and lock the carrier in the tribrach.
5. Screw the GPS antenna onto the carrier.
6. Check that the tribrach is still level.
7. Insert the batteries into the receiver.
8. Insert the CompactFlash card into the receiver.
9. Connect the receiver to the GPS antenna using the antenna cable and port ANT
on the receiver.
10. Attach the RX1210 to the receiver if required.
11. Press the ON/OFF button on the receiver for at least 2 s or PROG on the RX1210
to switch the receiver on.
12. Once operating, the receiver can be placed in the transport container for additional
protection.
Next step
IF the receiver AND the RX1200 is Refer to chapter
has been pre-programmed not being used 4
has been pre-programmed being used 35
requires programming being used 12

) When using the adapter and carrier, ensure that the GPS antenna and the adapter assembly
slide down the full length of the carrier stub. An incorrectly mounted GPS antenna will have
a direct effect on the results.
) If the receiver is left in the container during use in high temperatures, the lid should be left
open. Refer to the GPS1200 User Manual for operating and storage temperatures.
) Use an external battery such as GEB171 to ensure operation for a full day.
2.3 Post-Processed Static Reference on Tripod
Use The equipment setup described below is to be used for static operations over markers.
Description The receiver and the RX1200 if used can be assembled to make one unit. The receiver is
either clipped to the tripod leg or is placed in the transport container. One connection is
needed to connect the GPS antenna to the receiver. Note that the receiver can be
GPS antennas are AX1201 or AX1202. Procedures/setup may vary if AT504 is used.

Equipment setup
a
b
c
d
e
f h
g
i
GPS12_013
a) GPS antenna AX1201/AX1202 g) Receiver GX1210/GX1220/GX1230

b) Carrier h) Two batteries
c) Height hook i) CompactFlash card
d) Tribrach j) Tripod
e) 2.8 m antenna cable k) Transport container
f) RX1210 if required

Step Description
by-step
1. Set up the tripod.
2. Mount and level the tribrach on the tripod.
3. Ensure that the tribrach is over the marker.
4. Place and lock the carrier in the tribrach.
5. Screw the GPS antenna onto the carrier.
6. Check that the tribrach is still level.
9. Connect the receiver to the GPS antenna using the antenna cable and port ANT
on the receiver.
10. Attach the RX1210 to the receiver if required.
11. To hang the receiver on the tripod leg, use the hook on the rear of the unit. Or place
the receiver in the transport container.
12. Insert the height hook into the carrier.
13. Measure the antenna height using the height hook.

Next step
2.4 Post-Processed Kinematic, Pole and Minipack
Use The equipment setup described below is to be used for post-processed kinematic rover
surveys with extended periods of use in the field.
Description The receiver is placed in the minipack. Connections are made to the GPS antenna and the
RX1200.
Aluminium poles are used. They may be replaced with their carbon fibre equivalents
without any change to these instructions.

Equipment setup
a
d i
e
f
j
k
g l
h
m
GPS12_014
a) GPS antenna AX1201/AX1202 h) 1.6 m antenna cable

b) Upper half aluminium pole with screw i) Minipack
c) 1.2 m antenna cable j) 1.8 m, RX to GX cable
d) Grip for pole k) Receiver GX1210/GX1220/GX1230
e) RX1210 l) Two batteries
f) Holder for RX1210 on pole m) CompactFlash card
g) Lower half aluminium pole

Step Description
by-step
1. Screw the two halves of the pole together.
2. Slide the grip onto the pole.
3. Attach the RX1210 holder and tighten the screw.
4. Screw the GPS antenna to the top of the pole.
5. Clip the RX1210 into the holder.
8. Place the receiver in the minipack with the top side facing outwards and the
receiver front panel to the top.
9. Fasten the strap around the receiver.
10. Connect the 1.6 m antenna cable to port ANT on the receiver.
11. Pass the 1.6 m antenna cable through a cable brake and down through the
opening in the bottom corner of the minipack flap. Refer to paragraph "Position of
cables in the minipack".
12. Draw the required amount of cable out of the minipack and tighten the cable brake.
13. Connect one end of the 1.2 m antenna cable to the loose end of the 1.6 m antenna
cable and the other end to the GPS antenna.
14. Connect the 1.8 m, RX to GX cable to the RX1210.

Step Description
15. Pass the 1.8 m, RX to GX cable through the opening in the bottom corner of the
minipack flap and up through a cable brake. Refer to paragraph "Position of cables
in the minipack".
16. Plug it into port RX on the receiver.
17. Press PROG on the RX1210 to switch the receiver on.
Position of cables in the

minipack
a
b
a) 1.6 m antenna cable

GPS12_035
b) 1.8 m, RX to GX cable to the RX1210
Next step
IF the receiver And the RX1200 is Refer to chapter
) When using the upper pole half with stub, ensure that the GPS antenna and the screw-to-
stub adapter slide down the full length of the stub before tightening the locking ring. An incor-
rectly mounted GPS antenna will have a direct effect on the results.
) Refer to "2.13 Using the Minipack" for advice on using the minipack.

2.5 Post-Processed Kinematic, All-on-Pole - Option 1
surveys with short periods of use, especially where there are many obstacles such as fences.
Description The RX1200 is fixed to the pole grip with a holder. With another holder, the receiver is fixed
to the pole. One connection is needed to connect the GPS antenna to the receiver. Another
connection is needed to connect the RX1200 to the receiver.
Equipment setup
a
c
d
e
j
f
g
k
h l
GPS12_015
a) GPS antenna AX1201/AX1202 g) Receiver GX1210/GX1220/GX1230

b) 1.8 m antenna cable h) Holder for receiver on pole
c) Upper half aluminium pole with screw i) RX1210
d) Grip for pole j) 1.0 m RX to GX cable

e) Holder for RX1210 on pole k) Two batteries
f) Lower half aluminium pole l) CompactFlash card

Step Description
by-step
4. Slide the holder piece for the receiver onto the pole.
5. Attach the receiver holder and tighten the screw. The narrower end of the receiver
holder faces upwards.
10. Connect the receiver to the GPS antenna using the 1.8 m antenna cable and port
ANT on the receiver.
11. Connect the RX1210 to port RX on the receiver using the 1.0 m cable.
12. Screw the receiver to the receiver holder with the receiver front panel facing down-
wards.
Next step

2.6 Post-Processed Kinematic, All-on-Pole - Option 2
surveys with short periods of use, especially where there are many obstacles such as fences.
Description The RX1200, with the receiver attached, is fixed to the pole grip with a holder. One connec-
tion is needed to connect the GPS antenna to the receiver.
Equipment setup
a
e k
f
l
g
h
m
i
j
n
GPS12_021
a) GPS antenna AX1201/AX1202 f) Receiver GX1210/GX1220/GX1230

b) Upper half aluminium pole with screw g) 1.2 m antenna cable
c) Grip for pole h) Lower half aluminium pole
d) Holder for receiver together with RX1210 on i) Two batteries
pole
e) RX1210 j) CompactFlash card

Equipment set-up step-

Step Description
by-step
3. Attach the holder for receiver together with RX1210 and tighten the screw.
5. Screw the receiver, with RX1210 attached, to the holder.
8. Connect the receiver to the GPS antenna using the 1.2 m antenna cable and port
ANT on the receiver.
Next step
2.7 Real-Time Reference, Single Tripod
Use The equipment setup described below is to be used for real-time reference stations with the
need of normal radio coverage. Raw observation data may also be collected for post-
processing.
Description The receiver and RX1200 if used can be assembled to make one unit. The receiver clips to
the tripod leg. Connections are made to the GPS and radio antenna. The radio antenna is
mounted on the antenna arm which clips to the GPS antenna. Note that the receiver can be
The GX1210 and GX1220 can be used as a DGPS reference station if they are fitted with
the DGPS option. They cannot be used as a real-time reference station.
Standard radio mounted in radio housing is used throughout the instructions. Digital
cellular phones may also be used but the setup may differ slightly.

Equipment setup
c l
d
e
f
g m
h
i
n
j
k
o
GPS12_016
a) Radio antenna i) RX1210 if required

b) Radio antenna arm 15 cm long j) Receiver GX1210/GX1220/GX1230
c) GPS antenna AX1201/AX1202 k) Radio in housing
d) Height hook l) Transport container
e) Carrier m) 1.2 m antenna cable to connect radio housing
to radio antenna
f) Tribrach n) Two batteries
g) 1.2 m antenna cable to connect receiver and o) CompactFlash card
GPS antenna
h) Tripod

Step Description
by-step
1. Refer to "2.3 Post-Processed Static Reference on Tripod". Follow steps 1. to 13.
2. Clip the antenna arm to the GPS antenna.
3. Screw the radio antenna onto the antenna arm.
4. Attach the radio in its housing to port P1 or P3 on the receiver.
5. Connect the radio antenna to the radio using the second 1.2 m antenna cable.
Next step

2.8 Real-Time Reference, Two Tripods
Use The equipment setup described below is to be used for real-time reference station with the
need of maximized radio coverage. Raw observation data may also be collected for post-
processing.
Description Refer to "2.7 Real-Time Reference, Single Tripod". The same description applies except that
the radio antenna is mounted on the second tripod. This increases the height of the radio
antenna and therefore maximizes radio coverage.

Equipment setup
i
j
a k
b
c l o
d m
e
n
p
f q
g
h r
GPS12_017
a) GPS antenna AX1201/AX1202 j) Radio antenna arm 3 cm long

b) Carrier k) 2.8 m antenna cable
c) Height hook l) Telescopic rod
d) Tribrach m) Base for telescopic rod
e) 1.2 m antenna cable n) Radio in housing
f) RX1210 if required o) Transport container
g) Receiver GX1210/GX1220/GX1230 p) Tripod
h) Tripod q) Two batteries
i) Radio antenna r) CompactFlash card

Step Description
by-step
1. Refer to "2.3 Post-Processed Static Reference on Tripod". Follow steps 1. to 13.
3. Set up the second tripod nearby.
4. Screw the base for the telescopic rod onto the tripod.
5. Screw the radio antenna arm onto the telescopic rod.
6. Screw the radio antenna onto the arm.
7. Connect the radio antenna to the radio using the 2.8 m antenna cable.
8. Push the telescopic rod into the base.
Next step

2.9 Real-Time Rover, Pole and Minipack
Use The equipment setup described below is to be used for real-time rover with extended periods
of use in the field. Raw observation data may also be collected for post-processing.
Description The radio attaches to the receiver and is placed in the minipack. Connections are made to
the GPS antenna, radio antenna and RX1200. The cables coming from the minipack can be
disconnected in the event that an obstacle such as a fence has to be crossed.

Equipment setup
a
n
b
o
p
g q
c
d
e
r
i
j
k
l
f
h
m
GPS12_018
a) GPS antenna AX1201/AX1202 j) 1.8 m, RX to GX cable

b) Upper half aluminium pole with screw or k) Receiver GX1210/GX1220/GX1230
stub
c) Grip for pole l) Two batteries
d) RX1210 m) CompactFlash card
e) Holder for RX1210 on pole n) Radio antenna
f) Lower half aluminium pole o) Radio antenna arm 3 cm long
g) 1.2 m antenna cable p) 1.2 m antenna cable to connect radio housing
and radio antenna
h) 1.6 m antenna cable q) Telescopic rod
i) Radio in housing r) Minipack

Step Description
by-step
1. Refer to "2.4 Post-Processed Kinematic, Pole and Minipack". Follow steps 1. to 7.
5. Push the telescopic rod through the slit in the top of the minipack. Ensure it is
located in the sleeve inside the minipack and push it all the way to the bottom.
6. Adjust the height of the telescopic rod to suit.
8. Connect the first 1.2 m antenna cable to the radio antenna.
9. Pass the cable through the opening in the top of the minipack and down under-
neath the receiver.
10. Connect the first 1.2 m antenna cable to the radio.
11. Connect the 1.6 m antenna cable to port ANT on the receiver.

Step Description
12. Pass the 1.6 m antenna cable through a cable brake and down through the
cables in the minipack".
14. Connect one end of the second 1.2 m antenna cable to the loose end of the 1.6 m
antenna cable and the other end to the GPS antenna.
in the minipack".
Position of cables in the
c
minipack
a
b
a) 1.6 m antenna cable

b) 1.8 m, RX to GX cable
c) 1.2 m antenna cable to connect radio housing
GPS12_036 and radio antenna
Next step

2.10 Real-Time Rover, Pole, Minipack and SmartAntenna
Use The equipment setup described below is to be used for real-time rover using SmartAntenna
with extended periods of use in the field. Raw observation data may also be collected for
post-processing.
Description The radio attaches to the receiver and is placed in the minipack. Connections are made to
the SmartAntenna, radio antenna and RX1200. The cables coming from the minipack can be
disconnected in the event that an obstacle such as a fence has to be crossed.
) SmartAntenna is mounted directly using screw fitting. If using stub and adapter, proce-

Equipment setup
a
b o
c
p
q
h r
d
e
f
s
j
k
l
m
g
i
n
GPS12 150
a) SmartAntenna k) 1.8 m, RX to GX cable

b) Battery for SmartAntenna l) Receiver GTX1230
c) Upper half aluminium pole with screw or m) Two batteries for GTX1230
stub
d) Grip for pole n) CompactFlash card
e) RX1210 o) Radio antenna
f) Holder for RX1210 on pole p) Radio antenna arm 3 cm long
g) Lower half aluminium pole q) 1.2 m antenna cable to connect radio housing
and radio antenna
h) 1.2 m SmartAntenna cable r) Telescopic rod
i) 1.6 m SmartAntenna cable s) Minipack
j) Radio in housing

Step Description
by-step
4. Insert the battery into the SmartAntenna.
5. Screw the SmartAntenna to the top of the pole.
12. Push the telescopic rod through the slit in the top of the minipack. Ensure it is
located in the sleeve inside the minipack and push it all the way to the bottom.

Step Description
13. Adjust the height of the telescopic rod to suit.
15. Connect the 1.2 m antenna cable to the radio antenna.
16. Pass the cable through the opening in the top of the minipack and down under-
neath the receiver.
17. Connect the 1.2 m antenna cable to the radio.
18. Connect the 1.6 m SmartAntenna cable to port ANT on the receiver.
19. Pass the 1.6 m SmartAntenna cable through a cable brake and down through the
cables in the minipack" in "2.9 Real-Time Rover, Pole and Minipack".
21. Connect one end of the 1.2 m SmartAntenna cable to the loose end of the 1.6 m
SmartAntenna cable and the other end to the SmartAntenna.
in the minipack".
Next step
) When using the upper pole half with stub, ensure that the SmartAntenna and the screw-to-
rectly mounted SmartAntenna will have a direct effect on the results.

2.11 Real-Time Rover, All-on-Pole - Option 1
Use The equipment setup described below is to be used for real-time rover with short periods of
use, especially where there are many obstacles such as fences.
Description The RX1200 is fixed to the pole grip with a holder. With another holder, the receiver is fixed
to the pole. One connection is made from the receiver to the GPS antenna. Another connec-
tion is made from the receiver to the RX1200. The radio plus radio antenna attaches to the
receiver.
Equipment setup
a
e k
f
l
g
h
m
i
j
n
GPS12_019
a) GPS antenna AX1201/AX1202 h) Radio in housing

b) Upper half aluminium pole with screw i) Receiver GX1210/GX1220/GX1230
c) 1.8 m antenna cable j) Holder for receiver on pole
d) Grip for pole k) RX1210
e) Holder for RX1210 on pole l) 1.0 m RX to GX cable
f) Lower half aluminium pole m) Two batteries

g) Radio antenna n) CompactFlash card

by-step Step Description
1. Refer to "2.5 Post-Processed Kinematic, All-on-Pole - Option 1". Follow steps 1. to
12.
3. Screw the radio antenna onto the housing.
Next step
2.12 Real-Time Rover, All-on-Pole - Option 2
Use The equipment setup described below is to be used for real-time rover with short periods of
use, especially where there are many obstacles such as fences.
Description The RX1200, with the receiver attached, is fixed to the pole grip with a holder. One connec-
tion is needed to connect the GPS antenna to the receiver. The radio plus radio antenna
attaches to the receiver.

Equipment setup
a
m
b
n
o
i p
c
d j q
e
f k
g
l
h
GPS12_022
a) GPS antenna AX1201/AX1202 g) 1.2 m antenna cable

b) Upper half aluminium pole with screw h) Lower half aluminium pole
c) Grip for pole i) Radio antenna
d) Holder for RX1210 and receiver on pole j) Radio in housing
e) RX1210 k) Two batteries
f) Receiver GX1210/GX1220/GX1230 l) CompactFlash card

1. Refer to "2.6 Post-Processed Kinematic, All-on-Pole - Option 2". Follow steps 1. to
8.
2. Attach the radio in its housing to port P1 or P3 the receiver.
3. Screw the radio antenna onto the housing.
Next step

2.13 Using the Minipack
Use The minipack is used for various applications. The applications are:
Post-processed kinematic, pole and minipack.

Real-time rover, pole and minipack.
Antenna pole strap Ensures the antenna pole does not sway
around and remains as upright as possible.
Pass the strap around the pole and fasten

using the clip as shown in the diagram.
GPS12_137
Hip belt The hip belt
transfers most of the weight from the
shoulders to the hips when properly
adjusted.
contains velcro attachments through which
cables can be passed.
GPS12_138
Internal net pouch The internal net pouch is designed for

carrying an AX1201/AX1202 antenna
when not in use.
storing coiled cables.
carrying a non standard radio.
carrying spare batteries.
carrying sandwiches.
GPS12_139
Use in high tempera- In high temperatures it is desirable to increase air flow around the receiver. Therefore the
tures minipack can be kept half or even fully open when in use.

GPS12_140 GPS12_141
To half open the minipack: To fully open the minipack:

1. Open the minipack halfway. 1. Open the minipack completely.
2. Tuck the flap inside. 2. Tuck the flap inside.
3. Secure it with the velcro pad. 3. Secure it with the velcro pad.
4. Tuck the flap under the receiver.
2.14 Checking and Adjusting the Circular Level on the Tribrach
Description The circular level is used to level the antenna over the observation point. An incorrectly
adjusted circular level means that the GPS antenna is not properly levelled over the point.
This means that in fact another point on the ground is observed.
Tribrach should be checked and adjusted

before the first use.
before each precision survey.
after long periods of transport.
after long periods of work.
if the temperature changes by more than 20C.
Equipment checklist Tripod Carrier with precision bubble checked and

adjusted
Tribrach Adjusting pin
Check and adjust step-

Step Description
by-step
1. Set up the tripod.
2. Screw the tribrach onto the tripod.
3. Fix the carrier to the tribrach.
4. Level the tripod using the precision bubble on the carrier.
5. Is the circular level on the tribrach centered and does not extend beyond the
circle?

Step Description
If yes, no adjustment is required. The procedure is finished.
If no, the bubble needs adjusting. Continue with step 6.
6. Take down the carrier with precision bubble.
7. Centre the bubble using the adjustment pin in conjunction with the adjustment
screws on the bottom side of the bubble. Refer to paragraph "Diagram".
8. Reattach the precision bubble to the tribrach.
9. Check that no screw is loose.
10. Check the adjustment of the circular level using the precision bubble.
11. Is more adjustment necessary?
If no, the adjustment procedure is finished.
If yes, repeat steps 6. to 11.
Diagram
GPS12_61

Antenna Heights GPS1200 3-1
3 Antenna Heights

3.1 Overview 3-2
3.2 Mechanical Reference Planes, MRP 3-5
3.3 Determining Antenna Heights 3-7
3.4 Measuring Slope Antenna Heights 3-18
3.1 Overview
Description The height of the GPS antenna above the point consists of three components:
the vertical or slope height reading,

the vertical offset,
the vertical phase centre variations.
For most operations, pre-configured standard settings in the receiver can be used. They
automatically take the vertical phase centre variations into account.
Vertical or slope height GPS1200 accepts vertical and slope antenna heights measured to the Mechanical Refer-
ence Plane. For the majority of GPS antennas, including all Leica GPS antennas, the vertical
antenna height is measured.
Measurements required This is an overview of required measurements depending on antennas, setup and accesso-
ries.
IF the antenna is AND the accesso- AND the setup is THEN the measure-
ries are ments required are
standard standard tripod vertical height from
GPS1200/System500 GPS1200/System500 height hook
standard standard pole none.
GPS1200/System500 GPS1200/System500 Value is 2.00 m.

IF the antenna is AND the accesso- AND the setup is THEN the measure-
ries are ments required are
standard standard GPS1200 pillar vertical height to
GPS1200/System500 the MRP.
Refer to "3.2 Mechan-
ical Reference
Planes, MRP".
standard non Leica any vertical height to
possibly vertical
offset.
ical Reference
Planes, MRP"
non Leica antenna standard any vertical height to
OR possibly vertical
non Leica offset.
phase centre vari-
ations.
horizontal offset if
a slope height
reading.
ical Reference
Planes, MRP"
Vertical phase centre For Leica antennas: Are handled automatically in the standard antenna records.
variations
For non Leica antennas: Can be stored in a newly created antenna record.
OR
Antenna records including azimuth and elevation dependent
corrections need to be created using LGO.
The antenna calibrations to determine the phase centre variations were executed by
Geo++ GmbH.

3.2 Mechanical Reference Planes, MRP
General The Mechanical Reference Plane
is where the antenna heights are measured to.

is where the phase centre variations refer to.
varies for different antennas.
The MRP is shown for each GPS1200 antenna.
AX1201 and AX1202
a a) The mechanical reference plane is the under-

GPS12_028 side of the threaded metal insert.
SmartAntenna
a a) The mechanical reference plane is the under-

GPS12_154 side of the threaded metal insert.
AT504 379.4 mm
a) The mechanical reference plane is the under-

side of the preamplifier housing. The AT504 is
a built to a JPL design specified by the IGS for
GPS12_030 34.5 mm reference stations.

3.3 Determining Antenna Heights

3.3.1 Pillar Setup 3-8
3.3.2 Tripod Setup 3-13
3.3.3 Pole Setup 3-16
3.3.1 Pillar Setup
) One of the Leica standard antennas is used: AX1201, AX1202, SmartAntenna, AT504,
AT501, AT502, AT503.
Leica standard accessories are used.

Pillar setup
a
b c
a) Mechanical reference plane

b) Vertical phase centre eccentricity for L1
c) Vertical phase centre eccentricity for L2
d) Vertical height reading
An AX1201/AX1202 antenna is shown.

GPS12_031 Vertical offset = 0
Vertical height reading The vertical height reading is the height difference between the pillar benchmark and the
mechanical reference plane of the antenna. Normally, it is determined indirectly by levelling.
Determine the antenna Sometimes, it is difficult to measure to the MRP directly.
height step-by-step
Step Description
1. Determine the height difference between the pillar benchmark and a surface on the
carrier.
2. Refer to paragraph "Carrier and adapter dimensions". Look up the height differ-
ence between this surface on the carrier and where the MRP of the antenna sits
on the carrier.
3. Add the values determined in step 1. and 2., to get the vertical height reading.
4. For Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset is 0.00 m.

Carrier and adapter
dimensions
9.3 mm
109 mm
145.5 mm
99.7 mm
145.5 mm
36.5 mm
36.5 mm
GPS12_038 GPS12_037
GRT144 carrier with GAD31 screw-to-stub GRT146 carrier.

adapter.
Next step At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the receiver.
The vertical offset of 0.00 m is stored in the antenna setup record for a pillar setup and
will automatically be taken into account.
Refer to "3.1 Overview" for the vertical phase centre variations.
) For carriers other than those shown in the diagram above, the dimensions must be deter-
mined.
) Except for Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset must be measured.
This value must be entered in the antenna setup record.

3.3.2 Tripod Setup
AT501, AT502, AT503.
Tripod setup
a
c
b

d) Vertical offset
e) Vertical height reading
GPS12_032 An AX1201/AX1202 antenna is shown.
Vertical height reading The vertical height reading is the height difference between the ground mark and the bottom
end of the height hook. It is determined using the height hook.

Determine the antenna
Step Description
height step-by-step
1. Determine the vertical height reading using the height hook.
Next step At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the receiver.
The vertical offset of 0.36 m is stored in the antenna setup record for a tripod setup and
will automatically be taken into account. It does not need to be entered.
) For other than the carriers shown in the diagram above, the dimensions must be determined
and the vertical offset must be adapted.
) For other height measurement devices than the height hook, the dimensions must be deter-
mined and the vertical offset must be adapted.
) For other than Leica standard antennas, the vertical offset must be measured. It must be
entered in the antenna setup record.
3.3.3 Pole Setup
AT503.
Pole setup
a
c

d) Vertical height reading
An AX1201/AX1202 antenna is shown.

GPS12_033 Vertical offset = 0

Vertical height reading The vertical height reading is the height difference between the bottom end and the top end
of the pole. Usually, this is a fixed value.
Determine the antenna

Step Description
height step-by-step
1. The vertical height reading for
the Leica standard pole consisting of an upper and a lower half is 2.00 m.
the Leica standard pole consisting of an upper and a lower half with an addi-
tional 1.00 m pole section added is 3.00 m.
the lower half of the pole alone is 1.00 m.
Next step At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the receiver. Note that
a standard rover configuration with a standard antenna setup record for a pole setup uses
the value of 2.00 m already as default.
The vertical offset of 0.00 m is stored in the antenna setup record for a pole setup and will
automatically be taken into account. It does not need to be entered.
) For other than the Leica standard poles, the dimensions must be determined.
) For other than Leica standard antennas, the vertical offset must be measured. It must be
entered in the antenna setup record.
3.4 Measuring Slope Antenna Heights
Setup with a slope

b
antenna height
a e f
c
b) Horizontal offset
c) Slope height reading
d) Vertical offset
e) Vertical phase centre eccentricity for L1
f) Vertical phase centre eccentricity for L2
An AT504 antenna, Dorne Margolin T, as

specified by the IGS is shown.
The mechanical reference plane will differ
GPS12_034
depending on the antenna type used.

Determine the slope The slope height reading is the height difference between the ground marker and the outside
height reading edge of the antenna.
Next step Determine the horizontal and vertical offset.

At the beginning of a survey, enter the slope height reading. The horizontal and vertical
offsets must also be configured in MANAGE Antennas.
) If the outside edge of the antenna is above the mechanical reference plane, the vertical offset
is negative.
Using GPS1200 without RX1200 GPS1200 4-1
4 Using GPS1200 without RX1200
Use For reference stations in post-processing, real-time and static applications, GPS1200 can be
used without RX1200.
Description The receiver is pre-programmed in the office using the RX1200. In the field, the receiver is
used without the RX1200 attached. This greatly reduces the knowledge required to operate
the instrument in the field. Usually, a tripod or pillar setup is used.
Refer to "12 Manage...\Configuration Sets" for full instructions on how to program the
receiver.
Use GPS1200 without

Step Description
RX1200
1. Set up the equipment according to the needs. Refer to "2 Equipment Setup" for
details of the equipment setup.
2. Hold down the ON/OFF button on the receiver for at least 2 s to switch the receiver
on.
3. Check the start time.
4. Note down information such as
start time.
antenna height.
point ID.
This information is required for post-processing. Refer to paragraph "Field Record
Sheet" for an example for a field record sheet.
Step Description
5. The receiver automatically begins to acquire and track satellites and record data
as defined in the receiver configuration.
6. To shut down the equipment press and hold down the ON/OFF button for 4 s. The
LED indicators will not be lit when the equipment is switched off. Refer to para-
graph "LED Indicators".
7. Check the stop time.
8. Note down the stop time.
LED Indicators Description

Every GPS1200 receiver has three Light Emitting Diode indicators positioned below the
ON/OFF button. They indicate the basic receiver status.
Diagram
PWR
MEM
TRK
TRK Tracking LED

MEM Memory LED
PWR Power LED

Description of the LEDs
IF the LED is THEN
TRK off no satellites are tracked.
green enough satellites are tracked to compute a posi-
tion.
flashing green the first satellite is tracked, a position is not yet
available.
MEM off no memory device is available. CompactFlash
card is not inserted or internal memory not fitted.
green memory capacity is okay on selected device.
flashing green memory capacity is 75 % full on selected device.
red memory is full on selected device.
PWR off power is off.
green power is okay.
flashing green power is low.
The remaining time for which enough power is
available depends on the type of survey, the
real-time device in use, the temperature and the
age of the battery.
Field Record Sheet Some information cannot be entered into the receiver without RX1200 but must be entered
into LGO for post-processing. A field record sheet is intended for writing down this necessary
information such as point ID and antenna height.
Example
Field Record
Date:
Local start time: Local stop time:
Receiver serial no.: Operator name:
Point ID: Antenna height:

Configurable Keys GPS1200 5-1
5 Configurable Keys

5.1 Hot Keys 5-2
5.2 USER Key 5-4
5.1 Hot Keys
Description Two levels of hot keys exist:

The first level are the keys F7, F8, ..., F12
The second level is the combination of SHIFT and F7, F8, ..., F12
Functionality Hot keys provide a shortcut for quickly and directly carrying out functions or starting applica-
tion programs assigned to the keys. The assignment of functions and application programs
to hot keys is user configurable. Refer to "19.2 Hot Keys & User Menu" for the configuration
of hot keys.
Use The first level is accessed by pressing F7, F8, ..., F12 directly.
The second level is accessed by pressing SHIFT first followed by F7, F8, ..., F12
Hot keys can be pressed at any time. It is possible that a function or application program
assigned to a hot key cannot be executed in certain situations.
Define hot key step-by- This step-by-step description shows how to assign the CONFIGURE Coding Settings
step screen to the F7 key and to the first line of GPS1200 User Menu: Job Name.
Step Description
1. Select Main Menu: Config...\General Settings...\Hot Keys & User Menu.
2. CONFIGURE Hot Keys & User Menu
For Hot Keys/Shift Hot Keys select <F7: CONF Coding Settings>.
For User Menu select <1: CONF Coding Settings>.
3. CONT (F1)

Step Description
4. CONT (F1).
5. Press F7 to access CONFIGURE Coding Settings.
OR
Press USER and 1 to access CONFIGURE Coding Settings.
5.2 USER Key
Description The USER key opens the user defined menu.
User defined menu The user defined menu can be configured to contain the most used functions or application
programs. The user defined menu can not be accessed while in a CONFIGURE XX screen.
Refer to "19.2 Hot Keys & User Menu" for the configuration of the user defined menu.
Functionality of the Selecting an option in the menu carries out the function or starts the application program
user defined menu assigned to the option.
Access Press USER to access GPS1200 User Menu: Job Name.
GPS1200 This is an example of what a user defined menu can look like. The softkeys and their order
User Menu: Job Name is fixed. The functions and application programs which are assigned to the individual places
in the user defined menu can differ depending on the configuration.
CONT (F1)
To execute the selected function.
CONF (F2)
To access GPS1200 Configuration: Configu-
ration Set.
STAT (F3)
To get information on battery status, interface
status, etc. Refer to "29 STATUS".

Define USER key step- To define the USER key is the same as for the hot keys. Refer to paragraph "Define hot key
by-step step-by-step".
Main Menu GPS1200 6-1
6 Main Menu

6.1 Main Menu Functions 6-2
6.2 Survey 6-4
6.3 Programs... 6-5
6.4 Manage... 6-7
6.5 Convert... 6-9
6.6 Config... 6-10
6.7 Tools... 6-11
6.1 Main Menu Functions
Description The main menu is the first screen displayed when the instrument is switched on.
) If desired, the instrument can be configured to start up with a user defined screen. Refer to
"19.6 Start Up & Power Down".
GPS1200
Main Menu
CONT (F1)
To select the highlighted option and to continue
with the subsequent screen.
Description of the main

Main menu function Description Refer to
menu functions
chapter
Survey To start measuring. 6.2
Programs... To select and start application programs. 6.3
Manage... To manage jobs, data, codelists, configurations 6.4
sets, antennas and coordinate systems.

Main menu function Description Refer to

chapter
Convert... To export data from a job on the receiver to a 6.5
file on the CompactFlash card in a customised
ASCII format.
To import ASCII or GSI data from a file on the
CompactFlash card to a job on the receiver.
To copy points between jobs.
Config... To access all configuration parameters related to 6.6
a survey, the receiver and the interfaces.
Tools... To format the memory device. 6.7
To upload files relevant for the receiver func-
tionality, for example, firmware and language
files.
To transfer non data related files between
receiver and CompactFlash card.
To perform arithmetic operations such as addi-
tion, subtraction, multiplication, division, statis-
tical functions, trigonometric functions, conver-
sions or roots.
To view files on the CompactFlash card or the
internal memory.
To manually type in a licence key.
6.2 Survey
Access Select Main Menu: Survey.
Description Survey provides the functionality used to perform the survey.
SURVEY
Survey Begin
CONT (F1)
To accept settings and to continue with screen
SURVEY Survey: Job Name.
CONF (F2)
Available for configuration sets with <R-Time
Mode: None> or <R-Time Mode: Rover>. To
configure auto point and hidden point meas-
urements functionality.
CSYS (F6)
To change the coordinate system. Refer to
"11.4.1 Creating a New Coordinate System" for
information on defining a coordinate system.
Next step For Main Menu: Survey Refer to chapter 35.

6.3 Programs...
Access Select Main Menu: Programs....

OR
Press PROG.
Description Programs... accesses the application programs menu. The screen of the application
programs menu is called GPS1200 Programs.
GPS1200 The application programs menu contains all loaded application programs including Survey.
Programs They are listed in the order in which they were loaded.
CONT (F1)
Next step For Main Menu: Programs...\Survey Refer to chapter 35.

For Main Menu: Programs...\Stakeout Refer to chapter 38.
For Main Menu: Programs...\COGO Refer to chapter 39.
For Main Menu: Programs...\Reference Line Refer to chapter 41.
For Main Menu: Programs...\Reference Plane Refer to chapter 42.
For Main Menu: Programs...\Determine Coordinate System Refer to chapter 43.
For Main Menu: Programs...\Wake-Up Refer to chapter 40.
For Main Menu: Programs...\RoadRunner Refer to GPS1200 Road-
Runner Manual.

6.4 Manage...
Access Select Main Menu: Manage....
Description Manage... is used to manage

jobs. coordinate systems.
data. configuration sets.
codelists. antennas.
Management functions include creating, selecting, editing and deleting.
GPS1200
Management
CONT (F1)
Next step For Main Menu: Manage...\Jobs Refer to chapter 7.

For Main Menu: Manage...\Data Refer to chapter 8.
For Main Menu: Manage...\Codelists Refer to chapter 9.
For Main Menu: Manage...\Coordinate Systems Refer to chapter 11.
For Main Menu: Manage...\Configuration Sets Refer to chapter 12.
For Main Menu: Manage...\Antennas Refer to chapter 13.

6.5 Convert...
Access Select Main Menu: Convert....
Description Convert... provides access to data exchange options.
GPS1200
Convert Data
CONT (F1)
Next step For Main Menu: Convert...\Export Data from Job Refer to chapter 14.
For Main Menu: Convert...\Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job Refer to chapter 15.
For Main Menu: Convert...\Copy Points Between Jobs Refer to chapter 16.
6.6 Config...
Access Select Main Menu: Config....

OR
Press USER and then CONF (F2).
Description Config... accesses all configuration parameters related to a survey, the receiver and the
interfaces. Any changes made are stored in the configuration set.
GPS1200
Configuration: Configu-
ration Set
CONT (F1)
Next step For Main Menu: Config...\Survey Settings... Refer to chapter 17.
For Main Menu: Config...\Instrument Settings... Refer to chapter 18.
For Main Menu: Config...\General Settings... Refer to chapter 19.
For Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces... Refer to chapter 20.

6.7 Tools...
Access Select Main Menu: Tools....
Description Tools... provides functionality which is not directly related to surveying data.
GPS1200
Tools Menu
CONT (F1)
Next step For Main Menu: Tools...\Format Memory Device Refer to chapter 23.
For Main Menu: Tools...\Transfer Objects... Refer to chapter 24.
For Main Menu: Tools...\Upload System Files... Refer to chapter 25.
For Main Menu: Tools...\Calculator Refer to chapter 26.
For Main Menu: Tools...\File Viewer Refer to chapter 27.
For Main Menu: Tools...\Licence Keys Refer to chapter 28.
Manage...\Jobs GPS1200 7-1
7 Manage...\Jobs

7.1 Overview 7-2
7.2 Accessing Job Management 7-3
7.3 Creating a New Job 7-5
7.4 Editing a Job 7-9
7.5 Managing Job Codes 7-12
7.1 Overview
Description Jobs
structure surveying projects.
contain all points, lines, areas and codes that are recorded and stored.
can be downloaded to LGO for post-processing or for data transfer to a further program.
can be uploaded from LGO, for example, for real-time stake out operations.
may be stored on the CompactFlash card or internal memory, if fitted.
Type of jobs Data jobs. Explained in this chapter.

DTM jobs. Refer to "38.4.4 Staking Out a DTM".
Road jobs. Refer to the GPS1200 RoadRunner Manual.
Default job A job called Default is available on the receiver after formatting the memory device, inserting
a previously formatted CompactFlash card or deleting all jobs from MANAGE Jobs
(Device).
Active job The active job is the one data is stored to. One job is always considered the active job. After
formatting the memory device, the job Default is used until a user defined job is created and
selected.

7.2 Accessing Job Management
Access Select Main Menu: Manage...\Jobs.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen MANAGE Jobs (Device). Refer to "5.1
Hot Keys" for information on hot keys.
OR
Press USER. Refer to "5.2 USER Key" for information on the USER key.
OR
From a choicelist in some screens for example the XX Begin screen of application
programs.
MANAGE Listed are all data jobs stored on the CompactFlash card or in the internal memory, if fitted,
Jobs (Device) depending on the current device.
CONT (F1)
To select the highlighted job and to return to
the screen from where this screen was
accessed.
NEW (F2)
To create a job. Refer to "7.3 Creating a New
Job".
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted job. Refer to "7.4 Editing
a Job".
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted job.
CFCRD (F6) or INTL (F6)
Available for receivers with internal memory.
To change between viewing jobs stored on the
CompactFlash card or internal memory.
Next step
IF a job THEN
is to be selected highlight the desired job.
CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to the screen from where
MANAGE Jobs (Device) was accessed.
is to be created NEW (F2). Refer to "7.3 Creating a New Job".
is to be edited highlight the job and EDIT (F3). Refer to "7.4 Editing a Job".

7.3 Creating a New Job
Access Refer to "7.2 Accessing Job Management" to access MANAGE Jobs (Device).
Create job step-by-step The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
information on screens.
Step Description Refer to
chapter
1. In MANAGE Jobs (Device) highlight a job. The settings of this job 7.2
are applied to the new job.
2. NEW (F2) to access MANAGE New Job.
STORE (F1)
To store the settings and to return to the screen
from where MANAGE New Job was accessed.
PAGE (F6)
To change to another page on this screen.
chapter
3. MANAGE New Job, General page
<Name:> A unique name for the new job. The name may be up to 16
characters long and may include spaces. Input required.
<Description:> Two lines for a detailed description of the job. This
can be for example, work to be performed or the classes contained in
the job. Input optional.
<Creator:> The persons name who is creating the new job. Input
optional.
<Device:> The device on which the new job will be stored.
Depending on the receiver options, this may be an output field.
4. PAGE (F6) changes to the Codelist page.
5. MANAGE New Job, Codelist page 10
<Codelist:> Choosing a codelist copies the codes to the job.
6. PAGE (F6) changes to the Coord System page.
7. MANAGE New Job, Coord System page 11.4
<Coord System:> Choosing a coordinate system attaches it to the
job. If it is not known which coordinate system to use, select <Coord
System: WGS 1984 >.
All other fields on this screen are output fields. They depend on the
transformation type of the selected coordinate system.
8. PAGE (F6) changes to the Avge page.


chapter
9. MANAGE New Job, Avge page
In order to check measurements, the same point can be measured 8.3.4
more than once. If activated, an average or an absolute difference is
calculated.
<Averaging Mode:> Defines the averaging principles for multiple
measured points. <Averaging Mode: Average> computes the
average for the position and the height. Points exceeding the defined
limits are marked with in MANAGE Edit Point, Mean page. <Aver-
aging Mode: Absolute Diffs> computes the absolute differences
between two points selected from a list of measured points which are
all stored with the same point ID. The selection determines the avail-
ability of the subsequent fields for setting the acceptable averaging
limits or absolute differences.
For <Averaging Mode: Average>:
<Points to Use:> The type of points which will be taken into
account for averaging.
<Avge Limit Pos:> and <Avge Limit Ht:> The acceptable differ-
ence for the position and height components.
For <Averaging Mode: Absolute Diffs>:
<Points to Use:> The type of points which will be taken into
account for absolute differences.
From <Easting:> to <Cartesian Z:> The acceptable absolute
differences for each coordinate component.
chapter
For <Averaging Mode: Off>:
No other fields are available.
10. STORE (F1) creates the new job and returns to MANAGE Jobs
(Device).

7.4 Editing a Job
Access Refer to "7.2 Accessing Job Management" to access MANAGE Jobs (Device).
Edit job step-by-step The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. In MANAGE Jobs (Device) highlight a job to be edited.
2. EDIT (F3)
3. MANAGE Edit Job: Job Name, General page
<Name:> Rename the job.
<Device:> Cannot be edited.
The remaining functionality on this page is identical with the creation 7.3
of a new job.
) DATA (F5) accesses MANAGE Data: Job Name. To view, edit and 8.2
delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points, lines and
areas are shown on separate pages. Selected sort and filter settings
apply.
) SHIFT LOG (F5) accesses MANAGE Data Log: Job Name. To view, 8.5
edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points,
lines and areas are sorted by time in one list.
4. PAGE (F6) changes to the Codelist page.
5. Are codes stored in the job?
chapter
If no, continue with step 6.
If yes, continue with step 8.
6. No codes are stored in the job. 10
MANAGE Edit Job: Job Name, Codelist page
<Codelist: <None>> This default setting can be changed. Choosing
a codelist copies the codes to the job. All codelists from Main Menu:
Manage...\Codelists can be selected.
7. PAGE (F6) changes to the Coord System page. Continue with step
10.
8. Codes are stored in the job.
MANAGE Edit Job: Job Name, Codelist page
<Codelist:> If codes had been copied from a System RAM codelist,
the name of the codelist is displayed. If codes have been typed in,
then the name of the active job is displayed.
) IMPRT (F2) adds additional codes from a new codelist to the job. The 9
name of this codelist is copied to the job.
) SHIFT EXPRT (F2) copies codes from the job to an existing or new 9
codelist.
)9.
CODES (F4) views codes currently stored in the job.
PAGE (F6) changes to the Coord System page.
7.5
10. MANAGE Edit Job: Job Name, Coord System page


chapter
The functionality on this page is identical with the creation of a new 7.3
job.
11. PAGE (F6) changes to the Avge page.
12. MANAGE Edit Job: Job Name, Avge page
The functionality on this page is identical with the creation of a new 7.3
job.
) DATA (F5) accesses MANAGE Data: Job Name. To view, edit and 8.2
delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points, lines and
areas are shown on separate pages. Selected sort and filter settings
apply.
) SHIFT LOG (F5) accesses MANAGE Data Log: Job Name. To view, 8.5
edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points,
lines and areas are sorted by time in one list.
13. STORE (F1) stores the changes and returns to the screen from
where MANAGE Edit Job: Job Name was accessed.
7.5 Managing Job Codes
Description To view, edit, group and sort all codes currently stored in the job. The functionality of this
screen is mainly the same as for MANAGE Codes. For simplicity, the functionality which is
different from MANAGE Codes is explained here. Refer to "9.5 Managing Codes" for infor-
mation on MANAGE Codes.
Access step-by-step Available for jobs which have a codelist attached.

Step Description
1. Refer to "7.2 Accessing Job Management" to access MANAGE Jobs (Device).
3. EDIT (F3) to access MANAGE Edit Job: Job Name.
4. In MANAGE Edit Job: Job Name, PAGE (F6) until the Codelist page is active.
5. CODES (F4) to access MANAGE Job Codes.

MANAGE
Job Codes
CONT (F1)
To return to MANAGE Edit Job: Job Name,
Codelist page.
NEW (F2)
To create a new code. Refer to "9.5.2 Creating
a New Code".
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted code. Accesses
MANAGE Edit Code where new attributes can
be added to a code and line styles can be
changed. Refer to paragraph "MANAGE Edit
Code".
MORE (F5)
To display information about the code group,
the code type, the code description and the
quick codes if available.
SHIFT GROUP (F4)
To access MANAGE Code Groups. To view,
create, activate and deactivate code groups.
Refer to "9.6 Managing Code Groups".
SHIFT SORT (F5)
To access MANAGE Sort Codes. To sort
codes by code name, code description, quick
code or last used.
Next step
IF THEN
the job codes do not CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to the screen from where
need to be changed MANAGE Job Codes was accessed.
a new job code is to NEW (F2). Refer to "9.5.2 Creating a New Code".
be created
an existing job code is highlight the job code and EDIT (F3). Refer to paragraph "MANAGE
to be edited Edit Code".
MANAGE
Edit Code
STORE (F1)
To store the code including any newly created
attributes and to return to the screen from
where MANAGE Edit Code was accessed.
NEW-A (F2)
To add a new attribute to a code.
NAME (F3) or VALUE (F3)
Available for attributes for which an attribute
name can be typed in. To highlight <Attribute
n:> or the field for the attribute value. The
name of <Attribute n:> can be edited and an
attribute value can be typed in.
The behaviour of this screen varies with the type of code to be edited. The differences are
explained in the table.

Type of code Description

Point codes New attributes can be added with NEW-A (F2).
and
Free codes
Line codes New attributes can be added with NEW-A (F2).
and The line style can be changed. This new line style is stored to the
Area codes code. It can be decided whether or not to update the line style of
all previously stored lines/areas with this code in this job.
Manage...\Data GPS1200 8-1
8 Manage...\Data

8.1 Overview 8-2
8.2 Accessing Data Management 8-3
8.3 Point Management 8-8
8.4 Line/Area Management 8-34
8.5 Data Log 8-46
8.6 Point Sorting and Filters 8-49
8.1 Overview
Description Data is a generic term for points, lines and areas.
Data management is the administration of data stored in the active job. This includes
viewing data with their related information.
editing data.
creating new data.
deleting existing data.
filtering existing data.
Objects Objects
are points, lines and areas.
have a unique identification ID. This is the point ID, the line ID and the area ID.
may or may not have a code attached. This is either a point code, a line code or an area
code depending on the type of object. Refer to "10 Coding" for information on coding.

8.2 Accessing Data Management
Access Select Main Menu: Manage...\Data.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen MANAGE Data: Job Name. Refer to
"5.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys.
OR
OR
From a choicelist in some screens for example in application programs.
OR
Tap the line/area icon. Refer to the GPS1200 System Field Manual for information on
icons.
) The objects listed on the pages belong to the currently active job. The objects listed and their
order depend on the active sort and filter settings. An active filter for a page is indicated by
to the right of the name of the page. Refer to "8.6 Point Sorting and Filters" for information
about sort and filter settings.
MANAGE
Data: Job Name,
Points page
CONT (F1)
To close the screen and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
NEW (F2)
To create a point.
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted point.
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted point.
MORE (F5)
To display information about the codes if stored
with any point, the time and the date of when
the point was stored and the 3D coordinate
quality and the class.
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT LOG (F4)
To view points, lines, areas and free codes
stored with the job sorted by time. Refer to "8.5
Data Log".
SHIFT FILT (F5)
To define sort and filter settings. Refer to "8.6
Point Sorting and Filters".

Next step
IF THEN
a point is to be highlight the point and NEW (F2). Refer to "8.3.2 Creating a New
created Point".
a point is to be edited highlight the point and EDIT (F2). Refer to "8.3.3 Editing a Point".
a line/area is to be PAGE (F6) changes to the Lines (X) and Areas (X) page. Refer to
managed paragraph "MANAGE Data: Job Name, Lines (X) page; MANAGE
Data: Job Name, Areas (X) page".
MANAGE The explanations for the softkeys given below are valid for both pages.
Data: Job Name, The number in brackets next to the name of the page indicate the number of open
Lines (X) page; lines/areas. Example: Lines (2)/Areas (2) means that two lines/areas are open.
MANAGE
Data: Job Name,
Areas (X) page CONT (F1)
NEW (F2)
To create a line/area. After storing the new line,
all existing lines and areas which are open are
closed.
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted line/area.
CLOSE (F4) and OPEN (F4)
To change between the options in the Open
column of the highlighted line/area.
MORE (F5)
with any line/area, the start time, the end time
of when the last point was added to the
line/area, the length of the line, the perimeter
and the area of the area.
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted line/area.
SHIFT FILT (F5)
To define sort and filter settings. Refer to "8.6
Point Sorting and Filters".
Description of columns
Column Description
Line or Area The listed lines/areas already stored in the active job.
Open The status of a line/area.
Yes
The line/area is open. Measured points are assigned to the line/area.
No
The line/area is closed. Measured points are not assigned to the
line/area.
CLOSE (F4) and OPEN (F4) change between the options.

Next step
IF the line/area THEN
management is CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to the screen from where this
completed screen was accessed.
is to be opened highlight the line/area and OPEN (F4).
which was last used is press a hot key configured to re-open last used line/area. This hot
to be opened key can be used at any time. Refer to "5.1 Hot Keys" for information
on hot keys.
is to be closed highlight the line/area and CLOSE (F4)
OR
press a hot key configured to close all open lines/areas. This hot
key can be used at any time. Refer to "5.1 Hot Keys" for informa-
tion on hot keys.
is to be created NEW (F2). Refer to "8.4.2 Creating a New Line/Area".
is to be edited highlight the line/area and EDIT (F3) to access MANAGE Edit Line:
Line ID or MANAGE Edit Area: Area ID. Refer to "8.4.3 Editing a
Line/Area".
is to be viewed PAGE (F6) until the Map page is active. Refer to "30.5 Map Mode"
for information about the functionality and softkeys available on the
Map page.
8.3 Point Management

8.3.1 Terminology 8-9
8.3.2 Creating a New Point 8-18
8.3.3 Editing a Point 8-22
8.3.4 Mean Page 8-27

8.3.1 Terminology
Description This chapter describes technical terms related to data management.
Coordinate triplet A measured point consists of three coordinate components - two horizontal components and
one vertical component. The generic term for the three coordinate components is coordinate
triplet.
Depending on the class, a point ID can contain more than one coordinate triplet of the same
and/or of different classes.
Class The class describes the type of coordinate triplet.
Description of classes
The following table shows the classes in ascending hierarchical order.
Class Characteristic Description
NONE Type Measured points with angles.
Instrument source TPS
Possible number of Unlimited
triplets
EST Type Estimated points from LGO.
Instrument source LGO.
Possible number of One
triplets
NAV Type Navigated points using uncorrected code solutions
of a single epoch or SPP positions.
Instrument source GPS
Number of triplets Multiple
MEAS Type Measured points differentially corrected using
real-time phase, real-time code or post-
processing.
Measured points with angles and distances.
Calculated from some application programs.
Instrument source GPS, TPS or LGO
Number of triplets Multiple. With more than one measured coordinate
triplet, the average for the position and the height
can be computed.
AVGE Type Averaged point calculated when more than one
coordinate triplet of class MEAS exist for the same
point ID unless <Averaging Mode: Off>.
Instrument source GPS or TPS
Number of triplets One
REF Type Reference point received by a real-time rover
Station point set by Setup application program.
ADJ Type Adjusted points using the adjustment program.


Instrument source LGO
CTRL Type Control points. Automatically assigned to entered
points.
Sub class The sub class describes certain classes in detail. It indicates the status of the position when
a coordinate triplet was measured and how the coordinates were determined.
Sub class Description Associated with class
COGO Indirect coordinate determination MEAS
with application program COGO
Fixed (Height) Manually entered and fixed in height CTRL
Fixed (Position) Manually entered and fixed in posi- CTRL
tion
Fixed (Pos & Ht) Manually entered and fixed in posi- CTRL
tion and height
GPS Code Only Direct coordinate determination MEAS
with code solution NAV
GPS Fixed Direct coordinate determination MEAS
with phase fixed solution
Sub class Description Associated with class
GPS Float Direct coordinate determination MEAS
with autonomous solution coming
from LGO
Hidden Point Indirect coordinate determination MEAS
with hidden point measurements
Source The source describes the application program that generated a coordinate triplet and the
method with which it was created.
Source Originated from application Method
program
Arc Base Pt COGO Arc Calculation - Base Point
Arc Centre Pt COGO Arc Calculation - Centre Point
Arc Offset Pt COGO Arc Calculation - Offset Point
Arc Segmt Pt COGO Arc Calculation - Segmentation
Backwrd Brg-Dist Hidden point measurements Backward Bearing and Distance
Bearing-Distance Hidden point measurements Bearing and Distance
Chainage-Offset Hidden point measurements Chainage and Offset
COGO Shift/Rtn COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale
COGO Traverse COGO Traverse
Copied Point - Copying points between jobs
Double Bearing Hidden point measurements Double Bearing
Double Distance Hidden point measurements Double Distance


program
Intsct (Brg Brg) COGO Intersection, Bearing - Bearing
Intsct (Brg Dst) COGO Intersection, Bearing - Distance
Intsct (Dst Dst) COGO Intersection, Distance - Distance
Intsct (4 Pts) COGO Intersection, By points
Line Base Pt COGO Line Calculation - Base Point
Line Offset Pt COGO Line Calculation - Offset Point
Line Segmt Pt COGO Line Calculation - Segmentation
None - No information on the source is
available
RefLine (Grid) Reference Line Staked out in a defined grid
RefLine (Meas) Reference Line Measured
RefLine (Stake) Reference Line Staked out
Ref Plane (Meas) Reference Plane Measured
Road Runner Road Runner Road Runner
Stakeout Stakeout Staked out
Survey (Auto) Survey Auto Points Logging of auto points
Survey (Auto Of) Survey Auto Points Automatically recorded with offsets
Survey (Event) Survey Event input
program
Survey (Instant) Survey Measured with <Pt Occupation:
Instantaneous> in CONFIGURE
Point Occupation Settings
Survey (Static) Survey Measured with <Pt Occupation:
Normal> in CONFIGURE Point
Occupation Settings
User Entered - Manually entered point
Instrument source The instrument source describes where the coordinate triplet was measured or entered. The
options are GPS, TPS or LGO.
Coordinate quality Description

The Coordinate Quality is
computed on the rover for code solutions and phase fixed solutions.
an indicator for the quality of the observations.
an indicator for the current satellite constellation.
an indicator for different environmental conditions.
derived such that there is at least a two third probability that the computed position devi-
ates from the true position by less than the CQ value.
different from the standard deviation.

CQ versus standard deviation
The standard deviation as CQ would often be too optimistic. This is why the computation of
the CQ in GPS1200 is not simply based on the basic standard deviation algorithms.
For the standard deviation, there is, statistically, a 39.3 % probability in 2D that the computed
position deviates from the true position by less than the standard deviation. This is not
enough for a reliable quality indicator.
This is particularly true for low redundancy situations such as a constellation of four satellites.
In such a case the RMS converges to zero and the standard deviation would show an unre-
alistically small value.
Computation
GPS measurements
Least square adjustment Unknowns

like rover coordinates
Root Mean Square RMS * Elements of cofactor matrix
= a posteriori of unit weight Reflects the influence of the
Reflects all error sources such as different constellations of the
diffraction, multipath, ionospheric satellites on the coordinate
and tropospheric disturbances. components.
Indicator of the measurement
noise and environmental condi-
tions.
Standard deviation + Empirical assumptions
Coordinate Quality CQ
Range
For a phase fixed solution: Centimetre level
For a code solution: From 0.4 to 5 m.
Position CQ versus height CQ

All GPS computed positions are almost twice as accurate in plan than in height. For the posi-
tion determination, satellites can appear in all four quadrants. For the height determination,
satellites can appear in two quadrants. This weakens the height position compared to the
plan position.

E
N
H
GPS12_055
Position determination with satellites Height determination with satellites

appearing in all four quadrants. appearing in two quadrants.
8.3.2 Creating a New Point
Access Refer to "8.2 Accessing Data Management" to access MANAGE Data: Job Name.
Create point step-by- The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
step information on screens.
chapter
1. MANAGE Data: Job Name, Points page
2. NEW (F2) to access MANAGE New Point.
3. MANAGE New Point, Coords page
<Point ID:> The name of the new point. The configured point ID
template is used. The ID can be changed.
To start a new sequence of point IDs overtype the point ID.
For an individual name independent of the ID template SHIFT
INDIV (F5). SHIFT RUN (F5) changes back to the next ID from
the configured ID template.
Enter a point ID and the coordinates.
) COORD (F2) views other coordinate properties.
) Negative geodetic coordinates are interpreted as being of the oppo-

site hemisphere or other side of the central meridian. For example,
entering -25 N will be stored as 25 S, entering -33 E will be stored
as 33 W.


chapter
) NORTH (F3) or SOUTH (F3). Available for local geodetic or

WGS 1984 geodetic coordinates when <Local Lat:> or <WGS 1984
Lat:> is highlighted. Changes between North and South latitude.
) EAST (F3) or WEST (F3). Available for local geodetic or WGS 1984
geodetic coordinates when <Local Long:> or <WGS 1984 Long:> is
highlighted. Changes between East and West longitude.
) SHIFT ELL H (F2) or SHIFT ORTH (F2). Available for local coordi-
nates. Changes between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height.
4. PAGE (F6) changes to the Code page.
5. MANAGE New Point, Code page 17.3
The setting for <Thematc Codes:> in CONFIGURE Coding
Settings determines the availability of the subsequent fields and
softkeys.
For <Thematc Codes: With Codelist>:
The codes from the job codelist are used.
<Point Code:> All point codes of the job codelist can be selected.
The description of the code is shown as an output field.
The attributes are shown as output, input or choicelist fields
depending on their definition.
chapter
For <Thematc Codes: Without Codelist>:
Codes for points can be typed in but not selected from a codelist.
<Point Code:> The code to be stored with the point. A check is
performed to see if a point code of this name already exists in the
job. If so, the according attributes are shown.
<Attribute n:> Up to eight attribute values are available.
6. Is <Thematc Codes: With Codelist>?
If yes, continue with the next row.
) NEW-A (F2) allows additional attributes to be created for this point

code.
) NAME (F3) or VALUE (F3)

Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in.
To highlight <Attribute n:> or the field for the attribute value. The
name of <Attribute n:> can be edited and an attribute value can be
typed in.
) LAST (F4) recalls the last used attribute values which were stored
with this point code.
)7.
DEFLT (F5) recalls the default attribute values for the selected code.
STORE (F1) stores the new point entered and all associated informa-
tion and returns to MANAGE Data: Job Name, Points page.
The properties stored with the point are:


chapter
Class: CTRL
Sub class: Fixed (Pos & Ht)
Source: User Entered
Instrument source: GPS
) It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job. If 10.5
the codes and/or attribute values of the new and the existing point do
not match, a screen opens where they can be corrected.
8.3.3 Editing a Point
Edit point step-by-step The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. In MANAGE Data: Job Name, Points page highlight a point to be
edited.
2. EDIT (F3) to access MANAGE Edit Point: Point ID.
) The visible pages on this screen depend on the properties of

the point being edited.
3. MANAGE Edit Point: Point ID, Coords page
It is possible to edit the point ID and for points of <Class: CTRL> and 8.3.1
<Class: EST> also the coordinates. Other point related data is shown
in output fields.
) Points of <Class: REF> cannot be renamed.
) Changing the point ID for a point of any class applies this new
point ID to all other points with the same original name, regard-
less of class.
) MORE (F5) displays information about class, sub class, 3D coordi-

nate quality, time and date of when point was stored, instrument
8.3.1
source and source.
) COORD (F2) views other coordinate types.


chapter
) SHIFT ELL H (F2) or SHIFT ORTH (F2). Available for local coordi-
nates. Change between the option to enter an ellipsoidal or an ortho-
metric height.
Changing the height type does not edit the point.
4. Is <Class: MEAS>?
5. The edited point is <Class: MEAS>.
PAGE (F6) changes to the Obs page.
6. MANAGE Edit Point: Point ID, Obs page
For GPS points
It is possible to edit the antenna height.
The name of the real-time reference station from where the GPS
point was measured, the name of antenna used to measure the point
and the baseline values are shown in output fields.
) Changing the antenna height recalculates the point coordi-

nates.
For TPS points
It is possible to edit the reflector height.
The name of the station from where the point was measured is shown
in an output field.
chapter
) Changing the reflector height recalculates the point height.
) MORE (F5) Available for TPS points. Displays the horizontal angle or
the azimuth from the point to the instrument.
8. MANAGE Edit Point: Point ID, Code page 10.2 and
10.3
The point code can be edited. All point codes in the job can be
selected.
The attribute values shown depend on <Attributes:> in
CONFIGURE Coding Settings. <Attributes: Last Used> shows the
last used attribute values which are stored for this point code in the
active codelist. <Attributes: Default Values> shows the default
attribute values for this point code if existing.

code.


chapter

typed in.
)9.
Is <Class: MEAS> and no offset point or <Class: NAV>?
10. Is <Class: AVGE>?
11. The edited point is <Class: MEAS> and no offset point or <Class:
NAV>.
PAGE (F6) changes to the Annots page.
12. MANAGE Edit Point: Point ID, Annots page 17.7
The comments to be stored with the point can be edited except for
<4:> if a GPS seismic value has been recorded.
Continue with step 15.
chapter
13. The edited point is <Class: AVGE>.
PAGE (F6) changes to the Mean page.
14. MANAGE Edit Point: Point ID, Mean page 8.3.4
All points of <Class: MEAS> of the same point ID are listed sorted by
time. The settings in the Use column can be edited.
All functionality and keys are explained in a separate section.
15. STORE (F1) stores the changes and returns to MANAGE Data: Job
Name.
) An edited point retains the creation value for <Time:>.
) Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously

used in other application programs, for example COGO, or
hidden point measurements does not update the application
results.
) It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job. If 10.5

8.3.4 Mean Page
Description In order to check measurements, the same point can be measured more than once.
These measured points are assigned the class MEAS. The various measured coordinate
triplets for one point can be recorded using the same point ID. If the averaging mode is acti-
vated, an average is calculated when more than one measured coordinate triplet is available
for the same point ID.
The averaged point is given the class AVGE. It is checked if the deviations of each single
point are within the limits configured in MANAGE New Job, Avge page or in MANAGE Edit
Job: Job Name, Avge page.
After averaging, the Mean page becomes available in MANAGE Edit Point: Point ID and
accessible from the Survey application program SURVEY Survey: Job Name, Survey
page.
Available functionality on the Mean page depends on the selected averaging mode.
Averaging Averaging Mode

The averaging mode defines the checks which are performed when more than one set of
measured coordinates are recorded for the same point. The selected averaging mode also
affects the behaviour of the instrument when editing a point and calculating averages.
Defining the averaging mode and configuring the limits

The averaging mode and the limits are configured in MANAGE New Job, Avge page or in
MANAGE Edit Job: Job Name, Avge page. Refer to "7.3 Creating a New Job". Refer to "7.4
Editing a Job".
Description of averaging modes
Averaging Description
mode
Average When more than one measured coordinate triplet is recorded for the same
point, the average for the position and the height is computed. The class
AVGE is assigned to the averaged point.
The horizontal and height distances from the measured points to the
average are computed and displayed on the Mean page.
A check is performed that the differences for the position and height
components between the averaged point and the point being stored does
not exceed the defined limits.
Absolute Diffs What is described above for Average applies for Absolute Diffs.
Additionally, the absolute difference between two points selected from a
list of measured points which are all stored with the same point ID are
computed and checked for being within the defined limits.
Off Averaging functionality is turned off.
With more than one measured coordinate triplet recorded for the same
point, no average for the position and the height is computed.
Averaging with position only or height only points

Position only points, height only points and points with full coordinate triplets are handled in
the averaging.
Access step-by-step The Mean page can be accessed if

<Averaging Mode: Average> or <Averaging Mode: Absolute Diffs> is configured in
MANAGE New Job, Avge page or in MANAGE Edit Job: Job Name, Avge page.

AND
more than one measured coordinate triplet is recorded for the same point using the same
point ID.
Access within data management

Step Description
1. Refer to "8.2 Accessing Data Management" to access MANAGE Data: Job Name.
2. In MANAGE Data: Job Name, Points page highlight a point to be edited.
3. EDIT (F3) to access MANAGE Edit Point: Point ID, Mean page.
Access within Survey

From within the Survey application program, the Mean page is accessible for <R-Time
Mode: Rover>.
Step Description
1. Main Menu: Survey to access SURVEY Survey Begin.
2. CONT (F1) to access SURVEY Survey: Job Name, Survey page.
3. SHIFT AVGE (F2) or SHIFT ABS (F2) to access SURVEY Edit Point: Point ID,
Mean page.
MANAGE All measured coordinate triplets recorded using the same point ID are shown.
Edit Point: Point ID,
Mean page
STORE (F1)
To store the changes and to return to the
screen from where this screen was accessed.
USE (F2)
To change between the options in the Use
column for the highlighted coordinate triplet. To
include or exclude this triplet in or from the
calculation of the average. Refer to " Descrip-
tion of columns" below.
EDIT (F3)
To view and edit the highlighted measured
coordinate triplet. It is possible to edit the point
ID and the antenna height without impact on all
other classes of the point with the same original
name. The coordinates are updated. Codes
cannot be changed. The average point has the
higher priority. A change in codes must be an
overall change for the average point.
Example: One of the measured coordinate
triplets has a wrong point ID and should not be
included in the average. By editing the point ID,
the point is renamed and no longer contributes
to the average.

DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted coordinate triplet. The
average is recomputed.
MORE (F5)
To change between time and date of when the
point was stored and the 3D coordinate quality.
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT DIFFS (F5)
Available for <Averaging Mode: Absolute
Diffs> and Yes is set in the Use column for
exactly two measurements. To display the
absolute coordinate differences when a local
coordinate system is active. Differences
exceeding the defined limit are indicated by .
Column Description
Use The use of a measured coordinate triplet in the averaging.
Auto
The coordinate triplet is included in the averaging computation if within
the averaging limit defined in MANAGE New Job, Avge page or in
MANAGE Edit Job: Job Name, Avge page.
Column Description
Yes
The coordinate triplet is always included in the averaging computation
even if it would fall outside the averaging limit defined in MANAGE
New Job, Avge page or in MANAGE Edit Job: Job Name, Avge
page.
No
The coordinate triplet is never included in the averaging computation.
----
The coordinate triplet cannot be included in the averaging computation.
Automatically set by the system.
USE (F2) changes between the options.
Time The time the measured coordinate triplet was stored.
Date The date the measured coordinate triplet was stored. The format is as
defined in CONFIGURE Units & Formats, Time page.
dPos The horizontal distance from the measured coordinate triplet to the
average. <dPos: ----> indicates unavailable information, for example for a
height only point.
dHt The height distance from the measured coordinate triplet to the average.
<dHt: ----> indicates unavailable information, for example for a position
only point.
Available for measured coordinate triplets with Auto or Yes in the Use
column if <Averaging Mode: Average>. Indicates an exceeding of the
limits.

Next step
IF a measured coor- THEN
dinate triplet
is not to be viewed STORE (F1) stores the changes and returns to MANAGE Data: Job
Name.
is to be viewed highlight a measured coordinate triplet and EDIT (F3).
8.4 Line/Area Management

8.4.1 Overview 8-35
8.4.2 Creating a New Line/Area 8-36
8.4.3 Editing a Line/Area 8-40
8.4.4 Working Example 8-43

8.4.1 Overview
Description A line/area consists of points and can be created/edited in MANAGE Data: Job Name. The
individual points are measured within any application program. These can be all points
except auxiliary points. Points can be simultaneously assigned to one or more lines and/or
areas.
A line/area can have

a style for display in MapView.
a code independent of the point code of the points comprising the line/area.
) Points are assigned to a line/area when the line/area is open. Refer to "8.2 Accessing Data
Management" for information on how to open a line/area.
8.4.2 Creating a New Line/Area
) The functionality of all screens and fields are similar for the creation of both lines and areas.
The step-by-step instructions for creating a new line can be applied for areas.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen MANAGE New Line/MANAGE New
Area. Refer to "5.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys.
Create line step-by-step The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. MANAGE Data: Job Name
2. PAGE (F6) until the Lines (X) page is active.
3. MANAGE Data: Job Name, Lines (X) page
4. NEW (F2) to access MANAGE New Line.
5. MANAGE New Line, General page
<Line ID:> The name of the new line. The configured ID template for
lines is used. The ID can be changed.
To start a new sequence of line IDs overtype the line ID.
For an individual name independent of the ID template SHIFT
INDIV (F5). SHIFT RUN (F5) changes back to the next ID from
the configured ID template.


chapter
<Pts to Store:> The type of points which are used to form the line 36.1, 36.4
during a survey. Select between all points, measured points, auto
points and offset points of type 1 or 2.
<Line Style:> This is the line style in which lines/areas are repre-
sented in MapView and LGO. For <Line Code: <None>> on the
Code page a line style can be selected from a choicelist. Otherwise
the line style as defined for the selected line code is shown.
Type in a number for the line, select the points to be stored with the
line and select a line style if necessary.
7. MANAGE New Line, Code page 17.3
softkeys.
<Line Code:> All line codes of the job codelist can be selected.
The line style is shown as defined for the selected line code. It is
the style in which lines/areas are represented in MapView and
LGO. For <Line Code: <None>>, it can be changed.
chapter
Codes for lines can be typed in but not selected from a codelist.
<Line Code:> The line code to be stored with the point. A check
is performed to see if a line code of this name already exists in the
job. If so, the according attributes are displayed.
Type in a code.
) NEW-A (F2) allows additional attributes to be created for this line

code.

typed in.
with this line code.
)9.
STORE (F1) stores the new line entered and all associated informa-
tion and returns to MANAGE Data: Job Name, Lines (X) page.


chapter
The value for <Start Time:> with which the line is stored is the time 8.4.3
when STORE (F1) was pressed. The same value is assigned to the
value for <End Time:> until a point is added to the line.
) Any existing lines and areas which are open are closed.
Creating lines/areas
IF the task is to THEN
most efficiently
create
multiple lines/areas use the hot key/user menu function FUNC Create New Line
with subsequent (Quick)/FUNC Create New Area (Quick). Pressing the hot key or
line/area IDs selecting the function from the user menu creates and immediately
stores the new line/area. For the line/area ID, the line/area ID
template as defined in CONFIGURE ID Templates is used. The
code and attributes are taken over from the last created line/area.
lines/areas with use quick coding. The job codelist must contain quick codes for
certain codes lines/areas. By tying the quick code a new line/area is created and
immediately stored with that line/area code and attributes. For the
line/area ID, the line/area ID template as defined in CONFIGURE ID
Templates is used.
8.4.3 Editing a Line/Area
) The functionality of all screens and fields are similar for the editing of both lines and areas.
The step-by-step instructions for editing a new line can be applied for areas.
Edit line step-by-step The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. MANAGE Data: Job Name
2. PAGE (F6) until the Lines (X) page is active.
3. In MANAGE Data: Job Name, Lines (X) page highlight a line to be
edited.
4. EDIT (F3) to access MANAGE Edit Line: Line ID.
5. MANAGE Edit Line: Line ID, General page
The line ID and the type of points which are used to form the line
during a survey can be edited. Other line related data is shown in
output fields.
<No. of Pts:> The number of points contained within the line.
<Length:> The sum of the distances between the points in the
sequential order in which they are stored for the line. This can be a
horizontal grid distance or a geodetic distance on the WGS 1984
ellipsoid.


chapter
<Start Time:> and <Start Date:> The time/date when the line was
created.
) A line cannot be renamed to an already existing line ID.
) MORE (F5) displays <End Time:> and <End Date:>. This is the
time/date when the last point was added to the line. This can be
different to the time the point was created. The values do not change
after deleting the last added point or after editing unless an additional
point is added to the line.
6. PAGE (F6) changes to the Points page.
7. MANAGE Edit Line: Line ID, Points page
All points belonging to the line are listed. The point that was added
last to the line is at the top of the list.
) ADD (F2) Accesses MANAGE Select Point with the Points and Map 8.2
page. To add an existing point from the active job to the line. A new
point is added above the point which was highlighted when ADD (F2)
was pressed.
) EDIT (F3) edits the highlighted point. 8.3.3
) REMOV (F4) removes the highlighted point from the line. The point
itself is not deleted.
) MORE (F5) displays information about the point codes if stored with 8.3.1
the line, the time and the date of when the line was stored, the 3D
coordinate quality and the class.
chapter
9. MANAGE Edit Line: Line ID, Code page 10
The line code can be edited. All line codes can be selected. For <Line
Code: <None>>, the line style can be changed.
) NEW-A (F2) allows additional attributes to be created for this line

code.

typed in.
with this line code.
)
10.
STORE (F1) stores the changes and returns to MANAGE Data: Job
Name, Lines (X) page.
) An edited line retains the creation value for <Start Time:>. The value
for <End Time:> changes when a point was added to the line.

8.4.4 Working Example
Description Application: Pick up points along fence lines with a gate. The gate can also
be represented as a line.
Some points belong to more than one line.
Working technique: Real-time kinematic.
Setting: F7 is configured to access the MANAGE Data: Job Name

screen. Refer to "5.1 Hot Keys" on how to configure hot keys.
Goal: Each point is to be picked up once.
Diagram
F3
F2
P1 Gate post
P2 Gate post
F1 F4 F1 First fence line
F2 Second fence line
G1 F3 Third fence line
P1 P2 F4 Fourth fence line
GPS12_079 G1 Gate
Requirements A real-time reference is running.

For the rover: <R-Time Mode: Rover> in CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
Field procedure step- The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
by-step information on screens.
chapter
1. Create the lines F1, F2 and G1. 8.2
2. Start Survey application program for a real-time rover. 35.3.3
3. Press F7.
The line F1 must be open, the lines F2 and G1 must be closed.
To open/close a line, highlight the line and CLOSE (F4) and OPEN
(F4).
5. CONT (F1)
6. SURVEY Survey: Job Name 35.3.3
Measure points along fence line F1 until the last point before P1.
These points are automatically added to line F1.
)7.
Points can be coded separately.
Press F7.
Highlight the line F2.
OPEN (F4) to open the line.
9. Highlight the line G1.
OPEN (F4) to open the line.
Manage...\Data
) Line F1 stays open.
GPS1200 8-44

chapter
10. CONT (F1)
Measure P1. This point is automatically added to all three lines open
at that time.
12. Press F7.
Highlight the line F1.
CLOSE (F4) to close the line.
14. Highlight the line F2.
CLOSE (F4) to close the line.
)
15.
Line G1 stays open.
CONT (F1)
Measure points along gate G1. These points are automatically added
to line G1.
17. After finishing the survey, import the data into a CAD package.
If the line codes required by the CAD package were used, the lines
are automatically connected and the point symbols are automatically
set.
8.5 Data Log
Description A list of all objects and free codes in the active job is displayed in order of time.
Access step-by-step Access within data management

Step Description
2. In MANAGE Data: Job Name on the Points page, SHIFT LOG (F4) to access
MANAGE Data Log: Job Name.
Access within job management

Step Description
1. Main Menu: Manage...\Jobs to access MANAGE Jobs (Device).
Refer to "7.2 Accessing Job Management" for further options to access this
screen.
3. EDIT (F3) to access MANAGE Edit Job: Job Name.
4. SHIFT LOG (F5) to access MANAGE Data Log: Job Name.
Access by hot key

Press a hot key configured to access the screen MANAGE Data Log: Job Name. Refer to

Access by user defined menu
MANAGE In the column Data Record, all points, lines and areas as well as free codes stored within
Data Log: Job Name the active job are displayed. They are always sorted by time with the most recent record at
the top. For lines and areas, the value for <Start Time:> is relevant.
CONT (F1)
NEW (F2)
To insert a free code below, this means time-
wise before, the currently highlighted object or
record. The functionality of inserting a free
code is identical to the functionality of entering
a free code during a survey. Refer to "10.3 Free
Coding".
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted object or free code.
Refer to "8.3.3 Editing a Point", "8.4.3 Editing a
Line/Area". The functionality of editing a free
code is identical to the functionality of entering
a free code during a survey. Refer to "10.3 Free
Coding".
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted object or free code.
MORE (F5)
To display information about the type of data
recorded, the time and the date of when it was
stored or for lines and areas when they were
created and the codes if stored with any object.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where MANAGE Data Log: Job Name was accessed.

8.6 Point Sorting and Filters

8.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas 8-50
8.6.2 Point, Line and Area Code Filter 8-59
8.6.3 Stakeout Filter 8-61
8.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas
Description The sort settings define the order of the objects in the active job. The filter settings define the
objects to be viewed.
Three types of filters are available:

Point filter: An active point filter shows selected points in MANAGE Data: Job Name,
Points page.
Line filter: An active line filter shows selected lines in MANAGE Data: Job Name,
Lines (X) page.
Area filter: An active area filter shows selected areas in MANAGE Data: Job Name,
Areas (X) page.
) The sort and filter settings are stored in the job. They are remembered after turning off the
instrument.
) Changing the active job does influence the sort settings for the objects. The filter settings are
set to those of the selected job.
) An active filter for an object is indicated in MANAGE Data: Job Name by

right hand side of the page name.
located on the
Access step-by-step
Step Description
2. In MANAGE Data: Job Name on the Points, Lines (X) or Areas (X) page, SHIFT
FILT (F5) to access MANAGE Sorts & Filters.

Step Description
3. MANAGE Sorts & Filters
) This screen consists of three pages, one for each type of object. The page
for an object is displayed when the equivalent page is displayed in
MANAGE Data: Job Name.
MANAGE The available fields on this screen depend on the selected setting for <Filter:>.
Sorts & Filters,
Points page
CONT (F1)
from where this screen was accessed. The
selected sort and filter settings are applied.
STAKE (F5)
To filter points for the Stakeout application
program. Refer to "8.6.3 Stakeout Filter".
PAGE (F6)
Description of fields
Field Option Description
<Sort:> Ascend Point ID, Always available. The method points are sorted by.
Descend Point ID,
Forward Time or
Backward Time
<Filter:> Always available. The method the points are filtered
by.
No Filter Shows all points.
Highest Class Shows points of highest class.
Range of Pt ID's Shows points with point IDs between the entered
start and end ID. The points are left aligned and
sorted by the first digit.
Pt ID Wildcard Shows points with point IDs matching the wildcard.
Time Shows points which were recorded within a defined
time window.
Class Shows points of the selected class.
Instrument Shows points originating from the selected instru-
ment or software program type.
Coordinate Type Shows points of the selected type of coordinates.
Point Code Shows points with selected codes attached. Refer to
"8.6.2 Point, Line and Area Code Filter".


Radius From Pt Shows points within the defined radius from a partic-
ular point. The radius is the horizontal distance.
Individual Line Shows points forming a selected line. This may for
example be useful during stakeout.
Individual Area Shows points forming a selected area. This may for
example be useful during stakeout.
<Start ID:> User input Available for <Filter: Range of Pt ID's>. The first
point to be displayed.
<End ID:> User input Available for <Filter: Range of Pt ID's>. The last
<Wildcard:> User input Available for <Filter: Pt ID Wildcard>. * and ? are
supported. * indicates an undefined number of
unknown characters. ? indicates a single unknown
character.
<Start Date:> User input Available for <Filter: Time>. The date of the first
<Start Time:> User input Available for <Filter: Time>. The time of the first point
to be displayed.
<End Date:> User input Available for <Filter: Time>. The date of the last point
to be displayed.
<End Time:> User input Available for <Filter: Time>. The time of the last point
to be displayed.
<CTRL:>, Show or Hide Available for <Filter: Class>. Defined classes are
<ADJ:>, shown or hidden.
<REF:>,
<AVGE:>,
<MEAS:>,
<NAV:>,
<EST:>,
<NONE:>
<View:> Available for <Filter: Class>.
Highest Triplet The coordinate triplets of the highest class are
shown.
All Triplets All classes for one coordinate triplet are shown.
<Instrument:> All, TPS, GPS, Available for <Filter: Instrument>. Points originating
LEICA Geo Office, from this instrument type are shown.
Level, Data
Logger, Third
Party SW or
Unknown
<Type:> WGS84 Only or Available for <Filter: Coordinate Type>. Points from
Local Only the chosen coordinate type are shown.
<Point ID:> Choicelist Available for <Filter: Radius From Pt>. The point to
which the radius is applied. Opening the choicelist
opens MANAGE Data: Job Name. Refer to "8.2
Accessing Data Management".


<Radius:> User input Available for <Filter: Radius From Pt>. The radius of
the circle within which the points are shown.
<Line ID:> Choicelist Available for <Filter: Individual Line>. Opening the
choicelist opens MANAGE Data: Job Name. Refer
to "8.2 Accessing Data Management".
<Area ID:> Choicelist Available for <Filter: Individual Area>. Opening the
choicelist opens MANAGE Data: Job Name. Refer
to "8.2 Accessing Data Management".
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Lines page. Refer to paragraph "MANAGE Sorts & Filters, Lines
page".
MANAGE
Sorts & Filters,
Lines page
CONT (F1)
selected sort and filter settings are applied and
the lists in MANAGE DATA: Job Name are
updated.
CODES (F4)
Available for <Filter: Code/Code Group>. To
select the line codes to be used.
PAGE (F6)
<Sort:> Ascend Line ID, Always available. The method the lines are sorted by.
Descend Line ID,
Fwrd Start Time,
Bwrd Start Time,
Fwrd End Time,
Bwrd End Time
<Filter:> Always available. The method by which the lines are
filtered.
No Filter Shows all lines.


Code/Code Group Shows lines with selected codes attached. Refer to
"8.6.2 Point, Line and Area Code Filter" since the
functionality is identical to the point code filter.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Areas page. Refer to paragraph "MANAGE Sorts & Filters, Areas
page".
MANAGE
Sorts & Filters,
Areas page
CONT (F1)
selected sort and filter settings are applied and
the lists in MANAGE DATA: Job Name are
updated.
CODES (F4)
Available for <Filter: Code/Code Group>. To
select the area codes to be used.
PAGE (F6)
The functionality of setting the filters is identical to those on the Lines page. Refer to para-
graph "MANAGE Sorts & Filters, Lines page".
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where MANAGE Sorts & Filters was accessed.

8.6.2 Point, Line and Area Code Filter
) For each object, a code filter exists. The point, line and area code filters are independent
from each other. The functionality is identical. For simplicity, the point code filter is explained.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "8.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas" to access MANAGE
Sorts & Filters.
2. Select <Filter: Point Code>.
3. CODES (F4) to access MANAGE Point Code Filter.
MANAGE This screen shows the point codes from the active job and codes currently used as filter.
Point Code Filter Point codes are sorted according to the settings in MANAGE Sort Codes.
CONT (F1)
GROUP (F4)
To activate and deactivate code groups.
Accesses MANAGE Code Groups. Any code
group that have been previously deactivated
are displayed as deactivated here. Codes
belonging to a deactivated code group are not
displayed in MANAGE Code Filter. Refer to
"9.6 Managing Code Groups".
USE (F5)
To activate and deactivate the filter for the
highlighted code.
NONE (F6) or ALL (F6)
To deactivate or activate all point codes.
SHIFT SORT (F5)
To define the order of the codes. Accesses
MANAGE Sort Codes.

8.6.3 Stakeout Filter
Description The settings on this screen define a filter for the Stakeout application program, for example
to show points which are already staked or points that are still to be staked.
) The stakeout filter acts in addition to any other filter set in MANAGE Sorts & Filters.
For example, points still to be staked out with a particular code can be filtered.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "8.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas" to access MANAGE
Sorts & Filters.
2. In MANAGE Sorts & Filters, PAGE (F6) until the Points page is active.
3. STAKE (F5) to access MANAGE Stakeout Filter.
MANAGE
Stakeout Filter
CONT (F1)
<View:> All Shows all points.
Pts to Stakeout Shows points not yet staked out.
Staked Points Shows points which are already staked out.

Manage...\Codelists GPS1200 9-1
9 Manage...\Codelists

9.1 Terminology 9-2
9.2 Overview 9-9
9.3 Accessing Codelist Management 9-10
9.4 Creating/Editing a Codelist 9-12
9.5 Managing Codes 9-13
9.6 Managing Code Groups 9-21
9.1 Terminology
Description This chapter describes technical terms related to codes and codelists.
) The values for code groups, codes and attributes are case sensitive. For example the code
group Tree is not the same as the code group TREE.
Object For coding, points, lines and areas have the same behaviour. In this chapter, object is used
as generic term for points, lines and areas.
Code group A code group allows codes belonging to the same theme to be grouped together. Individual
groups can be activated or deactivated. The codes belonging to a deactivated code group
cannot be selected from the choicelist for code selection.
Code Description
A code is a description which can be stored with an object or alone.
Structure of codes
Codes

Thematical codes: Free codes:

Object related information recorded Time related information
together with the actual object in the field. recorded between objects in the
field. A time stamp is recorded
with each free code. It allows to
export free codes and objects in
a chronological order to be used
for third party mapping software.
Code type: Code type:

Point code Line code Area code Free code
Optional: Optional:
Quick code Quick code
Code types
The code type defines how and for which objects a code can be used. It is possible to create
a code of the same name but of different code types both on the receiver and in LGO.
Example: The code Oak can exist with code type point code and with code type line code.
Point code: To record a code directly with a point. This is thematical point coding.
Line code: To record a code directly with a line. This is thematical line coding.
Area code: To record a code directly with an area. This is thematical area coding.
Free code: To record a code based on time in between objects.
Quick code: To start a point occupation and store the code by typing in one, two or
three predefined digits.
Attribute Description
The use of attributes allows additional information to be stored with the code. Up to twenty
attributes can be related to one code. Attributes are not compulsory.
Structure of attributes
Attributes
Attribute type:
Normal Mandatory Fixed

Attribute value type:
Text Real Integer
Attribute value region: Attribute value region:

None Choicelist None Choicelist Range
Attribute types
The attribute type defines the input requirements for the attribute.
Normal: An input for the attribute is optional. The attribute value can be typed in
in the field. New attributes with this attribute type can be created in LGO
or on the receiver.
Mandatory: An input for the attribute is compulsory. The attribute value must be
typed in the field. New attributes with this attribute type can be created
in LGO.
Fixed: The attribute value is a predefined default which is displayed but cannot
be changed in the field. This attribute value is automatically attached to
the code. New attributes with this attribute type can be created in LGO.
Attribute value types

The attribute value type defines which values are accepted as input.
Text: Any input for the attribute is interpreted as text. New attributes with this
attribute value type can be created in LGO or on the receiver.
Real: An input for the attribute must be a real number, for example 1.23. New
attributes with this attribute value type can be created in LGO.
Integer: An input for the attribute must be an integer number, for example 5. New
attributes with this attribute value type can be created in LGO.
Attribute value regions

The attribute value region defines if the attribute values must be selected from a predefined
list.
None: An input for the attribute must be typed in. New attributes with this
attribute value region can be created in LGO or on the receiver.
Range: An input for the attribute must fall within a predefined range. New
attributes with this attribute value region can be created in LGO.
Choicelist: An input for the attribute is selected from a predefined list. New
attributes with this attribute value region can be created in LGO.
Example
Code Attributes Attribute value Attribute value Example for the
type region attribute value region
Birch Height Real Range 0.5-3.0
Condition Text Choicelist Good, Dead, Damaged
Remark Text None -

Codelist Description
A codelist is a collection of codes that can be used to describe surveyed objects in the field.
Elements of a codelist
Code group Code Attributes
Structure of a codelist
Structure Example
Codelist Codelist
| |
| Code group 1 | Trees
| |
| | Code 1.1 | | Birch
| | | |
| | | Attribute 1.1.1 | | | Height
| | | | | |
| | | Attribute ... | | | Condition
| | | | | |
| | | Attribute 1.1.20 | | | Remark
| | | |
| | Code 1.2 | | Oak
| | | |
| | | Attribute 1.2.1 | | | Circumference
| | | | | |
| | | Attribute ... | | | Condition
| | | | | |
| | | Attribute 1.2.20 | | | ...
| | | |
| | Code ... | | ...
| |
| |
| Code group 2 | Infrastructure
| |
| | Code 2.1 | | Road
| | | |
| | | Attribute 2.1.1 | | | Material
| | | | | |
| | | ... | | | ...
| | | | | |
Codelist types
System RAM codelist: A codelist stored in the System RAM of the instrument.
Job codelist: The collection of codes contained within the currently active job.

9.2 Overview
) It is recommended to create a codelist in LGO. A codelist can be transferred from LGO to the
System RAM of the receiver using the CompactFlash card.
Steps from creating to Codelist Tools: Transfer

using a codelist Receiver LGO
Manage-
ment:
Create Serial Compact-
codelist upload Flash
card
System RAM: System RAM codelist
Selecting codelist(s) for a job:

Copy of codes
Job: Job codelist
The creating, editing and managing of codelists is explained in this chapter.

In order to use a codelist on the receiver, it must be transferred from the CompactFlash card
to the System RAM. Refer to "24 Tools...\Transfer Objects...".
9.3 Accessing Codelist Management
Access Select Main Menu: Manage...\Codelists.

OR
From a choicelist in some screens, for example MANAGE New Job, Codelist page.
MANAGE Listed are all codelists stored in the System RAM.

Codelists
CONT (F1)
To return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed. If this screen was accessed
from a choicelist, the codes from the high-
lighted codelist are copied to the active job.
NEW (F2)
To create a codelist. Refer to "9.4
Creating/Editing a Codelist".
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted codelist. Refer to "9.4
Creating/Editing a Codelist".
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted codelist.
MORE (F5)
To display information about the creator and
the date of when the codelist was created.

Next step
IF a codelist THEN
is to be selected highlight the desired codelist.
CONT (F1) copies the codes of the codelist to the active job, closes
the screen and returns to the screen from where MANAGE
Codelists was accessed.
is to be created NEW (F2). Refer to "9.4 Creating/Editing a Codelist".
is to be edited highlight the codelist and EDIT (F3). Refer to "9.4 Creating/Editing a
Codelist".
9.4 Creating/Editing a Codelist
Access Refer to "9.3 Accessing Codelist Management" to access MANAGE Codelists.
Create/edit a codelist The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
step-by-step information on screens.
chapter
1. MANAGE Codelists 9.3
NEW (F2) or EDIT (F3)
2. MANAGE New Codelist or MANAGE Edit Codelist
<Name:> A unique name for the codelist. The name may be up to 16
characters long and may include spaces. Input required.
<Description:> A detailed description of the codelist. This can be for
example, work to be performed. Input optional.
<Creator:> The persons name who is creating the new codelist.
Input optional.
) CODES (F4) accesses MANAGE Codes where codes can be

created, edited or deleted and code groups can be accessed.
9.5.2, 9.5.3
or 9.6
3. STORE (F1) stores the codelist and returns to MANAGE Codelists.

9.5 Managing Codes

9.5.1 Accessing MANAGE Codes 9-14
9.5.2 Creating a New Code 9-17
9.5.3 Editing a Code 9-20
9.5.1 Accessing MANAGE Codes
Description Managing codes includes

creating new codes
viewing codes with their related information
editing codes.
deleting existing codes.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "9.3 Accessing Codelist Management" to access MANAGE Codelists.
2. In MANAGE Codelists highlight the codelist of which codes are to be managed.
3. EDIT (F3) to access MANAGE Edit Codelist.
4. CODES (F4) to access MANAGE Codes. This screen is described below.
MANAGE Codes from currently active code groups are shown.

Codes
The listed code groups belong to
the selected System RAM codelist when this screen was accessed through Main Menu:
Manage...\Codelists.
OR
to the job codelist when MANAGE Codes was accessed from an application program,
MANAGE New Job or MANAGE Edit Job.
The indicates codes which have attributes attached.

CONT (F1)
NEW (F2)
a New Code".
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted code. Refer to "9.5.3
Editing a Code".
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted code.
MORE (F5)
To display information about the code descrip-
tion, the quick codes if available, the code
groups and the code type.
SHIFT GROUP (F4)
To view, create, delete, activate and deactivate
code groups. Refer to "9.6 Managing Code
Groups".
SHIFT SORT (F5)
To sort codes by code name, code description,
quick code or the last use.
Next step
IF THEN
a code is to be NEW (F2). Refer to "9.5.2 Creating a New Code".
created
a code is to be edited highlight the code and EDIT (F3). Refer to "9.5.3 Editing a Code".
code groups are to be SHIFT GROUP (F4). Refer to "9.6 Managing Code Groups".
accessed

9.5.2 Creating a New Code
Create a new code step- The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. Refer to "9.5.1 Accessing MANAGE Codes" to access MANAGE
Codes.
2. NEW (F2) to access MANAGE New Code.
3. MANAGE New Code
<Code:> A unique name for the new code. The name may be up to
16 characters long and may include spaces. Input required.
<Code Desc:> A detailed description of the code. This can be for
example the full designation if <Code:> is an abbreviation. Input
optional.
<Group:> The code group to which the code is to be assigned. All 9.1
code groups from MANAGE Code Groups can be selected.
<Code Type:> Defines the use of the code. It can be used as themat- 9.1
ical code for points, lines or areas or as a free code.
<Line Style:> Available for <Code Type: Line> or <Code Type:
Area>. The style in which lines/areas are represented in MapView
and LGO.
chapter
) <Code Type:> makes a code unique. <Code:> can be the same

value with different <Code Type:> within the same codelist. For
example <Code: Oak> can have <Code Type: Point>, <Code
Type: Line>, <Code Type: Area> and/or <Code Type: Free>.
4. NEW-A (F2) adds <Attribute 1:> as new input field for an attribute of
attribute type normal and of value type text.

To highlight <Attribute 1:> or the field for the attribute value. The
name of <Attribute 1:> can be edited and the attribute value to be
used as the default attribute value can be typed in.
) Attributes of attribute type mandatory or fixed and of value type real

or integer must be created in LGO.
)5.
Up to twenty attributes can be created.
Is another attribute to be created?
If yes, repeat step 4.
6. STORE (F1) adds the new code and any associated attributes to the
System RAM codelist and returns to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.


chapter
) A new code can also be created within an application program. In this

case, the new code is added to the job codelist.
9.5.3 Editing a Code
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "9.5.1 Accessing MANAGE Codes" to access MANAGE Codes.
2. EDIT (F3) to access MANAGE Edit Code.
3. All following steps are identical with the creation of a new code.
Refer to "9.5.2 Creating a New Code". Follow the instructions in paragraph "Create
a new code step-by-step" from step 3. onwards.
) Attribute names that have already been typed in cannot be edited in a job codelist.

9.6 Managing Code Groups
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "9.5.1 Accessing MANAGE Codes" to access MANAGE Codes.
2. SHIFT GROUP (F4) to access MANAGE Code Groups.
MANAGE The listed code groups belong to

Code Groups the selected System RAM codelist when this screen was accessed through Main Menu:
Manage...\Codelists.
OR
to the job codelist when MANAGE Codes was accessed from an application program,
MANAGE New Job or MANAGE Edit Job.
CONT (F1)
NEW (F2)
To create a new code group.
EDIT (F3)
Available for System RAM codelists. To edit
the highlighted code group.
DEL (F4)
Available for System RAM codelists. To delete
the highlighted code group.
USE (F5)
To activate and deactivate the highlighted code
group. Codes belonging to a deactivated code
group are not displayed in MANAGE Codes.
NONE (F6) or ALL (F6)
To deactivate or activate all code groups.
Column Description
Code Group The name of the code group.
Activated Use code group or not. The options are Yes and No. The codes belonging
to a deactivated code group cannot be selected from the choicelist for
code selection. USE (F2) changes between the options.
Next step
IF a code group THEN
is to be created NEW (F2). In MANAGE New Code Group type in a unique name
for <Group:>. STORE (F1) stores the new code group typed in and
returns to MANAGE Code Groups.
is to be edited highlight the code group and EDIT (F3). In MANAGE Edit Code
Group type in the changes for <Group:>. STORE (F1) stores the
changes and returns to MANAGE Code Groups.

Coding GPS1200 10-1
10 Coding

10.1 Overview 10-2
10.2 Thematical Coding 10-6
10.3 Free Coding 10-13
10.4 Quick Coding 10-20
10.5 Code and Attribute Mismatch 10-24
10.1 Overview
Description A code is a description which can be stored with a point, line, area or alone.
Coding on GPS1200 is very flexible with thematical, free and quick coding being available.
Thematical and free coding is possible by selecting codes from a codelist or by directly typing
in codes.
) For coding, points, lines and areas have the same behaviour. In this chapter, the word object
is used as a generic term for points, lines and areas.
Coding methods
Coding Characteristic Description
method
Thematical Use To store a description together with an object inside
an application program or in Main Menu:
Manage...\Data.
Selection of the codes For thematical coding with codelist:
On a configured display mask, codes are
selected from the job codelist in a choicelist. The
job codelist must contain thematical codes.
For thematical coding without codelist:
On a configured display mask, codes are manu-
ally typed in.
Recording of the Together with the objects.
codes
Coding GPS1200 10-2

Coding GPS1200 10-3

method
Free Use To store a description independent of an object at
any time. A free code can be used to store a descrip-
tion related to an object or to store additional
descriptions such as the job name or the tempera-
ture.
Selection of the codes For free coding using a codelist:
Pressing the configured hot key opens a
choicelist with the free codes of the job codelist.
For free coding with direct input:
Pressing the configured hot key opens a screen
for alphanumeric input.
Recording of the Stored as time related information. A time stamp is
codes stored with each free code. According to the require-
ments of the CAD package used, free codes can be
configured to be stored before or after the object.
Quick Use Quick coding is the storing of an object plus a
thematical or free code using a minimum number of
keystrokes.
Selection of the codes Shortcuts must be assigned to codes in the job
codelist. <Quick Code: On> must be set in
CONFIGURE Coding Settings. Typing the shortcut
searches for the assigned code. Point occupation
begins.
method
Recording of the For thematical codes:
codes Together with the objects. With <Auto STOP:
Yes> and <Auto STORE: Yes>, the points and
codes are immediately stored.
For free codes:
Stored as time related information before or after
the points. A time stamp is stored with each free
code.
) Quick codes must be created in LGO.
) Characters that can be assigned to quick codes are:

0 to 9
A to Z, not case sensitive
a to z, not case sensitive
Configure coding Refer to "17.3 Coding Settings" for information on configuring coding.
Coding GPS1200 10-4

Coding GPS1200 10-5
10.2 Thematical Coding

10.2.1 Thematical Coding with Codelist 10-7
10.2.2 Thematical Coding without Codelist 10-11
10.2.1 Thematical Coding with Codelist
) Thematical coding of points with a codelist is explained in this chapter. Refer to "8.4
Line/Area Management" for information on coding lines/areas.
Requirements The job codelist contains thematical codes.

<Thematc Codes: With Codelist> in CONFIGURE Coding Settings.
A display mask with an input field for point codes must be configured.
Access Open the choicelist for <Point Code:> in a display mask of an application program.
OR
Open the choicelist for <Point Code:> in MANAGE New Point, Code page in data
management.
OR
Open the choicelist for <Point Code:> in MANAGE Edit Point: Point ID, Code page in
data management.
OR
Open the choicelist for <Auto Pt Code:> in SURVEY Survey: Job Name, Auto page, if
configured.
Any of these options accesses XX Select Point Code.
Coding GPS1200 10-6

Coding GPS1200 10-7
XX
Select Point Code
CONT (F1)
was accessed.
NEW (F2)
a New Code".
ATRIB (F3)
Available unless accessed from MANAGE
New Point or MANAGE Edit Point. To type in
attribute values for the selected code and/or
add new attributes for the selected code.
LAST (F4)
Available if a point code has been previously
used in the active job. To select from a list of
last used point codes. The point codes are
sorted by time with the most recently used
code at the top of the list.
MORE (F5)
tion, the code group and the quick code if
codes with quick codes exist in the job.
SHIFT GROUP (F4)
Groups".
SHIFT SORT (F5)
quick code or the last used.
Thematical coding with The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
codelist step-by-step information on screens.
chapter
1. Refer to paragraph "Access" to access XX Select Point Code.
2. XX Select Point Code
All point codes from the job codelist which belong to the active code 9.6
groups are available for selection. Point codes marked with have
attributes attached.
3. Highlight the desired code.
4. ATRIB (F3)
5. XX Enter Attributes
<Point Code:> The name of the selected code for which attribute
values are to be typed in.
<Code Desc:> The detailed description of the selected code.
If configured for the selected code, input fields for attribute values are
available. Type in the attribute values. Attribute values for attributes
of type
normal can be typed in.
fixed cannot be edited.
) NEW-A (F2) to add a new attribute of type normal and of value type
text.
Coding GPS1200 10-8

Coding GPS1200 10-9

chapter

To highlight <Attribute n:> or the field for the attribute value.
) Attributes of type mandatory or fixed and of value type real or integer online help
must be created in LGO. in LGO.
) Up to twenty attributes can be added.
) LAST (F4) recalls the last used attribute values for the selected code.
)6.
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where XX Select Point Code
was accessed.
) The point code and any associated attribute values are stored when
the point is stored.
) If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, the
attribute names and the attribute values of the new and the existing
10.5
point must be identical. Should they not be identical, a screen opens

where the code or attribute mismatch can be corrected.
10.2.2 Thematical Coding without Codelist
) Thematical coding without codelist for points is explained in this chapter. Refer to "8.4
Line/Area Management" for information on coding lines/areas.
Requirements <Thematc Codes: Without Codelist> in CONFIGURE Coding Settings.

A display mask with an input field for point codes must be configured.
Access A thematical code is typed in the field <Point Code:> in
a display mask of an application program.

OR
MANAGE New Point, Code page in data management.
OR
MANAGE Edit Point: Point ID, Code page in data management.
OR
in the field <Auto Pt Code:> in SURVEY Survey: Job Name, Auto page, if configured.
Thematical coding
Step Description
without codelist step-
by-step
) Thematical coding in the Survey application program is explained in this step-by-
step instruction. A typical configuration set with a display mask for coding called
Code is used.
1. SURVEY Survey: Job Name, Code page
<Point ID:> The identifier for the point for which codes and attribute values are to
be typed in.
<Point Code:> The name for the code.
Coding GPS1200 10-10

Step Description
<Attribute n:> The attribute values for the code.
Type in a code and attribute values.
)2.
Up to eight attributes can be added. This is configured in the display mask.
OCUPY (F1) to start the point occupation.
OR
PAGE (F6) to change to another page on this screen.
10.3 Free Coding

10.3.1 Free Coding Using a Codelist 10-14
10.3.2 Free Coding with Direct Input 10-18

10.3.1 Free Coding Using a Codelist
) In this chapter, free coding using a codelist is explained for points. Refer to "8.4 Line/Area
Management" for information on coding lines/areas.
Requirements The job codelist contains free codes.

A hot key is configured to access the screen FREECODING Select Free Code or the
user defined menu is configured to display the option Select Free Code.
Access Press a hot key configured to access the screen FREECODING Select Free Code. Refer
to "5.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys.
OR
Press USER and select Select Free Code to access the screen FREECODING Select
Free Code. Refer to "5.2 USER Key" for information on the USER key.
FREECODING
Select Free Code
STORE (F1)
To store the free code and any associated
attribute values and to return to the screen from
where this screen was accessed.
NEW (F2)
a New Code".
ATRIB (F3)
To type in attribute values and/or add new
attributes for the selected free code.
LAST (F4)
Available if a free code has been previously
used in the active job. To select from a list of
last used free codes. The free codes are sorted
by time with the most recently used code at the
top of the list.
MORE (F5)
tion, the code group and the quick code if
codes with quick codes exist in the job.
SHIFT GROUP (F4)
Groups".
SHIFT SORT (F5)
quick code or the last used.
Free coding using a The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
codelist step-by-step information on screens.
chapter
1. Refer to paragraph "Access" to access FREECODING Select Free
Code.
2. FREECODING Select Free Code
All free codes from the job codelist which belong to the active code 9.6
groups are available for selection. Free codes marked with have
attributes attached.


chapter
3. Highlight the desired code.
4. ATRIB (F3) to access FREECODING Enter Attributes.
5. FREECODING Enter Attributes
<Free Code:> The name of the selected code for which attribute
values are to be typed in.
<Code Desc:> The detailed description of the selected code.
If configured for the selected code, input fields for attribute values are
available. Type in the attribute values. Attribute values for attributes
of type
normal can be typed in.
) NEW-A (F2) to add a new attribute of type normal and of value type
text.

To highlight <Attribute n:> or the field for the attribute value.
) Attributes of type mandatory or fixed and of value type real or integer online help
must be created in LGO. in LGO.
) Up to twenty attributes can be added.
) LAST (F4) recalls the last used attribute values for the selected code.
) DEFLT (F5) recalls the default attribute values for the selected code.
chapter
6. FREECODING Enter Attributes
STORE (F1) returns to the screen from where FREECODING Select
Free Code was accessed and stores the free code, any associated
attribute values and time related information.

10.3.2 Free Coding with Direct Input
) In this chapter, free coding with direct input is explained for points. Refer to "8.4 Line/Area
Management" for information on coding lines/areas.
Requirements A hot key is configured to access the screen FREECODING Enter Free Code & Attributes
or the user defined menu is configured to display the option Enter Free Code.
Access Press a hot key configured to access the screen FREECODING Enter Free Code &
Attributes. Refer to "5.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys.
OR
Press USER and select Enter Free Code to access the screen FREECODING Enter
Free Code & Attributes. Refer to "5.2 USER Key" for information on the USER key.
Free coding with direct

Step Description
input step-by-step
1. Refer to paragraph "Access" to access FREECODING Enter Free Code &
Attributes.
2. FREECODING Enter Free Code & Attributes
<Free Code:> The name for the free code.
<Attribute n:> The attribute values for the free code.
Type in a code and attribute values.
) As soon as a free code is typed in, a codelist is created within the job.
) Up to eight attributes can be added.
) LAST (F4)
Step Description
Available if a free code has been previously used in the active job. Accesses
FREECODING Last Used Free Codes. To select from a list of last used free
codes. The free codes are sorted by time with the most recently used code at the
top of the list.
In FREECODING Last Used Free Codes press ATRIB (F3) to type in attribute
values.
3. STORE (F1) stores the free code, any associated attribute values and time related
information.

10.4 Quick Coding
Requirements The job codelist contains quick codes for points, lines and/or areas.
According to the requirements of the used CAD package, set <Rec Free Code: Before
Point> or <Rec Free Code: After Point> in CONFIGURE Coding Settings.
Activate quick coding The current setting for <Quick Code:> in CONFIGURE Coding Settings determines how
quick coding is activated. Quick coding can be activated at any time.
For <Quick Code: On> in CONFIGURE Coding Settings

Quick coding is active and can be used.
For <Quick Code: Off> in CONFIGURE Coding Settings
Press a hot key configured to switch between <Quick Code: Off> and <Quick Code:
On> in CONFIGURE Coding Settings. Refer to "5.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot
keys.
OR
OR
Tap the quick coding icon visible during Survey and other application programs where
it is possible to measure a point with quick codes.
OR
Access CONFIGURE Coding Settings and change the setting manually. Refer to
"17.3 Coding Settings".
For <Quick Code: Never> in CONFIGURE Coding Settings
Access CONFIGURE Coding Settings and change the setting manually. Refer to "17.3
Coding Settings".
Quick coding for points The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. Refer to paragraph "Activate quick coding" to activate quick coding.
) A screen must be active where points can be occupied. OCUPY (F1)

must be visible. For example SURVEY Survey: Job Name.
2. Type in the one, two or three digits of the quick code. 17.3
The current setting for <Digits:> in CONFIGURE Coding Settings
determines by how many keystrokes quick coding is executed.
) ENTER to execute quick coding already after one or two keystrokes.

Available for <Digits: 2> and <Digits: 3> in CONFIGURE Coding
Settings.
)3.
ESC clears digits from the entry.
What is the code type of the quick codes?
For point codes continue with the next row.
For free codes continue with step 5.
) The point code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job
codelist and point occupation begins.
) Attribute values for attributes of type

normal cannot be typed in. Depending on the setting for
<Attributes:> in CONFIGURE Coding Settings, the default or
the last used attribute values are stored.


chapter
) The point code and any associated attribute values are stored with
the point. This can be automatic if <Auto STOP: Yes> and <Auto
STORE: Yes> is configured or manual with STOP (F1) and STORE
(F1).
) If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, the
attribute names and the attribute values of the new and the existing
10.5
point must be identical. Should they not be identical, a screen opens

where the code or attribute mismatch can be corrected.
4. Quick coding for a point code is finished.
5. Quick coding for free codes continues from here.
) The free code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job
codelist and point occupation begins.
) Attribute values for attributes of type

normal cannot be typed in. Depending on the setting for
<Attributes:> in CONFIGURE Coding Settings, the default or
the last used attribute values are stored.
) The free code, associated attribute values and time related informa-
tion are stored. The setting for <Rec Free Code:> in CONFIGURE
Coding Settings determines if the free code is stored before or after
the point.
chapter
6. Quick coding for a free code is finished.
Quick coding for The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
lines/areas step-by-step information on screens.
chapter
1. Refer to paragraph "Activate quick coding" to activate quick coding.
2. Type in the one, two or three digits of the quick code. 17.3
The current setting for <Digits:> in CONFIGURE Coding Settings
determines by how many keystrokes quick coding is executed.
) ENTER to execute quick coding already after one or two keystrokes.

Available for <Digits: 2> and <Digits: 3> in CONFIGURE Coding
Settings.
) ESC clears digits from the entry.
) The line/area code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the
job codelist.
) A new line/area is created and immediately stored with that line/area

code and attributes. For the line/area ID, the line/area ID template as
defined in CONFIGURE ID Templates is used.
)3.
The system asks for mandatory attribute values.
Quick coding for a line/area is finished.

10.5 Code and Attribute Mismatch

10.5.1 Code Mismatch 10-25
10.5.2 Attribute Mismatch 10-27
10.5.1 Code Mismatch
Description When storing a point with a code, it may happen that a point with the same point ID already
exists in the job. If the codes of the new and the existing point do not match, a screen opens
where the code can be corrected. One point cannot have different codes.
XX
Point Code Mismatch
STORE (F1)
To store the highlighted code and any associ-
ated attributes with the point being stored and
to continue with the application program or
data management.
MORE (F5)
tion, the code group and any attributes associ-
ated with the highlighted code.
<New Code:> Output The code for the point.
<Stored Output The code as stored for the existing point in the job.
Code:>

Match codes step-by-
Step Description
step
) XX Point Code Mismatch opens automatically if the codes of the new and the
existing point do not match.
1. Highlight the code to be stored with the new point.
2. STORE (F1) stores the highlighted code and any associated attributes with the
point being stored and continues with the application program or data manage-
ment.
10.5.2 Attribute Mismatch
Description If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, the attribute names and the
attribute values of the new and the existing point must be identical. Should they not be iden-
tical, a screen opens where the attribute mismatch can be corrected. One point cannot have
different attributes.
) The name of the screen changes with pressing CURNT (F5) or STORD (F5):
Pressing CURNT (F5): XX Attributes Being Stored

Pressing STORD (F5): XX Attributes Already Stored
For simplicity, the screen shown is XX Attributes Already Stored.
XX
Attributes Already
Stored
STORE (F1)
To store the selected attributes with the
new/created point and to continue with the
application program or data management.
CURNT (F5) or STORD (F5)
To change between viewing the attribute
names and values of the new/created point and
those stored for the existing point in the job.

<Point Code:> Output For XX Attributes Already Stored: The code of
the existing point in the job.
For XX Attributes Being Stored: The code of the
new point.
Attributes Output For XX Attributes Already Stored: The attributes
as stored for the existing point in the job.
For XX Attributes Being Stored: The attributes
of the new point.
Match attributes step-

Step Description
by-step
) XX Attributes Already Stored opens automatically if the attribute names and/or
values of the new and the existing point do not match.
1. CURNT (F5) and STORD (F5) to display the attribute names and values to be
stored with the point.
2. STORE (F1) stores the displayed attribute names and values with the point being
stored and continues with the application program or data management.
Manage...\Coordinate Systems GPS1200 11-1
11 Manage...\Coordinate Systems

11.1 Overview 11-2
11.2 Terminology 11-5
11.3 Accessing Coordinate System Management 11-8
11.4 Coordinate Systems 11-11
11.5 Transformations 11-16
11.6 Ellipsoids 11-22
11.7 Projections 11-27
11.8 Geoid Models 11-34
11.9 CSCS Models 11-40
11.1 Overview
Description A coordinate system

consists of up to five elements.
allows the conversion from WGS 1984 geodetic or cartesian coordinates to, local carte-
sian, geodetic or grid coordinates and back.
can be attached to jobs.
can be manually defined.
can be computed in the field.
can be downloaded to LGO.
can be uploaded from LGO.
) All GPS surveyed points are always stored as WGS 1984 geodetic coordinates regardless
of the coordinate system being used. Using a different coordinate system converts the coor-
dinates displayed on the screen, but does not convert and restore the coordinate values in
the database DB-X.
) One coordinate system can be attached to a job at one time. This coordinate system remains
attached to the job unless it is changed.
Elements of coordinate The five elements which define a coordinate system are:
system a transformation
a projection
an ellipsoid
a geoid model
a Country Specific Coordinate System model

Z Z
d
Y Y
X X
a e
b f
a) WGS 1984 cartesian: X, Y, Z

b) WGS 1984 ellipsoid
c) WGS 1984 geodetic: Latitude, longitude, ellip-
c g soidal height
d) 7 parameter transformation: dX, dY, dZ, rx, ry,
rz, scale
h e) Local cartesian: X, Y, Z
f) Local ellipsoid
g) Local geodetic: Latitude, longitude, ellipsoidal
height
h) Local projection
i) Local grid: Easting, Northing, orthometric
i
GPS12_083 height
All these elements can be specified when creating a coordinate system.

Default coordinate The default coordinate system is WGS 1984. It cannot be deleted.
systems Additional default coordinate systems may be available for certain countries.
Coordinate system WGS 1984 is the global geocentric datum to which all GPS positioning information is referred
WGS 1984 to. WGS 1984 is the default coordinate system on a GPS1200 receiver. It is not possible to
manually create a coordinate system called WGS 1984.
Coordinate system <None> is the default coordinate system on a TPS1200 instrument. It is not possible to
<None> manually create a coordinate system called <None>.
Active coordinate The active coordinate system is the one attached to the job currently being used. One coor-
system dinate system is always considered as the active coordinate system.
Coordinate systems When transferring a job from GPS1200 to TPS1200, or vice-versa, the coordinate system
when transferring jobs stays attached to the job and appears like any other coordinate system on the instrument.
between GPS and TPS

11.2 Terminology
Description This chapter describes technical terms related to coordinate system management.
Transformation Refer to "43.1 Overview" for information on transformations.
Geoid model Description

GPS operates on the WGS 1984 ellipsoid and all heights obtained by measuring baselines
are ellipsoidal heights. Existing heights are usually orthometric heights, also called height
above the geoid, height above mean sea level or levelled height. The mean sea level corre-
sponds to a surface known as the geoid. The relation between ellipsoidal height and ortho-
metric height is
Orthometric Height = Ellipsoidal Height - Geoid Separation N

P0
d1
d2
a
b a) WGS 1984 ellipsoid
b) Geoid
P0 Measured point
d1 Ellipsoidal height
d2 Geoid separation N, is negative when the
GPS12_076 geoid is below the ellipsoid
N value and geoid model
The geoid separation (N value) is the distance between the geoid and the reference ellipsoid.
It may refer to the WGS 1984 or to the local ellipsoid. It is not a constant except over maybe
small flat areas such as 5 km x 5 km. Therefore it is necessary to model the N value in order
to obtain accurate orthometric heights. The modelled N values form a geoid model for an
area. With a geoid model attached to a coordinate system, N values for the measured points
can be determined. Ellipsoidal heights can be converted to orthometric heights and back.
Refer to the online help of LGO for more information on geoid models.
) Geoid models are an approximation of the N value. In terms of accuracy, they may vary
considerably and global models in particular should be used with caution. If the accuracy of
the geoid model is not known it might be safer to use local control points with orthometric
heights and apply a transformation to approximate the local geoid.
Geoid field file Geoid field files may be used in the field to calculate orthometric heights out of ellipsoidal
heights and vice versa.
CSCS model Description

Country Specific Coordinate System models
are tables of correction values to directly convert coordinates from WGS 1984 to local grid
without the need of transformation parameters.
take the distortions of the mapping system into account.
are an addition to an already defined coordinate system.
Types of CSCS models

The correction values of a CSCS model can be applied at different stages in the coordinate
conversion process. Depending on this stage, a CSCS model works differently. Three types

of CSCS models are supported by GPS1200. Their conversion process is as explained in
the following table. Any suitable geoid model can be combined with a geodetic CSCS model.
Refer to the online help of LGO for more information on CSCS models.
Type Description
Grid 1. Determination of preliminary grid coordinates by applying the specified
transformation, ellipsoid and map projection.
2. Determination of the final local grid coordinates by applying a shift in
Easting and Northing interpolated in the grid file of the CSCS model.
Cartesian 1. Performing the specified transformation.
2. Determination of local cartesian coordinates by applying a 3D shift inter-
polated in the grid file of the CSCS model.
3. Determination of the final local grid coordinates by applying the specified
local ellipsoid and map projection.
Geodetic 1. Determination of local geodetic coordinates by applying a correction in
latitude and longitude interpolated from the file of the CSCS model.
2. Determination of the final local grid coordinates by applying the local
map projection.
) Using a geodetic CSCS model excludes the use of a transformation in

a coordinate system.
CSCS field file CSCS field files may be used in the field. They are extracted from the main CSCS model,
which may be too big to fit on the instrument.
11.3 Accessing Coordinate System Management
Access Select Main Menu: Manage...\Coordinate Systems.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen MANAGE Coordinate Systems. Refer
OR
OR
From a choicelist in some screens for example in MANAGE New Job, Coord System
page.
OR
Press CSYS (F6) in some screens for example in SURVEY Survey Begin.
MANAGE Listed are all coordinate systems stored in the database DB-X. Any unavailable information
Coordinate Systems is shown as -----.

CONT (F1)
To select the highlighted coordinate system
and to return to the previous screen. With a
CompactFlash card inserted, the selected
coordinate system will be attached to the active
job.
NEW (F2)
To create a coordinate system manually. Refer
to "11.4.1 Creating a New Coordinate System".
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted coordinate system.
Refer to "11.4.2 Editing a Coordinate System".
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted coordinate system.
MORE (F5)
To display information about the type of trans-
formation used, the type of heights computed,
the number of control points used for the deter-
mination and the date of when the coordinate
system was created.
SHIFT SET-D (F4)
Available unless a default coordinate system is
highlighted. To turn the highlighted coordinate
system into a user defined default coordinate
system stored in the receiver.
SHIFT DEFLT (F5)
To recall the deleted default coordinate
systems.
Next step
IF a coordinate THEN
system
is to be selected highlight the desired coordinate system.
MANAGE Coordinate Systems was accessed.
is to be created highlight any coordinate system and NEW (F2). Refer to "11.4.1
Creating a New Coordinate System".
is to be edited highlight the coordinate system and EDIT (F3). Refer to "11.4.2
Editing a Coordinate System".

11.4 Coordinate Systems

11.4.1 Creating a New Coordinate System 11-12
11.4.2 Editing a Coordinate System 11-14
11.4.1 Creating a New Coordinate System
) Coordinate systems can be defined by manual creation or determined by calculation.

In this chapter, the manual creation of coordinate systems is explained. Refer to "43 Deter-
mine Coordinate System - General" for information on the determination by calculation.
)
Access
Coordinate systems with a Classic 3D transformation can be defined by manual creation.
Refer to "11.3 Accessing Coordinate System Management" to access MANAGE Coordi-

nate Systems.
Create a coordinate The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
system step-by-step information on screens.
chapter
1. In MANAGE Coordinate Systems highlight a coordinate system. A
copy of this coordinate system is taken for further configurations.
2. NEW (F2) to access MANAGE New Coordinate System.
3. MANAGE New Coordinate System
<Name:> A unique name for the new coordinate system. The name
may be up to 16 characters long and may include spaces.


chapter
<Residuals:> Available for transformations with control points.
Manually entered transformations do not have control points. The
method by which residuals are distributed throughout the transforma-
tion area. The transformation results become more realistic and any
strain is dispersed in the transformation. <Residuals: 1/Dist>,
<Residuals: 1/Dist2> and <Residuals: 1/Dist3/2> distribute the
residuals of the control points according to the distance between
each control point and the newly transformed point. <Residuals:
Multiquadratic> distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic
interpolation approach.
<Transform:> The type of transformation. 11.5
<Ellipsoid:> Available unless projection <Type: Customised>. The 11.6
local coordinates are based on this ellipsoid.
<Projection:> The map projection. 11.7
<Geoid Model:> The geoid model. 11.8
<CSCS Model:> The Country Specific Coordinate System model. 11.9
Enter a name.
4. STORE (F1) stores the new coordinate system and returns to
MANAGE Coordinate Systems.
11.4.2 Editing a Coordinate System
) The type of transformation of the selected coordinate system determines which elements of
a coordinate system can be edited. The name of the coordinate system, the method of
residual distribution and the geoid model in use are always editable.
Access Refer to "11.3 Accessing Coordinate System Management" to access MANAGE Coordi-
nate Systems.
Edit a coordinate The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
system step-by-step information on screens.
chapter
1. In MANAGE Coordinate Systems highlight a coordinate system to
be edited.
2. EDIT (F3) to access MANAGE Edit Coordinate System.
3. MANAGE Edit Coordinate System
The transformation type of the selected coordinate system deter- 11.4.1
mines the availability and the options of the subsequent fields.
Most fields are identical with those for the creation of a new coordi-
nate system. An additional field is:
<Pre Transform:> Available for Twostep transformations. The name
of a preliminary 3D transformation which is used together with the
selected projection to obtain preliminary grid coordinates to be used
for a final 2D transformation.


chapter
Make the required changes.
4. STORE (F1) stores the changes and returns to MANAGE Coordi-
nate Systems.
11.5 Transformations

11.5.1 Accessing Transformation Management 11-17
11.5.2 Creating a New Transformation 11-19
11.5.3 Editing a Transformation 11-21

11.5.1 Accessing Transformation Management
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "11.3 Accessing Coordinate System Management" to access MANAGE
Coordinate Systems.
2. In MANAGE Coordinate Systems highlight a coordinate system to be edited.
3. EDIT (F3)
4. In MANAGE Edit Coordinate System highlight <Transform:>.
5. ENTER to access MANAGE Transformations.
MANAGE Listed are all Classic 3D transformations stored in the database DB-X. Any unavailable infor-
Transformations mation is shown as -----.
CONT (F1)
To select the highlighted transformation and to
return to the previous screen.
NEW (F2)
To create a new transformation. Refer to
"11.5.2 Creating a New Transformation".
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted transformation. Refer to
"11.5.3 Editing a Transformation".
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted transformation.
MORE (F5)
To display information about the type of heights
computed and the number of control points
used for the determination of the transforma-
tion.
SHIFT SET-D (F4)
To turn the highlighted transformation into a
user defined default transformation stored in
the receiver.
SHIFT DEFLT (F5)
To recall the deleted default transformations.
Next step
IF a transformation THEN
is to be selected highlight the desired transformation.
MANAGE Transformations was accessed.
is to be created highlight any transformation and NEW (F2). Refer to "11.5.2
Creating a New Transformation".
is to be edited highlight the transformation and EDIT (F3). Refer to "11.5.3 Editing
a Transformation".

11.5.2 Creating a New Transformation
)
Access
Classic 3D transformations can be created.
Refer to "11.5.1 Accessing Transformation Management" to access MANAGE Transforma-

tions.
Create a transformation The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. In MANAGE Transformations highlight a transformation. A copy of
this transformation is taken for further configurations.
2. NEW (F2) to access MANAGE New Transformation.
3. MANAGE New Transformation, General page
<Name:> A unique name for the new transformation. The name may
be up to 16 characters long and may include spaces.
<Type:> Output field. No other transformations than Classic 3D can 43.1
be created.
Enter a name.
4. PAGE (F6) changes to the Parameters page.
5. MANAGE New Transformation, Parameters page
Enter the known values of the transformation parameters.
6. PAGE (F6) changes to the More page.
chapter
7. MANAGE New Transformation, More page
<Height Mode:> The type of heights to be computed.
<Transf Model:> The transformation model to be used. For <Transf
Model: Molodensky-Bad>, additional input fields are available.
Select at least a height mode and a transformation model.
) CLEAR (F5) Available for <Transf Model: Molodensky-Bad>. To

set the additional input fields to 0.
8. STORE (F1) stores the new transformation and returns to MANAGE
Transformations.

11.5.3 Editing a Transformation
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "11.5.1 Accessing Transformation Management" to access MANAGE
Transformations.
2. In MANAGE Transformations highlight a transformation to be edited.
3. EDIT (F3) to access MANAGE Edit Transformation.
4. All following steps are identical with the creation of a new transformation.
<Height Mode:> in MANAGE Edit Transformation, More page cannot be
changed.
Refer to "11.5.2 Creating a New Transformation". Follow the instructions in para-
graph "Create a transformation step-by-step" from step 3. onwards.
11.6 Ellipsoids

11.6.1 Accessing Ellipsoid Management 11-23
11.6.2 Creating a New Ellipsoid 11-25
11.6.3 Editing an Ellipsoid 11-26

11.6.1 Accessing Ellipsoid Management
Access step-by-step
Step Description
Coordinate Systems.
4. In MANAGE Edit Coordinate System highlight <Ellipsoid:>.
5. ENTER to access MANAGE Ellipsoids.
MANAGE Listed are all ellipsoids stored in the database DB-X.

Ellipsoids
CONT (F1)
To select the highlighted ellipsoid and to return
to the previous screen.
NEW (F2)
To create a new ellipsoid. Refer to "11.6.2
Creating a New Ellipsoid".
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted ellipsoid. Refer to
"11.6.3 Editing an Ellipsoid".
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted ellipsoid.
SHIFT SET-D (F4)
To turn the highlighted ellipsoid into a user
defined default ellipsoid stored in the receiver.
SHIFT DEFLT (F5)
To recall the deleted default ellipsoids.
Next step
IF an ellipsoid THEN
is to be selected highlight the desired ellipsoid.
MANAGE Ellipsoids was accessed.
is to be created highlight any ellipsoid and NEW (F2). Refer to "11.6.2 Creating a
New Ellipsoid".
is to be edited highlight the ellipsoid and EDIT (F3). Refer to "11.6.3 Editing an
Ellipsoid".

11.6.2 Creating a New Ellipsoid
Access Refer to "11.6.1 Accessing Ellipsoid Management" to access MANAGE Ellipsoids.
Create an ellipsoid The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. In MANAGE Ellipsoids highlight an ellipsoid. A copy of this ellipsoid
is taken for further configurations.
2. NEW (F2) to access MANAGE New Ellipsoid.
3. MANAGE New Ellipsoid
<Name:> A unique name for the new ellipsoid. A name is mandatory
and may be up to 16 characters long and may include spaces.
<Axis a:> The semi-major axis a.
<1/f:> The reciprocal value of flattening f.
Enter a name.
4. STORE (F1) stores the new ellipsoid and returns to MANAGE Ellip-
soids.
11.6.3 Editing an Ellipsoid
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "11.6.1 Accessing Ellipsoid Management" to access MANAGE Ellip-
soids.
2. In MANAGE Ellipsoids highlight an ellipsoid to be edited.
3. EDIT (F3) to access MANAGE Edit Ellipsoid.
4. All following steps are identical with the creation of a new ellipsoid. Refer to "11.6.2
Creating a New Ellipsoid".
Follow the instructions in paragraph "Create an ellipsoid step-by-step" from step 3.
onwards.

11.7 Projections

11.7.1 Accessing Projection Management 11-28
11.7.2 Creating a New Projection 11-32
11.7.3 Editing a Projection 11-33
11.7.1 Accessing Projection Management
Access step-by-step
Step Description
Coordinate Systems.
4. In MANAGE Edit Coordinate System highlight <Projection:>.
5. ENTER to access MANAGE Projections.
MANAGE Listed are all projections stored in the database DB-X. Any unavailable information is shown
Projections as -----.
CONT (F1)
To select the highlighted projection and to
NEW (F2)
To create a new projection. Refer to "11.7.2
Creating a New Projection".
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted projection. Refer to
"11.7.3 Editing a Projection".
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted projection.

SHIFT SET-D (F4)
Available unless a default projection is high-
lighted. To turn the highlighted projection into a
user defined default projection stored in the
receiver.
SHIFT DEFLT (F5)
To recall the deleted default projections.
Column Option Description
Type The projection type. Refer to standard surveying liter-
ature for details on projections.
Customised Customised projection. Certain hard wired projec-
tions which cannot be defined by any of the following
options.
Trans Mercator Transverse Mercator. Conformal projection onto a
cylinder with its axis lying on the equatorial plane. The
cylinder is tangential to a meridian.
UTM Universal Transverse Mercator. Transverse Mercator
projection with fixed zone-defining constants. The
central meridian is selected automatically according
to the selected zone number.
Oblq Mercator Oblique Mercator. Oblique Mercator Conformal
projection onto a cylinder. The cylinder is tangent to
any circle other than the equator or a meridian.
Mercator Mercator. Conformal projection onto a cylinder with
its axis lying on a meridian plane. The cylinder is
tangent to the sphere along the equator.
Lambert 1 Para Lambert 1 Parallel. Conformal projection onto a cone,
with its axis coinciding with the z-axis of the ellipsoid.
Lambert 2 Para Lambert 2 Parallel. Conformal projection onto a cone,
with its axis coinciding with the z-axis of the ellipsoid.
The cone is secant to the sphere.
Cassini-Soldn Soldner Cassini. Projection onto a cylinder. It is
neither equal area nor conformal. The scale is true
along the central meridian and along lines perpendic-
ular to central meridian.
Polar Stereo Polar Stereographic. Conformal azimuthal projection
onto a plane. The point of projection is on the surface
of the ellipsoid diametrically opposite of the origin
which is the centre of the projection.
Double Stereo Double Stereographic. Conformal azimuthal projec-
tion onto a plane. The point of projection is on the
surface of the sphere diametrically opposite of the
centre of the projection.
RSO Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic. This is a special
type of Oblique Mercator projection.

Next step
IF a projection THEN
is to be selected highlight the desired projection.
MANAGE Projections was accessed.
is to be created highlight any projection and NEW (F2). Refer to "11.7.2 Creating a
New Projection".
is to be edited highlight the projection and EDIT (F3). Refer to "11.7.3 Editing a
Projection".
11.7.2 Creating a New Projection
Access Refer to "11.7.1 Accessing Projection Management" to access MANAGE Projections.
Create a projection The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. In MANAGE Projections highlight a projection. A copy of this projec-
tion is taken for further configurations.
2. NEW (F2) to access MANAGE New Projection.
3. MANAGE New Projection
<Name:> A unique name for the new projection. A name is manda-
tory and may be up to 16 characters long and may include spaces.
<Type:> The projection type. 11.7.1
The setting for <Type:> determines the availability of the subsequent
fields for the parameters of the projection.
Enter a name.
4. STORE (F1) stores the new projection and returns to MANAGE
Projections.

11.7.3 Editing a Projection
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "11.7.1 Accessing Projection Management" to access MANAGE Projec-
tions.
2. In MANAGE Projections highlight a projection to be edited.
3. EDIT (F3) to access MANAGE Edit Projection.
4. All following steps are identical with the creation of a new projection. <Type:> in
MANAGE Edit Projection cannot be changed.
Refer to "11.7.2 Creating a New Projection". Follow the instructions in paragraph
"Create a projection step-by-step" from step 3. onwards.
11.8 Geoid Models

11.8.1 Overview 11-35
11.8.2 Accessing Geoid Model Management 11-37
11.8.3 Creating a New Geoid Model from the CompactFlash Card 11-39

11.8.1 Overview
Use in the field For use on the receiver in the field, geoid field files are created from the geoid model.
Geoid field file The geoid separations in a geoid field file may be used in the field to change between ellip-
soidal and orthometric heights.
Creation: In LGO with export onto a CompactFlash card.
Extension: *.gem
Create geoid models on Geoid models can be created on the receiver in one of two ways:
the receiver 1.
Geoid field file on the Creation Geoid model
CompactFlash card on the receiver
Here the geoid field file is stored on a CompactFlash card and can be used when
the CompactFlash card is inserted in the receiver. It is recommended for large geoid
field files. This method is explained in this chapter.
2. Transfer Creation
Geoid field file on the System Geoid model
CompactFlash card Main Menu: RAM on the receiver
Tools...
Here the geoid field file is transferred to the System RAM and can be used at any
time. The total size of all files in the System RAM is restricted to 1 MB. Refer to "24
Tools...\Transfer Objects..." for information on how to transfer geoid field files to the
System RAM on the receiver.

11.8.2 Accessing Geoid Model Management
Access step-by-step
Step Description
Coordinate Systems.
4. In MANAGE Edit Coordinate System highlight <Geoid Model:>.
5. ENTER to access MANAGE Geoid Models.
MANAGE Listed are all geoid models stored in the database DB-X. Any unavailable information is
Geoid Models shown as -----, for example if the geoid field file which was associated to the geoid model is
not available on the CompactFlash card.
CONT (F1)
To select the highlighted geoid model and to
CFCRD (F2)
To create a new geoid model. The
\DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the Compact-
Flash card is automatically scanned for geoid
field files. Refer to "11.8.3 Creating a New
Geoid Model from the CompactFlash Card".
EDIT (F3)
To view the highlighted geoid model. None of
the fields can be edited. The geoid field file
from which the geoid model was created must
be stored in the System RAM or in the
\DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the Compact-
Flash card.
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted geoid model. The
geoid field file which was associated with this
geoid model is then also deleted.
Next step
IF a geoid model THEN
is to be selected highlight the desired geoid model.
MANAGE Geoid Models was accessed.
is to be created CFCRD (F2). Refer to "11.8.3 Creating a New Geoid Model from the
CompactFlash Card".

11.8.3 Creating a New Geoid Model from the CompactFlash Card
) Refer to "24 Tools...\Transfer Objects..." for information on how to transfer geoid field files to
the System RAM on the receiver.
Requirement At least one geoid field file with the extension *.gem is in the \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory
on the CompactFlash card. Refer to "11.2 Terminology" for information on geoid field files.
Create geoid model

Step Description
step-by-step
1. Refer to "11.8.2 Accessing Geoid Model Management" to access MANAGE
Geoid Models.
2. CFCRD (F2) to scan the \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the CompactFlash card
3. For each geoid field file on the CompactFlash card, one geoid model is automati-
cally created. The names given to the geoid models are those which were entered
in LGO.
) Existing geoid models are automatically overwritten by new models with the
same name.
4. The creation of a geoid model is finished.
11.9 CSCS Models
Use in the field For use on the receiver in the field, CSCS field files are created from the CSCS model.
CSCS field file CSCS field files may be used in the field to directly convert coordinates from WGS 1984 to
local grid without the need of transformation parameters.
Creation: In LGO with export onto a CompactFlash card.
Extension: *.csc
) The creation of CSCS models on the receiver and the functionality of all screens and fields
are similar to those for geoid models. Refer to "11.8 Geoid Models".
The directory on the CompactFlash card for CSCS field files with the extension *.csc is
\DATA\GPS\CSCS.

Manage...\Configuration Sets GPS1200 12-1
12 Manage...\Configuration Sets

12.1 Overview 12-2
12.2 Accessing Configuration Set Management 12-3
12.3 Creating a New Configuration Set 12-5
12.4 Editing a Configuration Set 12-20
12.1 Overview
Description The receiver has numerous user configurable parameters and functions. This allows a
variety of preferences to be addressed. The configuration of the parameters and functions
for an individual measuring technique are combined in a configuration set.
Default configuration Default configuration sets exist on the instrument. They use standard settings for the majority
sets of application programs. Default configuration sets can be edited and deleted. It is always
possible to restore the default configuration sets.
User defined configura- New configuration sets can be created. The configuration set wizard assists in editing config-
tion sets uration sets.
Edit outside the config- Parameters and functions can be edited without going through the configuration set wizard.
uration set wizard Refer to "12.4 Editing a Configuration Set" for more information.
) Each application program can be configured separately. Application program settings are
configured in the application program but are stored as part of the configuration set. Refer to
"34 Application Programs - General".

12.2 Accessing Configuration Set Management
Access Select Main Menu: Manage...\Configuration Sets.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen MANAGE Configuration Sets. Refer to
OR
OR
From a choicelist in some screens for example the begin screen of application programs.
MANAGE
Configuration Sets
CONT (F1)
To select the highlighted configuration set and
to return to GPS1200 Main Menu.
NEW (F2)
To create a new configuration set. Refer to
"12.3 Creating a New Configuration Set".
EDIT (F3)
To edit a configuration set. Accesses the first
screen of the sequential configuration set
wizard for the highlighted configuration set.
Default configuration sets can be edited. Refer
to "12.4 Editing a Configuration Set".
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted configuration set.
MORE (F5)
To display information about the description,
the creator and the creation date of the config-
uration set.
SHIFT SET-D (F4)
Available unless a default configuration set is
highlighted. To turn the highlighted configura-
tion sets into a user defined default configura-
tion set stored in the receiver.
SHIFT DEFLT (F5)
To recall previously deleted default configura-
tion sets and to reset default configuration sets
to the default settings. User defined configura-
tion sets are not affected.
Next step
IF a configuration THEN
set
is to be selected select the desired configuration set.
CONT (F1) to close the screen and to return to the screen from
where MANAGE Configuration Sets was accessed.
is to be created highlight any configuration set and NEW (F2). Refer to "12.3
Creating a New Configuration Set".
is to be edited highlight the configuration set and EDIT (F3). Refer to "12.4 Editing
a Configuration Set".

12.3 Creating a New Configuration Set

12.3.1 Initial Steps 12-6
12.3.2 Configuration Set for Static Operations 12-8
12.3.3 Configuration Set for Post-Processed Kinematic Operations 12-11
12.3.4 Configuration Set for Real-Time Reference Operations 12-14
12.3.5 Configuration Set for Real-Time Rover Operations 12-17
12.3.1 Initial Steps
Configuration step-by- The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
step information on individual screens.
chapter
1. Refer to "12.2 Accessing Configuration Set Management" to access
MANAGE Configuration Sets.
2. In MANAGE Configuration Sets highlight a configuration set. A 12.2
copy of this configuration set is taken for further configurations.
3. NEW (F2) to access MANAGE New Configuration Set. A copy of
the highlighted configuration set is created.
4. MANAGE New Configuration Set
<Name:> A unique name for the new configuration set.
<Description:> A detailed description of the configuration set, since
the name of a configuration set is usually an abbreviation. Input
optional.
<Creator:> The persons name who creates the new configuration
set. Input optional.
Enter a name.
5. STORE (F1) stores the new configuration set with the entered name.
Starts the sequential configuration set wizard.
6. CONFIGURE Wizard Mode 19.1
<Wizard Mode: Reduced>


chapter
) LIST (F6) accesses CONFIGURE Quick Access. Lists all screens

within the configuration set. Allows to access these individual screens
and to change settings.
7. CONT (F1)
8. Is the configuration for a static operation? 12.3.2
Is the configuration for a post-processed kinematic operation? 12.3.3
Is the configuration for a real-time reference operation? 12.3.4
Is the configuration for a real-time rover operation? 12.3.5
12.3.2 Configuration Set for Static Operations
Description Configuring the receiver for post-processed static operations.
Configuration step-by- The following table provides recommendations for the most common settings. For all other
step fields, the default settings can be used. Refer to the stated chapter for more information on
individual screens.
chapter
1. Refer to "12.3 Creating a New Configuration Set". Follow the instruc-
tions in paragraph "Configuration step-by-step" up to step 7.
2. CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode 20.3
<R-Time Mode: None>
3. CONT (F1)
4. CONFIGURE Antenna & Antenna Heights 18.1
<Antenna: AX1202 Tripod> or <Antenna: AX1202 Pillar>
<Default Ht: 0.0000>
<Meas Type: Vertical>
<Moving Ht: 0.0000>
5. CONT (F1)
6. CONFIGURE Display Settings 19.5
Select the display masks to be used with this configuration set.
) DMASK (F3) configures the selected display mask.


chapter
7. CONT (F1)
8. CONFIGURE Coding Settings 17.3
<Quick Code: Off>
<Attributes: Default Values>
9. CONT (F1)
10. CONFIGURE Logging of Raw Obs 17.5
<Log Raw Obs: Static Only>
For static operations with long baselines and over long time: <Log
Rate: 15.0s> or <Log Rate: 30.0s>
For reference stations for post-processed ensure that <Log
Rate:> is the same rate as at the rover.
11. FILES (F6)
12. CONFIGURE Raw Observation Files 17.5
<Use Separate Files: No>
13. CONT (F1) leads back to CONFIGURE Logging of Raw Obs
14. CONT (F1)
15. CONFIGURE Point Occupation Settings 17.6
<Pt Occupation: Normal>
<Auto OCCUPY: No>
<Auto STOP: No>
chapter
<Auto STORE: No>
16. CONT (F1)
17. CONFIGURE Quality Control Settings 17.4
<Allow 2D Posn: Yes>
18. CONT (F1)
19. CONFIGURE ID Templates
<Survey Pts: No Template Used>
<Auto Pts: Time & Date>
<Auxil Pts: No Template Used>
<Lines: No Template Used>
<Areas: No Template Used>
20. CONT (F1)
21. MANAGE Configuration Sets
The adapted configuration set is highlighted.
22. CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to GPS1200 Main Menu.
The highlighted configuration set is then the active configuration set.

12.3.3 Configuration Set for Post-Processed Kinematic Operations
Description Configuring the receiver for post-processed kinematic operations.
individual screens.
chapter
2. CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode 20.3.2
<R-Time Mode: None>
3. CONT (F1)
<Antenna: AX1202 Pole>
<Moving Ht: 2.0000>
5. CONT (F1)
) DMASK (F3) configures the selected display mask.

chapter
7. CONT (F1)
<Quick Code: Off>
9. CONT (F1)
<Log Raw Obs: Static & Moving>
11. FILES (F6)
12. CONFIGURE Raw Observation Files 17.5
<Use Separate Files: No>
13. CONT (F1) leads back to CONFIGURE Logging of Raw Obs
14. CONT (F1)
<Auto OCCUPY: No>
<Auto STOP: No>
<Auto STORE: No>
16. CONT (F1)


chapter
18. CONT (F1)
20. CONT (F1)
12.3.4 Configuration Set for Real-Time Reference Operations
Description Configuring the receiver for real-time reference operations.
) Real-time reference operations are possible with a GX1230. It provides real-time to centi-
metre level.
In order to use a GX1210 or a GX1220 for real-time reference operations, the RTCM v3
option must be activated. A GX1210 or GX1220 provides DGPS to 0.25 - 1 m level.
individual screens.
.

chapter
<R-Time Mode: Reference>
<R-Time Data: Leica>
3. RATES (F3)
4. CONFIGURE Data Rates 20.3.3
<Data: 1.0s>
<Coords: 10s>
<Info: 60s>


chapter
5. CONT (F1) leads back to CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode
) DEVCE (F5) to configure devices. 21.2
) REF (F2) configures additional reference station options like time

slicing.
20.3.3
)6.
SHIFT RT-2 (F2) configures a second real-time device.
CONT (F1)
12.3.4
) The sequence of screens varies slightly when a second real-time

device was configured before the configuration set wizard was
started.
7. The next screen depends on the setting for <Device:> in 21.2
CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
Set the parameters required.
8. CONT (F1)
<Antenna: AX1202 Tripod>
10. CONT (F1)
<Quick Code: Off>
chapter
12. CONT (F1)
<Log Raw Obs: No>
14. CONT (F1)

12.3.5 Configuration Set for Real-Time Rover Operations
Description Configuring the receiver for real-time rover operations.
) Real-time rover operations are possible with a GX1230. It provides real-time to centimetre
level.
In order to use a GX1210 or a GX1220 for real-time rover operations, the RTCM v3 option
must be activated. A GX1210 or GX1220 provides DGPS to 0.25 - 1 m level.
individual screens.
chapter
<R-Time Mode: Rover>
<R-Time Data: Leica>
) ROVER (F2) configures additional rover station options such as using 20.3.4
a reference network.
) 3.
DEVCE (F5) to configure devices.
CONT (F1)
21.2
4. The next screen depends on the setting for <Device:> in 21.2

chapter
Set the parameters required.
5. CONT (F1)
<Antenna: AX1202 Pole>
7. CONT (F1)
)9.
DMASK (F3) configures the selected display mask.
CONT (F1) 17.4
<Quick Code: Off>
11. CONT (F1)
<Log Raw Obs: Never>
13. CONT (F1)


chapter
<Auto OCCUPY: No>
<Auto STOP: No>
<Auto STORE: No>
15. CONT (F1)
17. CONT (F1)
19. CONT (F1)
12.4 Editing a Configuration Set
Description There are two possibilities to edit a configuration set.
Using the configuration set wizard to be lead through the steps.

OR
Outside of the configuration set wizard. Each screen can be accessed separately
without being guided through the steps.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
with using configura-
tion set wizard 1. Refer to "12.2 Accessing Configuration Set Management" to access MANAGE
Configuration Sets.
2. In MANAGE Configuration Sets highlight a configuration set to be edited.
3. EDIT (F3) to access CONFIGURE Wizard Mode. This starts the sequential config-
uration set wizard.
4. All following steps are identical with the creation of a new configuration set.
Refer to "12.3.1 Initial Steps". Follow the instructions in paragraph "Configuration
step-by-step" from step 6. onwards.
Access without using The currently active configuration set can be edited. Choose one of the following options and
the configuration set access the required screens to edit the configuration set.
wizard
Select Main Menu: Config.... Refer to "6 Main Menu".
OR
From inside an application program press USER and then CONF (F2).

OR
In CONFIGURE Wizard Mode, press LIST (F6). Refer to "12.3 Creating a New Configu-
ration Set".
Manage...\Antennas GPS1200 13-1
13 Manage...\Antennas

13.1 Overview 13-2
13.2 Accessing Antenna Management 13-3
13.3 Creating a New Antenna 13-5
13.4 Editing an Antenna 13-7
13.1 Overview
Description Leica Geosystems antennas are predefined as default and can be selected from a list.
Additional antennas can be defined.
Default antennas contain an elevation dependent correction model.
New antenna correction models can be set up and transferred to the receiver using LGO.
Default antennas All Leica Geosystems antennas are supported.
Active antenna One antenna is always considered as the active antenna.

13.2 Accessing Antenna Management
Access Select Main Menu: Manage...\Antennas.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen MANAGE Antennas. Refer to "5.1 Hot
Keys" for information on hot keys.
OR
OR
From a choicelist in some screens for example the SURVEY Survey Begin screen.
MANAGE
Antennas
CONT (F1)
To select the highlighted antenna and to return
to the previous screen.
NEW (F2)
To define a new antenna. Refer to "13.3
Creating a New Antenna".
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted antenna. It is not
possible to edit default antennas. Refer to
"13.4 Editing an Antenna".
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted antenna. It is not
possible to delete default antennas.
SHIFT DEFLT (F5)
To recall previously deleted default antennas
and to reset default antennas to the default
settings. User defined antennas are not
affected.
Next step
IF an antenna THEN
is to be selected highlight the desired antenna.
MANAGE Antennas was accessed.
is to be created highlight the antenna with offset characteristics similar to those
required by the new antenna.
NEW (F2) creates a new antenna. Refer to "13.3 Creating a New
Antenna".
is to be edited highlight the desired antenna.
EDIT (F3). Refer to "13.4 Editing an Antenna".

13.3 Creating a New Antenna
Access Refer to "13.2 Accessing Antenna Management" to access MANAGE Antennas.
Create new antenna The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. In MANAGE Antennas press NEW (F2).
2. MANAGE New Antenna, General page 3
<Name:> A unique name for the new antenna.
<Hz Offset:> Horizontal offset of measurement reference point.
<V Offset:> Vertical offset of measurement reference point.
<L1 PhOffset:> Offset of L1 phase centre.
<L2 PhOffset:> Offset of L2 phase centre.
<Copy Additional Corrections:> Allows additional corrections to be
copied from the antenna which was highlighted when MANAGE New
Antenna was accessed.
All offsets are copied from the antenna which was highlighted when
MANAGE New Antenna was accessed.
3. PAGE (F6) to access MANAGE New Antenna, IGS page.
4. MANAGE New Antenna, IGS page
<IGS Name:> The International GPS Service name of the antenna.
chapter
<Serial Number:> The serial number of the antenna.
<Set Up Number:> The set up number of the antenna. This identifies
the version number of the current calibration.
The combination of values typed in here provides a unique standard-
ised ID for the antenna being used.
5. STORE (F1) stores the new antenna and returns to MANAGE
Antennas.

13.4 Editing an Antenna
Access Refer to "13.2 Accessing Antenna Management" to access MANAGE Antennas.
Edit antenna step-by-

Step Description
step
1. In MANAGE Antennas highlight the antenna to be edited.
2. EDIT (F3) to access MANAGE Edit Antenna, General page.
3. MANAGE Edit Antenna
All the following steps are identical with the creation of a new antenna. All fields
can be edited except those of Leica default antennas.
Refer to "13.3 Creating a New Antenna". Follow the instructions from step 2.
onwards.
Convert...\Export Data from Job GPS1200 14-1
14 Convert...\Export Data from Job

14.1 Overview 14-2
14.2 Accessing the Data Export Functionality 14-4
14.3 Exporting Data from a Job to a Custom ASCII Format 14-5
14.4 Exporting Data from a Job to another Device 14-8
14.1 Overview
Description The settings on this screen define the data that is converted and exported and what format
is used.
Data is exported from the selected job. Currently active view, filter and sort settings are
applied. The points that are exported are those that are visible in MANAGE Data: Job
Name.
Data can be exported

to a file on the CompactFlash card.
to a file on the internal memory if fitted.
via RS232 to a Leica TPS400/700 instrument. Refer to "20.6 Export Job" for information
on how to configure the interface.
Export format
Format Characteristic Description
Custom Export variables Refer to the online help of LGO.
ASCII
Format definition Composed individually as format file using
LGO. Refer to the online help of LGO for
information on creating format files.
Units Defined within the format file.
Coordinate conversion All coordinate types are supported.
Height All height types are supported. If the desired
height cannot be computed, the default value
for the missing variable is output.


Specialities:
Points in file outside of CSCS The default value for missing variable is
model output.
Points in file outside of geoid The default value for missing variable is
model output, also if a geoid separation is available.
14.2 Accessing the Data Export Functionality
Access Select Main Menu: Convert...\Export Data from Job.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen EXPORT Export Data from Job. Refer
OR
Next step
IF exporting to THEN
custom ASCII format Refer to "14.3 Exporting Data from a Job to a Custom ASCII
Format".
another device Refer to "14.4 Exporting Data from a Job to another Device".

14.3 Exporting Data from a Job to a Custom ASCII Format
Requirements At least one format file was created using LGO and has been transferred to the System RAM.
Access Refer to "14.2 Accessing the Data Export Functionality" to access EXPORT Export Data
from Job.
Export data step-by- The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. EXPORT Export Data from Job
<Export To: CF Card> or <Export To: Internal Memory>
<Directory:> Available for <Export To: CF Card>. The data can be
exported to the \Data, the \GSI or the root directory. Data must be
stored to the \GSI directory in order to read it in a TPS1100. For
<Export To: Internal Memory>, the data is always exported to the
\Data directory.
<Job:> All jobs from Main Menu: Manage...\Jobs can be selected.
When in this choicelist press CFCRD (F6) or INTL (F6) to select a job
from a different memory device.
<Coord System:> The coordinate system currently attached to the
selected <Job:>.
<Format File:> The format files currently available in the System
RAM.
chapter
<File Name:> The name of the file to which the data should be
exported.
Select the job to be exported and enter a file name.
2. Highlight <Format File:> and ENTER.
3. EXPORT Format Files
All format files available in the System RAM are listed. Select the
format file to be used.
)4.
DEL (F4) deletes the highlighted format file from the System RAM.
CONT (F1) selects the highlighted format file and leads back to
EXPORT Export Data from Job.
5. FILT (F4) to set the sort and filter settings for export. Accesses
EXPORT Sorts & Filters.
6. EXPORT Sorts & Filters, Points page 8.6
<Sort:> The order in which points, lines and areas are exported.
<Filter:> Defines which points are exported.
) PAGE (F6) changes to the Lines or Areas page. The setting for
<Filter:> on these pages defines which lines or areas are exported.
7. CONT (F1) accepts the changes and returns to EXPORT Export
Data from Job.
) CSYS (F6) accesses EXPORT Coordinate Systems. To update the 11.3

coordinate system in which the coordinates are exported.


chapter
8. CONT (F1) exports the data.
9. Information message: Are more data to be exported?
10. YES (F4). Repeat steps 1. to 9.
11. NO (F6) returns to the GPS1200 Main Menu.
14.4 Exporting Data from a Job to another Device
General Data can be transferred to a Leica TPS400/700 via RS232.
Access Refer to "14.2 Accessing the Data Export Functionality" to access EXPORT Export Data
from Job.
Export data step-by- The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. EXPORT Export Data from Job 14.1
<Export To: RS232>
<Port:> displays the port currently configured to be used with RS232.
) IFACE (F5) accesses CONFIGURE Export Job Interface. To

choose the port and device to which the data should be exported.
2. FILT (F4) to set the sort and filter settings for export. Accesses
EXPORT Sorts & Filters.
3. EXPORT Sorts & Filters, Points page 8.6
<Sort:> The order in which points, lines and areas are exported.
<Filter:> Defines which points are exported.
) PAGE (F6) changes to the Lines or Areas page. The setting for
<Filter:> on these pages defines which lines or areas are exported.


chapter
4. CONT (F1) accepts the changes and returns to EXPORT Export
Data from Job.
) CSYS (F6) accesses EXPORT Coordinate Systems. To update the 11.3

coordinate system in which the coordinates are exported.
5. CONT (F1) exports the data.
6. Information message: Are more data to be exported?
7. YES (F4). Repeat step 1. to 6.
Convert...\Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job GPS1200 15-1
15 Convert...\Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job

15.1 Overview 15-2
15.2 Accessing the Data Import Functionality 15-6
15.3 Importing Data in ASCII Format 15-7
15.4 Importing Data in GSI Format 15-9
15.1 Overview
Description The settings on this screen define what data can be imported. The data to import must be
stored on the CompactFlash card.
Data can be imported to a job

on the CompactFlash card.
on the internal memory, if fitted.
Import formats
ASCII Import variables Point ID, grid coordinates, thematical codes.
No free codes, no attributes.
Format definition Free format. Use and order of variables and
delimiter can be defined during import.
Units As currently configured on the receiver
Height Orthometric or ellipsoidal
Specialities
Local heights but no coordi- Points are imported without coordinates but
nates in file with local height and code if available.
Coordinates but no heights in Points are imported without height but with
file coordinates and code if available.
Neither coordinates nor No import
heights in file
No point IDs in file No import


GSI8 Import variables Point ID (WI 11), local coordinates (WI 81,
GSI16 WI 82, WI 83), thematical codes (WI 71). No
free codes, no attributes. Example for GSI8:
110014+00001448 81..01+00001363
82..01-00007748 83..01-00000000
71....+000sheep
Format definition Fixed format. Easting and Northing can be
switched during import.
Units As defined in the GSI file
Heights Orthometric or ellipsoidal
Specialities
Local heights but no coordi- Points are imported without coordinates but
nates in file with local height and code if available.
Coordinates but no heights in Points are imported without height but with
file coordinates and code if available.
Neither coordinates nor No import
heights in file
No point IDs in file No import
Checks Points are always imported with the class CTRL and a coordinate quality of 0.00. Refer to
"8.3.1 Terminology".
While importing points to a job, checks are performed against point ID, class and coding of
points already existing in the job.
Case 1: Point already exists in database with class CTRL
Overwrite existing point? No Point not imported.
Yes
Point imported; coordinates and code overwritten.
Case 2: Point already exists in database with a class other than CTRL
Add point to database? No Point not imported.
Yes
Is a code attached to the point? No Point imported.
Yes
Is the attached code the same as Yes Point imported.

for the point already existing in
the database?
No

Should the existing code for the No Point imported, existing code from data-
point in the database be replaced? base applies.
Yes
Is the new point code already in No Point imported with code, code added to
the job? job as thematical code.
Yes
Point imported with code.

15.2 Accessing the Data Import Functionality
Access Select Main Menu: Convert...\Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen IMPORT Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job.
Refer to "5.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys.
OR
Next step
IF importing data in THEN
ASCII format Refer to "15.3 Importing Data in ASCII Format".
GSI format Refer to "15.4 Importing Data in GSI Format".

15.3 Importing Data in ASCII Format
Requirements At least one ASCII file with any file extension is stored in the \DATA directory of the Compact-
Flash card.
Access Refer to "15.2 Accessing the Data Import Functionality" to access IMPORT Import
ASCII/GSI Data to Job.
Import data step-by-

Step Description
step
1. IMPORT Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job
<Import: ASCII Data>
<From File:> All files in the \DATA directory on the CompactFlash card can be
selected.
<To Job:> Choosing a job as destination for import makes this job the active job.
All jobs from Main Menu: Manage...\Jobs can be selected.
<Header:> This option allows up to ten header lines which may exist in an ASCII
file to be skipped. Select the number of header lines.
2. CONF (F2) defines the format of the data to be imported.
3. IMPORT Define ASCII Import
<Delimiter:> The separator between the import variables.
<Multi Spaces:> Available for <Delimiter: Space>. <Multi Spaces: No> for
space delimited data having one space between the variables. <Multi Spaces:
Yes> for space delimited data having multi spaces between the variables.
Step Description
<No. Lines/Pt:> Available for <Delimiter: Line Feed>. The number of lines used
to describe each point.
Select the delimiter and the positions of the particular variables.
)4.
DEFLT (F5) recalls the default ASCII import settings.
CONT (F1) leads back to IMPORT Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job
5. SHIFT HTS (F2) to access IMPORT Define Ht Type & Easting Import.
6. IMPORT Define Ht Type & Easting Import
<Import as:> The height type for the imported data.
<Easting:> The Easting can be imported as written in the ASCII file or it can be
multiplied by -1. This is required by some coordinate systems.
7. CONT (F1) leads back to IMPORT Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job
8. CONT (F1) imports the data.
)9.
Points with a height > 20000 m are not imported.
Information message: Are more data to be imported?

15.4 Importing Data in GSI Format
Requirements At least one ASCII file in GSI format with the file extension *.gsi is stored in the \GSI directory
of the CompactFlash card.
Access Refer to "15.2 Accessing the Data Import Functionality" to access IMPORT Import
ASCII/GSI Data to Job.
Import data step-by-

Step Description
step
1. IMPORT Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job
<Import: GSI Data>
<From File:> All files with extension *.gsi in the \GSI directory on the Compact-
Flash card can be selected.
<To Job:> Choosing a job as destination for import makes this job the active job.
All jobs from Main Menu: Manage...\Jobs can be selected.
) CONF (F2) accesses IMPORT Define GSI Import. For <Switch WI81/WI82:
Yes> all WI 81 data, normally Easting, is imported as Northing and all WI 82 data,
normally Northing, is imported as Easting. This coordinate switch is necessary for
left handed coordinate systems.
2. SHIFT HTS (F2) to access IMPORT Define Ht Type & Easting Import.
3. IMPORT Define Ht Type & Easting Import
<Import as:> The height type for the imported data.
<Easting:> The Easting can be imported as written in the *.gsi file or it can be
multiplied by -1. This is required by some coordinate systems.
Step Description
4. CONT (F1) leads back to IMPORT Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job
5. CONT (F1) imports the data.
)6.
Points with a height > 20000 m are not imported.
Information message: Are more data to be imported?

Convert...\Copy Points Between Jobs GPS1200 16-1
16 Convert...\Copy Points Between Jobs
Description This chapter explains the process of copying points from one job to another.
) Important features:
Points are copied as defined by the point filter settings.
Points selected for copying may be viewed in a points listing. The point sort settings
define the order of the points in the listing. The point filter settings define the points to be
viewed in the listing.
Only points are copied - observation data is not copied.
When points are copied from one job to another:
their point codes and attached attributes are also copied.
their Class is retained.
their Sub Class is retained.
their Source is changed to Copied Point.
their Point Coordinate Quality is retained.
their Instrument Flag is retained.
their Date and Time Stamp is retained.
Access Select Main Menu: Convert...\Copy Points Between Jobs.

COPY
Copy Points
Between Jobs
CONT (F1)
To copy a selection of points.
FILT (F4)
To define the point sort and/or point filter
settings of points from the job <From Job:>.
DATA (F5)
To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas
stored with the job. Points, lines and areas are
shown on separate pages. Selected sort and
filter settings apply. Refer to "8.3 Point
Management".
CSYS (F6)
To select a different coordinate system.
<From Job:> Choicelist Describes where the points are to be copied from. All
jobs may be selected from Main Menu:
Manage...\Jobs.
<Coord Output The coordinate system which is currently attached to
System:> the job <From Job:>.
<To Job:> Choicelist Describes where the points are to be copied to. All
jobs may be selected from Main Menu:
Manage...\Jobs.

Config...\Survey Settings... GPS1200 17-1
17 Config...\Survey Settings...

17.1 ID Templates 17-2
17.2 Display Settings 17-17
17.3 Coding Settings 17-23
17.4 Quality Control Settings 17-26
17.5 Logging of Raw Obs 17-29
17.6 Point Occupation Settings 17-35
17.7 Seismic Recording 17-50
17.8 Ring Buffer 17-53
17.1 ID Templates

17.1.1 Overview 17-3
17.1.2 Accessing ID Template Configuration 17-5
17.1.3 Creating a New ID Template 17-7
17.1.4 Editing an ID Template 17-11
17.1.5 Deleting an ID Template 17-13

17.1.1 Overview
Description ID templates are predefined templates for point, line or area numbers. ID templates save
having to type in the ID for each object. They are useful when many points are collected
quickly, for example in post-processed and real-time kinematic operations.
The ID templates that are selected to be used suggest IDs for <Point ID:>, <Line ID:> and
<Area ID:> when points, lines and areas are to be surveyed.
Default ID templates Seven ID templates are implemented by default.

Default ID template Description
0001 Suggested as ID for measured points in default configuration sets.
This ID is automatically incremented.
Area0001 Suggested as ID for areas in default configuration sets. This ID is
automatically incremented.
Auto0001 Suggested as ID for auto points in default configuration sets. These
points are automatically recorded at a specific rate. This ID is auto-
matically incremented.
Aux0001 Suggested as ID for auxiliary points in default configuration sets.
These points are used when trying to find a stake-out point. This ID
is automatically incremented.
Line0001 Suggested as ID for lines in default configuration sets. This ID is
automatically incremented.
Default ID template Description
No Template Used The last point ID during a survey will be displayed. This ID is auto-
matically incremented if it contains numerical characters. If this ID
is overwritten, the auto increment starts from the new ID. The auto-
matic incrementation can be turned off when editing this ID
template. Refer to "17.1.4 Editing an ID Template".
Time & Date The current local time and date is the ID.

17.1.2 Accessing ID Template Configuration
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Survey Settings...\ID Templates.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen CONFIGURE ID Templates. Refer to
OR
OR
Within the configuration set wizard. Refer to "12.2 Accessing Configuration Set Manage-
ment".
CONFIGURE
ID Templates
CONT (F1)
To accept changes and return to the screen
<Survey Pts:> Choicelist Sets the ID templates for manually occupied points.
<Auto Pts:> Choicelist Sets the ID templates for auto points. These points
are automatically recorded at a specific rate.
<Auxil Pts:> Choicelist Sets the ID templates for auxiliary points. These
points are used when trying to find a stake-out point.
<Lines:> Choicelist Sets the ID templates for lines.
<Areas:> Choicelist Sets the ID templates for areas.
Next step
IF an ID template THEN
is to be selected select the desired ID template.
where CONFIGURE ID Templates was accessed.
is to be created Refer to "17.1.3 Creating a New ID Template".
is to be edited Refer to "17.1.4 Editing an ID Template".
is to be deleted Refer to "17.1.5 Deleting an ID Template".

17.1.3 Creating a New ID Template
Create ID template step-

Step Description
by-step
1. Refer to "17.1.2 Accessing ID Template Configuration" to access CONFIGURE ID
Templates.
2. In CONFIGURE ID Templates highlight any field.
3. ENTER to access CONFIGURE ID Template Library.
4. Highlight an ID template. A copy of this ID template is taken for further configura-
tions.
5. NEW (F2) to access CONFIGURE New ID Template.
6. CONFIGURE New ID Template
<ID:> The name of the ID template and the format of the ID object. Any characters
including spaces are allowed. Leading spaces are not accepted.
<Increment:> IDs are incremented numerical or alphanumerical.
<Increment By:> The amount by which the point ID is incremented.
<Cursor Posn:> The character position at which the cursor is placed when
ENTER is pressed in <Point ID:> when surveying points. <Cursor Posn: Last
Character> means that the cursor is placed immediately to the right of the last
character.
Adapt the settings according to the requirements.
7. CONT (F1) stores the new ID template into the ID template library and returns to
CONFIGURE ID Template Library.
8. CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE ID Templates.
Step Description
9. CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE ID Templates was
accessed.
Examples for incremen- For <Increment: Numeric only>

tation The rightmost numeric part is incremented within the point ID.
<ID:> <Increment Next point ID Notes
By:>
Point994 5 Point999 -
Point1004
...
994point 5 999point -
1004point
...
123point123 -10 123point113 Right hand side numbers are
incremented. Negative incre-
ments allowed.
Point11 -6 Point5 -
Point-1
Point-7
Point-13
...
Abcdefghijklmn94 5 Abcdefghijklmno99 Incrementation fails if next
Point ID increment fail increment will result in more
than 16 characters.

<ID:> <Increment Next point ID Notes

By:>
Abcdefghijklmno9 -5 Abcdefghijklmnop4 Negative incrementing fails if
Point ID increment fail next increment requires nega-
tive sign and will result in more
than 16 characters.
For <Increment: Alphanumeric>

The rightmost character within the point ID is incremented regardless of whether that char-
acter is numeric or alphanumeric.
Template Increment Next point IDs Notes
value
Point994 5 Point999 -
Point99E
Point99J
...
994point 5 994poiny Lower case alpha characters
Point ID increment fail increment until z is reached.
Then a new point ID must be
entered.
Abcdef -5 Abcdea Lower case alpha characters
AbcdeV decrement from lower to
upper case until A is reached.
AbcdeB Then a new point ID must be
Point ID increment fail entered.
Template Increment Next point IDs Notes
value
ABCDEB 5 ABCDEB Upper case alpha characters
ABCDEG increment from upper to lower
... case until z is reached. Then a
Abcdez new point ID must be entered.
Point ID increment fail

17.1.4 Editing an ID Template
Edit ID template step-

Step Description
by-step
Templates.
3. ENTER to access CONFIGURE ID Template Library.
4. CONFIGURE ID Template Library
Highlight the ID template to be edited. The ID template Time & Date cannot be
edited. EDIT (F3).
5. CONFIGURE Edit ID Template
The type of ID template selected for editing determines the availability of the fields
on this screen.
Available for the default ID template No Template Used:
<ID:> The name of the ID template cannot be changed since it is a default ID
template.
The other fields on this screen are the same as in CONFIGURE New ID
Template. Refer to "17.1.3 Creating a New ID Template".
Available for a user defined ID template:
All fields on this screen are the same as in CONFIGURE New ID Template.
Refer to "17.1.3 Creating a New ID Template".
Adapt the settings according to the requirements.
6. CONT (F1) stores the changes and returns to CONFIGURE ID Template Library.
Step Description
accessed.

17.1.5 Deleting an ID Template
Delete ID template step-

Step Description
by-step
Templates.
3. ENTER
4. CONFIGURE ID Template Library
Highlight the ID template to be deleted.
DEL (F4)
) It does not matter if the ID template is being used in a configuration set. The ID
template will be rebuilt when that configuration set becomes active.
5. YES (F4) returns to the CONFIGURE ID Template Library.
accessed.
Description Application: Pick up points with many different point IDs.

Most point IDs require an incrementing number behind a text.
Goal: The first point IDs for survey points are Bolt 001, Bolt 002, ....
A different point ID can be entered manually during the survey.
The following point IDs will be based on the manually entered point
ID.
An individual point ID can be typed in for one point.

Configuration of ID
Step Description
template step-by-step
1. Refer to "17.1.3 Creating a New ID Template". Follow step 1. to 4.
2. CONFIGURE New ID Template
<ID: Bolt 001>
<Increment: Numeric only>
<Increment By: 1>
<Cursor Posn: 1>
3. CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to CONFIGURE ID Template Library.

Step Description
<Survey Pts: Bolt 001>
accessed.
Field procedure step-
1. Refer to "35.3 Surveying Points" to access SURVEY Survey: Job Name.
2. SURVEY Survey: Job Name
<Point ID: Bolt 001> is shown automatically.
At the point to be measured, place and level the pole on the point.
3. OCUPY (F1)
4. STOP (F1)
5. STORE (F1)
<Point ID: Bolt 002> is shown automatically.
6. Repeat steps 2. to 4. until all points with the ID Bolt XXX are surveyed.
The next point IDs are RoadXXXX, starting with Road0723.
Type Road0723. <Point ID: Road0723>.
8. OCUPY (F1)
Step Description
9. STOP (F1)
10. STORE (F1)
<Point ID: Road0724> is shown automatically.
11. Repeat steps 7. to 9. until all points with the ID RoadXXXX are surveyed.
The next required point ID is BM98. It is valid for one point.
SHIFT INDIV (F5)
Type BM98. <Indiv Pt ID: BM98>.
14. OCUPY (F1)
15. STOP (F1)
16. STORE (F1)
The system changes back to use the ID template RoadXXXX.

17.2 Display Settings
Description Display settings define the parameters shown on a page on the SURVEY screen.
Four display masks are definable.

Mask 1: Always shown on the SURVEY screen.
Mask 2: Can be shown or hidden on the SURVEY screen.
Mask 3: Can be shown or hidden on the SURVEY screen.
Mask 4: Never shown on the SURVEY screen. Reserved for application programs.
The settings on this screen define the layout of the four display masks.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Survey Settings...\Display Settings.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen CONFIGURE Display Settings. Refer
OR
OR
ment".
CONFIGURE
Display Settings
CONT (F1)
DMASK (F3)
To configure the selected display mask. Refer
to paragraph "CONFIGURE Define Display
Mask n".
<Define:> Mask 1, 2, 3 or 4 Selected display mask.
<Use in Output Indicates if the display mask is shown or hidden as a
Survey:> page in SURVEY.
<Position and From 0.05s to 1.0s Determines how often positions are computed and
Screen the screen display is updated.
Update:>

Next step
IF a display mask THEN
is not to be edited CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to the screen from where
CONFIGURE Display Settings was accessed.
is to be edited highlight the display mask and DMASK (F3). Refer to paragraph
"CONFIGURE Define Display Mask n".
CONFIGURE
Define Display Mask n
CONT (F1)
To accept changes and to return to
CONFIGURE Display Settings.
CLEAR (F4)
To set all fields to <XX. Line: Line Space
Full>.
DEFLT (F5)
To recall the default settings.
<Visible:> Yes or No Shows or hides the display mask as a page in
SURVEY.
<Fixed Lines:> From 0 to 5 Defines how many lines do not scroll in the survey
screen when that display mask is used.
<1st Line:> Output Fixed to <1st Line: Point ID>.
<2ndt Line:> to For each line one of the following options can be
<16th Line:> selected.
% Completed Output field for the percentage of the time for which
the point has been occupied based on the setting for
<STOP Criteria:> in screen CONFIGURE Point
Occupation Settings. Appears in the display mask
during the point occupation unless <STOP Criteria:
None> or <% Indicator: None>.
Annot 1-4 Input field for comments to be stored with the point.
Antenna Ht Input field for antenna height for static observations.
Atmos Pressure Input field for atmospheric pressure.
Attrib (free) 01-20 Output field for attributes for free codes.
Attrib (pt) 01-20 Input field for attributes for point codes.
Code (free) Input field for free codes.
Code (pt) Input field for point codes.
Code Desc (free) Output field for the description of free codes.
Code Desc (pt) Output field for the description of point codes.
GDOP Output field for the current GDOP of the computed
position.


HDOP Output field for the current HDOP of the computed
position.
Line Space Full Insert full line space.
Line Space Half Insert half line space.
Moving Ant Ht Input field for antenna height for moving observa-
tions.
Msd PP Obs Output field for the number of static observations
recorded over the period of point occupation.
Appears in the display mask when recording of static
observations is configured.
PDOP Output field for the current PDOP of the computed
position.
Point ID Input field for the point number.
Quality 1D Output field for the current height coordinate quality of
computed position.
Quality 2D Output field for the current 2D coordinate quality of
computed position.
Quality 3D Output field for the current 3D coordinate quality of
computed position.
RTK Positions Output field for the number of positions recorded over
the period of point occupation. Appears in the display
mask of real-time rover configurations.
Rel Humidity Input field for relative humidity to be stored with point.
Temp Dry Input field for dry temperature to be stored with point.
Temp Wet Input field for wet temperature to be stored with point.
Time at Point Output field for the time from when the point is occu-
pied until point occupation is stopped. Appears in the
display mask during the point occupation.
VDOP Output field for the current VDOP of the computed
position.
Next step
Step Description
1. CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE Display Settings.
2. CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Display Settings was
accessed.

17.3 Coding Settings
Description The settings on this screen define the method of coding. Refer to "10 Coding" for a complete
description of coding.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Survey Settings...\Coding Settings.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen CONFIGURE Coding Settings. Refer
OR
OR
ment".
CONFIGURE
Coding Settings
CONT (F1)
<Quick Code:> Never Prevents the use of quick coding completely.
On Allows the use of quick coding and activates it.
Off Allows the use of quick coding, but keeps it deacti-
vated.
<Digits:> 1, 2 or 3 Available unless <Quick Code: Never>.
Sets the mostly used number of digits for the quick
code. Quick codes with less digits can still be used.
While typing a quick code during a survey, using
ENTER after typing one or two digits of the quick
code indicates the end of the input.
<Rec Free After Point or Available unless <Quick Code: Never>.
Code:> Before Point Determines if a free code measured with a quick code
is stored before or after the point.
<Attributes:> Determines the attribute values displayed under
certain circumstances. This is applicable to both the
storing and displaying of attribute values.
Default Values When available, the default attribute values, as
stored in the job, are displayed and stored.
Last Used When available, the last used attribute values as
stored in the job are displayed and stored.


<Mand Always Prompt The screen XX Enter Mandatory Attribute will
Attribs:> always appear when codes, having one or more
attributes of attribute type mandatory, are being
stored. Attributes of attribute type mandatory or fixed
can only be created in LGO.
Only If No Value The screen XX Enter Mandatory Attribute will only
appear when codes, having one or more attributes of
attribute type mandatory, are being stored without an
attribute value. Attributes of attribute type mandatory
must always be created in LGO.
<Thematc Sets the coding method.
Codes:>
With Codelist Codes stored within the job codelist can be selected
to code points, lines and areas.
Without Codelist Codes stored within the job codelist cannot be
selected to code points, lines and areas. Each code
must be entered manually.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Coding Settings was accessed.
17.4 Quality Control Settings
Description The settings on this screen define the limits for coordinate quality and DOP values accepted
for point occupations.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Survey Settings...\Quality Control Settings.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen CONFIGURE Quality Control Settings.
OR
OR
ment".
CONFIGURE
Quality Control Settings
CONT (F1)

<CQ Control:> None, Pos Only, The type of coordinate quality to be checked before
Height Only or storing a point. If activated, the limit defined in
Pos & Height <Maximum CQ:> is checked before storing a point.
A warning signal is given when the limit is exceeded.
Refer to "8.3.1 Terminology" for information on coor-
dinate quality.
<Maximum User input Available unless <CQ Control: None>.
CQ:> The maximum acceptable coordinate quality.
<DOP Limit:> None, GDOP, If activated, the limit defined in <Maximum DOP:> is
PDOP, HDOP or checked. GPS positions are unavailable when the
VDOP limit is exceeded.
<Maximum User input Available unless <DOP Limit: None>.
DOP:> The maximum acceptable DOP value.
<Allow 2D Yes 2D positions can be obtained with only three satellites
Posn:> available. The height is fixed to that of the last posi-
tion computed with height.
No 2D positions cannot be obtained with only three satel-
lites available.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Qualtiy Control Settings was
accessed.

17.5 Logging of Raw Obs
Description Logged raw observations are used for

static and kinematic operations. With these operations, raw data is always post-proc-
essed in the office. Raw data must therefore be logged on both reference and rover
receivers.
real-time operations
to check the work in the office by post-processing.
OR
to fill in gaps when a real-time position could not be calculated in the field. This can
happen due to problems with the real-time data reception.
Observations must be logged on all receivers which will be used for post-processing.
The settings on this screen define the logging of raw observations.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Survey Settings...\Logging of Raw Obs.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen CONFIGURE Logging of Raw Obs.
OR
OR
ment".
CONFIGURE
Logging of Raw Obs
CONT (F1)
FILES (F6)
Available unless <Log Raw Obs: Never> or
<Log Raw Obs: No>. To configure the files for
raw observations. Refer to paragraph
"CONFIGURE Raw Observation Files".
<Log Raw Never Available unless <R-Time Mode: Reference>. No
Obs:> raw observation logging during either static or moving
intervals.
Static Only Available unless <R-Time Mode: Reference>. Raw
observation logging during static intervals when
occupying a point. The receiver has to be stationary.
Static & Moving Available unless <R-Time Mode: Reference>. Raw
observation logging during static and moving inter-
vals. For post-processed kinematic rover operations.


If Radio Down Available for <R-Time Mode: Rover>. Continuous
raw observation logging during static and moving
intervals when no real-time corrections are being
received by a receiver.
Yes Available for <R-Time Mode: Reference>. Raw
observation logging.
No Available for <R-Time Mode: Reference>. No raw
observation logging.
<Log After:> User input Available for <Log Raw Obs: If Radio Down>.
Raw data logging begins after the specified time if
radio contact is lost.
<For User input Available for <Log Raw Obs: If Radio Down>.
Minimum:> Raw data logging continues for the specified time,
also after the radio link is regained.
<Log Rate:> From 0.05s to Available unless <Log Raw Obs: Never> or <Log
300.0s Raw Obs: No>. Rate at which raw observations are
logged.
Recommendations:
For static operations with long baselines and over
long time <Log Rate: 15.0s> or <Log Rate:
30.0s>.
For reference stations for post-processed and
real-time kinematic rovers, <Log Rate:> at the
reference should be the same rate as at the rover.
For initialisation while static and occupying distinct
points in kinematic chains <Log Rate: > between
0.1s and 2.0s.
Next step
IF files for raw THEN
observations
are not to be config- CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to the screen from where
ured CONFIGURE Logging of Raw Obs was accessed.
are to be configured FILES (F6). Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Raw Observation
Files".
CONFIGURE
Raw Observation Files
CONT (F1)
CONFIGURE Logging of Raw Obs.

<Use Separate Yes or No Stores all raw observations into one or into separate
Files:> files.
<Obs File From 1 min to 24 Available for <Use Separate Files: Yes>.
Size:> hours Splits the recorded data up into files of a specific
period of time.
<Split Tracks:> Yes or No Available for <Use Separate Files: Yes> and unless
<R-Time Mode: Reference>.
Activates the interruption of static intervals when the
time set for <Obs File Size:> is reached. The data is
then recorded to a new file.
Moving intervals are always interrupted and written to
a new file when the time set for <Obs File Size:> is
reached.
<Delete Old Yes or No Available for <Use Separate Files: Yes>. Deletes
Files:> the recorded data after a specified period of time.
<When Older From 1 day to 30 Available for <Delete Old Files: Yes>. The period of
Than:> days time after which the recorded data is deleted.
Next step
Step Description
1. CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE Logging of Raw Obs.
2. CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Logging of Raw Obs
was accessed.

17.6 Point Occupation Settings

17.6.1 Configuration of Point Occupation Settings 17-36
17.6.1 Configuration of Point Occupation Settings
Description The settings on this screen define the way in which points are occupied and recorded.
) Point occupation settings are configurable for <R-Time Mode: Rover> and <R-Time Mode:
None>.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Survey Settings...\Point Occupation Settings.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen CONFIGURE Point Occupation
Settings. Refer to "5.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys.
OR
OR
ment".

CONFIGURE
Point Occupation
Settings
CONT (F1)
PARAM (F3)
To configure the time interval after which a
point occupation can be stopped automatically.
Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Post-
Process Stop Criteria".
<Pt Occupa- The way in which coordinates for a point are
tion:> recorded.
Normal Records observations between pressing OCUPY
(F1) and STOP (F1). Recommended for static post-
processed reference station and normal real-time
applications.
Instantaneous Records the time tag when OCUPY (F1) is pressed.
A coordinate is interpolated between the positions at
the neighbouring two epochs to filter out effects of
slight movement. Recommended when measuring
positions of objects while the antenna is moving.
Example: Measuring the position of lampposts by
driving in a car along the road and pressing OCUPY
(F1) when the car is next to the lamppost.
Refer to the diagram below.
<Auto Available for <Pt Occupation: Normal>.
OCCUPY:>
No Starts point occupation when pressing OCUPY (F1).
Yes Starts point occupation automatically when entering
SURVEY Survey: Job Name. All subsequent points
must be occupied by pressing OCUPY (F1).
Timed Starts point occupation automatically at a certain
time. The start time is specified in SURVEY Survey:
Job Name.
<Auto STOP:> Yes or No Available for <Pt Occupation: Normal>.
Stops the measurements automatically when the
parameter defined for <STOP Criteria:> reaches
100 %.
<STOP Available for <Pt Occupation: Normal> and <Auto
Criteria:> STOP: Yes>.


Defines the method used for <Auto STOP:>. The
setting determines the computation and value to be
shown for <% Completed:> in the display mask and
in STATUS Occupation Information. Parameters
for the selected method are defined with PARAM
(F3). Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Post-
Process Stop Criteria" or "CONFIGURE Real-Time
Stop Criteria".
Accuracy or Posi- Available for <R-Time Mode: Rover>.
tions
Time, Observa- Available for <R-Time Mode: None>.
tions or No. of
Satellites
<% Indicator:> Available for <Pt Occupation: Normal> and <Auto
STOP: No>.
The setting determines the computation and value to
be shown for <% Completed:> in the display mask
and in STATUS Occupation Information. This is an
indicator when to stop the point occupation. Parame-
ters for the selected method are defined with
PARAM(F3). Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE
Post-Process Stop Criteria" or "CONFIGURE Real-
Time Stop Criteria".
None or Positions Available for <R-Time Mode: Rover>.
None, Time, Available for <R-Time Mode: None>.
Observations or
No. of Satellites
<Beep On Yes or No Activates that a beep is made when the point occupa-
STOP:> tion is ended by <Auto STOP:>.
<Auto Yes or No Stores points automatically after stopping the point
STORE:> occupation.
<Beep On Yes or No Activates that a beep is made when the point is stored
STORE:> by <Auto STORE:>.
<End Survey:> Available for <Pt Occupation: Normal>.
Defines the instrument behaviour once a point is
stored.
Manual Exits SURVEY when pressing ESC.
Automatically Exits SURVEY automatically when pressing STORE
(F1) and returns to main menu.
Auto & Turn Off Exits SURVEY automatically when pressing STORE
(F1) and turns receiver off.

Point occupation mode Normal
b c
a a) Time in epochs
b) OCUPY (F1) pressed
1 2 3 4 5 c) STOP (F1) pressed
d) Post-processed coordinates computed by
d averaging resulting positions of epochs 2 and
GPS12_056 3
Point occupation mode Instantaneous

b c
a) Time in epochs
a b) OCUPY (F1) pressed and point coordinates
interpolated based on epochs 2 and 3
1 2 3 4 5 c) OCUPY (F1) pressed and point coordinates
interpolated based on epochs 4 and 5
5 d
d) Plan view
f
2 e) OCUPY (F1) pressed and point coordinates
1 e 4 interpolated based on epochs 2 and 3
3 f) OCUPY (F1) pressed and point coordinates
GPS12_057 interpolated based on epochs 4 and 5
Next step
IF parameters for AND THEN
<Auto STOP:>
are not to be config- - CONT (F1) closes the screen and
ured returns to the screen from where
CONFIGURE Point Occupation
Settings was accessed.
are to be configured <R-Time Mode: None> PARAM (F3) changes to
CONFIGURE Post-Process Stop
Criteria. Refer to paragraph
"CONFIGURE Post-Process Stop
Criteria".
are to be configured <R-Time Mode: Rover> PARAM (F3) changes to
CONFIGURE Real-Time Stop
Criteria. Refer to paragraph
"CONFIGURE Real-Time Stop
Criteria".

CONFIGURE
Post-Process Stop
Criteria
CONT (F1)
CONFIGURE Point Occupation
Settings.
The parameters shown on this screen depend on the setting for <STOP Criteria:> in
CONFIGURE Point Occupation Settings.
<Time at Point:> User input Sets the required observation time for each point.
Counting time starts when OCUPY (F1) is pressed.
The receiver stops measuring when the set length of
time is reached.
<Number of Obs:> User input Sets the required number of observations that should
be recorded at each point. Counting observations
starts when OCUPY (F1) is pressed. The receiver
stops measuring when the set number of observa-
tions is reached.
<At Logging Output Displays the rate at which static raw observations are
Rate:> logged as configured in CONFIGURE Logging of
Raw Obs.
<8+ satellites for:> User input Sets the required observation time depending on the
<7 satellites for:> number of satellites available. Counting time starts
<6 satellites for:> when OCUPY (F1) is pressed. The receiver stops
<5 satellites for:> measuring when the set length of time for a certain
<4 satellites for:> number of satellites is reached.
Should the number of available satellites change
during observation, the observations already
recorded will be taken into account. Refer to para-
graph "Observation time depending on the number of
satellites available".
Next step
Step Description
1. CONT (F1) closes the screen.
2. CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Point Occupation

CONFIGURE
Real-Time Stop Criteria
CONT (F1)
The parameters shown on this screen depend on the setting for <STOP Criteria:> in
<Pos Quality User input Sets the maximum position and height qualities for
<:> each point occupation. Calculating the qualities starts
and when OCUPY (F1) is pressed. The receiver stops
<Ht Quality <:> measuring when the position and height qualities are
both less than the configured values.
<Positions:> User input Raw data is logged for a minimum number of posi-
tions even when the <Pos Quality <:> and <Ht
Quality <:> is already less than the specified
maximum.
<Position Output Displays the value for <Position and Screen
Update:> Update:> as configured in CONFIGURE Display
Settings.
<No. of Posi- User input Sets the number the positions which must be
tions:> observed before the receiver stops measuring.
Counting the number of positions starts when
OCUPY (F1) is pressed.
Next step
Step Description
1. CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE Point Occupation Settings.

Observation time
a d c b b b
depending on the
number of satellites 6
available
4
e
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GPS12_075
Thin line represents <6 satellites for: 3 min>.

Bold line represents <5 satellites for: 5 min>.
Dashed line represents <4 satellites for: 7 min>.
a) OCUPY (F1) is pressed. Counting time starts.

b) Observation is stopped.
c) 40 % for five satellites
d) 30 % for five satellites
e) 30 % for four satellites
Description Application: Surveying individual points in a kinematic chain.

Required accuracy less than 30 mm.
Working technique: Real-time kinematic
Aim: Press OCUPY (F1) to start recording manually.

Stop recording and storing points without user interaction.
After storing, the instrument stays in the SURVEY screen.
Requirements <R-Time Mode: Rover> in CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
Configuration of point
Step Description
occupation settings
step-by-step 1. Refer to "17.6.1 Configuration of Point Occupation Settings" for accessing
2. CONFIGURE Point Occupation Settings
<Auto OCCUPY: No>
<Auto STOP: Yes>
<STOP Criteria: Positions>
<Auto STORE: Yes>
<End Survey: Manual>
3. PARAM (F3)

Step Description
4. CONFIGURE Post-Process Stop Criteria
Type in how many positions are to be occupied before the point occupation stops
automatically. The number varies with each application.
5. CONT (F1) closes the screen.

Step Description
by-step
1. Refer to "35.3 Surveying Points" for accessing SURVEY Survey: Job Name.
2. At the point to be measured, place and level the pole on the point.
3. Enter a point ID.
4. If required, type in the antenna height.
5. If required, type in a code.
) Point ID, antenna height and code must be correctly typed in before OCUPY (F1)
is pressed due to <Auto STORE: Yes>.
6. OCUPY (F1)
) The point will be recorded and stored automatically as soon as the set number of
observations are recorded.
7. Move to the next point.
8. Repeat steps 2. to 7. until all points are measured.
17.7 Seismic Recording
Description In some countries, certain information must be documented for seismic surveys. This infor-
mation is output as a seismic record. Refer to "Appendix H Seismic Record Format" for a
detailed description of the seismic record format.
The settings on this screen activate seismic recording.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Survey Settings...\Seismic Recording.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen CONFIGURE Seismic Recording.
OR
OR
ment".

CONFIGURE
Seismic Recording
CONT (F1)
<Store Yes or No Stores a seismic record with each real-time point.
Seismic The seismic record is stored in point annotation 4 of
Record:> a point.
) For auto logged points set additionally <Store:

DBX(Pnts&Codes)> in SURVEY Configura-
tion, Auto Points page.
If Annot 4 has been configured to be used in the
currently active display mask, the seismic record
format has priority. The input field changes to <A4:
Seismic>.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Seismic Recording was
accessed.

17.8 Ring Buffer

17.8.1 Overview 17-54
17.8.2 Configuring and Using a Ring Buffer 17-56
17.8.1 Overview
Description A ring buffer

is a second set of raw data recorded in addition to the logging defined in CONFIGURE
Logging of Raw Obs.
can use a different observation rate.
has a defined duration for how long raw data is recorded.
consists of several files.
can be configured and used from an external software using special commands from
Outside World Interface or Leica Binary 2 format. Documentation for OWI and LB2 is
available on request from the Leica Geosystems representative.
can be configured on the RX1210.
has a number.
Use of ring buffers Ring buffers are used for monitoring an event.
Example: Data is collected for earthquake monitoring. The standard data is logged every
10 s and is continuously stored. The raw data for the ring buffer is logged at 1 s. After an
hours worth of raw data, for example, the ring buffer file is ovewritten by a new ring buffer
file. If an earthquake occurs the ring buffer file provides the detailed data needed to study the
event.
Active ring buffer A ring buffer is active when logging of raw observations for it has started.
One ring buffer can be active at one time. Before starting another ring buffer the active ring
buffer must be stopped.
Reserved space on When a ring buffer is activated a check is made that there is enough free space on the
memory device CompactFlash card or in the internal memory to log the data with the defined observation

rate and data interval. This required space is reserved, so that it cannot be used by other
applications such as logging the standard set of raw data.
Example: For a ring buffer with a time interval of 1 h, the last 1 h of stored data is always
available. Data older than 1 h is automatically overwritten by the data currently being logged.
Ring buffer files Number of files: Depends on the data interval specified. It is automatically determined.
Example: An interval of 1 h consists of six files each of ten minutes
length and a seventh file which is currently logged data to when the
ring buffer is active.
Type of files: Measurement database files.
File name: All files for one ring buffer share the same file name.
File extension: The file extensions for the files of one ring buffer differ and increment.
Directory: \DATA\GPS\RINGBUF on the chosen memory device.
Point ID RBxxxxff is the point ID for a static point which is stored into the ring buffer.
Field Description
RB Ring buffer
xxxx Receiver ID, four characters. Default: Last four digits of the receiver serial
number
ff Ring buffer number, two characters
17.8.2 Configuring and Using a Ring Buffer
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Survey Settings...\Ring Buffer.
) The configuration of an active ring buffer cannot be changed. In order to change the config-
uration of a ring buffer, raw data logging for the ring buffer must be stopped and the recorded
raw data must be deleted.
CONFIGURE
Ring Buffer
START (F3) or STOP (F3)

To activate and deactivate the ring buffer and
to start/stop logging raw data for the ring buffer.
DEL (F4)
To delete the logged raw data.
<Buffer No.:> From 0 to 9 The number of the ring buffer to be configured or
used. Up to ten ring buffers can be configured, one
ring buffer can be used at a time.


<Status:> Active Raw data is being logged to the ring buffer.
Inactive No raw data is being logged to the ring buffer.
<Configura- How the total length of the ring buffer is defined.
tion:>
Overall Length The time span of the ring buffer is defined in <Data
Interval:>. The splitting into individual files is done
automatically by the receiver.
No. of Files The time span of the ring buffer results from the user
inputs for <File Length:> and <No. of Files>. This
option helps controlling the file length for down-
loading.
<Log Rate:> From 0.05s to 300s Rate at which raw data is logged to the ring buffer.
<Dynamics:> Static or Moving Raw data for a ring buffer can be logged in static or
moving mode.
<Device:> CF Card or The device on which the raw data will be stored.
Internal Depending on the receiver options, this may be an
output field.
<Data From 10 min to Available for <Configuration: Overall Length>. The
Interval:> 4 weeks duration for how long data is recorded to the ring
buffer before newly observed data is recorded over
the oldest data.
<File Length:> From 1 min to 24 h Available for <Configuration: No. of Files>. For how
long data are written to one file before a new file is
created.
<No. of Files:> User input Available for <Configuration: No. of Files>. Defines
how many files are required for the ring buffer
logging. This is also the number of complete files
which are kept before overwriting old ones.
) Every power failure of the receiver will cause a

new file to be started. The number of files to be
created as defined in this field stays the same.
It is recommended to configure a higher
number of files, if the power supply of a
receiver is not reliable due to infrastructure
constraints. This will increase the time span
covered by the ring buffer in case of power fail-
ures.
Next step
IF THEN
a ring buffer is to be activated select the desired <Buffer No.:>. START (F3).
a ring buffer is to be deactivated select the desired <Buffer No.:>. STOP (F3).
the raw data on a deactivated ring select the desired <Buffer No.:>. DEL (F4).
buffer is to be deleted

IF THEN
the screen is to be quit ESC.
Config...\Instrument Settings... GPS1200 18-1
18 Config...\Instrument Settings...

18.1 Antenna & Antenna Heights 18-2
18.2 Satellite Settings 18-4
18.3 Time Zone 18-9
18.4 Instrument ID 18-11
18.5 Set NET Parameters 18-13
18.1 Antenna & Antenna Heights
Description The settings on this screen define the antenna and the default height for the antenna. Refer
to "3 Antenna Heights" for all information about antenna heights.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Instrument Settings...\Antenna & Antenna Heights.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen CONFIGURE Antenna & Antenna
Heights. Refer to "5.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys.
OR
OR
ment".
CONFIGURE
Antenna & Antenna
Heights
CONT (F1)

<Antenna:> Choicelist Antennas in the receivers System RAM or as defined
in Main Menu: Manage...\Antennas.
<Default Ht:> User input Sets the default antenna height for the current config-
uration. This is then also the default antenna height
during the use of application programs. The antenna
height can still be changed during a survey. The
change will not update <Default Ht:> in the configu-
ration. The initial value depends on the selected
antenna.
<Vert Offset:> Output The vertical antenna offset for the selected antenna.
<Meas Type:> Slope or Vertical The way the antenna height will be measured.
<Horiz Offset:> Output Available for <Meas Type: Slope>. The horizontal
antenna offset for the selected antenna.
<Moving Ht:> User input Sets the default antenna height for auto points and for
the moving part of a track when logging raw observa-
tions.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Antenna & Antenna Heights
was accessed.
18.2 Satellite Settings
Description The settings on this screen define which satellites and satellite signals will be used by the
receiver.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Instrument Settings...\Satellite Settings.

OR
ment".
CONFIGURE
Satellite Settings
CONT (F1)
To accept changes and return to GPS1200
Main Menu.
HELTH (F4)
Available for <SV Health: User Defined>. To
configure the satellites used in the survey.
Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Satellite
Tracking".

<Track Mode:> Defines the satellite signals accepted by the receiver
when tracking satellites.
Max Accuracy For normal survey applications requiring high accu-
racy. Phase solution for real-time and post-
processing.
MaxTrack For applications requiring lower accuracy. Enables
satellite tracking under noisier conditions like dense
tree cover. Code solution for real-time and post-
processing. A T appears in the number of visible
satellites icon.
<Cut Off User input Sets the elevation in degrees below which satellite
Angle:> signals are not recorded and are not shown to be
tracked. Recommended settings:
For real-time: 10.
For purely post-processing applications: 15.
<Loss of Beep & Message Activates an acoustic warning signal and a message
Lock:> or No given by the receiver when satellites are lost and
Beep/Message therefore no position can be computed.
<SV Health:> Sets the satellite tracking behaviour.
) This setting is remembered when the receiver

is turned off. It is stored as part of the configu-
ration set.
Automatic Incoming satellite signals are monitored by the
receiver. Data from signals which are flagged as
unhealthy are neither recorded nor used for real-time
computations.
User Defined Satellites must manually be included/excluded from
data recording and real-time computations with
HELTH (F4).
Next step
IF satellites used in THEN
the survey
ured CONFIGURE Satellite Settings was accessed.
are to be configured HELTH (F4). Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Satellite Tracking".

CONFIGURE
Satellite Tracking
CONT (F1)
USE (F5)
To change between the options in the column
User.
Satellite 01 to 32 The Pseudo Random Noise number of the satellites.
System OK, N/A or Information on the satellite health taken from the
Unhealthy almanac. N/A stands for not available.
User Bad Excludes satellite from tracking.
OK Includes satellite in tracking.
Auto Automatic satellite tracking when satellite is healthy.
) This setting is remembered until the receiver is

turned off. It is not stored as part of the config-
uration set. After turning the receiver on, Auto
is always set.
Next steps
Step Description
1. CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE Satellite Settings.
2. CONT (F1) returns to GPS1200 Main Menu.

18.3 Time Zone
Description The settings on this screen help the receiver to quickly locate and track satellites.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Instrument Settings...\Time Zone.

OR
ment".
CONFIGURE
Local Time Zone
CONT (F1)
To accept changes and to return to GPS1200
Main Menu.
<Time Zone:> From The time zone for the current location and local date.
-13:00 to +13:00
<Local Time:> User input Setting the local time and date supports a very fast
<Local Date:> satellite acquisition.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to GPS1200 Main Menu.

18.4 Instrument ID
Description The settings on this screen define the instrument identification number. This number is used
for the generation of the file names. Using format files, the instrument ID can be output
together with data from the instrument. By doing so, it can be identified which instrument was
used for certain measurements.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Instrument Settings...\Instrument ID.
CONFIGURE
Instrument ID
CONT (F1)
Main Menu.
DEFLT (F5)
To recall the default instrument ID.
<Instrument User input Sets a four digit number as instrument identification
ID:> number. By default the last four numbers of the serial
number are used.
Next step

18.5 Set NET Parameters
)
Description
The Set NET Parameters option is available on the GRX1200 Pro.
The settings on the screen allow the network parameters to be defined for the ethernet
device.
Typical uses The ethernet connection can be used to remotely

download data from a reference station.
access, control and configure a reference station.
The use of the ethernet connection could be of interest in the following examples:
Example 1: A receiver is set up on a glacier and is connected to the Internet via the
ethernet connection. A computer in a remote location can be used to access
the receiver and download data about the position of the receiver as well as
perform any controlling or configuring functions that are required.
Example 2: A permanent reference station on a mountain used to measure movement is
connected to the Internet via the ethernet connection and can be accessed,
controlled and configured using a computer in the office.
Example 3: A reference station on top of a survey companys building is used to broad-
cast real-time corrections and is connected to the companys intranet via the
ethernet connection. The reference station can be accessed, controlled and
configured by the survey personnel within the company.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Instrument Settings...\Set NET Parameters.

OR
ment".
CONFIGURE
Set NET Parameters
CONT (F1)
To return to GPS1200 Main Menu.
CLEAR (F5)
To reset all fields to their default values.
<IP Address:> User input The Internet Protocol address of the receiver. It is a
32 bit number which must be obtained from the
network administrator or the Internet service provider.
The format of the IP address is aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
where aaa is a value ranging from 001 to 254 and
bbb, ccc and ddd are values ranging from 000 to 254.


<Network User input Used together with the IP address to identify the
Mask:> network the receiver is on. It is a 32 bit number which
must be obtained from the network administrator or
the Internet service provider.
The format of the network mask is aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
where aaa is a value ranging from 001 to 255 and
bbb, ccc and ddd are values ranging from 000 to 255.
<Gateway IP User input The IP address of a local default IP router on the
Address:> same network. It is used to forward traffic to destina-
tions beyond the local network.
A gateway is the connection or interchange point that
connects separate IP networks. For example a Local
Area Network may need a gateway to connect it to
the Internet.
Next step
Config...\General Settings... GPS1200 19-1
19 Config...\General Settings...

19.1 Wizard Mode 19-2
19.2 Hot Keys & User Menu 19-4
19.3 Units & Formats 19-7
19.4 Language 19-15
19.5 Display, Beeps, Text 19-17
19.6 Start Up & Power Down 19-21
19.1 Wizard Mode
Description The settings on this screen define the behaviour of the configuration set wizard.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\General Settings...\Wizard Mode.

OR
ment".
CONFIGURE
Wizard Mode
CONT (F1)
Main Menu or to continue with the subsequent
screen within the configuration set wizard.
LIST (F6)
To access CONFIGURE Quick Access. Lists
all screens within a configuration set. Allows to
access these individual screens and change
settings.

<Wizard View All Screens All configuration screens are shown in the configura-
Mode:> tion set wizard. Application program configuration
screens are not included. They can be configured
within each application program.
Reduced A reduced set of screens are shown in the configura-
tion set wizard.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to GPS1200 Main Menu or continues with the subsequent screen within
the configuration set wizard.
19.2 Hot Keys & User Menu
Description The settings on this screen assign a particular function, screen or application program to
each of the first and second level of hot keys and to the USER key. Refer to "5 Configurable
Keys" for more information on hot keys and the USER key.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\General Settings...\Hot Keys & User Menu.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen CONFIGURE Hot Keys & User Menu.
OR
OR
ment".
OR
Hold a hot key down for two seconds. This is also possible after pressing SHIFT.
CONFIGURE To configure the first level of hot keys.

Hot Keys & User Menu,
Hot Keys page

CONT (F1)
PAGE (F6)
<F7:> to Choicelist All functions, screens or application programs which
<F12:> can be assigned to the particular key.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Shift Hot Keys page. Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Hot
Keys & User Menu, Shift Hot Keys page".
CONFIGURE To configure the second level of hot keys.

Hot Keys & User Menu, The functionality on this page is identical to the one on the Hot Keys page.
Shift Hot Keys page
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the User Menu page. Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Hot Keys &
User Menu, User Menu page".
CONFIGURE
Hot Keys & User Menu,
User Menu page
CONT (F1)
PAGE (F6)
<1:> to <9:> Choicelist All functions, screens or application programs which
can be assigned to the individual lines in the user
defined menu.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the first page on this screen.

19.3 Units & Formats
Description The settings on this screen define

the units for all types of measurement data displayed.
information related to some types of measurement data.
the order in which coordinates are displayed.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\General Settings...\Units & Formats.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen CONFIGURE Units & Formats. Refer
OR
OR
ment".
CONFIGURE
Units & Formats,
Units page
CONT (F1)
PAGE (F6)
<Distance The units shown for all distance and coordinate
Unit:> related fields.
Metre (m) Metres [m]
Int Ft (fi) International feet [fi], storage in US feet
Int Ft/Inch (fi) International feet [fi], inches and 1/8 inches (0' 00 0/8
fi), storage in US feet
US Ft (ft) US feet [ft]
US Ft/Inch (ft) US feet, inches and 1/8 inches (0' 00 0/8 fi) [ft]
US Miles (mi) US miles [mi]


Kilometres (km) Kilometres [km]
<Distance From 0 Decimals The number of decimal places shown for all distance
Dec:> to 4 Decimals and coordinate related fields. This is for data display
and does not apply to data export or storage. The
available options depend on the selected <Distance
Unit:>.
<Angle Unit:> 400 gon, 360 ' ", The units shown for all angular and coordinate related
360 dec or fields. More angle settings can be defined on the
6400 mil Angle page.
<Angle Dec:> The number of decimal places shown for all angular
and coordinate related fields. This is for data display
and does not apply to data export or storage.
From 1 Decimal to Available for <Angle Unit: 6400 mil>.
3 Decimals
From 2 Decimals Available for <Angle Unit: 400 gon> and <Angle
to 4 Decimals Unit: 360 dec>.
1, 5, 10, 60 Available for <Angle Unit: 360 >.
<Grade Unit:> The input and output format for grades.
h:v Horizontal by vertical distance.
v:h Vertical by horizontal distance.
% (v/h * 100) Percentage of vertical by horizontal distance.
Elev Angle Elevation angle.
<Velocity Km/h (kmh), Mph The units shown for all velocity related fields.
Unit:> (mph) or Knots
(kn)
<Area Unit:> m2, Int Acres (Ai), The units shown for all area related fields.
US Acres (A),
Hectares (ha), fi2
or ft2
<Temp Unit:> Celsius (C) or The units shown for all temperature related fields.
Fahrenheit (F)
<Press Unit:> mbar, mmHg, Inch The units shown for all pressure related fields.
Hg (inHg), hPa or PSI = pounds per square inch.
psi
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Angle page. Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Units & Formats,
Angle page".

CONFIGURE
Units & Formats,
Angle page
CONT (F1)
PAGE (F6)
<Direc Ref:> North Azimuth, Sets the reference direction as well as the direction
South Azimuth, from where and how azimuths are computed.
North Anticlock or For <Direc Ref: Bearing>, the azimuth/bearing fields
Bearing in other screens are called <Bearing:>. NE, SW, SE
and NW indicate the quadrant of the bearing.
N
NW NE
SW SE
GPS12_084
For all other options, the azimuth/bearing fields in

other screens are called <Azimuth:>.
<Direc Base:> True or Magnetic Sets the North direction.
<Mag Declin:> User input Available for <Direc Base: Magnetic>.
The value for the magnetic declination. It is consid-
ered when computing or using any azimuth values.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Time page. Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Units & Formats,
Time page".

CONFIGURE
Units & Formats,
Time page
CONT (F1)
PAGE (F6)
<Time 24 hour or 12 hour How the time is shown in all time related fields.
Format:> (am/pm)
<Date Day.Month.Year, How the date is shown in all date related fields.
Format:> Month/Day/Year
or
Year/Month/Day
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Format page. Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Units &
Formats, Format page".
CONFIGURE
Units & Formats,
Format page
CONT (F1)
PAGE (F6)
<Grid East,North or The order in which grid coordinates are shown in all
Format:> North,East screens. The order in display masks depends on the
user settings.
<Geodetic Lat,Long or The order in which geodetic coordinates are shown in
Format:> Long,Lat all screens. The order in display masks depends on
the user settings.
Next step

19.4 Language
Description The setting on this screen defines the language used on the instrument. Three languages
can be stored on the receiver at one time - English and two others. English cannot be
deleted. Refer to "25.2 System Languages" for information on uploading languages.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\General Settings...\Language.
CONFIGURE
Languages on Instru-
ment
CONT (F1)
Main Menu.
DEL (F1)
To delete the highlighted language.
Field Description
Language The languages available on the receiver.
Field Description
The selected language is used for the system software. If a language is
not available for the system software, the English language is used
instead.
Application programs run in the language they were loaded.
Next step

19.5 Display, Beeps, Text
Description The settings on this screen allow the screen appearance to be configured, turn the notifica-
tion beeps on and off and define the behaviour of the keys. The settings are stored on the
RX1200 itself. If RX1200s are exchanged, the settings stored on the new RX1200 apply.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\General Settings...\Display, Beeps, Text.
CONFIGURE
Display, Beeps, Text,
Display page
CONT (F1)
Main Menu.
CALIB (F5)
To calibrate the touch screen.
PAGE (F6)
<Touch On or Off Turns touch screen on and off.
Screen:>
<Screen Off, Soft or Loud Controls the beep upon touching the touch screen.
Beep:>
<Screen Off, Always On, Controls the screen illumination to be on, off or on for
Illum:> On for 1 min, On the specified time after the last key was pressed, or
for 2 min or On for touch screen event.
5 min
<Key Illum:> Off, Same as Controls the keyboard illumination.
Screen or Always
On
<Contrast:> From 0% to 100% Adjust the contrast level for the display with the right
and left arrow key when the field is highlighted or
using the supplied stylus on the slider.
<Heating:> Automatic The screen heating comes on automatically at 5C
and shuts off again at 7C.
Off The screen heating never comes on.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Beeps page. Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Display, Beeps,
Text, Beeps page".

CONFIGURE
Beeps page
CONT (F1)
PAGE (F6)
<Warning Off, Soft or Loud Controls the beep for acoustic warning signals.
Beeps:>
<Key Beeps:> Off, Soft or Loud Controls the beep upon key presses on the RX1200.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Text page. Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Display, Beeps,
Text, Text page".
CONFIGURE
Text page
CONT (F1)
PAGE (F6)
<Deflt Num:> Choicelist Sets the set of extra characters available through
NUM or F1-F6 whenever an entry is made.
The choices available depend on the character sets
loaded on the instrument and the language config-
ured to be used on the instrument.
Next step

19.6 Start Up & Power Down
Description The settings on this screen define the behaviour of the instrument for a general start up and
when starting up after a power loss.
The screen entered after turning on the instrument can be configured.
Once power is restored after a power loss the instrument returns to the screen in which it was
operating when the power failed. After restarting, the instrument uses the same job and
configuration set as before the power loss. If either the job or configuration set are not avail-
able the first in the list is used.
Two types of power loss could be experienced:

Sudden power loss: Internal or external battery being removed.
Gradual power loss: Internal or external battery running down naturally.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\General Settings...\Start Up & Power Down.

OR
ment".
CONFIGURE
Start Up & Power Down,
Start Up page
CONT (F1)
Main Menu.
PAGE (F6)
<Start Choicelist Determines the screen entered after turning on the
Screen:> receiver.
<Port 1:> Yes or No Determines if the receiver powers up when a pulse is
<Port 2:> received at one of the ports.
<Port 3:>
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Power Down page. Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Start Up
& Power Down, Power Down page".

CONFIGURE
Start Up & Power Down,
Power Down page
CONT (F1)
Main Menu.
PAGE (F6)
<Recovery:> Sets the behaviour of the receiver after power failure
when power is restored.
Sudden Loss The receiver turns itself back on automatically once
Only power is restored after a sudden power loss.
Always The receiver turns itself back on automatically once
power is restored after a sudden power loss or after
gradual power loss. The receiver returns to the
screen in which it was operating when the power
failed.
<Set Primary:> External A, Available for the GRX1200 Series where batteries
External B or can be attached to port PWR with a Y-cable. Sets the
Automatic external battery which is always used when sufficient
power is available, regardless of the status of the
other battery. Primary power sources must provide a
minimum voltage of 11.4 V.
Next step

Config...\Interfaces... - General GPS1200 20-1
20 Config...\Interfaces... - General

20.1 Overview 20-2
20.2 Accessing Configuration Interfaces 20-3
20.3 Real-Time 20-5
20.4 ASCII Input 20-33
20.5 NMEA Out 20-46
20.6 Export Job 20-54
20.7 Hidden Point 20-57
20.8 Tilt 20-65
20.9 Meteo 20-69
20.10 Internet 20-70
20.11 PPS Output 20-74
20.12 Event Input 20-77
20.13 External Oscillator 20-80
20.14 ASCII Remote 20-83
20.15 Remote 20-86
20.1 Overview
Description The receiver has a variety of interfaces which can be configured to be used with different
ports and devices. The configuration varies depending on the individual application.
Interface, port and Description of the technical terms

device
Technical term Description Example
Interface An interface should be considered as a function of the Real-Time
receiver.
Port The physical port on the instrument which will be used for Port P1
the interface functionality. It is sometimes necessary to
use particular ports with certain interfaces.
Device The hardware which is connected to the chosen port. Radio

20.2 Accessing Configuration Interfaces
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces....

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen CONFIGURE Interfaces. Refer to "5.1
OR
CONFIGURE The screen gives an overview of all interfaces with the currently assigned port and device. If
Interfaces a second real-time interface is configured it will also be shown.
CONT (F1)
was accessed.
EDIT (F3)
To configure the parameters related to the
highlighted interface. Refer to the sections on
each individual interface below.
CTRL (F4)
Available for certain devices connected to
certain interfaces. To configure additional
parameters, for example changing channels of
radios.
SHIFT CONEC (F4) and SHIFT DISCO (F4)
Available for a real-time interface configured to
use a device of type digital cellular phone or
modem. To dial the number of another station
configured in the active configuration set and to
hang up again.
Next step
IF THEN
an interface is to be highlight the interface to be configured and EDIT (F3). Refer to the
edited sections in this chapter on each individual interface.
a device attached to highlight the relevant interface and CTRL (F4). Refer to "22
an interface is to be Config...\Interfaces... - Controlling Devices" for information on the
configured functionality.

20.3 Real-Time

20.3.2 Configuration without Real-Time Interface 20-7
20.3.3 Configuration of a Reference Real-Time Interface 20-8
20.3.4 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Interface 20-19
20.3.5 Configuration with Digital Cellular Phone and Radio 20-30
20.3.6 Configuration of SBAS 20-31
20.3.1 Overview
Description The real-time interface allows real-time related parameters to be configured. This includes
defining if the receiver should work as a reference or a rover and the real-time messages to
be used. Up to two real-time interfaces can be configured on the receiver.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces.... Highlight Real-Time. EDIT (F3).

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode. Refer
OR
OR
ment".
Depending on the access, some options are not editable.
Next step
IF the real-time THEN
interface is
not to be used Refer to "20.3.2 Configuration without Real-Time Interface".
for a reference Refer to "20.3.3 Configuration of a Reference Real-Time Interface".
for a rover Refer to "20.3.4 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Interface".
for use with both Refer to "20.3.5 Configuration with Digital Cellular Phone and
digital cellular phone Radio".
and radio

20.3.2 Configuration without Real-Time Interface
Access Refer to "20.3.1 Overview" to access CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
CONFIGURE <R-Time Mode: None> means the receiver is not to be used as a real-time reference or as
Real-Time Mode a real-time rover.
Next step
IF a Space-Based THEN
Augmentation
System
needs to be config- SHIFT SBAS (F5) to access CONFIGURE SBAS Tracking Mode.
ured
does not need to be CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Real-
configured Time Mode was accessed.
20.3.3 Configuration of a Reference Real-Time Interface
CONFIGURE The available fields and keys on this screen depend on the selected settings.
Real-Time Mode
CONT (F1)
REF (F2)
To configure additional settings relevant to
reference, e.g. time slicing. Refer to paragraph
"CONFIGURE Additional Reference Options,
General page".
RATES (F3)
To configure the data rates for the selected
real-time data format. Refer to paragraph
"CONFIGURE Real-Time Data Rates".
DEVCE (F5)
Available unless <Port: NETx>. To create,
select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2
Accessing CONFIGURE Devices /
CONFIGURE GPRS Internet Devices".
SHIFT RT-2 (F2)
To accept the settings and configure a second
reference real-time interface. Refer to para-
graph "CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode (2)".

SHIFT SBAS (F5)
To configure the Space-Based Augmentation
System to be used. Refer to "20.3.6 Configura-
tion of SBAS".
) Two real-time devices can be attached to two different ports, for example a radio and a digital
cellular phone. On the reference, the two devices can operate simultaneously. Press SHIFT
RT-2 (F2) to configure a second real-time interface.
<R-Time None, Reference <R-Time Data: Reference> activates a reference
Mode:> or Rover real-time interface.
<R-Time Leica The proprietary Leica real-time GPS data format.
Data:> This is recommended when working exclusively with
Leica receivers.
CMR CMR and CMR+ are compacted formats used to
CMR+ broadcast data for third party receivers.
RTCM v3 Use RTCM when rover units from a different manu-
facturer are to be used.
Message according to RTCM version 3. A new
standard format for transmission of Global Navigation
Satellite System correction information. Higher effi-
ciency than RTCM v2.x. Supports real-time services
with significantly reduced bandwidth.
Message types for real-time GPS operation:
1001: L1-only GPS real-time observables
1002: Extended L1-only GPS real-time observa-
bles
1003: L1 & L2 GPS real-time observables
1004: Extended L1 & L2 GPS real-time observa-
bles
1005: Stationary real-time reference station
Antenna Reference Point
1006: Stationary real-time reference station ARP
with antenna height
1007: Antenna descriptor
1008: Antenna descriptor and serial number
1013: System parameters
Pseudorange and phase range values for L1 and L2.
Depending on the type of receiver, the data for L1-
only or for L1 and L2 are sent out.
Accuracy at the rover:
For L1-only: 0.25 - 1 m rms.
For L1 and L2: 1 - 5 cm rms after a successful
ambiguity resolution.


RTCM 1,2 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Differential
and delta differential GPS corrections. Message 3 is
also generated. Use for DGPS applications. Accu-
racy at the rover: 0.25 - 1 m rms.
RTCM 9,2 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. GPS partial
correction set and delta differential GPS corrections.
Message 3 is also generated. Use for DGPS applica-
tions with a slow data link in the presence of interfer-
ence. Accuracy at the rover: 0.25 - 1 m rms.
RTCM 18,19 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Uncor-
rected carrier phase and pseudorange. Message 3 is
also generated. Use for real-time operations where
the ambiguities will be resolved at the rover. Accuracy
at the rover: 1 - 5 cm rms after a successful ambiguity
resolution.
RTCM 20,21 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Real-time
carrier phase corrections and high-accuracy pseu-
dorange corrections. Message 3 is also generated.
Use for real-time operations. Accuracy at the rover:
1 - 5 cm rms after a successful ambiguity resolution.
RTCM Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Combina-
1,2,18,19 v2 tion of RTCM 1,2 v2 and RTCM 18,19 v2.
RTCM Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Combina-
1,2,20,21 v2 tion of RTCM 1,2 v2 and RTCM 20,21 v2.
<Port:> Port x Port to which the device is attached.
Port 4(BT) Available for GTX1230. Enables communication
between a Bluetooth device and the Bluetooth in the
SmartAntenna.
NETx Available for an activated Internet interface. If these
ports are not assigned to a specific interface, then
these ports are additional remote ports.
Next step
REF (F2) changes to CONFIGURE Additional Reference Options, General page. Refer to
paragraph "CONFIGURE Additional Reference Options, General page".
CONFIGURE
Additional Reference
Options,
General page
CONT (F1)
PAGE (F6)

<Ref Stn ID:> User input An identification for a reference station. It is converted
into a compact format and sent out with real-time data
in all real-time data formats. It is different from the
point ID of the reference station.
An ID of the reference station is required if working
with several reference stations in time slicing mode
on the same frequency. In this case, the ID of the
reference station from which data is to be accepted
must typed in at the rover.
The allowed minimum and maximum values vary.
From 0 to 31 For <R-Time Data: Leica> and <R-Time Data:
CMR/CMR+> in CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
From 0 to 1023 For <RTCM Version: 1.x> and <RTCM Version:
2.x>.
From 0 to 4095 For <R-Time Data: RTCM v3> in CONFIGURE
Real-Time Mode.
<Time Yes or No The possibility to send real-time messages delayed.
Slicing:> This is required when real-time messages from
different reference stations are sent on the same
radio channel. Time slicing works for all device types.
<Used Ref 2, 3 or 4 Available for <Time Slicing: Yes>.
Stations:> The number of reference stations in use from where
real-time messages are sent.
<Time Slot:> 2, 3 or 4 Available for <Time Slicing: Yes>.
The contents of the The time slot represents the actual time delay. The
choicelist depend number of possible time slots is the number of refer-
on the settings for ence stations in use. The time delay equals 1 s
<Used Ref divided by the total number of reference stations. If
Stations:>. two reference stations are used, the time delay is
0.50 s. Therefore, the time slots are at 0.00 s and at
0.50 s. With three reference stations, the time delay
is 0.33 s. The time slots are at 0.00, 0.33 and 0.66 s.
<End of Nothing or CR To add a Carriage Return at the end of the real-time
Message:> meassage.
<RTCM 2.1, 2.2 or 2.3 Available for <R-Time Data: RTCM XX v2> in
Version:> CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
The same version must be used at the reference and
the rover.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the NTRIP page.

CONFIGURE
Additional Reference
Options,
NTRIP page
CONT (F1)
PAGE (F6)
<Use NTRIP:> Yes or No Activates NTRIP.
<Password:> User input A password for authentication is required to send
data to the NTRIPCaster. Contact the NTRIP admin-
istrator for information.
<Mountpnt:> User input Identifies from where data is streamed to the NTRIP-
Caster.
Next step
Step Description
1. CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
2. RATES (F3). Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Real-Time Data Rates".
CONFIGURE Description
Real-Time Data Rates For all real-time data formats, parts of the message can be output at different rates.
The settings on this screen define the output rates for the various parts of the selected real-
time data format. The available fields on this screen depend on the selected setting for <R-
Time Data:> in CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
<Data:> From 0.1s to 60.0s Rates for the transmission of raw observations. The
default settings are suitable for standard applications.
They can be changed for special applications. A
check is performed for permissible combinations.
<Coords:> From 10s to 120s Rate for the transmission of reference coordinates.
<Messages:> Choicelist Available for <RTCM Version: 2.3> in CONFIGURE
Additional Reference Options, General page. The
messages sent within the coordinate message.
<Info:> From 10s to 120s Rate for the transmission of reference station infor-
mation such as point ID.


<Msge Type:> Choicelist The message type of <R-Time Data: RTCM v3>.
<Msge Type: Compact> is suitable for standard
applications.
Next step
Step Description
1. CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
2. SHIFT RT-2 (F2) changes to CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode (2). Refer to para-
graph "CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode (2)".
CONFIGURE Description
Real-Time Mode (2) The second real-time interface is completely independent from the first one. All settings can
be configured differently. The port that is used must be different to the first real-time interface.
Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode" above for information on the fields and
keys. The difference is, that SHIFT RT-2 (F2) is replaced by SHIFT RT-1 (F2) and returns to
Next step
IF changes for the THEN
first real-time inter-
face
are not to be made CONT (F1) accepts the changes, closes the screen and returns to
the screen from where CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode was
accessed.
The second real-time interfaces is added to the list in CONFIGURE
Interfaces.
are to be made SHIFT RT-1 (F2) accepts the settings and returns to CONFIGURE
Real-Time Mode.

20.3.4 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Interface
CONFIGURE The available fields and keys on this screen depend on the selected settings.
Real-Time Mode
CONT (F1)
ROVER (F2)
Available unless <R-Time Data:
WAAS/EGNOS/MSAS>. To configure addi-
tional settings relevant to rover operations.
Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Additional
Rover Options, General page".
DEVCE (F5)
To create, select, edit or delete a device. Avail-
able unless <R-Time Data:
WAAS/EGNOS/MSAS>, <R-Time Data:
WAAS>, <R-Time Data: EGNOS>, <R-Time
Data: MSAS> and/or <Port: NETx>. Refer to
"21.2 Accessing CONFIGURE Devices /
SHIFT PRED (F3)
Available unless <R-Time Data: RTCM 1,2
v2> or <R-Time Data: RTCM 9,2 v2>. To acti-
vate and deactivate the prediction of real-time
observations between the data rate of the
reference. Refer to paragraph "Prediction" for
information on prediction.
SHIFT FILT (F4)
Available unless <R-Time Data:
WAAS/EGNOS/MSAS>. To activate and
deactivate the height filter for height
smoothing. Refer to paragraph "Height
smoothing" for information on height
smoothing.
SHIFT SBAS (F5)
To configure the Space-Based Augmentation
System to be used. Refer to "20.3.6 Configura-
tion of SBAS".
) Two real-time devices can be attached to two different ports, for example a radio and a digital
cellular phone. Due to the nature of a rover, the two devices cannot operate simultaneously.
It is recommended to choose two different configuration sets, one for each real-time device.
Change the configuration set to change the active device.
<R-Time None, Reference <R-Time Data: Rover> activates a rover real-time
Mode:> or Rover interface.


<R-Time The options available on this screen depend on the
Data:> selection made for <SBAS Tracking:> in
CONFIGURE SBAS Tracking Mode. Refer to
"20.3.6 Configuration of SBAS".
Leica Refer to "20.3.3 Configuration of a Reference Real-
CMR/CMR+ Time Interface" for information about these real-time
RTCM v3 data formats.
RTCM 1,2 v2
RTCM 9,2 v2
RTCM 18,19 v2
RTCM 20,21 v2
WAAS/EGNOS/M Wide Area Augmentation System
SAS, WAAS, European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service
EGNOS or MSAS MTSAT Satellite-based Augmentation System where
MTSAT stands for Multi-functional Transport SATel-
lite.
<Ref Sensor:> Choicelist The receiver type used at the reference. If the real-
time data format does not contain the information of
the receiver type certain corrections based on the
information of the receiver type are applied in order to
provide correct results. The real-time data formats
Leica, CMR and CMR+ contain this information. This
is mainly important when a System300 receiver is
used as reference.
<Ref Choicelist The antenna used at the reference. If the real-time
Antenna:> data format does not contain the information of the
antenna certain corrections based on the information
of the antenna are applied in order to provide correct
results. The real-time data formats Leica, RTCM
v2.3, CMR and CMR+ contain this information.
) If the reference data is corrected by absolute

antenna calibration values and a Leica
standard antenna is being used on the rover,
select ADVNULLANTENNA as reference
antenna.
Next step
IF additional rover THEN
options
ured CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode was accessed.
are to be configured ROVER (F2). Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Additional Rover
Options, General page".
CONFIGURE The available fields depend on the selected <R-Time Data:> in CONFIGURE Real-Time
Additional Rover Mode.
Options,
General page

CONT (F1)
GETID (F5)
Available for <Accept Ref: User Defined>.
To display and select the station ID of the avail-
able reference stations, the latency of the
message and the data format. When using
radios, the radio channel can be switched and
the stations received on the new frequency are
displayed.
PAGE (F6)
<Accept Ref:> The reference station of which real-time data is to be
accepted.
User Defined Incoming real-time data is accepted from the refer-
ence station defined in <Ref Stn ID:>.
First Received Incoming real-time data from the first recognised
reference station is accepted.
Any Received Incoming real-time data from any reference station is
accepted.
<Ref Stn ID:> User input Available for <Accept Ref: User Defined>. The
special ID of the reference station from which real-
time data is to be received. The allowed minimum and
maximum values vary.
From 0 to 31 For <R-Time Data: Leica> and <R-Time Data:
CMR/CMR+>.
From 0 to 1023 For <RTCM Version: 1.x> and <RTCM Version:
2.x>.
From 0 to 4095 For <R-Time Data: RTCM v3>.
<Ref None, VRS or FKP Defines the type of reference network to be used.
Network:>
<Send User Yes or No Activates the sending of a Leica proprietary NMEA
ID:> message defining the user.
<User ID 1:> User input Available for <Send User ID: Yes>.
and <User ID The specific user IDs to be sent as part of the Leica
2:> proprietary NMEA message. By default the serial
number of the instrument is displayed.
<RTCM 1.x, 2.1, 2.2 or 2.3 Available for <R-Time Data: RTCM XX v2> in
Version:> CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
The same version must be used at the reference and
the rover.
<Bits / Byte:> 6 or 8 Defines the number of bits/byte in the RTCM
message being received.

Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the NTRIP page.
CONFIGURE
Additional Rover
Options,
NTRIP page
CONT (F1)
SRCE (F5)
To download the NTRIP source table if
<Mountpnt:> is unknown. To do this, the
GPRS Internet interface must already be
configured. Refer to "32.2.3 Using the NTRIP
Service with a Real-Time Rover".
PAGE (F6)
<Use NTRIP:> Yes or No Activates NTRIP.
<User ID:> User input A user ID is required to receive data from the NTRIP-
Caster. Contact the NTRIP administrator for informa-
tion.
<(cont):> User input Allows the <User ID:> string to continue onto a new
line.
<Password:> User input A password is required to receive data from the
NTRIPCaster. Contact the NTRIP administrator for
information.
<Mountpnt:> User input The NTRIPSource from where real-time data is
required.
Next step
Step Description
1. CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
2. CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode was
accessed.
Prediction The following provides additional information on the prediction of real-time positions between
the data rate of the reference. This can be activated for a real-time rover interface unless <R-
Time Data: RTCM 1,2 v2> or <R-Time Data: RTCM 9,2 v2>.
Access
SHIFT PRED (F3) in CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.

Description
Prediction is the interpolation of real-time corrections between those regularly transmitted by
a reference at a defined data rate.
Advantages in using prediction

Computation of real-time positions on the rover is independent from the transmission rate
of the data from the reference station.
Positions computed with prediction have a reduced latency of around 20 ms.
Recommended settings for using prediction

The slower the data rate the more important it is to activate prediction.
Height smoothing The following provides additional information on the height filter for height smoothing. This
can be activated for a real-time rover interface unless <R-Time Data:
WAAS/EGNOS/MSAS>.
Access
SHIFT FILT (F4) in CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
Description
Height smoothing is a filter applied to all heights measured in the WGS 1984 or a local coor-
dinate system or output via NMEA. The filter defaults are best suited for high dynamic vari-
ations in height up to 1 m/s as carried out by graders.
Height Smoothing with high dynamic GPS operations
All GPS computed positions are almost twice as accurate in plan than in height. For the posi-
tion determination, satellites can appear in all four quadrants. For the height determination,
satellites can appear in two quadrants. This weakens the height position compared to the
plan position.
N
E
N
H
GPS12_055
Position determination with satellites Height determination with satellites

appearing in all four quadrants. appearing in two quadrants.
In high dynamic GPS operations, this fact results in height variations of a few centimetres as
shown in the blue curve in the diagram below. Some GPS monitoring applications require a
stabilised height. By applying the filter, the height variations are smoothed and most of the
noise in the height component is eliminated.

a [m]
201.2
b
201.19
c
201.18
201.17
201.16
201.15
a) Height
201.14
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 b) Height variations
GPS12_111
[sec] c) Smoothed height
20.3.5 Configuration with Digital Cellular Phone and Radio
Description An ideal real-time setup is to combine a radio and a digital cellular phone to get the best of
both technologies. The radio can be used where the radio signals can be received, the
advantage being that the radio data transmission is free. If the radio link is broken when the
rover goes out of range or due to an obstruction, change to the digital cellular phone to
complete the survey. This allows maximum productivity and minimal costs with real-time
GPS.

Step Description
by-step
1. Set up a reference.
2. On the reference, attach a digital cellular phone to one port and a radio to another
port.
3. Configure both interfaces on the reference.
4. Start the reference. Real-time data is transmitted on two ports simultaneously -
using different devices.
5. Set up a rover.
6. On the rover, attach a digital cellular phone to one port and a radio to another port.
The backpack is made large enough to take both.
7. Use two configuration sets to configure both interfaces on the rover.
8. Start the rover using either the digital cellular phone interface or the radio interface.
9. On the rover, change the configuration set in use in order to change between using
digital cellular phone and radio. There is no need to return to the reference.

20.3.6 Configuration of SBAS
Description Allows a Space-Based Augmentation System to be configured to provide additional correc-

tions in conjunction with GPS signals. Also commonly referred to as Satellite-Based
Augmentation System, SBAS provides corrected time and distance measurements calcu-
lated by a network of ground relay stations and geostatic satellites. A SBAS can correct for
problems such as atmospheric delays, poor satellite geometry and incorrect satellite posi-
tioning.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "20.3.1 Overview" to access CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
2. SHIFT SBAS (F5) to access CONFIGURE SBAS Tracking Mode.
CONFIGURE
SBAS Tracking Mode
CONT (F1)
<SBAS The Space-Based Augmentation System to use.
Tracking:>
GPS Only SBAS satellites will not be tracked.
Automatic SBAS SBAS satellites will be tracked and the SBAS service
used will be automatically selected, including MSAS.
WAAS, EGNOS Wide Area Augmentation System or European
Geostationary Navigation Overlay System satellites
will be tracked.
EGNOS (Test) To track European Geostationary Navigation Overlay
System satellites while the system is still in test mode.
Next step
Step Description
1. CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
2. CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode was
accessed.

20.4 ASCII Input

20.4.1 Overview 20-34
20.4.2 Configuration of an ASCII Input Interface 20-35
20.4.3 Configuration of Annotations 20-37
20.4.4 Configuration of a Command to the Device 20-39
20.4.5 Working Example 1 20-40
20.4.6 Working Example 2 20-43
20.4.1 Overview
Description The ASCII Input interface receives ASCII messages from third party devices such as depth
sounders, barometers, digital cameras, pipe detectors, Geiger counters, etc. The ASCII
messages are stored as point annotations together with the next manually occupied point
and/or auto point. After receiving the ASCII message, a reply can be sent back to the device
as confirmation.
The settings on this screen define the port and the device to be used and the type of ASCII
messages to be written to individual annotations.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces.... Highlight ASCII Input. EDIT (F3).
Next step
IF the task is to THEN
configure the
ASCII interface Refer to "20.4.2 Configuration of an ASCII Input Interface".
annotations Refer to "20.4.3 Configuration of Annotations".
reply command Refer to "20.4.4 Configuration of a Command to the Device".

20.4.2 Configuration of an ASCII Input Interface
Access Refer to "20.4.1 Overview" to access CONFIGURE ASCII Input.
CONFIGURE
ASCII Input
CONT (F1)
ANNOT (F2)
To configure which ASCII messages to record
to which annotation. Refer to "20.4.3 Configu-
ration of Annotations".
DEVCE (F5)
Available unless <Device: NETx>. To create,
SHIFT CMND (F5)
To configure a message to be sent through the
configured port to the device. Refer to "20.4.4
Configuration of a Command to the Device".
<Use Device:> Yes or No Activates the ASCII input interface.
<End of Msg:> CR, LF or CR/LF The character to be used to identify the end of the
incoming ASCII message.
From <Annota- Output The description of the ASCII input as configured with
tion 1:> to ANNOT (F2).
<Annotation If the seismic record is configured to be used then the
4:> default is <Annotation 4: Seismic>.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE ASCII Input was accessed.

20.4.3 Configuration of Annotations
Configuration of anno-
Step Description
tations step-by-step
1. Refer to "20.4.1 Overview" to access CONFIGURE ASCII Input.
2. ANNOT (F2) to access CONFIGURE Annotations to be Used.
3. CONFIGURE Annotations to be Used
<Annotation:> The annotation to which the ASCII message is to be stored.
<Accept ASCII:> Activates the recording of ASCII messages with the selected
annotation. <Accept ASCII: No> if the seismic record is configured to be used with
<Annotation: Annotation 4>.
<Message Desc:> The description for the ASCII message being received. This
description is then displayed in other screens, e.g. in STATUS ASCII Input - XX.
<Message ID:> The message ID to identify a particular ASCII message coming
from the device. The message is then saved to the annotation. Refer to "20.4.2
Configuration of an ASCII Input Interface". The following characters can be used
as filter:
^ To accept strings starting with the subsequent characters. For example ^1
accepts 12 but not 21.
$ To accept strings ending with the preceding characters. For example 1$ accepts
21 but not 12.
. To accept any character except newline.
[ ] To accept a set of characters. For example [0-9] accepts all numbers.
Step Description
Any characters to accept strings that include the characters at any position. For
example 1 accepts 1234, 4321 or 2134 but not 2345.
<Use Prefix:> Stores the description in <Message Desc:> as prefix to the ASCII
message. This helps to more easily identify the annotations registered with a point.
<Send Reply:> As a reaction of the receiver to an incoming ASCII message, an
NMEA message can be sent back to the device. For example, in the case of a
camera this allows the position to be integrated into the photograph afterwards.
Adapt the settings for a selected annotation according to the requirements.
4. For the configuration of other annotations repeat step 3. until all annotations are
configured.
5. CONT (F1) stores the changes and returns to CONFIGURE ASCII Input.

20.4.4 Configuration of a Command to the Device
Configuration of
Step Description
command step-by-step
1. Refer to "20.4.1 Overview" to access CONFIGURE ASCII Input.
2. SHIFT CMND (F5)
3. CONFIGURE Send Command to Device
<Command:> A message to be sent to the device through the configured port
when the survey or stakeout application program is accessed. This, for example,
allows the device to be started remotely. The last used command that was entered
is remembered as part of the active configuration set.
Type in the command to be sent.
4. SEND (F3) sends the command to the device.
5. CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE ASCII Input.
20.4.5 Working Example 1
Description Application: Survey on a small lake.

Recording the depth with the survey points.
Working technique: Using a depth sounder to measure the depth of the lake at certain
locations.
Goal: The depth sounder constantly streams data at a rate of 1 Hz and

sends the depth it has measured to the GPS1200 receiver in the
format:
27.234<CR>
27.345<CR>
27.232<CR>
The ASCII Input interface needs to be configured such that when

a position is measured, the depth measurement will be stored as
annotation 1 with that point.
Requirements The port and the device to be used for the depth sounder is configured correctly. The device
will most likely be RS232 using the same parameters as the depth sounder. Refer to "21.2
Accessing CONFIGURE Devices / CONFIGURE GPRS Internet Devices".
Configuration of ASCII
Step Description
Input interface step-by-
step 1. Refer to "20.4.1 Overview" to access CONFIGURE ASCII Input.

Step Description
2. CONFIGURE ASCII Input
<Use Device: Yes>
<Port:> Select the port to which the depth sounder is connected.
<End of Msg: CR>
3. ANNOT (F2)
<Annotation: Annotation 1>
<Accept ASCII: Yes>
<Message Desc: Depth Sounder>
<Message ID: ----->
<Use Prefix: None>
<Send Reply: No>
5. Still in CONFIGURE Annotations to be Used
<Accept ASCII: No>
6. Repeat step 5. for <Annotation: Annotation 3> and <Annotation: Annotation
4>.
7. CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to CONFIGURE ASCII Input.
8. CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE ASCII Input was
accessed.
Step Description
by-step
1. The coordinates of points can be measured over the lake with the depth of the lake
at that point recorded as an annotation. Refer to "35 Survey - General" for infor-
mation on how to run a survey.
) Because the depth sounder is streaming data, the depth measurement that is
stored with the point is the last measurement received by the receiver before the
point is stored. The point can be stored manually or automatically. Refer to "17.6
Point Occupation Settings" for information on how to configure <Auto STORE:>.
) The coordinates of the points can be measured as auto points. Refer to "36 Survey - Auto
Points" for information on how to automatically log points.
) Use STATUS ASCII Input - XX to view and check the ASCII data being input to the receiver.
Refer to "29.5.1 Real-Time Input".

20.4.6 Working Example 2
Description Application: Survey on contaminated waste land.

Recording four different levels of different gasses with the
surveyed points.
Working technique: Using a gas analyser to measure the levels of gasses at various
locations.
Goal: The gas analyser outputs the results as an ASCII message and
sends the four different levels it has measured to the GPS1200
receiver in the format:
GS1 2.786<CR/LF>
GS2 0.034<CR/LF>
GS3 1.395<CR/LF>
GS4 0.025<CR/LF>
GS1 to GS4 is the message ID for the four different gasses. The
numbers are the gas reading in ppm.
The ASCII Input interface needs to be configured such that when
a position is measured, the ASCII message is split and that each
individual gas reading is recorded as a separate annotation. For
example, annotation 1 would contain the value 2.786,
annotation 2 would contain the value 0.034 etc.The message ID
is used to search the input for that particular gas reading.
Requirements The port and the device to be used for the gas analyser is configured correctly. The device
will most likely be RS232 using the same parameters as the depth sounder. Refer to "21.2
Accessing CONFIGURE Devices / CONFIGURE GPRS Internet Devices".
Configuration of ASCII
Step Description
Input interface step-by-
step 1. Refer to "20.4.1 Overview" to access CONFIGURE ASCII Input.
2. CONFIGURE ASCII Input
<Use Device: Yes>
<Port:> Select the port to which the depth sounder is connected.
<End of Msg: CR/LF>
3. ANNOT (F2)
<Accept ASCII: Yes>
<Message Desc: Gas 1>
<Message ID: GS1>
<Use Prefix: None>
<Send Reply: No>
5. Still in CONFIGURE Annotations to be Used
<Accept ASCII: Yes>
<Message Desc: Gas 2>

Step Description
<Message ID: GS2>
<Use Prefix: None>
<Send Reply: No>
6. Repeat step 5. accordingly for <Annotation: Annotation 3> and <Annotation:
Annotation 4>.
7. CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to CONFIGURE ASCII Input.
8. CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE ASCII Input was
accessed.
Field procedure The coordinates of the points can be measured. Before storing each point, the gas analyser
is activated to take a gas reading at the point. The point can then be stored and the four gas
readings are stored as individual annotations along with each point.
Refer to "35 Survey - General" for information on how to run a survey.
20.5 NMEA Out
Description National Marine Electronics Association has developed a message standard related to the
marine electronics industry. NMEA messages have been accepted as the standard for
sharing specific data information between companies since the late 1970s. Refer to
"Appendix F NMEA Message Formats" for a comprehensive description of each NMEA
message.
The settings on this screen define the port, the device and the type of NMEA message to be
used for the NMEA Out interface.
Up to two NMEA Out interfaces can be configured. Each NMEA Out interface can output
different messages at different rates with different talker IDs. The output of NMEA messages
on both ports is simultaneous.
The screens for the configuration of the both NMEA interfaces are identical except for the
title - NMEA Output 1 and NMEA Output 2. For simplicity, the title NMEA Output is used in
the following.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces.... Highlight NMEA Out. EDIT (F3).

CONFIGURE
CONT (F1)
NMEA Output
MESGS (F2)
To configure what NMEA messages are
output, the rates and the output timing method.
Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE NMEA
Messages".
DEVCE (F5)
<Output Yes or No Activates the output of NMEA.
NMEA:>
SmartAntenna.
<Device:> Output Usually, RS232 is used to transfer NMEA messages.
<Talker ID:> User input Appears at the beginning of each NMEA message.
Normally, this will remain at the default GP for GPS.
Refer to "F.1 Overview" for more information.
<Messages:> Output The NMEA messages currently selected for output.
Refer to "Appendix F NMEA Message Formats" for
more information.
Next step
IF NMEA messages THEN
are not configured CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to the screen from where
CONFIGURE NMEA Output was accessed.
are to be configured MESGS (F2). Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE NMEA Messages".
CONFIGURE This screen shows the messages that can be output, which messages are currently output,
NMEA Messages the output rates and the output timing method.

CONT (F1)
EDIT (F3)
To configure how the currently highlighted
message is output. Refer to paragraph
"CONFIGURE Message to Send".
ALL (F4) and NONE (F4)
To activate and deactivate the output for all
messages.
USE (F5)
To activate and deactivate the output for the
highlighted message.
Next step
IF a NMEA message THEN
is not to be configured CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to the screen from where
CONFIGURE NMEA Messages was accessed.
is to be configured highlight the message and EDIT (F3). Refer to paragraph
"CONFIGURE Message to Send".
CONFIGURE
Message to Send
CONT (F1)
<Output:> At Epoch The NMEA message is created at the exact epoch as
defined in <Position and Screen Update:> in
CONFIGURE Display Settings. It is sent out in the
time interval as defined in <Rate:>. With <Output
Delay:>, the output can also be delayed by a time
after this epoch. Refer to paragraph "Diagram".
Immediately The NMEA message is created as soon as the infor-
mation is available. It is sent out in the time interval as
defined in <Rate:>. Refer to paragraph "Diagram".
On Point Stored The NMEA message is sent on point storage.

) If the time interval as defined in <Rate:> is

shorter than the epochs as defined in <Posi-
tion and Screen Update:> in CONFIGURE
Display Settings, then the internal computa-
tion of positions is changed to allow the speci-
fied rate of NMEA positions. <Position and
Screen Update:> remains unchanged.
<Output User input Available for <Output: At Epoch>.
Delay:> Delays the output of the NMEA message. The delay
is applied from the epoch as defined in <Rate:>. The
time of delay can be a value up to <Rate:>.
This option is required if two or more receivers are
being used to monitor the position of an object. The
position of each receiver is being output as NMEA
message back to a control station. The control station
may not be able to cope with all the positional data
messages if all receivers were sending their position
message back at exactly the same time as would be
the case with <Output: Immediately>. In this case
the output of the second receiver could be delayed so
that the control station receives the message from
each receiver at a slightly different time.
<Point Type:> Available for <Output: On Point Stored>.
Defines the type of points for which the NMEA
message is send.
All Points The NMEA message is sent when any type of point is
stored.
Occupy Pts Only The NMEA message is sent when a manually occu-
pied point is stored.
Auto Pts Only The NMEA message is sent when auto points are
stored.
<Rate:> From 0.05s to Available unless <Output: On Point Stored>.
3600.0s Defines the time intervals at which the NMEA
messages are created.
<CQ Control:> None, Pos Only, Available unless <Output: On Point Stored>.
Height Only or Activates a control over the coordinate quality. NMEA
Pos & Height messages are not output, if the coordinate quality of
the position and/or height component exceeds the
limit as defined in <Maximum CQ:>.
<Maximum User input Available unless <CQ Control: None>.
CQ:> The limit for the coordinate quality up to which NMEA
messages are output.
Next step
Step Description
1. CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE NMEA Messages.
2. CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE NMEA Messages was
accessed.

Diagram For <Output: At Epoch> with <Rate: 1.0s> and
A1
B1
A2
B2
<Position and Screen Update: 1.0s>
a1 Data 1 available
c1,a2
b1 NMEA message for data 1 composed
a1
b1
b2
c2
c1 NMEA message for data 1 sent
a2 Data 2 available
b2 NMEA message for data 2 composed
c2 NMEA message for data 2 sent
For <Output: Immediately> with <Rate: 1.0s>

and <Position and Screen Update: 1.0s>
0 1 2 3 4 A1 Data 1 available
GPS12_077
B1 NMEA message for data 1 composed and
sent
A2 Data 2 available
B2 NMEA message for data 2 composed and
sent
20.6 Export Job
Description The Export Job interface allows data from a job to be exported from the receiver to an instru-
ment such as Leica TPS400/700. Refer to "14.4 Exporting Data from a Job to another
Device" for information on how to export data via RS232.
The settings on this screen define the port and the device to which the data should be
exported.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces.... Highlight Export Job. EDIT (F3).
OR
Select Main Menu: Convert...\Export Data from Job. Set <Export To: RS232>. IFACE
(F5).
CONFIGURE The availability of the fields depend on the setting for <Device:>.
Export Job Interface
CONT (F1)
GET (F4)
Available for <Device: Leica TPS400/700>.
To check which jobs are available on the
TPS400/700. The job numbers can then be
selected in <Job Number:>.
DEVCE (F5)
To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer
to "21.2 Accessing CONFIGURE Devices /

<Use Device:> Yes or No Activates the interface.
SmartAntenna.
<Device:> Output The device currently assigned to the selected port
within the active configuration set. The device which
is selected determines the availability of the next
fields.
<Job From 1 to 8 The number of the job on the TPS400/700 to which
Number:> the data will be sent.
<Job Name:> Output or User Displays the name of an existing job assigned to the
input selected job number. If the selected job number does
not yet have a job name assigned to it, enter a new
job name. This job is then created on the TPS400/
700 instrument.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Export Job Interface was
accessed.

20.7 Hidden Point
Description Hidden point measurement devices are used for measuring to points which cannot be
directly measured with GPS, for example house corners or trees. The measurements made
with a hidden point measurement device are directly transferred to the receiver for the calcu-
lation of the coordinates of the hidden point. They can also be entered manually.
The settings on this screen define the port, the device and estimated qualities to be used for
the hidden point interface.
) The configuration of hidden point measurements is possible for <R-Time Mode: Rover> and
<R-Time Mode: None> in CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces.... Highlight Hidden Pt. EDIT (F3).
OR
Press SHIFT CONF (F2) in HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Measurements.
OR
Select Main Menu: Survey. In SURVEY Survey Begin press CONF (F2) to access
SURVEY Configuration. PAGE (F6) until the Hidden Points page is active.
OR
In SURVEY Survey: Job Name press SHIFT CONF (F2) to access SURVEY Configu-
ration. PAGE (F6) until the Hidden Points page is active.
CONFIGURE Depending on the method of access, the name of the screen varies.
Hidden Point Measure-
ments
CONT (F1)
OFSET (F2)
To configure the heighting and external angle
offsets. Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE
Hidden Pt Device Offsets".
DEVCE (F5)
<Compute Ht:> Yes or No to compute a hidden point with height.
<Est Pos User input The estimated value for the position quality assigned
Qlty:> to all hidden points. This must be estimated because
hidden point measurement devices do not output
position qualities.
<Est Ht Qlty:> User input Available for <Compute Ht: Yes>.
The estimated value for the height quality assigned to
all hidden points.


<Use Device:> Yes or No Activates the hidden point interface. For <Use
Device: No>, the measured values must be entered
manually.
Next step
IF heighting and THEN
external angle
offsets
ured CONFIGURE Hidden Point Measurements was accessed.
are to be configured OFSET (F2). Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Hidden Pt Device
Offsets".
CONFIGURE
Hidden Pt Device
Offsets
CONT (F1)
CONFIGURE Hidden Point Measurements.
<Height Available for <Compute Ht: Yes> in CONFIGURE
Offset:> Hidden Point Measurements.
None No height offsets are used. The result is the delta
height between the centre of the device and the
aimed point. Refer to paragraph "Diagram".
Device Ht When measuring hidden points, the height of the
hidden point measurement device can be typed in.
This option should be used when the hidden point can
be directly measured using the hidden point device.
Refer to paragraph "Diagram".


Device & Trgt Ht When measuring hidden points, the height of the
hidden point measurement device as well as the
target height can be typed in. This option should be
used when the hidden point cannot be directly meas-
ured with a hidden point device but a target point can
be used to calculated the position of the hidden point.
<Device Ht:> User input The height of the hidden point measurement device.
This is the distance from the ground to the centre of
the device. Refer to paragraph "Diagram".
<Target Ht:> User input The distance from the hidden point to the aimed point.
<Dist Offset:> User input The offset is automatically added to the measured
distance. Refer to paragraph "Distance offsets at
hidden point measurement devices".
<EAO Sets the default method for entering an External
Method:> Angle Offset. EAO is an offset angle between the
North of the device being used and WGS 1984
geodetic North. EAOs are applied when measuring
hidden points using a device capable of measuring
azimuths.
None No EAO value is applied to the azimuth measurement
received from the hidden point measurement device.
Permanent Applies a default value for the offset angle. The value
is changeable.
New for Each Pt Offset angle values must be entered for each new
hidden point.
<Offset:> User input Available for <EAO Method: Permanent>.
The default value for the offset angle.
Next step
Step Description
1. CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE Hidden Point Measurements.
2. CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Hidden Point Meas-
urements was accessed.

Diagram
P0 Known point
P1 P1 Target point
P2 Hidden point
d2 a Height of P0
d3 d4
b Height of P2 = a + d1 + d4 - d3
b d1 Device height: height of hidden point meas-
urement device above P0
d2 Slope distance
d1 a P2 d3 Device height: height of P1 above P2
d5 d4 Height difference between hidden point
P0 measurement device and P1
GPS12_058 d5 Horizontal distance
Distance offsets at A Leica Disto is shown as an example.
hidden point measure- P0
ment devices
a
a) Negative <Dist Offset:>
b) Positive <Dist Offset:>
c) Pole
d) Disto
GPS12_039 P0 Hidden point

20.8 Tilt
Description Tilt devices are used for measuring inclinations. The data from the tilt device is logged
together with the GPS raw observations. PC based software can convert the tilt data to a
readable ASCII format, e.g. RINEX.
In addition, a binary notification message can be output through ports P1, P2, P3, RX or NET
to controlling application software. A port configured as a remote port can be used to output
the notification message. The message contains the tilt measurements obtained by the
receiver from the tilt device.
The settings on this screen define the input port and parameters for incoming tilt measure-
ments.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces.... Highlight Tilt. EDIT (F3).
CONFIGURE CONT (F1)

Tilt Measurement To accept changes and return to the screen
NPORT (F4)
Available for <Notify Msg: Binary>. To
configure the port and the device through
which the notification message shall be trans-
mitted. Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE
Choose Notification Port".
DEVCE (F5)
<Use Device:> Yes or No Activates the tilt interface.
<Data Rate:> From 0.05s to The rate at which data is requested from the tilt
3600.0s device.
<Log to File:> Yes or No To store measurements from the tilt device. Data is
logged into the same job and file where the GPS raw
observations are logged. No data is logged, unless
raw observation logging is active.
For an active ring buffer on a GRX1200 Classic or
GRX1200 Pro, the measurements are also stored to
the ring buffer files.
<Notify Msg:> None or Binary Activates the output of a binary notification message.
The format is LB2 v2. Documentation for LB2 is avail-
able on request from the Leica Geosystems repre-
sentative.
Next step
IF port and device THEN
for a notification
message
ured CONFIGURE Tilt Measurement was accessed.


for a notification
message
are to be configured NPORT (F4) to access CONFIGURE Choose Notification Port.
Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Choose Notification Port".
CONFIGURE
Choose Notification
Port
CONT (F1)
DEVCE (F5)
<Port:> Choicelist The port through which the notification message shall
be transmitted.
<Device:> Output The device that is currently configured to <Port:>. If
no device is configured to that port then RS232 is
displayed.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Choose Notification Port was
accessed.

20.9 Meteo
Description Meteo devices are used for measuring air pressure, temperature and relative humidity. The
data from the meteo device is logged together with the GPS raw observations. PC based
software can convert the meteo data to a readable ASCII format, e.g. RINEX.
In addition, a binary notification message can directly be output through ports P1, P2, P3, RX
or NET to controlling application software. A port configured as a remote port can be used to
output the notification message. The message contains the meteo measurements obtained
by the receiver from the meteo device.
The settings on this screen define the input port and parameters for incoming meteo meas-
urements.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces.... Highlight Meteo. EDIT (F3).
CONFIGURE The content of the screen is identical with for CONFIGURE Tilt Measurement. Refer to
Meteo Measurement "20.8 Tilt" for an explanation.
20.10 Internet
Description The Internet interface

allows accessing the Internet using a GPS1200 receiver plus normally a GPRS device.
can be used together with the Real-Time interface to receive real-time data from a
NTRIPCaster via Internet communication.
Refer to "32.1 Overview" for information about NTRIP.
The settings on this screen define the port and parameters required for accessing the
Internet.
) This screen is not available for the GRX1200 Pro where Ethernet is used for the Internet
connection. Refer to "22.8 Internet / Ethernet" for configuring the Ethernet interface.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces.... Highlight Internet. EDIT (F3).

CONFIGURE
Internet Interface
CONT (F1)
DEVCE (F5)
<Internet:> Yes or No Activates the Internet interface.
<IP Address:> In order to get access to the Internet, an IP address is
required. This IP address identifies the receiver in the
Internet.
Dynamic The IP address to get access to the Internet is
provided by the network provider dynamically. Each
time a GPS1200 receiver wants to access the
Internet via the device a new IP address is assigned
to the receiver. When using GPRS to connect to the
Internet then the network provider always dynami-
cally assigns the IP address.
Static The IP address to get access to the Internet is
provided by the network provider permanently. Each
time GPS1200 wants to access the Internet via the
device the same IP address identifies the receiver.
This is important if GPS1200 is used as a TCP/IP
server. This option should only be selected if a static
IP address is available for the receiver.
<Set IP Adr:> User input Available for <IP Address: Static>. To set the IP
address.
<User ID:> User input Some providers ask for a user ID to allow connecting
to the Internet via GPRS. Contact your provider if a
user ID needs to be used.
<(cont):> User input Allows the <User ID:> string to continue onto a new
line.
<Password:> User input Some providers ask for a password to allow
connecting to the Internet via GPRS. Contact your
provider if a password is required.

Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Internet Interface was
accessed.
20.11 PPS Output
)
Description
The PPS output is an optional interface requiring a special port.
PPS stands for Pulse Per Second. It is a pulse that is output at a specified interval time. This
can be used to activate another device. Additionally, a notification message can be output
through ports P1, P2, P3 or RX when a PPS output occurs.
For example, in aerial photography, an aerial camera can be configured to take a photo each
time it receives a pulse from the receiver.
The settings on this screen define the output port and parameters for the PPS option. This
screen is available if the receiver is fitted with a PPS output port.
Technical specifica- Refer to the GPS1200 User Manual for technical specifications of the port and the required
tions cable.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces.... Highlight PPS Output. EDIT (F3).

CONFIGURE
PPS Output
CONT (F1)
NPORT (F4)
Available unless <Notify Msg: None>. To
configure the port and the device through
mitted. Refer to "20.15 Remote".
<Output PPS:> Yes or No Activates the output of PPS.
<PPS Rate:> From 0.05s to The rate at which pulses will be output.
20.0s
<Polarity:> Negative Edge or Measure the time from the negative edge or the posi-
Positive Edge tive edge of the pulse.
<Limit Error:> The output of PPS can be restricted by the accuracy
of time. If the time accuracy is degraded below a
defined value, for example, due to a lack of satellites,
no PPS output is generated.
Yes or No Activates the observation of the time accuracy limit
within which pulses shall be generated.
<Limit:> User input Available for <Limit Error: Yes>. The time accuracy
limit in nanoseconds.
<Notify Msg:> None, Binary or Activates the output of a notification message with
ASCII each PPS output. Refer to "Appendix I PPS Output
Notify Message Format" for information on the
message format.
Next step
for a notification
message
are not to be configured CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to the screen from where
CONFIGURE PPS Output was accessed.
are to be configured NPORT (F4). Refer to "20.15 Remote".

20.12 Event Input
)
Description
The event input is an optional interface requiring a special port.
The event input interface allows pulses which are sent from devices connected to the
receiver to be recorded. These records can later be superimposed on the processed kine-
matic data and the positions where the events took place can be interpolated in LGO. Events
logged during real-time operations can also be exported to an ASCII file using an appropriate
format file. Additionally, a notification message can be output through ports P1, P2, P3, RX
or NET providing information about when the event occurred. A port configured as a remote
port can be used to output the notification message.
For example, in aerial photography, an aerial camera can be connected via the event input
port. When the shutter opens, the position at which the event occurred is recorded.
The settings on this screen define the input port and parameters for the event input option.
This screen is available if the instrument is fitted with a event input port.
Technical specifica- Refer to the GPS1200 User Manual for technical specifications of the event input port and
tions the required cable.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces.... Highlight Event Input. EDIT (F3).
CONFIGURE This screen consists of two identical pages, one for each event input port. The explanations
Event Input given are valid for both pages.
CONT (F1)
NPORT (F4)
To configure the port and the device through
mitted. Refer to "20.15 Remote".
<Info to Log:> Choicelist Activates the detection and logging of events being
sent to the event ports.
<Polarity:> Negative Edge or The polarity according to the device in use.
Positive Edge
<Bias Intern:> User or Factory Accepts personal or default settings as calibration
values for the particular receiver.
<Intern Bias:> User input Available for <Bias Intern: User>. Sets the particular
calibration value in ns for the receiver.
<Extern Bias:> User input Sets a calibration value in ns according to the
external event device and cable being used.


<Time Guard:> User input If two or more events take place during the time
defined in s, the first event will be recorded. Enter 0 to
accept all events. The shortest recording time is
0.05 s.
<Notify Msg:> None, Binary or Activates the output of a notification message with
ASCII each event input. Refer to "Appendix G Event Input
Notify Message Format" for information on the
message format.
<Description:> User input Records up to four lines of data with the event record.
This is particularly useful if two event input ports are
used at the same time in order to differentiate
between the two event records.
Next step
for a notification
message
ured CONFIGURE Event Input was accessed.
are to be configured NPORT (F4). Refer to "20.15 Remote".
20.13 External Oscillator
)
Description
The external oscillator option is available on the GRX1200 Pro.
An external oscillator can be used to provide a better quality time signal to the GRX1200 Pro
than the internal clock, for example, through the use of a rubidium or caesium oscillator. The
same external oscillator can also be used with a number of receivers so that each GRX1200
Pro is guaranteed to be tracking satellites using the same time signal. An external oscillator
is attached to the GRX1200 Pro via the port OSC.
The settings on this screen define the parameters for incoming external oscillator signals.
Technical specifica- Refer to the GPS1200 User Manual for technical specifications of the external oscillator port
tions and the required cable.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces.... Highlight Ext Osc EDIT (F3).
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen CONFIGURE External Oscillator. Refer
OR

CONFIGURE
External Oscillator
CONT (F1)
<Use Device:> The type of external oscillator to use.
No An external oscillator is not been used. All other fields
become unavailable.
TCXO To use a temperature compensated crystal oscillator.
OCXO To use an oven controlled crystal oscillator.
Rubidium To use a rubidium based external oscillator.
Caesium To use a caesium based external oscillator.
User Allows noise elements to be defined for a customised
external oscillator. The noise elements are used to
describe the frequency noise characteristics of the
oscillator. The noise elements are a value with a
number part and an exponential part, for example,
1.0167e-23.
<Frequency:> 5 MHz or 10 MHz The frequency of the external oscillator.
<h0:> User input Available for <Use Device: User>. The number part
of the process noise element h0. Range:
From 1.0e-31 to 1.0e-18.
<Exponential User input Available for <Use Device: User>. The exponential
e:> part of the process noise elements h0, h1 and h2.
From 1.0e-31 to 1.0e-18.
From 1.0e-31 to 1.0e-18.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Remote Interfaces was
accessed.

20.14 ASCII Remote
Description The ASCII remote interface is used to

send a command from a PC through the GX1200 to a third party device, e.g. a barometer.
receive a message from a third party device through the GX1200 at a PC.
For requesting ASCII Data a Outside World Interface or Leica Binary 2 command is used.
Documentation for OWI and LB2 is available on request from the Leica Geosystems repre-
sentative.
The settings on this screen define the port and parameters for connecting a PC.
)

The PC must be connected to a port assigned to the remote interface.
The third party device must be connected to the port assigned to the ASCII remote inter-
face.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces.... Highlight ASCII Remote. EDIT (F3).
CONFIGURE
ASCII Remote
CONT (F1)
DEVCE (F5)
<Use Device:> Yes or No Activates the interface.
SmartAntenna.
<Device:> Output The device currently assigned to the selected port
within the active configuration set.


<End of Msg:> None, CR, LF or The character to be used to identify the end of the
CR/LF incoming ASCII message.
<Data Rate:> From 0.1s to 60.0s Available for <End of Msg: None>. The receiver
takes the ASCII data that it received from the third
party device over the defined time span and passes
them on to the PC.
<Notify Msg:> None, ASCII or Activates the output of a notification message. The
Binary format is OWI or LB2 v2. Documentation for OWI and
LB2 is available on request from the Leica Geosys-
tems representative.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE ASCII Remote was accessed.
20.15 Remote
Description The remote interface allows:

the receiver to be controlled using a device other than the RX1200, e.g. a PC. Outside
World Interface or Leica Binary 2 commands can be used to control the receiver through
the remote port. Documentation for OWI and LB2 is available on request from the Leica
Geosystems representative.
a message log to be requested from a remote client via an OWI message. A message log
contains a history of warning messages and message lines. It is not possible to view a
message log in the RX1200.
the downloading of data directly from the receivers memory device to LGO through a
serial port on the PC. The RX1200 does not need to be removed from the receiver.
The settings on this screen define the port and the device to be used for the remote control.
) A port configured as a remote port can be used to output event input, meteo or tilt notification
messages.
) Except for the GRX1200 Series the OWI commands listed below are protected by a licence
key. Refer to "28 Tools...\Licence Keys" for information on how to type in the licence key. The
corresponding LB2 commands are also protected. If these OWI commands have been acti-
vated by a licence key is indicated in STATUS System Information, Instrument page.
AHT DPM LLK POS POQ
ANT SCC LLQ RTK USR
CNF GGA GGK TPV
DCF GLL GGQ POB
DCT GNS NXT POE

Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces.... Highlight Remote. EDIT (F3).
CONFIGURE
Remote Interfaces
CONT (F1)
CTRL (F4)
To configure additional parameters. Refer to
"22 Config...\Interfaces... - Controlling
Devices".
DEVCE (F5)
USE (F6)
Available unless the interface of the highlighted
port is NMEA Out or Remote. To use the high-
lighted interface by Remote.
Column Description
Port The physical port on the instrument which will be used for the interface
functionality.
Interface The interface configured for the ports. Any port which is not configured is
automatically assigned the remote interface.
Column Description
Device The hardware connected to the chosen port.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Remote Interfaces was
accessed.

Configuration of Devices GPS1200 21-1
21 Configuration of Devices

21.1 Devices 21-2
21.2 Accessing CONFIGURE Devices / CONFIGURE GPRS Internet Devices 21-17
21.3 Creating a New Device 21-20
21.4 Editing a Device 21-24
21.1 Devices

21.1.2 Digital Cellular Phones 21-4
21.1.3 Modems 21-7
21.1.4 Radios 21-9
21.1.5 RS232 21-11
21.1.6 Smartgate 21-12
21.1.7 Hidden Point Measurement Devices 21-13
21.1.8 GPRS / Internet Devices 21-15

21.1.1 Overview
Description A device is the hardware which is connected to a chosen port of GPS1200. Devices are used
to transmit and receive real-time data and to communicate with the receiver, for example to
download raw observations from a remote location.
Before using any device it is necessary to configure the interface with which it will be used.
Refer to "20.2 Accessing Configuration Interfaces" for information on how to configure the
interfaces.
Some devices may be used with different interfaces for different applications. For example,
a radio can be used to receive real-time reference data but a second radio could also be used
to simultaneously output NMEA messages.
Next step
IF more information THEN
is required on
digital cellular phones Refer to "21.1.2 Digital Cellular Phones".
modems Refer to "21.1.3 Modems".
radios Refer to "21.1.4 Radios".
RS232 Refer to "21.1.5 RS232".
SAPOS Refer to "21.1.6 Smartgate".
hidden point meas- Refer to "21.1.7 Hidden Point Measurement Devices".
urement devices
GPRS / Internet Refer to "21.1.8 GPRS / Internet Devices".
devices
21.1.2 Digital Cellular Phones
Description Digital cellular phones comprise of the technologies CDMA and GSM with its subgroup
GPRS.
Typical uses To transmit real-time data. To download raw observations from a remote loca-
tion.
To receive real-time data. To steer a receiver.
Example use
Step Description
1. Reference and rover must both be equipped with a digital cellular phone.
2. Ensure that the digital cellular phone at the reference is on.
3. The rover digital cellular phone contacts the selected reference of which the phone
number was pre-defined. Refer to "21.3 Creating a New Device".
4. One rover can dial in to the reference digital cellular phone at a time.
5. As soon as the reference digital cellular phone is contacted, real-time data is sent
to the rover digital cellular phone that has called.
) Several digital cellular phone numbers can be pre-defined on the rover. Dialing a
different number dials that particular reference station.
Requirements for using Always required: AT command language must be supported by the digital cellular
digital cellular phones phone. Refer to "21.3 Creating a New Device".
Working area must be covered by a digital cellular phone
network.

The network operator must support data transmission.
Sometimes required: SIM card. This is the same SIM card as normally used in mobile
phones. The SIM card must be enabled to transmit data. Contact
the service provider to enable the SIM card.
Personal Identification Number
Registration
Supported digital Default digital cellular phones fitting into a clip-on-housing

cellular phones MultiTech MTMMC-C Siemens MC45
Default digital cellular phones not fitting into a clip-on-housing

These digital cellular phones must be connected with a cable. Refer to "Appendix E Cables"
for information on cables.
Siemens M20 Siemens TC35
Siemens S25/S35i Wavecom M1200 Series
User defined digital cellular phones

Other digital cellular phones than those listed above can be used. Their settings must be
defined by creating a new digital cellular phone configuration. Refer to "21.3 Creating a New
Device". These digital cellular phones must be connected with a cable. Refer to "Appendix
E Cables" for information on cables. Please contact the local selling unit or dealer for further
information.
Advantages Unlimited range of the data link between reference and rover.
Free of jamming from other users.
Cheaper in price in the initial costs of buying.
Disadvantages Fees are charged for the time that the digital cellular phone network is being used.
) Reference and rover can both be equipped with a digital cellular phone and a radio. On the
reference they operate simultaneously. On the rover, use the radio when within radio range
of the reference and the digital cellular phone when radio reception is not possible.

21.1.3 Modems
Typical uses To transmit NMEA messages. To download raw observations from a remote loca-
tion.
To transmit real-time data
Example of use
Step Description
1. The reference is equipped with a modem.
2. The rover is equipped with a digital cellular phone.
3. Ensure that the modem is switched on.
4. The rover digital cellular phone contacts the selected reference of which the phone
number was pre-defined. Refer to "21.3 Creating a New Device".
5. One rover can dial in to the reference modem at a time.
6. As soon as the reference modem is contacted, it sends its data to the rover digital
cellular phone that has called.
) Several modem numbers can be pre-defined on the rover. Dialing a different

number changes the reference station.
Requirements for using AT command language must be supported by the modem. Refer to "21.3 Creating a New
modem Device".
Supported modems Default modems

AirLink CDMA U.S. Robotics 56K
Modems must be connected with a cable. Refer to "Appendix E Cables" for information on
cables.
User defined modems

Other modems than those listed above can be used. Their settings must be defined by
creating a new modem configuration. Refer to "21.3 Creating a New Device".

21.1.4 Radios
Typical uses To transmit real-time data. To download raw observations from a remote loca-
tion.
To receive real-time data. To steer a receiver.
Example of use
Step Description
1. Reference and rover must both be equipped with radios using the same frequency
range and the same data format.
2. The reference radio continuously sends out real-time data until the receiver is
turned off, the configuration is changed or the radio is detached.
3. The rover radio continuously receives real-time data until the receiver is turned off,
the configuration is changed or the radio is detached.
4. Several rovers can receive data from the same reference at the same time.
) Several reference radios can transmit real-time data simultaneously using different
radio channels. Changing to a different radio channel on the rover changes the
reference from which real-time data is received.
Supported radios Default radios fitting into a clip-on-housing

Pacific Crest PDL, receive Satelline 3AS, transceive
Default radios not fitting into a clip-on-housing
These radios must be connected with a cable. Refer to "Appendix E Cables" for information
on cables.
AT-RXM500, Akasaka Tech Satelline 2ASx
Pacific Crest RFM96W Satelline 2ASxE
User defined radios

Other radios than those listed above can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating
a new radio configuration. Refer to "21.3 Creating a New Device". These radios must be
connected with a cable. Refer to "Appendix E Cables" for information on cables.
) Reference and rover can both be equipped with a radio and a digital cellular phone. On the
reference they operate simultaneously. On the rover, use the radio when within radio range
of the reference and the digital cellular phone when radio reception is not possible.

21.1.5 RS232
Typical uses To exchange information with a device via an RS232 interface, for example sending NMEA
messages to a computer. Port P1, P2, P3 and the RX port of the receiver are standard
RS232 interfaces. The device is always connected with a cable. Refer to "Appendix E
Cables" for information on cables.
Example of use
Step Description
1. A device with an RS232 interface must be connected to the receiver.
2. Information can be continuously or sporadically exchanged between the receiver
and the device. For example NMEA messages are continuously send out from the
receiver. Commands to steer the receiver are send sporadically from a device.
3. A connection is maintained until the receiver is turned off, the configuration is
changed or the device is detached.
Standard RS232 Standard RS232 is supported by default. The settings are:

Baud rate: 115200 Stop bits: 1
Parity: None Flow control: None
Data bits: 8
21.1.6 Smartgate
Description Smartgate is a device with an integrated digital cellular phone, a radio and the functionality
of a SAPOS-Box, available in a Leica radio housing. The SAtellite POSitioning service is a
reference station service available in Germany. Refer to www.navsys.de for more informa-
tion about the Smartgate device.
Example of use
Step Description
1. The rover is equipped with a Smartgate device.
2. The Smartgate radio continuously receives real-time data from the SAPOS service
until the radio link is broken.
3. The Smartgate digital cellular phone then automatically contacts the SAPOS
service and real-time data link is resumed via the digital cellular phone network.
4. Once radio contact is possible again, the digital cellular phone connection is ended
and the radio real-time data link is resumed.
User profiles There is one default user profile initially available with the Smartgate box. This user profile
can be edited using the manufacturers software provided with the Smartgate box. New user
profiles can also be created using the software. User profiles contain information about the
kind of communication, the service employed, the account used, a list of reference stations
and an acceptable minimum distance. Refer to the manufacturers specifications for more
information about user profiles.

21.1.7 Hidden Point Measurement Devices
Typical uses To measure

distances, using laser technology angles azimuths
to points which are not directly accessible by means of GPS, for example house corners or
trees. The measurements taken with hidden point measurement devices are directly trans-
ferred if the device is connected to the receiver. If the device is not connected, measurement
can be typed in manually to calculate the coordinates of a hidden point.
Example of use
Step Description
1. A receiver must be in <R-Time Mode: None> or <R-Time Mode: Rover>.
2. A hidden point measurement device is connected to the receiver via cable.
3. Hidden point measurements are configured and activated.
4. Distances, angles and azimuths are measured to the hidden point with the hidden
point measurement device.
5. The measurements are directly transferred to the receiver and displayed in the
appropriate fields.
) Hidden point measurement devices can be connected in addition to any of the

other devices. They can be active at the same time. Changing of ports is not
required.
Supported hidden point Default hidden point measurement devices
measurement devices All devices support reflectorless distance measurements using laser technology.
Criterion 400 Leica DistoTM pro4 a
Criterion Compatible Leica DistoTM classic5
Laser Ace 300 Leica Laser Locator
Leica Disto memo Leica Laser Locator Plus
Leica Disto pro Leica Vector
Leica DistoTM pro4
User defined hidden point measurement devices

Other hidden point measurement devices than those listed above can be used. Their settings
must be defined by creating a new hidden point measurement device. Refer to "21.3
Creating a New Device".
) In order to connect a device to the receiver use the cable delivered with the device. Refer to
"Appendix E Cables" for information on cables.

21.1.8 GPRS / Internet Devices
Description GPRS is a telecommunication standard for transmitting data packages using the Internet
Protocol.
When using GPRS technology charges are made based on the amount of transferred data
and not as for normal digital cellular phones where charges are made for the connection
time.
Typical uses To access the Internet with a GPS1200 receiver in order to receive real-time data from the
Internet.
Example use
Step Description
) 1.
This is an example use for receiving data from the Internet.
Rover must be equipped with a GPRS / Internet device.
2. The GPRS / Internet device accesses the Internet where the rover connects for
example to NTRIP.
3. The rover receives real-time corrections from this other computer in the Internet.
Requirements for using AT command language must be supported by the digital cellular phone. Refer to "21.3
GPRS / Internet devices Creating a New Device".
Access Point Name of a server from the network provider. The APN can be thought of as
the home page of a provider supporting GPRS data transfer.
SIM card. This is the same SIM card as normally used in mobile phones. The SIM card
must be enabled to transmit data. Contact the service provider to enable the SIM card.
Personal Identification Number
Registration
Supported GPRS / Default GPRS / Internet devices fitting into a clip-on-housing

Internet devices Siemens MC45
User defined GPRS / Internet devices

Other GPRS capable devices than those listed above can be used as long as they use AT
commands. Their settings must be defined by creating a new GPRS / Internet device config-
uration. Refer to "21.3 Creating a New Device". These GPRS / Internet devices must be
connected with a cable. Refer to "Appendix E Cables" for information on cables. Please
contact the local selling unit or dealer for further information.
Advantages Unlimited range of the data link between reference and rover.
Free of jamming from other users.
Fees are charged for the amount of data being transferred.

21.2 Accessing CONFIGURE Devices / CONFIGURE GPRS Internet Devices
Description Allows devices to be created, edited, selected and deleted. Refer to "22 Config...\Interfaces...
- Controlling Devices" for more information about configuring devices.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces...
2. Highlight the appropriate interface based on the type of device that needs to be
configured. For example, highlight Real-Time when a radio is to be configured.
3. EDIT (F3) to access CONFIGURE XX.
4. DEVCE (F5) to access CONFIGURE Devices / CONFIGURE GPRS Internet
Devices. Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE Devices; CONFIGURE GPRS
Internet Devices".
CONFIGURE This screen may consist of several pages and provides different devices for selection
Devices; depending on which interface the screen was accessed from. The functionality described
CONFIGURE GPRS below is always the same.
Internet Devices
CONT (F1)
To select the highlighted device and return to
accessed.
NEW (F2)
To create a new device. Refer to "21.3
Creating a New Device".
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted device. Refer to "21.4
Editing a Device".
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted device.
MORE (F5)
To display information about the type of device
and the creator of the device.
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT ALL (F4) or SHIFT FILT (F4)
Available for Internet and bluetooth devices.
To list all devices or to hide devices which are
not Internet or bluetooth capable.
SHIFT DEFLT (F5)
To recall previously deleted default devices
and to reset default devices to the default
settings.

Column Description
Name Names of available devices.
Type Type of device defined when creating the device.
Creator The creator of the device. The creator can either be Default if the device
is a default, or User if the device has been created.
) If a Default device is edited by using EDIT (F3) then its creator is

still displayed as Default.
Next step
IF the desired THEN
device is
present in the list highlight the desired device.
where CONFIGURE Devices / CONFIGURE GPRS Internet
Devices was accessed.
is not present in the NEW (F2). Refer to "21.3 Creating a New Device".
list
is present in the list highlight the desired device.
but needs to be edited EDIT (F3). Refer to "21.4 Editing a Device".
21.3 Creating a New Device
Description Allows a new device to be configured.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "21.2 Accessing CONFIGURE Devices / CONFIGURE GPRS Internet
Devices" to access CONFIGURE Devices / CONFIGURE GPRS Internet
Devices.
2. Highlight a device of the same type as the device to be created, from the list.
3. NEW (F2) to access CONFIGURE New Device.
CONFIGURE
New Device
STORE (F1)
To store the new device and to return to the
ATCMD (F4)
Available for digital cellular phones and
modems. To configure communication
commands. Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE
GSM/Modem AT Command Lines".

<Name:> User input Name of new device.
<Type:> Output Same device type as was highlighted when NEW (F2)
was used.
<GPRS/ Yes or No Available for digital cellular phones and modems.
Internet:> Defines the device as an Internet capable device and
adds it to the list in CONFIGURE GPRS Internet
Devices.
<Baud Rate:> From 2400 to Frequency of data transfer from receiver to device in
115200 bits per second.
<Parity:> None, Even or Error checksum at the end of a block of digital data.
Odd
<Terminator:> Available if required by the interface.
CR/LF The terminator is a carriage return followed by a line
feed.
CR Not available for RS232 device. The terminator is a
carriage return.
<Data Bits:> 6, 7 or 8 Number of bits in a block of digital data.
<Stop Bits:> 1 or 2 Number of bits at the end of a block of digital data.
<Flow None or RTS/CTS Activates hardware handshake.
Control:> When the receiver/device is ready for data, it asserts
the Request To Send line indicating it is ready to
receive data. This is read by the sender at the Clear
To Send input, indicating it is clear to send the data.
Next step
IF the device is a THEN
radio or device other STORE (F1) to close the screen and to return to the screen from
than digital cellular where CONFIGURE Device was accessed.
phone or modem
digital cellular phone ATCMD (F4). Refer to paragraph "CONFIGURE GSM/Modem AT
or modem Command Lines".
CONFIGURE For <GPRS/Internet: Yes> in CONFIGURE New Device, this screen consists of two pages:
GSM/Modem AT GSM/CSD page: The AT commands configure the devices for normal digital cellular
Command Lines phone/modem mode.
GPRS/Internet page The AT commands configure the devices for GPRS/Internet mode.
Please refer to the manual of the GPRS / Internet device for informa-
tion about which AT commands need to be entered or contact the
supplier.
The following table lists the fields of both pages.

<Init 1:> User input Initilisation sequence to initilise digital cellular
phone/modem.
<(cont):> User input Allows the <Init X:> or the <Connect:> string to
continue onto a new line.
<Init 2:> User input Initilisation sequence to initilise digital cellular
phone/modem.
<Dial:> User input Dialing string used to dial the phone number of the
real-time reference.
<Hangup:> User input Hangup sequence used to end the network connec-
tion.
<Escape:> User input Escape sequence used to switch to the command
mode before using the hangup sequence.
<Connect:> User input Dialing string used to dial into the Internet.
When the device is used, between <Init 1:> and <Init 2:>, a check for the PIN is performed.
Refer to "Appendix J AT Commands" for more information about AT commands.
Next step
STORE (F1) returns to CONFIGURE Devices / CONFIGURE GPRS Internet Devices.
21.4 Editing a Device
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "21.2 Accessing CONFIGURE Devices / CONFIGURE GPRS Internet
Devices" to access CONFIGURE Devices / CONFIGURE GPRS Internet Device.
2. Highlight the device to be edited from the list.
3. EDIT (F3) to access CONFIGURE Edit Device.
CONFIGURE The availability of options may change depending on the selected device. Most fields are
Edit Device identical with the creation of a new device. Refer to "21.3 Creating a New Device" for infor-
mation on the fields.
Next step
STORE (F1) to close the screen and to return to the screen from where CONFIGURE Edit
Device was accessed.

Config...\Interfaces... - Controlling Devices GPS1200 22-1
22 Config...\Interfaces... - Controlling Devices

22.1 Digital Cellular Phones 22-2
22.2 Modems 22-11
22.3 Radios 22-13
22.4 RS232 22-16
22.5 Smartgate Boxes 22-18
22.6 Hidden Point Measurement Devices 22-20
22.7 GPRS / Internet Devices 22-22
22.8 Internet / Ethernet 22-24
22.9 Scanning Reference Stations 22-27
22.10 Configuring the Stations to Dial 22-29
22.1 Digital Cellular Phones

22.1.2 Configuring a GSM Connection 22-5
22.1.3 Configuring a CDMA Connection 22-8

22.1.1 Overview
Description For digital cellular phones, information such as

the reference stations that can be contacted
the phone numbers of the reference stations and
the type of protocol to be used
can be defined.
Changing the reference station to be dialled is of interest in two cases.

Case 1: Two real-time reference stations, each equipped with a digital cellular phone,
are set up at two locations belonging to different network providers.
When leaving the area of one reference, the station can be changed and the
other reference can be called.
Case 2: Set up as in case 1.
Two separate fixes from each reference for each point can be obtained,
providing redundancy for future least squares adjustment operations.
Technologies CDMA Code Division Multiple Access is a high speed data transmission for very
effective and flexible use of available ressources such as band width. Users
of a cellular phone network occupy the same frequency band. The signal is
especially coded for each user.
GSM Global System for Mobile Communications is a more efficient version of
CDMA technology that uses smaller time slots but faster data transfer rates.
It is the worlds most commonly used digital network.
Next step
IF using a digital THEN
cellular phone of
technology
GSM Refer to "22.1.2 Configuring a GSM Connection".
CDMA Refer to "22.1.3 Configuring a CDMA Connection".

22.1.2 Configuring a GSM Connection
Configure GSM connec- The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
tion step-by-step information on screens.
chapter
1. Refer to "20.2 Accessing Configuration Interfaces" to access
CONFIGURE Interfaces.
2. In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight an interface which has a digital 21
cellular phone of GSM technology attached.
3. CTRL (F4) to access CONFIGURE GSM Connection.
4. CONFIGURE GSM Connection
<GSM Type:> The type of digital cellular phone highlighted when
CONFIGURE GSM Connection was accessed.
<Bluetooth:> GPS1200 receivers detect automatically if the
attached devices is bluetooth capable. Some GSMs ask for the iden-
tification number of the Bluetooth. The identification number of
Leicas Bluetooth is 0000.
<ID Address:> Available for <Bluetooth: Yes>. The ID address of
the Bluetooth device to be used. Refer to the devices user manual
for information about the ID address.
<Station:> The digital cellular phone reference station to be dialled. 22.10
Opening the choicelist accesses CONFIGURE Stations to Dial
where new reference stations can be created and existing reference
stations can be selected or edited.
chapter
<Number:> The number of the digital cellular phone at the selected
<Station:> as configured in CONFIGURE Stations to Dial.
<Protocol:> The configured protocol of the digital cellular phone at
the selected <Station:> as configured in CONFIGURE Stations to
Dial.
<Auto CONEC:> Allows for automatic connection between the rover 35.3.2,
and the reference when a point is occupied during a survey. 35.3.3
<Net Data Rate:> The network baud rate. Select Autobauding for
an automatic search of the network baud rate. For digital cellular
phones of GSM technology that do not support autobauding choose
the baud rate from the choicelist.
<Connection:> Define if the digital cellular phone uses Radio Link
Protocol. Select Non-Transparent for digital cellular phones that use
RLP. For digital cellular phones that do not use RLP select Trans-
parent. Check with the network provider if the digital cellular phone
uses RLP.
Select the digital cellular phone reference station to be dialled.
) NEAR (F2) finds the nearest reference station with a digital cellular 22.10
phone of GSM technology. Available when reference stations to dial
are already created in CONFIGURE Stations to Dial. Coordinates of
these stations must be known.


chapter
5. CODES (F3) accesses CONFIGURE GSM Codes to enter the
Personal Identification Number of the SIM card. If the PIN is locked
for any reason, for example the wrong PIN was entered, input the
Personal UnblocKing code for access to the PIN.
) SRCH (F4) available for <Bluetooth: Yes>, to search for all available
Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of
available devices is provided.
) SHIFT CMND (F4) allows AT commands to be sent to the digital

cellular phone.
Appendix J
6. CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE Interfaces.

22.1.3 Configuring a CDMA Connection
Configure CDMA The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
connection step-by- information on screens.
step
chapter
cellular phone of CDMA technology attached.
3. CTRL (F4) to access CONFIGURE CDMA Connection.
4. CONFIGURE CDMA Connection
<CDMA Type:> The type of digital cellular phone highlighted when
CONFIGURE CDMA Connection was accessed.
<Station:> The digital cellular phone reference station to be dialled. 22.10
Accesses CONFIGURE Stations to Dial where new reference
stations can be created and existing reference stations can be
selected or edited.
<Number:> The number of the digital cellular phone at the selected
<Station:> as configured in CONFIGURE Stations to Dial.
<Auto CONEC:> Allows for automatic connection between the rover 35.3.2,
and the reference when a point is occupied during a survey. 35.3.3
Select the digital cellular phone reference station to be dialled.


chapter
) NEAR (F2) finds the nearest reference station with a digital cellular 22.10
phone of CDMA technology. Available when reference stations to dial
are already created in CONFIGURE Stations to Dial. Coordinates of
these stations must be known.
5. CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE CDMA Connection.
) SHIFT CMND (F4) allows AT commands to be sent to the digital

cellular phone.
Appendix J
) SHIFT INFO (F2) provides information about the CDMA device being
used, such as the manufacturer, the model and the electronic serial
number.
For registration purposes, send the electronic serial number to the
network provider in order to receive the service programming code
and the mobile directory number. These numbers must be typed in in
CONFIGURE CDMA Registration.
6. SHIFT REG (F3) to access CONFIGURE CDMA Registration.
7. CONFIGURE CDMA Registration
The settings allow the CDMA digital cellular phone to be registered
over the air.
<Prog Code:> Type in the service program code provided by the
network provider.
<My Phone No:> Type in the mobile directory number provided by
the network provider.
chapter
) 8.
CLEAR (F5) deletes the input of the highlighted field.
CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE Interfaces.

22.2 Modems
Description For modems, information such as

the reference stations that can contacted and
the phone numbers of the reference stations
can be controlled.
Changing the reference station to be dialled is of interest in two cases.

Case 1: Two real-time reference stations, each equipped with a digital cellular phone,
are set up at two locations belonging to different network providers.
When leaving the area of one reference, the station can be changed and the
other reference can be called.
Two separate fixes from each reference for each point can be obtained,
providing redundancy for future least squares adjustment operations.
Configure modem The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
step
chapter
2. In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight an interface which has a modem 21
attached.
3. CTRL (F4) to access CONFIGURE Modem Connection.
chapter
4. CONFIGURE Modem Connection
<Modem Type:> The type of modem highlighted when CONFIGURE
Modem Connection was accessed.
<Station:> The modem reference station to be dialled. Accesses 22.10
CONFIGURE Stations to Dial where new reference stations can be
created and existing reference stations can be selected or edited.
<Number:> The number of the modem at the selected <Station:> as
configured in CONFIGURE Stations to Dial.
Select the modem reference station to be dialled.
) NEAR (F2) finds the nearest reference station with a modem. Avail- 22.10
able when reference stations to dial are already created in
CONFIGURE Stations to Dial. Coordinates of these stations must
be known.

22.3 Radios
Description For radios the channels on which the radio broadcasts can be changed. Changing channels
changes the frequency at which the radio operates. The following radios support channel
changing:
AT-RXM500 Satelline 2Asx
Pacific Crest PDL Satelline 2AsxE
Pacific Crest RFM96W Satelline 3AS
Changing radio channels is of interest in three cases.

Case 1: Two real-time reference stations are set up at two locations, each broad-
casting on a different channel.
If the signal from one reference station is jammed, the channel can be
changed and the other reference can be used.
Two separate fixes for each point can be obtained, providing redundancy for
future least squares adjustment operations.
Case 3: One real-time reference and one real-time rover are being used.
If the signal is blocked due to radio interference, the channel at the reference
and the rover can be changed in order to work on a different frequency.
Requirements for Pacific Crest radios: Channel changing must be activated by a Pacific Crest dealer.
channel changing A special licence might be required.
Satelline radios: The radio must be in programming mode. This can be set by a
Satelline dealer.
) Channel changing may contravene radio broadcasting regulations in certain countries.
Before operating with radios, check the regulations in force in the working area.
) The number of channels available and the frequency spacing between channels depends on
the radio used.
) If channel changing is to be used, when configuring the reference real-time interface, set
<Ref Stn ID:> in CONFIGURE Additional Reference Options, General page to a different
ID for each reference site. By doing so, the rover can recognise if the incoming real-time data
after channel changing is being received from a different reference station or if the original
reference station is using a new frequency. In the first case, the ambiguities are recomputed.
Configure radio The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
channel step-by-step information on screens.
chapter
2. In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight an interface which has a radio 21
attached.
3. CTRL (F4) to access CONFIGURE Radio Channel.
4. CONFIGURE Radio Channel
<Radio Type:> The type of radio highlighted when CONFIGURE
Radio Channel was accessed.


chapter
<Channel:> The radio channel. The channel used must be within
minimum and maximum allowed input values. The minimum and
maximum allowed input values for a radio depend on the number of
channels supported by the radio and the spacing between the chan-
nels.
<Actual Freq:> Available for Satelline 3AS radios. Displays the
actual frequency of the radio.
Type in the radio channel.
) SCAN (F5) provides information such as the station ID, latency and 22.9
the data format of incoming signals from reference stations broad-
casting on the same radio channel. This information can be used to
select appropriate reference stations to dial.
5. CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE Interfaces screen.
22.4 RS232
Description RS232 is a standard serial communication method that is able to transfer data without the
need for predefined time slots. RS232 can be used, with a Bluetooth housing, to provide a
wireless connection to another Bluetooth enabled device, for example, a computer.
Configure RS232 The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
step
chapter
2. In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight an interface which has an 21
RS232 device attached.
3. CTRL (F4) to access CONFIGURE RS232 Connection.
4. CONFIGURE RS232 Connection
<Type:> The type of device highlighted when CONFIGURE RS232
Connection was accessed.
attached devices is bluetooth capable. Some devices ask for the
identification number of the Bluetooth. The identification number of


chapter
) SCAN (F5) provides information such as the station ID, latency and 22.9
the data format of incoming signals from reference stations. This
information can be used to select appropriate reference stations to
dial.
22.5 Smartgate Boxes
Description Smartgate boxes contain GSM and radio devices with the integrated functionality of a
SAPOS box. For Smartgate boxes, one channel corresponds to one out off several particular
frequencies configured on the radio. Changing channels changes the frequency at which the
radio operates.
Changing channels on a Smartgate box is of interest in three cases:

Case 1: Two real-time reference stations are set up at two locations, each broad-
casting on a different channel.
If the signal from one reference station is jammed, the channel can be
changed and the other reference can be used.
Two separate fixes for each point can be obtained, providing redundancy for
future least squares adjustment operations.
Case 3: One real-time reference and one real-time rover are being used.
If the signal is blocked due to radio interference, the channel at the reference
and the rover can be changed in order to work on a slightly different
frequency.
Configure Smartgate The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
step
chapter


chapter
2. In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight an interface which has a Smart- 21
gate box attached.
3. CTRL (F4) to access CONFIGURE Smartgate Connection.
4. CONFIGURE Smartgate Connection
<Profile:> List of user profiles that can be used.
<Profile No.:> Number of the profile selected in <Profile:>.
<Ref Select:> The way in which the reference station is selected.
<Ref Select: Profile> selects a reference station according to a
given profile. <Ref Select: Frequency> to input a frequency different
to that specified by the user profile. <Ref Select: Phone No> to input
a phone number different to that specified by the user profile. <Ref
Select: Station No> to input a station number different to that spec-
ified by the user profile.
<XX:> Available for <Ref Select: Frequency>, <Ref Select: Phone
No> and <Ref Select: Station No> to input the values different to
those present in the user profile.
5. CONT (F1) returns to CONFIGURE Interfaces screen.
22.6 Hidden Point Measurement Devices
Description Hidden point measurement devices can be used to measure distances, angles and azimuths
to points which are not accessible by means of GPS. A Bluetooth housing can be used to
provide a wireless connection between the receiver and a Bluetooth enabled hidden point
measurement device.
Configure hidden point The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
step
chapter
2. In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight an interface which has a hidden 21
point measurement device attached.
3. CTRL (F4) to access CONFIGURE RS232 Connection.
4. CONFIGURE RS232 Connection
<Type:> The type of hidden point measurement device highlighted
when CONFIGURE RS232 Connection was accessed.
identification number of the Bluetooth. The identification number of


chapter
22.7 GPRS / Internet Devices
Description GPRS / Internet devices can be used to access the Internet from a GPS1200 receiver.
Configure Internet The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
step
chapter
2. In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight the Internet interface which has 20.10
a GPRS / Internet device attached.
3. CTRL (F4) to access CONFIGURE GPRS/Internet Connection.
4. CONFIGURE GPRS/Internet Connection
<Device:> The type of GPRS / Internet device highlighted when
CONFIGURE GPRS/Internet Connection was accessed.
identification number of the Bluetooth.


chapter
<APN:> Available for some GPRS / Internet devices. The Access
Point Name of a server from the network provider, which allows
access to data services. Contact your provider to get the correct APN.
Mandatory for using GPRS.
) CODES (F3) Available for digital cellular phones of GSM technology.

Accesses CONFIGURE GSM Codes to enter the Personal Identifica-
tion Number of the SIM card. If the PIN is locked for any reason, for
example the wrong PIN was entered, input the Personal UnblocKing
code for access to the PIN.
) SRCH (F4) Available for <Bluetooth: Yes>, to search for all available
) SHIFT CMND (F4) allows AT commands to be sent to the GPRS /

Internet device.
Appendix J

22.8 Internet / Ethernet
) The Internet connection is available on every GRX1200 Classic receiver.

The ethernet connection is available on the GRX1200 Pro.
Description Internet
The Internet connection allows for the GPS1200 receivers except GRX1200 Pro to be
connected to the Internet to receive real-time data. A GPRS / Internet device must be
attached to the receiver.
Ethernet
The ethernet connection allows for the GRX1200 Pro to be connected to the Internet/intranet
for remote access. The ethernet device resides inside the GRX1200 Pro and is connected
to the intranet/Internet via the port NET on the receiver. The physical port NET is divided into
three logical NET ports NET1, NET2 and NET3 which can each be configured separately. IP
address ranges can be defined to prevent users with an IP address outside these ranges
from accessing the receiver.
Requirements For Internet

<Internet:> in CONFIGURE Internet Interface.
<Port: NETx> in CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode
Configure port NET The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more


chapter
2. CONFIGURE Interfaces 21
Highlight an interface which has an Internet / ethernet device
attached.
3. CTRL (F4) to access CONFIGURE Set NET Port.
4. CONFIGURE Set NET Port, General page
<Name:> The name of the port NET that was attached to the inter-
face that was highlighted when this page was accessed.
<User:> How the GPS1200 receiver will operate in the Internet. 32.1
<User: Client> must be selected when using NTRIP as Internet
application. Inside the Internet NTRIPClients and NTRIPServers are
considered as clients.
<IP Address:> For <User: Client>: Type in the IP address of the 18.5
server to be accessed in the Internet.
For <User: Server>: Output of the IP address associated with the
NET port as configured in CONFIGURE Set NET Parameter
<TCP/IP Port:> A number can be assigned to each of the ports. Type
in the NET port number.
chapter
<Auto CONEC:> Available for <User: Client>.
For <R-Time Mode: Rover> in CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode
Allows for automatic connection between the rover and the Internet
when a point is occupied during a survey. Ending the point occupa-
tion also ends the Internet connection.
For <R-Time Mode: Reference> in CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode
Automatically tries to establish a connection to the Internet for data
streaming. After the streaming was interrupted for some reason,
SHIFT CONEC (F4) in the Survey screen.
5. PAGE (F6) to access CONFIGURE Set NET Port, Ranges page
6. CONFIGURE Set NET Port, Ranges page
For <User: Server> in CONFIGURE Set NET Port, General page,
the fields are input fields. The fields <Range X From:> and <Range
X To:> can be used to prevent a user with an IP address outside the
defined ranges from accessing the receiver.
Enter the IP address ranges.
) 7.
CLEAR (F5) returns the fields back to their default values.
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Set NET
Port was accessed.

22.9 Scanning Reference Stations
Description CONFIGURE Scan Reference Station provides information about the reference stations,
with specific types of devices attached, for example a radio, from which real-time corrections
are being received. This can also be useful for finding out if anyone else in the area is using
a particular radio channel.
Access step-by-step
chapter
2. In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight an interface which has an 21
appropriate device attached.
3. CTRL (F4) to access CONFIGURE RS232 Connection or
CONFIGURE Radio Channel.
4. SCAN (F5) to access CONFIGURE Scan Reference Station.
CONFIGURE
Scan Reference Station
CONT (F1)
To select the highlighted reference station and
to continue with the subsequent screen.
CH-1 (F2) and CH+1 (F3)
Available for scanning reference stations with
radios attached. To switch the radio to one
channel lower/higher than the current channel.
The reference stations displayed change to
those broadcasting on the new channel.
Column Description
Stn ID Station ID of available reference stations from which a signal is being
received.
For radios, the reference station radios transmitting on the same channel
will be listed.
Latency (s) Time delay, in seconds and configured on the reference, from when the
reference collects the data to when the data is transmitted.
Data Format Format of the data from the reference station. Refer to "20.3.3 Configura-
tion of a Reference Real-Time Interface" for more information about data
formats.

22.10 Configuring the Stations to Dial

22.10.1Overview 22-30
22.10.2Accessing CONFIGURE Stations to Dial 22-31
22.10.3Creating a New Station to Dial 22-33
22.10.4Editing a Station to Dial 22-35
22.10.1 Overview
Description CONFIGURE Stations to Dial allows new stations to be created, provides a list of reference
stations that can be dialled and allows existing stations to be edited.
For digital cellular phones of any technology and for modems, the phone numbers of the
device at the reference station must be known. For a reference station to be dialled, a name,
the phone number and, if available, the coordinates can be configured.
The configuration is possible for rover and reference digital cellular phones and modems.

22.10.2 Accessing CONFIGURE Stations to Dial
Access step-by-step
chapter
cellular phone of any technology or modem attached.
3. CTRL (F4) to access CONFIGURE XX Connection.
4. Open the choicelist for <Station:> to access CONFIGURE Stations
to Dial.
CONFIGURE
Stations to Dial
CONT (F1)
To select the highlighted station and to return
to the screen from where this screen was
accessed.
NEW (F2)
To create a new station. Refer to "22.10.3
Creating a New Station to Dial".
EDIT (F3)
To edit a station. Refer to "22.10.4 Editing a
Station to Dial".
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted station.
Column Description
Name Name of all available reference stations.
Number Phone number of the station to dial.

22.10.3 Creating a New Station to Dial
Create new station to

Step Description
dial step-by-step
1. Refer to "22.10.2 Accessing CONFIGURE Stations to Dial" to access
CONFIGURE Stations to Dial.
2. NEW (F2) to access CONFIGURE New Station to Dial.
3. CONFIGURE New Station to Dial
<Name:> A unique name for the new reference station to be dialled. The name
may be up to 16 characters long and may include spaces. Input optional.
<Number:> The number of the reference station to dial. If the survey is to be
undertaken across country borders it is necessary to input the phone number using
standard international dialing codes. For example, +41123456789. Otherwise it
can be input as a standard digital cellular phone number.
<Protocol:> Available for digital cellular phones of GSM technology. The config-
ured protocol of the digital cellular phone of GSM technology. <Protocol: Analog>
For conventional phone networks. <Protocol: ISDN v.110> For GSM networks.
Type in the number to be dialled.
4. Are the approximate coordinates of the reference station to be typed in?
5. CONFIGURE New Stations to Dial
<Enter Coords: Yes> Type in the coordinates of the reference station.

Step Description
) SHIFT ELL H or SHIFT ORTH (F2) Available for local coordinates. Changes
between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height.
6. STORE (F1) returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE New Points to Dial
was accessed.

22.10.4 Editing a Station to Dial
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "22.10 Configuring the Stations to Dial" to access CONFIGURE Stations
to Dial.
2. EDIT (F3) to access CONFIGURE Edit Station to Dial.
3. All following steps are identical with the creation of a new station to dial.
Refer to "22.10.3 Creating a New Station to Dial". Follow the instructions from step
3. onwards.
Tools...\Format Memory Device GPS1200 23-1
23 Tools...\Format Memory Device
Description Allows the CompactFlash card, the internal memory, if fitted, and the System RAM to be
formatted. All data will be erased. Refer to "Appendix B Memory Types" for more information
on the types of memory devices available.
Access Select Main Menu: Tools...\Format Memory Device.
TOOLS
Format Memory Device
CONT (F1)
To format a memory device and return to the
PROGS (F4)
To format the application programs memory.
SYSTM (F5)
To format System RAM memory.
<Memory The type of memory to be formatted.
Device:>
Output For receivers without internal memory.
CF Card or For receivers with CompactFlash card and internal
Internal Memory memory.
<Format Format Quick After formatting, data is not visible any more but still
Method:> exists on the memory device and is overwritten as
and when required.
Format Complete Data is fully deleted.
Next step
IF THEN
the CompactFlash CONT (F1) to format the selected memory device and return to
card or internal GPS1200 Main Menu.
memory is to be
formatted
the application PROGS (F4) to format the application programs memory. All load-
programs memory is able application programs are deleted.
to be formatted
the System RAM is to SYSTM (F5) to format the System RAM.
be formatted
) If the System RAM is formatted all system data such as almanac, user defined configuration
sets, user defined antennas, codelists, geoid field files and CSCS field files will be lost.
Tools...\Format Memory Device GPS1200 23-2

Tools...\Transfer Objects... GPS1200 24-1
24 Tools...\Transfer Objects...
Description This chapter describes the basic procedure for transferring objects between the Compact-
Flash card, and the internal memory, if fitted, and the System RAM. Refer to "Appendix C
Directory Structure of the Memory Device" for information about file types and locations of
files on the CompactFlash card.
Access Select Main Menu: Tools...\Transfer Objects...\XX.
TOOLS The available fields on the screen depend on the option selected in Main Menu:
Transfer XX Tools...\Transfer Objects....
CONT (F1)
To transfer an object and return to the screen
ALL (F3)
Available for some transfer object options. To
transfer all objects.
<From:> Memory device to transfer object from.
CF Card Transfer from CompactFlash card.
System RAM Transfer from System RAM. Available unless object
to transfer is a job.
Internal Memory Transfer from internal memory, if fitted. Available if
the object to transfer is a job.
<To:> Output Memory device to transfer object to. Memory device
not selected in <From:>.
<Codelist:> Choicelist To select the codelist to be transferred.
<Config Set:> Choicelist To select the configuration set to be transferred.
<Coord Sys:> Choicelist To select the coordinate system to be transferred.
<File:> Choicelist To select the geoid field file, the CSCS field file or the
entire contents of the System RAM to be transferred,
depending on the transfer option chosen.
Output The modem or GSM station to be transferred as a
binary file. CDMA stations are also transferred.
<Format File:> Choicelist To select the format files to be transferred.
<Job:> Choicelist Available for receivers with internal memory. To
select the job to be transferred between CF card and
internal memory.
<Antenna:> Choicelist To select the antenna records to be transferred.

Next step
IF all XX THEN
are to be transferred ALL (F3) transfers all objects in list.
are not to be transferred CONT (F1) transfers selected object.
Tools...\Upload System Files... GPS1200 25-1
25 Tools...\Upload System Files...

25.1 Application Programs 25-2
25.2 System Languages 25-4
25.3 Instrument Firmware 25-6
25.1 Application Programs
Description Application program uploads are possible from the CompactFlash card to the application
programs memory. These files are stored in the \SYSTEM directory of the memory device
and use the extension *.a*.
Access Select Main Menu: Tools...\Upload System Files...\Application Programs.
TOOLS
Upload Application
Programs
CONT (F1)
To upload an application program and return
to the screen from where this screen was
accessed.
DEL (F4)
To delete an application program.
<From:> Output Upload from CompactFlash card.
<To:> Output Upload to application programs memory.


<Program:> Choicelist List of program files stored on the CompactFlash
card.
<Version:> Output Version of the program file chosen.
Next step
CONT (F1) uploads the selected application program.
25.2 System Languages
Description System language uploads are possible from the CompactFlash card to the instrument.
These files are stored in the \SYSTEM directory of the active memory device and use an
extension that is individual to each language.
Access Select Main Menu: Tools...\Upload System Files...\System Languages.
TOOLS
Upload System
Languages
CONT (F1)
To upload a system language and return to the
DEL (F4)
To delete a language from the System RAM.
<To:> Output Upload to the instrument.


<Language:> Choicelist List of language files stored on the CompactFlash
card.
<Version:> Output Version of the language file.
Next step
CONT (F1) uploads the selected language.
) It is not possible to have more than three language files stored on the instrument. English is
always available as the default language and cannot be deleted.
25.3 Instrument Firmware
Description Firmware uploads are possible from the CompactFlash card to the instrument, SmartAn-
tenna or RX1200. These files are stored in the \SYSTEM directory of the active memory
device and use the extension *.fw.
) Firmware can be uploaded from LGO on a PC directly through a serial interface to the
CompactFlash card in the receiver and from there to the instrument or RX1200.
) SmartAntenna must always be connected to GTX1230 when uploading firmware because

the firmware for the measurement engine is included into the instrument firmware.
Uploading the instrument firmware including firmware for the measurement engine takes
some time.
Access Select Main Menu: Tools...\Upload System Files...\Instrument Firmware.
TOOLS
Upload System
Firmware
CONT (F1)
To upload firmware and return to the screen

<To:> Output Upload to the instrument or RX1200.
<Firmware:> Choicelist List of firmware files stored on the CompactFlash
card. For the RX1200 firmware files, available
languages are included in the firmware.
<Version:> Output Version of the firmware file.
Next step
CONT (F1) to upload firmware.
Tools...\Calculator GPS1200 26-1
26 Tools...\Calculator

26.1 Overview 26-2
26.2 Accessing the Calculator 26-3
26.3 Configuring the Calculator 26-4
26.4 Using the Calculator 26-6
26.1 Overview
Description The calculator can be used to perform the following arithmetic operations such as
addition, subtraction, multiplication and division

statistics
trigonometry, hyperbolic trigonometry and calculations with Pi
hours and angle conversions
polar, rectangular and angle conversions
powers, logs, roots and exponential functions.
Operating modes The calculator has two operating modes - RPN mode and Standard mode.
The arithmetic operations available are identical, the difference lies in the way information is
entered, stored and displayed on the screen.
Type Description
RPN Reverse Polish Notation
This operating mode was developed as a way of writing mathematical
expressions without using parenthesis and brackets. Many scientific calcu-
lators, for example Hewlett Packard calculators, are implemented with this
operating mode. Values are entered and kept in a working stack.
Standard This operating mode is based on the principles of conventional pocket
calculators. There is no stacking of values.

26.2 Accessing the Calculator
Access Select Main Menu: Tools...\Calculator.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen TOOLS XX Calculator. Refer to "5.1 Hot
OR
OR
Press CALC in any screen when editing an input field for numeric characters, such as
<Azimuth:> in COGO Traverse Input. Refer to "26.4.4 Calling and Closing the Calcu-
lator from an Input Field for Numeric Characters".
26.3 Configuring the Calculator
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "26.2 Accessing the Calculator" to access TOOLS XX Calculator.
2. SHIFT CONF (F2) to access TOOLS Calculator Configuration.
TOOLS
Calculator Configura-
tion
CONT (F1)
<Operatng RPN The principle of, for example, Hewlett Packard calcu-
Mode:> lators. Refer to "26.1 Overview" for more information.
Refer to "26.4.1 RPN Mode" for a working example.


Standard The principle of conventional pocket calculators.
Refer to "26.1 Overview" for more information. Refer
to "26.4.2 Standard Mode" for a working example.
<Angle Unit:> The unit used for trigonometric functions in the calcu-
lator. The selection here is independent from the
angle setting in CONFIGURE Units & Formats.
DEG Degrees
RAD Radians
GRAD Gon
<Display Dec:> From 0 Decimals The number of decimal places shown in TOOLS
to 10 Decimals Calculator.
Next step
CONT (F1) confirms the selections made and returns to the screen from where TOOLS
Calculator Configuration was accessed.
26.4 Using the Calculator

26.4.1 RPN Mode 26-7
26.4.2 Standard Mode 26-10
26.4.3 Description of Softkeys 26-13
26.4.4 Calling and Closing the Calculator from an Input Field for Numeric Characters26-18

26.4.1 RPN Mode
Requirements <Operatng Mode: RPN> in TOOLS Calculator Configuration.
Access Refer to "26.2 Accessing the Calculator" to access TOOLS RPN Calculator.
TOOLS Refer to paragraph "Working example" for information about the operating principle.
RPN Calculator
The function keys F1-F6 are allocated seven

times. Using or the various allocations
can be accessed. Refer to "26.4.3 Description
of Softkeys" for information about the function
keys.
First field on the Output The unit used for trigonometric functions in the calcu-
screen lator as configured in TOOLS Calculator Configura-
tion.
DEG Degrees
RAD Radians
GRAD Gon
<Y:> Output The result of the sum or difference of values in <Y:>
using + (F1) and - (F2).
<X:> Output The result of the sum or difference of values in <X:>
using + (F1) and - (F2).
<T:> Output Third stack. After an operation, the value from <Z:> is
written here.
<Z:> Output Second stack. After an operation, the value from <Y:>
is written here.
<Y:> Output First stack. After an operation, the value from <X:> is
written here.
<X:> User input The value for the next operation.
Next step
SHIFT DONE (F4) returns to GPS1200 Main Menu.
Working example Task: Calculate (3 + 5) / (7 + 6).

Step Description
1. Type in 3.
2. ENTER

Step Description
3. Type in 5.
4. ENTER
)5.
<Y: 3>, <X: 5>
+ (F1)
)6.
<X: 8>
Type in 7.
7. ENTER
)8.
<Y: 8>, <X: 7>
Type in 6.
9. ENTER
)
10.
<Z: 8>, <Y: 7>, <X: 6>
+ (F1)
)
11.
<Y: 8>, <X: 13>
/ (F4)
) <X: 0.61538>
26.4.2 Standard Mode
Requirements <Operatng Mode: Standard> in TOOLS Calculator Configuration.
Access Refer to "26.2 Accessing the Calculator" to access TOOLS Standard Calculator.
TOOLS Refer to paragraph "Working example" for information about the operating principle.
Standard Calculator
The function keys F1-F6 are allocated seven

times. Using or the various allocations
can be accessed. Refer to "26.4.3 Description
of Softkeys" for information about the function
keys.
First field on the Output The unit used for trigonometric functions in the calcu-
screen lator as configured in TOOLS Calculator Configura-
tion.


DEG Degrees
RAD Radians
GRAD Gon
<:> Output The result of the sum or difference of values in the
last field on the screen using + (F1) and - (F2).
Third to sixth Output Previously entered value
field on the OR
screen Latest operation including result
# indicates that the value is cut after the third decimal.
Last field on the User input The value for next operation or result from latest oper-
screen ation.
Next step
SHIFT DONE (F4) returns to GPS1200 Main Menu.
Working example Task: Calculate (3 + 5) / (7 + 6).

Step Description
1. Type in 3.
2. ENTER
3. + (F1)
4. Type in 5.
5. ENTER
Step Description
)6.
Last field on the screen displays 8.00000.
such that STO (F1) is visible.
7. STO (F1)
8. such that + (F1) is visible.
9. Type in 7.
10. ENTER
11. + (F1)
12. Type in 6.
13. ENTER
) Last field on the screen displays 13.00000.
)
14.
Remember 13.00000.
such that REC (F2) is visible.
15. REC (F2) to recall 8.00000.
16. ENTER
17. such that / (F4) is visible.
18. / (F4)
19. Type in 13.
20. ENTER
) Last field on the screen displays 0.61538.

26.4.3 Description of Softkeys
Overview of softkeys The softkeys shown and described are those of <Operatng Mode: RPN>. Most of the
softkeys are identical and their functionality is similar to that for <Operatng Mode:
Standard>.
The function keys F1-F6 are allocated seven times with softkeys. Using or the various
allocations can be accessed.
Description of softkeys First level
+ (F1)
To add <X:> and <Y:>.
- (F2)
To subtract <X:> from <Y:>.
* (F3)
To multiply <X:> by <Y:>.
/ (F4)
To divide <Y:> by <X:>.
+/- (F5)
To change between positive and negative
algebraic sign for <X:>.
CLR X (F6)
To clear <X:>.
to access the Second level

+ (F1)
To add <X:> to <X:> and <Y:> to <Y:>.
- (F2)
To subtract <X:> from <X:> and <Y:> from
<Y:>.
MEAN (F3)
To calculate the mean <X>.
SDEV (F4)
To calculate the standard deviation for <X>.
CLR (F6)
To clear <X> and <X>.

to access the Third level
SIN (F1)
To calculate sine of <X:>.
COS(F2)
To calculate cosine of <X:>.
TAN (F3)
To calculate tangent of <X:>.
ASIN (F4)
To calculate arcsine of <X:>.
ACOS (F5)
To calculate arccosine of <X:>.
ATAN (F6)
To calculate arctangent of <X:>.
to access the Fourth level

DMS (F1)
To convert decimal degrees into dd.mm.ss.
DEC(F2)
To convert hh.mm.ss into decimal degrees.
PI (F3)
To insert <X: 3.1415926536>. The number of
decimals depends on the selection for
<Display Dec:> in TOOLS Calculator
Configuration.
D -> R (F5)
To convert degrees into radians.
R -> D (F6)
To convert radians into degrees.
to access the Fifth level
POLAR (F1)
Conversion of polar coordinates into rectan-
gular coordinates. The angle must be visible in
<Y:> and the distance in <X:> when pressing
this key. The y coordinate is displayed in <Y:>,
the x coordinate in <X:>.
RECT(F2)
Conversion of rectangular coordinates into
polar coordinates. The y coordinate must be
visible in <Y:> and the x coordinate in <X:>
when pressing this key. The angle is displayed
in <Y:> and the distance in <X:>.
SQRT (F3)
To calculate X<X:>.
X^2 (F4)
To calculate <X:>2.
1/X (F5)
To inverse <X:>.
Y^X (F6)
To calculate <Y:><X:>.
to access the Sixth level

LOG (F1)
To calculate the log10<X:>.
10^X(F2)
To calculate 10<X:>.
LN (F3)
To calculate the loge<X:>.

e^X (F4)
To calculate e<X:>.
Y^X (F6)
To calculate <Y:><X:>.
to access the Seventh level

STO (F1)
To store <X:> to the memory. Up to ten values
can be stored.
RCL (F2)
To recall a value for <X:> from the memory. Up
to ten values can be recalled.
X<>Y (F3)
To swap the values for <X:> and <Y:>.
LASTX (F4)
To recall the last <X:> before recent calcula-
tion.
CLEAR (F6)
To delete everything.
SHIFT to access the second level of function keys

SHIFT CONF (F2)
To configure the calculator.
SHIFT DONE (F4)
To return to GPS1200 Main Menu.
26.4.4 Calling and Closing the Calculator from an Input Field for Numeric Characters
)
Call and close calcu-
COGO traverse calculation is used as example.

lator step-by-step
chapter
1. Select Main Menu: Programs...\COGO to access the screen COGO
COGO Begin.
2. COGO COGO Begin
Check the settings.
3. CONT (F1) to access COGO COGO Menu.
4. COGO COGO Menu
Highlight Traverse.
5. CONT (F1) to access COGO Traverse Input.
6. COGO Traverse Input
Highlight <Azimuth:>.
7. ENTER
8. CALC (F5) to access TOOLS XX Calculator.
) If a value had already been typed in for <Azimuth:>, this value is

taken over into the input field in TOOLS XX Calculator.
9. TOOLS XX Calculator
Perform the calculations. 26.4.1,
26.4.2


chapter
10. SHIFT DONE (F4) to return to COGO Traverse Input.
) The calculated value is taken over for <Azimuth:>.

Tools...\File Viewer GPS1200 27-1
27 Tools...\File Viewer
Description Allows ASCII files on the memory device to be viewed. The ASCII file can have up to 500 KB.
Refer to "Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device" for more information on the
contents of folders on the memory device.
)
Access
The \DBX directory cannot be accessed to view files.
Select Main Menu: Tools...\File Viewer.
TOOLS
Device\Directory
CONT (F1)
To access the highlighted directory or to view
the highlighted file.
DIR (F2)
Available for a directory or .. being highlighted.
To access the highlighted directory or to move
up one directory.
VIEW (F3)
Available for a file being highlighted. To view
the highlighted file. Accesses TOOLS View
File: File Name. Refer to "TOOLS View File:
File Name".
DEL (F4)
Available for a file being highlighted. To delete
the highlighted file.
MORE (F5)
To display information about the size of a
directory or file.
CFCRD (F6) or INTL (F6)
Available for receivers with internal memory.
To change between viewing jobs stored on the
CompactFlash card or internal memory.
Column Description
First Directories and files are displayed if available. The file extension is shown
for files.
\ at the beginning of a line indicates a directory.
.. is displayed at the top of the list if a directory has been accessed.
Second Date of the directory or file.
Third Time of the directory or file.
Next step
IF THEN
the screen is to be ESC to return to GPS1200 Main Menu.
quit

IF THEN
a directory is to highlight the directory and DIR (F2).
accessed
a file is to be viewed highlight the file and VIEW (F3). Refer to "TOOLS View File: File
Name".
TOOLS
View File: File Name
CONT (F1)
was accessed.
Keys
Keys Function
Moves up.
Moves down.
Moves right.
Keys Function
Moves left.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where TOOLS View File: File Name was accessed.

Tools...\Licence Keys GPS1200 28-1
28 Tools...\Licence Keys
Description A licence key can be used to activate application programs and protected options and can
be used to define the expiry date of the software maintenance. Refer to "29.4 STATUS:
System Information" to find out how to check the expiry date of the software maintenance.
A licence key file can be uploaded to the receiver. To upload a licence key file the file should
be located on the \SYSTEM directory of the CompactFlash card. Licence key files use the
naming convention L_123456.key, where 123456 is the instrument serial number. Licence
keys can also be typed in manually.
Access Select Main Menu: Tools...\Licence Keys.

OR
Select an application program not yet activated.
TOOLS
Enter Licence Key
CONT (F1)
Main Menu or continue with application
program.
SHIFT DEL (F4)
To delete all licence keys on the receiver.
<Method:> The method used to input the licence key to activate
the application program or the protected options or
the software maintenance.
Upload Key File The licence key file is uploaded from the Compact-
Flash card. The licence key file must be stored in the
\SYSTEM directory on the CompactFlash card.
Manual Entry of Allows the licence key to be typed in manually.
Key
<Key:> User input Available for <Method: Manual Entry of Key>. The
licence key required to activate an application
program. Entry is not case sensitive.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to GPS1200 Main Menu or continues with selected application program.
Tools...\Licence Keys GPS1200 28-2

STATUS GPS1200 29-1
29 STATUS

29.1 STATUS Functions 29-2
29.2 STATUS: Survey... 29-4
29.3 STATUS: Battery & Memory 29-30
29.4 STATUS: System Information 29-34
29.5 STATUS: Interfaces... 29-36
29.1 STATUS Functions
Description The STATUS functions help using the receiver by showing the state of many receiver func-
tions. All fields are output fields. Unavailable information is indicated by -----.
Access Press USER and then STAT (F3). Refer to "5.2 USER Key" for information on the USER key.
STATUS
Status Menu
CONT (F1)
Description of the
STATUS function Description Refer to chapter
STATUS functions
Survey... Information related to an active survey. 29.2
Battery & Memory Information related to usage and status of 29.3
battery and memory.
System Information Information related to the instrument hardware 29.4
and firmware.
STATUS GPS1200 29-2

STATUS GPS1200 29-3
STATUS function Description Refer to chapter

Interfaces... Information related to the configuration and 29.5
use of interfaces, ports and devices.
Information related to the incoming data from
active devices.
29.2 STATUS: Survey...

29.2.1 Satellite Status 29-5
29.2.2 Real-Time Status 29-9
29.2.3 Current Position 29-19
29.2.4 Logging Status 29-23
29.2.5 Occupation Information Status 29-27
STATUS GPS1200 29-4

STATUS GPS1200 29-5
29.2.1 Satellite Status
Description This screen shows information related to the satellites with the highest elevation angle.
Access Select STATUS: Survey...\Satellite Status. Refer to "29.1 STATUS Functions" on how
to access the STATUS menu.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STATUS Satellites. Refer to "5.1 Hot
OR
OR
Tap the number of visible satellites icon. Refer to the GPS1200 System Field Manual for
information on icons.
OR
Tap the contributing satellites icon. Refer to the GPS1200 System Field Manual for infor-
mation on icons.
STATUS The name of the page changes depending on the active receiver configuration.
Satellites, Satellites page: Receiver is configured for static operations.
Satellites page;
Receiver is configured for post-processed kinematic operations.
STATUS
Receiver is configured for real-time reference operations.
Satellites,
Rover page Receiver is configured for real-time rover operations.
Rover page
Satellites below the <Cut Off Angle:> configured in CONFIGURE Satellite Settings are
shown in grey.
CONT (F1)
To exit STATUS Satellites.
HELTH (F3)
To view the PRN numbers of satellites catego-
rised in good, bad and unavailable.
MORE
To open and close a window showing the date
of the used almanac, the number of satellites
tracked as shown on the skyplot and the
number of all satellites available above the cut
off elevation mask as shown on the skyplot.
PAGE (F6)
Column Description
Sat The Pseudo Random Noise number of the satellites.
Elev The elevation angle in degrees. The arrows indicate if the satellite is rising
or falling.
Azmth The azimuth of the satellite.
S/N 1 and S/N 2 The signal to noise ratio on L1 and L2. The number is shown in brackets
if the signal is currently not being used in the position calculations.
STATUS GPS1200 29-6

STATUS GPS1200 29-7
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Skyplot page. Refer to paragraph "STATUS Satellites, Skyplot
page".
STATUS The skyplot shows satellite information in a graphical way.

Satellites, The part of the skyplot between the 0 elevation and the cut-off angle is marked grey.
Skyplot page
CONT (F1)
To exit STATUS Satellites.
MORE (F5)
To open and close a window showing the date
of the used almanac, the number of satellites
tracked as shown on the skyplot and the
number of all satellites available above the cut
off elevation mask as shown on the skyplot.
PAGE (F6)
Description of symbols
Symbol Description
Satellites above the <Cut Off Angle:> configured in CONFIGURE Satel-
lite Settings.
Satellites below the <Cut Off Angle:> configured in CONFIGURE Satel-
lite Settings.
Next step
IF THEN
the receiver is a real- PAGE (F6) changes to the Reference page. Refer to paragraph
time rover "STATUS Satellites, Reference page".
the receiver is not a CONT (F1) exits STATUS Satellites.
real-time rover
STATUS The information about the satellites at the reference shown on this page is identical with the
Satellites, information shown on STATUS Satellites, Rover page. Refer to paragraph "STATUS Satel-
Reference page lites, Satellites page; STATUS Satellites, Rover page".
Next step
CONT (F1) exits STATUS Satellites.
STATUS GPS1200 29-8

STATUS GPS1200 29-9
29.2.2 Real-Time Status
Description This screen shows information related to real-time data, for example the data link and the
device used to transfer real-time data.
The name of the screen changes depending on the configuration:
Real-time rover configuration: STATUS Real-Time Input
Real-time reference configuration with one STATUS Real-Time Output
real-time device:
Real-time reference configuration with two STATUS Real-Time Output 1
real-time devices: and STATUS Real-Time Output 2
For simplicity, the screen is named here as STATUS Real-Time. Differences depending on
the configurations are outlined.
Access This screen is accessible for <R-Time Mode: Rover> and <R-Time Mode: Reference> in
Select STATUS: Survey...\Real-Time Status.

OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STATUS Real-Time. Refer to "5.1 Hot
OR
OR
Tap the real-time device and real-time status icon. Refer to the GPS1200 System Field
Manual for information on icons.
STATUS
CONT (F1)
Real-Time,
To exit STATUS Real-Time.
General page
DATA (F4)
To view the data being received. Depending on
<R-Time Data:>, the shown data differ. Refer
to paragraph "STATUS Real-Time Input Data".
REF2 (F5) and REF1 (F5)
Available for <R-Time Mode: Reference> with
two real-time devices configured.
To change between the status information for
both real-time devices.
PAGE (F6)
Field Description
<R-Time Data:> The received real-time data format message type.
<Sats used The number of satellites on L1 and L2 being used in the current position
L1/L2:> solution.
<Last Sent:> Available for <R-Time Mode: Reference>.
Seconds since the last message from the reference was sent.
<Last Available for <R-Time Mode: Rover>.
Received:> Seconds since the last message from the reference was received.
STATUS GPS1200 29-10

Field Description
<In Last Available for <R-Time Mode: Rover>.
Minute:> The percentage of real-time data received from the reference compared
with the data received from the GPS antenna within the last minute. This
indicates how well the datalink is working.
<Ref Network:> Available for <R-Time Mode: Rover>.
The type of reference network in use.
<Output Available for <R-Time Mode: Rover> unless <Ref Network: None>.
NMEA:> NMEA positions must be send to a network. The type of NMEA message
send to the reference network. If more than one message is send at a
time, then all types are shown separated by comma.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Device page. Refer to paragraph "STATUS Real-Time, Device
page".
STATUS The content of this page differs for each type of device in use.
Real-Time,
Device page
CONT (F1)
To exit STATUS Real-Time.
ACCNT (F3)
Available for Smartgate device. To view
Smartgate account information. Accesses
STATUS SmartGate Account Information.
VERS (F4)
Available for Smartgate device. To view
Smartgate version information. Accesses
STATUS SmartGate Account Information.
PAGE (F6)
For all devices available

Field Description
<Name:> The name of the device.
For RS232
Field Description
<Type:> The type of device.
<Port:> The port to which the device is connected.

Field Description
<Bluetooth:> Available if device is connected via bluetooth. Indicates the state of the
connection.
For digital cellular phones and modems

Field Description
<Firmware:> The software version of the attached digital cellular phone.
<Operator:> The name of the network operator in which the digital cellular phone is
operating.
<Status:> The actual mode of the digital cellular phone. The options are Unknown,
Detection and Registered.
<Bluetooth:> Available if device is connected via bluetooth. Indicates the state of the
connection.
<Signal:> Indication of received signal strength of the digital cellular phone network.
For Satelline 3AS radios
Field Description
<Channel:> The radio channel.
<Actual Freq:> The actual set frequency of the radio.
<Central Freq:> The defined central frequency of the radio.
<Firmware:> The software version of the attached radio.
For Pacific Crest PDL radios

Field Description
<Channel:> The radio channel.
For Smartgate boxes

Field Description

Field Description
<Profile:> The user profile being used.
<Profile No.:> Number of the profile being used.
<Medium:> The Smartgate medium currently being used as configured in
<Profile:>.
<Error Rate:> The current error rate of the active medium.
For Ethernet, available for GRX1200 Pro

Field Description
<IP Port:> The logical NET port being used.
<Connected To:> IP address of device connected to the receiver.
<Duration:> Time since connection was established, displayed as hh:mm:ss.
<Kbytes Recvd:> Kilobytes of data received since the connection was established.
<Kbytes Sent:> Kilobytes of data sent since the connection was established.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Reference page. Refer to paragraph "STATUS Real-Time,
Reference page; STATUS Real-Time, Ref (VRS) page".
STATUS The name of the page changes depending on the type of reference being used.
Real-Time, Reference page: Reference is a real reference station.
Reference page; Ref (VRS) page Reference is a virtual reference station.
STATUS
Real-Time,
Ref (VRS) page Description of fields
Field Description
<Ref Stn ID:> An identification for a reference station. The ID can be converted into a
compact format to be send out with real-time data in all real-time data
formats. It is different from the point ID of the reference station.
<Antenna Ht:> For <R-Time Data: Leica>, <R-Time Data: RTCM v3.0> or <R-Time
Data: RTCM X v2> with <RTCM Version: 2.3>:
The antenna height at the reference from the marker to the MRP.
For <R-Time Data: CMR/CMR+> and <R-Time Data: RTCM 18, 19
v2> or <R-Time Data: RTCM 18, 19 v2> with <RTCM Version: 2.2>
The antenna height at the reference from the marker to the phase
center.
For all other <R-Time Data:>:
----- is displayed because the data format does not include information
about the antenna height.
<Coords of:> The coordinates for the reference station which are transferred depend on
the active real-time data format.
For real-time messages which include antenna height and antenna
type: Marker.
For real-time messages which do not include antenna Information:
Phase Centre of L1.

Next step
IF THEN
other coordinate types are COORD (F2). Local coordinates are available when a local
to be viewed coordinate system is active.
this screen is to be quit CONT (F1) exits STATUS Real-Time.
STATUS The following provides additional information on the satellite data received via real-time
Real-Time Input Data message. Information of those satellites is displayed, which are used on both reference and
rover.
Access
DATA (F4) on STATUS Real-Time, General page.
CONT (F1)
To return to STATUS Real-Time.
SAT- (F2)
To display information about the satellite with
the next smaller PRN.
SAT+ (F3)
To display information about the satellite with
the next larger PRN.
The data being received from the satellites and the layout of the screen depend on the active
real-time data format.
Field Description
<Sat PRN:> The PRN number of the satellites.
<Sat Time:> The GPS time of the satellite.
<Phase L1:>, <Phase L2:> The number of phase cycles from the antenna to the
satellite on L1 and L2.
<Msg 18 L1:>, <Msg 18 L2:> The uncorrected carrier phases for L1 and L2.
<Msg 20 L1:>, <Msg 20 L2:> The carrier phase corrections for L1 and L2.
<Code L1:>, <Code L2:> The pseudorange between the antenna to the satellite for
L1 and L2.
<Msg 19 L1:>, <Msg 19 L2:> The uncorrected pseudoranges for L1 and L2.
<Msg 21 L1:>, <Msg 21 L2:> The pseudorange corrections for L1 and L2.
<PRC:> Pseudorange corrections.
<RRC:> Rate of change of the corrections.
<IODE:> Issue Of Data Ephemeris. The identification number of
the ephemeris for a satellite.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where STATUS Real-Time Input Data was accessed.

29.2.3 Current Position
Description This screen shows information related to the current antenna position and the speed of the
antenna. For real-time rover configurations the baseline vector is also shown. MapView
shows the current position in a graphical format.
Access Select STATUS: Survey...\Current Position. Refer to "29.1 STATUS Functions" on how
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STATUS Position. Refer to "5.1 Hot
OR
OR
Tap the position status icon. Refer to the GPS1200 System Field Manual for information
on icons.
STATUS
Position,
CONT (F1)
Position page
To exit STATUS Position.
COORD (F2)
To see other coordinate types. Local coordi-
nates are available when a local coordinate
system is active.
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT ELL H (F2) and SHIFT ORTH (F2)
Available for local coordinates. To change
between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric
height.
Field Description
<Pos Latency:> The latency of the computed position. Latency is mainly due to time
required for data transfer and computation of position. Depends on
the use of the prediction mode.
Pos Quality and Available for phase fixed and code only solutions. The 2D coordinate
Ht Quality and height quality of the computed position. Refer to "8.3.1 Termi-
nology" for information on coordinate quality.
HDOP and VDOP Available for navigated solutions.

Next step
IF THEN
the receiver is a real-time PAGE (F6) changes to the Baseline page. Refer to para-
rover graph "STATUS Position, Baseline page".
the receiver is not configured PAGE (F6) changes to the Speed page. Refer to paragraph
for real-time "STATUS Position, Speed page".
the receiver is a real-time CONT (F1) exits STATUS Position.
reference
STATUS Information on the baseline vector is displayed.

Position,
Baseline page Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Speed page. Refer to paragraph "STATUS Position, Speed
page".
STATUS Description of fields

Position,
Field Description
Speed page
<Horizontal:> The speed over ground in the horizontal direction.
<On Bearing:> Available for local coordinate systems.
The bearing for the horizontal direction related to the North direction of
the active coordinate system.
<Vertical:> The vertical component of the actual velocity.
Next step
CONT (F1) exits STATUS Position.

29.2.4 Logging Status
Description This screen shows information related to logging of raw observations, including ring buffer.
Access Select STATUS: Survey...\Logging Status. Refer to "29.1 STATUS Functions" on how
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STATUS Logging. Refer to "5.1 Hot
OR
OR
Tap the logging information icon. Refer to the GPS1200 System Field Manual for infor-
mation on icons.
STATUS
Logging,
General page
CONT (F1)
To exit STATUS Logging.
PAGE (F6)
Field Description
<All Static The number of static epochs recorded in the current job.
Obs:>
<All Moving The number of moving epochs recorded in the current job.
Obs:>
<Recorded The number of manually occupied points and auto points stored in the job.
DB-X Pts:>
Next step
IF AND THEN
at least one ring - PAGE (F6) changes to the Ring Buffer
buffer is activated page. Refer to paragraph "STATUS Logging,
Ring Buffer page".
no ring buffer is acti- the receiver is a real- PAGE (F6) changes to the Reference or Ref
vated time rover (VRS) page. Refer to paragraph "STATUS
Logging, Reference page; STATUS Logging,
Ref (FKP) page; STATUS Logging, Ref
(VRS) page".
no ring buffer is acti- the receiver is not a CONT (F1) exits STATUS Logging.
vated real-time rover

STATUS
Logging,
Ring Buffer page
CONT (F1)
To exit STATUS Logging.
PAGE (F6)
Field Description
<Ring Buffer No.:> The number of the active ring buffer.
<No. of Files:> The number of files stored in the ring buffer.
<Obs Flagged:> The flag assigned to the stored observations.
<Obs Rate:> The configured observation rate by which data is logged.
<First Obs at:> The local time when the first observation available in the ring buffer
is stored.
<Last Obs at:> The local time when the last observation available in the ring buffer
is stored.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the STATUS Reference page or Ref (VRS) page.
STATUS The name of the page changes depending on the type of reference used.
Logging, Reference page: Reference is a real reference station.
Reference page; Ref (FKP) page FKP is received.
STATUS Ref (VRS) page Reference is a virtual reference station.
Logging,
Ref (FKP) page;
Logging,
Ref (VRS) page
<Log Static A time in sec The logging rate at the reference. This information is
Obs:> shown if the real-time message format supports this
information and raw observations are being logged at
the reference.
Not known The real-time message format does not support this
information or the information is not yet received by
the rover.
None Raw observations are not being logged at the refer-
ence.
Next step
CONT (F1) exits STATUS Logging.

29.2.5 Occupation Information Status
Description This screen shows information related to the amount of time required at a point and the
amount of time spent on a point.
Access Select STATUS: Survey...\Occupation Information Status. Refer to "29.1 STATUS

Functions" on how to access the STATUS menu.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STATUS Occupation Information
(Static) or STATUS Occupation Information (Moving). Refer to "5.1 Hot Keys" for infor-
mation on hot keys.
OR
STATUS Available for logging of raw observations.

Occupation Information
(Static); The name of the screen changes with the static or moving mode of the receiver. The values
STATUS are reset with each new static interval.
Occupation Information Information on this screen is available for <R-Time Mode: None> and <R-Time Mode:
(Moving) Rover>.
For static mode

Field Description
<Obs The percentage of collected data required for successful processing.
Completed:> It is a conservative estimate based on a 10 - 15 km baseline.
The criteria used to display this value depend on the settings for <Auto
STOP:>, <STOP Criteria:> and <% Indicator:> in Main Menu:
Config...\Point Occupation Settings.
<Time to Go:> The estimated time in hours, minutes and seconds until the configured
criteria for <STOP Criteria:> or <% Indicator:> is reached.
The criteria used to display this value depend on the settings for <Auto
STOP:>, <STOP Criteria:> and <% Indicator:> in Main Menu:
Config...\Point Occupation Settings.
<Time at The time passed since OCUPY (F1) was pressed in the SURVEY screen.
Point:>
<Cycle Slips The number of cycle slips on L1 and L2 that have occurred since recording
L1/L2:> started on the current point.
<Obs Rec Rate at which raw observations are being recorded.
Rate:>
<Static Obs> The number of logged static raw observations. Reset as soon as a new
static interval starts.

For moving mode
Field Description
<>5 Sats The time for how long five or more satellites are tracked on L1 and L2
Since:> without interruption. The counter is reset if less than five satellites were
tracked. The counter is not reset after OCUPY (F1), STOP (F1) or STORE
(F1).
<GDOP:> Current GDOP.
<Obs Rec Rate at which raw observations are being recorded.
Rate:>
<Moving The number of logged moving raw observations. Reset as soon a new
Obs:> moving interval starts.
Next step
CONT (F1) exits STATUS Occupation Information (Static) or STATUS Occupation Infor-
mation (Moving).
29.3 STATUS: Battery & Memory
Access Select STATUS: Battery & Memory. Refer to "29.1 STATUS Functions" on how to
access the STATUS menu.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STATUS Battery & Memory. Refer to
OR
OR
Tap the battery icon. Refer to the GPS1200 System Field Manual for information on icons.
OR
Tap the CompactFlash card/internal memory icon. Refer to the GPS1200 System Field
Manual for information on icons.
STATUS
Battery & Memory
(Rover),
Battery page
CONT (F1)
To exit STATUS Battery & Memory (Rover).
REF (F5)
Available when the receiver is configured as
real-time rover. To view battery and memory
information for the reference.
PAGE (F6)

Field Description
Any field The percentage of remaining power capacity for all batteries are displayed
numerically. Batteries not in use are shown in grey.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Memory page. Refer to paragraph "STATUS Battery & Memory
(Rover), Memory page".
STATUS If no information for a field is available, for example no CompactFlash card is inserted, then
Battery & Memory ----- is displayed.
(Rover),
Memory page
CONT (F1)
To exit STATUS Battery & Memory (Rover).
REF (F5)
Available when the receiver is configured as
real-time rover. To view battery and memory
information for the reference.
PAGE (F6)
Field Description
<Device Used:> The memory device in use.
<Mem CF Card:> The total/free memory for data storage on the CompactFlash card.
<Mem Instrmnt:> The total/free memory for data storage on the internal memory. A grey
field and grey dashes indicate an unavailable internal memory.
<Mem Programs:> The total/free system memory used for application programs.
<Mem System:> The total/free system memory. The system memory stores
receiver related files such as system settings.
survey related files such as codelists and configuration sets.
Next step
IF THEN
the receiver is a real- REF (F5) shows battery and memory information for the real-time
time rover reference in use.
the receiver is not a CONT (F1) exits STATUS Battery & Memory (Rover).
real-time rover
STATUS This screen consists of the Battery and the Memory page. Both pages are similar to those
Battery & Memory of the rover screen. The information that is displayed depends on the real-time message.
(Reference) Leica: Transfers precise values for all fields.
RTCM: Transfer of any of the information not part of the message.
CMR/CMR+: Transfers general status information such as O.K. and Low.

Next step
CONT (F1) returns to STATUS Battery & Memory (Rover).
29.4 STATUS: System Information
Access Select STATUS: System Information. Refer to "29.1 STATUS Functions" on how to
access the STATUS menu.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STATUS System Information. Refer to
OR
STATUS Shows the type of receiver, the serial number, the currently active system language, the
System Information, serial number of the measurement engine, the availability of additional instrument hardware
Instrument page options such as event input and if the protected OWI commands have been activated by a
licence key.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Firmware page. Refer to paragraph "STATUS System Informa-
tion, Firmware page".
STATUS Shows the versions of all system firmware.

System Information,
Firmware page Description of fields
Field Description
<Maintenance The expiry date of the software maintenance is shown.
End:>
<Meas Engine:> The firmware version for the measurement engine.

Field Description
<Meas Eng Boot:> The firmware version of the boot software for the measurement
engine.
<Boot:> The frimware version boot software.
<LB2/OWI:> The version of the LB2/OWI commands.
<Navigation:> The navigation firmware version with the algorithms for the signal
processing.
<API:> The firmware version for the application program interface.
<EF Interface:> The firmware version for the electric front interface.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Application page. Refer to paragraph "STATUS System Infor-
mation, Application page".
STATUS Shows the versions of all uploaded application programs.

System Information,
Application page Next step
CONT (F1) exits STATUS System Information.
29.5 STATUS: Interfaces...

29.5.1 Real-Time Input 29-37
29.5.2 ASCII Input 29-38
29.5.3 Tilt 29-40
29.5.4 Meteo 29-42
29.5.5 Internet 29-43
29.5.6 Event Input 29-44
29.5.7 Remote Interfaces 29-46

29.5.1 Real-Time Input
Description This screen shows the incoming data from the real-time device. Refer to "29.2.2 Real-Time
Status" paragraph "STATUS Real-Time, Device page" for information on the fields available,
depending on the configured real-time device.
Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated real-time interface.
Select STATUS: Interfaces.... Highlight Real-Time. IFACE (F5). Refer to "29.1 STATUS
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STATUS Real-Time Input. Refer to "5.1
OR
29.5.2 ASCII Input
Description This screen shows the

incoming ASCII data which is stored as a point annotation.
description of the incoming ASCII data for each point annotation field.
Not used is shown for annotation fields which are not configured to receive incoming ASCII
data.
Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated ASCII Input interface.
Select STATUS: Interfaces.... Highlight ASCII Input. IFACE (F5). Refer to "29.1
STATUS Functions" on how to access the STATUS menu.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STATUS ASCII Input - XX. Refer to "5.1
OR

STATUS
ASCII Input - XX
CONT (F1)
To exit STATUS ASCII Input - XX.
DATA (F3) and DESCR (F3)
To change between the given description for
the incoming ASCII data or the last received
ASCII data.
Next step
CONT (F1) exits STATUS ASCII Input - XX.
29.5.3 Tilt
Description This screen shows the incoming data from the tilt device.
Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated tilt interface.
Select STATUS: Interfaces.... Highlight Tilt. IFACE (F5). Refer to "29.1 STATUS Func-
tions" on how to access the STATUS menu.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STATUS Tilt Measurement. Refer to
OR
STATUS The units are independent from the settings in CONFIGURE Units & Formats. Displays the
Tilt Measurement inclination in .
Field Description
<Data Time:> The UTC or local time by when the last data was received.
<Temperature:> The temperature as received from the tilt device.
<Incl-x:> The x component, right/left, of the inclination as read from the tilt device.
<Incl-y:> The y component, forwards/backwards, of the inclination as read from
the tilt device.

Next step
CONT (F1) exits STATUS Tilt Measurement.
29.5.4 Meteo
Description This screen shows the incoming data from the meteo device.
Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated meteo interface.
Select STATUS: Interfaces.... Highlight Meteo. IFACE (F5). Refer to "29.1 STATUS
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STATUS Meteo Measurement. Refer
OR
STATUS The units are independent from the settings in CONFIGURE Units & Formats. Displays the
Meteo Measurement UTC or local time when the data was last received, the temperature in C, the air pressure
in hPa, the temperature in C and the relative humidity in percentage.
Next step
CONT (F1) exits STATUS Meteo Measurement.

29.5.5 Internet
) This screen is not available for the GRX1200 Pro where Ethernet is used for the Internet
connection.
Description This screen shows

if the receiver is online on the Internet.
for how long the receiver is online.
the technology of data transfer.
the amount of data received or sent since the receiver is online.
Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated Internet interface.
Select STATUS: Interfaces.... Highlight Internet. IFACE (F5). Refer to "29.1 STATUS Func-
tions" on how to access the STATUS menu.
29.5.6 Event Input
Description This screen shows the incoming data from the event input interface.
Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated event input interface.
Select STATUS: Interfaces.... Highlight Event Input. IFACE (F5). Refer to "29.1
STATUS Functions" on how to access the STATUS menu.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STATUS Event Input. Refer to "5.1 Hot
OR

Event Input
Field Description
<Time:> The local time of when the last event was available.
<Event The incrementing number of detected events. Counting starts as soon as
Count:> the event input is configured and activated. To reset the counter to 0,
RESET (F5).

Field Description
<Event Pulse The incrementing number of detected pulses in the event input.
Count:> Events which do not fulfil the requirements configured in CONFIGURE
Event Input are counted as an event pulse but not as an event. This is,
for example, the case when the time between two events is shorter than
defined in <Time Guard:>.
Counting starts as soon as the event input is configured and activated. To
reset the counter to 0, RESET (F5).
Next step
CONT (F1) exits STATUS Event Input.
Diagram
c c c
a a a a
b b
a) Event
0 b) Event pulse
GPS12_078 c) Time guard
29.5.7 Remote Interfaces
Description This screen shows all available ports and the interfaces and devices configured to these
ports.
Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated remote interface.
Select STATUS: Interfaces.... Highlight Remote. IFACE (F5). Refer to "29.1 STATUS
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STATUS Remote Interfaces. Refer to
OR
STATUS
Remote Interfaces
CONT (F1)
To exit STATUS Remote Interfaces.
DEVCE (F5)
Available for some devices. To view status
information about the devices.

Column Description
Port The physical port on the instrument which is being used for the interface
functionality.
Interface The interface configured for the ports.
Device The hardware connected to the chosen port.
Next step
CONT (F1) exits STATUS Remote Interfaces.
MapView Interactive Display Feature GPS1200 30-1
30 MapView Interactive Display Feature

30.1 Overview 30-2
30.2 Accessing MapView 30-4
30.3 Configuring MapView 30-7
30.4 MapView Components 30-11
30.5 Map Mode 30-18
30.6 Plot Mode - MapView Screen Area 30-25
30.7 Survey Mode 30-29
30.1 Overview
Description MapView is an interactive display feature embedded in the firmware but used by all applica-
tion programs as well as data management. MapView provides a graphical display of the
survey elements which allows for a better overall understanding of how the data being used
and measured relates to each other.
Depending on the application program and where in the application program MapView is
accessed from, different modes, and their associated functionality, are available.
MapView modes MapView is available in three modes:

Map mode: Part of data management.
Is also available within some application programs, for example, the
Reference Line application program.
Can be used to view, select and edit points.
Can be used to view lines and areas.
Available as the Map page in data management and some applica-
tion programs.
Plot mode: Is available to view results in various application programs. For
example, COGO application program.
Available as the Plot page in some application programs.
Survey mode: Part of the Survey application program.
Is available within some application programs, for example,
Stakeout application program.
Same as Map mode but also shows the positions of the reference
stations and the rover.
Provides special functionality when staking out points.
Available as the Map page in Survey and some application
programs.

Modes within applica- It is possible to access different MapView modes from the same application program. For
tion programs example, REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line, Map page accesses MapView in map
mode, whereas, REFLINE XX Stakeout, Map page accesses MapView in survey mode.
Displayable data The data displayed in MapView is defined by the application program through which it was
accessed, filters set in MANAGE Sorts & Filters, and the selections made in XX MapView
Configuration.
30.2 Accessing MapView
Description The MapView interactive display feature is provided as a page within all application
programs and data management. It is accessed through the application program itself.
Depending on the application program and from where in the application program MapView
is accessed, different MapView modes are available.
Access step-by-step Example access for map mode:

Step Description
1. Select Main Menu: Manage...\Data.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen MANAGE Data: Job Name.
OR
OR
From a choicelist in some screens for example in application programs.
2. PAGE (F6) until MANAGE Data: Job Name, Map page is active.
Example access for plot mode:

Step Description
1. Press PROG. Highlight COGO. CONT (F1). Refer to "34.2 Accessing the Appli-
cation Programs Menu" for information on the PROG key.

Step Description
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen COGO COGO Begin. Refer
OR
2. CONT (F1) to access COGO COGO Menu.
3. COGO COGO Menu
Highlight Intersections.
4. CONT (F1) to access COGO Intersection Input.
5. COGO Intersection Input
Choose a method and enter appropriate data.
6. CALC (F1) to access COGO XX Results.
7. PAGE (F6) until COGO XX Results, Plot page is active.
Example access for survey mode:

Step Description
1. Select Main Menu: Survey.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen SURVEY Survey Begin.
Step Description
OR
OR
Press PROG. Highlight Survey. CONT (F1). Refer to "34.2 Accessing the
Application Programs Menu" for information on the PROG key.
2. CONT (F1) to access SURVEY Survey: Job Name.
3. PAGE (F6) until SURVEY Survey: Job Name, Map page is active.
) MapView can be open multiple times, for example as SURVEY Survey: Job Name, Map
page accessed from GPS1200 Main Menu and as MANAGE Data: Job Name, Map page
accessed using the USER key.

30.3 Configuring MapView
Description Allows options to be set which are used as default options within MapView. These settings
are stored within the configuration set and apply to all Map and Plot pages, regardless of
how MapView is accessed.
) Any changes made in XX MapView Configuration affect the appearance of MapView in all
application programs, not just the active application program.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "30.2 Accessing MapView" to access MapView in map, plot or survey
mode.
2. SHIFT CONF (F2) to access XX MapView Configuration.
XX
MapView Configuration,
Points page
CONT (F1)
To confirm the selections and to return to the
SYMBL (F3)
To view all point symbols and their descrip-
tions.
PAGE (F6)
<Show Yes or No Determines if points are displayed in MapView.
Points:>
<Point ID:> Yes or No Available for <Show Points: Yes>. Determines if the
ID of a point is displayed.
<Point Code:> Yes or No Available for <Show Points: Yes>. Determines if the
code of a point is displayed.
<Point Yes or No Available for <Show Points: Yes>. Determines if the
Height:> height of a point is displayed.
<Point CQ:> Yes or No Available for <Show Points: Yes>. Determines if the
coordinate quality of a point is displayed.
Displayable point infor- a) <Point ID:>

mation b) <Point Code:>
c) <Point Height:>
d) <Point CQ:>
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Lines&Areas page. Refer to paragraph "XX MapView Configu-
ration, Lines&Areas page".

XX Description of fields
Lines&Areas page
<Show Lines:> Yes or No Determines if lines are displayed in MapView.
<Show Line Yes or No Available for <Show Lines: Yes>. Determines if the
ID:> ID of a line is displayed.
<Show Line Yes or No Available for <Show Lines: Yes>. Determines if the
Code:> code of a line is displayed.
<Show Yes or No Determines if areas are displayed in MapView.
Areas:>
<Show Area Yes or No Available for <Show Areas: Yes>. Determines if the
ID:> ID of an area is displayed.
<Show Area Yes or No Available for <Show Areas: Yes>. Determines if the
Code:> code of an area is displayed.
Displayable line/area A line is shown as example.

information
a) <Show Line ID:>

b) <Show Line Code:>
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Display page. Refer to paragraph "XX MapView Configuration,
Display page".
XX Description of fields
Display page
<Show Pt When <200 Pts or Determines if point information is shown or not. For
Info:> As Configured <Show Pt Info: When <200 Pts> point information is
not shown when more than 200 points are displayed.
For <Show Pt Info: As Configured> the point infor-
mation, as configured in XX MapView Configura-
tion, Points page, is shown regardless of the number
of points being displayed.
<Datum View:> WGS 1984 or Determines the datum in which the points are viewed.
Local
) When both GPS and TPS data is being used,
it is possible that some data will not be
displayed.
<Toolbar:> Yes or No Determines if the toolbar of touch icons are displayed.
Refer to "30.4.3 Toolbar".
<Show Path:> Yes or No Displays the path of the rover as a dashed line.
Next step
CONT (F1) confirms the selections and returns to where XX MapView Configuration was
accessed.

30.4 MapView Components

30.4.1 Softkeys 30-12
30.4.2 Screen Area 30-14
30.4.3 Toolbar 30-16
30.4.4 Point Symbols 30-17
30.4.1 Softkeys
Description Standard functionality is provided by a number of softkeys within MapView. These softkeys
are available regardless of the mode in which MapView was accessed and always perform
the same functions.
Standard softkeys The softkeys described below are standard on all MapView screens. For descriptions of
mode specific softkeys see appropriate chapters.
Softkey Description
ZOOM+ (F4) To zoom into the map.
) Pressing ESC stops the zooming process. All keys become

active again.
ZOOM- (F5) To zoom out of the map.
) Pressing ESC stops the zooming process. All keys become

active again.
PAGE (F6) To change to another page on this screen.
SHIFT CONF (F2) To configure MapView. Accesses XX MapView Configuration.
Refer to "30.3 Configuring MapView".
SHIFT FIT (F3) To fit all displayable data into the screen area. Refer to "30.4.3
Toolbar" for more information.
Touch screen functions

Some softkey functionality can be replaced by touch screen functions.

Softkey Touch equivalent

PAGE (F6) Tap on a page tab.
SHIFT FIT (F3) Tap on fit touch icon. Refer to "30.4.3 Toolbar"
30.4.2 Screen Area
Description The MapView screen area is very similar in all cases. The positions of the scale bar, the
North arrow and the toolbar, if visible, do not change.
Standard screen
b
c a) Toolbar
b) North arrow
GPS12_142 c) Scale bar
Scale bar
Symbol Description
Scale of the current screen. The minimum is 0.5 m. There is no maximum for
the zoom but the scale cannot display values greater than 99000 m. In this
case the value displayed will be >99000 m.
North arrow
Symbol Description
North arrow. North is always orientated towards the top of the screen.

Toolbar
Symbol Description
Touch icon toolbar. Refer to "30.4.3 Toolbar" for more information about the
functionality of the touch icons in the toolbar.
Point with focus

Symbol Description
The point that has the focus.
Rover
Symbol Description
Available in survey mode. Position of the rover.
) The rover path is shown as dashed line.

30.4.3 Toolbar
Description Touch icons are available in a toolbar, if <Toolbar: Yes> in XX MapView Configuration,
Display page. The toolbar is always located on the left hand side of the screen. Some of the
functions performed by the touch icons can also be replicated using a softkey in the same
mode as when the touch icon appears. The softkey equivalent to each touch icon, if one
exists, are indicated below.
Touch icons in the

Touch icon Softkey Description
toolbar
SHIFT FIT (F3) Available as a touch icon in map mode. The fit touch
icon fits all displayable data, according to filters and
the map configuration, into the screen area, using the
largest possible scale.
- The windowing touch icon zooms to a specified area
window. An area window can be drawn by tapping on
the top left and the bottom right corner of the area.
This causes the screen to zoom to the selected area.

30.4.4 Point Symbols
Points When <Show Points: Yes> in XX MapView Configuration, points are displayed, in all
modes, according to their class.
Symbol Description
3D control point is a point of class CTRL with full coordinate triplet.
2D control point is a position only point of class CTRL.
Adjusted point is a point of class ADJ.
Reference point is a point of class REF.
Average point is a point of class AVGE.
Measured point is a point of class MEAS.
Single Point Position uploaded from LGO.
Navigated point is a point of class NAV.
Estimated point is a point of class EST.
Calculated COGO point is a point of class MEAS or CTRL depending on the
COGO calculation method.
) Points of class NONE or points of class CTRL/MEAS with a height only component cannot
be displayed in MapView.
) A list of the point types available, and their description, is available by pressing SYMBL (F3)
in XX MapView Configuration, Points page. Refer to "30.3 Configuring MapView".
30.5 Map Mode

30.5.1 MapView in Map Mode 30-19
30.5.2 Selecting a Point 30-21

30.5.1 MapView in Map Mode
Description The map mode of MapView is available as the Map page in data management and some
application programs. It can be used to display, select and edit points and display lines and
areas.
Access Refer to "30.2 Accessing MapView" paragraph "Example access for map mode:".
OR
From a choicelist in some screens, for example, in application programs, which access
data management.
OR
As a part of an application program, for example, COGO.
) The MANAGE Data: Job Name, Map page is used as the example below. The functions
described are the same for all Map pages in map mode.
MANAGE The softkeys described below are specific to MapView in map mode. Refer to "30.4.1
Data: Job Name, Softkeys" for descriptions of the standard softkeys.
Map page
FOCUS (F2) or DONE (F2)
To activate the focus tool and select a point
without using the touch screen. Refer to
"30.5.2 Selecting a Point".
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted points parameters.
Accesses MANAGE Edit Point: Point ID.
SHIFT CENTR (F4)
To centre the screen around the point with the
current focus, or the focus tool if DONE (F2) is
visible.
SHIFT FILTR (F5)
Available for FOCUS (F2). To change the filter
settings. Accesses MANAGE Sorts & Filters.

Key Touch equivalent
FOCUS (F2) Tap on a point.

30.5.2 Selecting a Point
Description Selecting a point in the map mode of MapView is possible using both the softkeys and the
touch screen.
Select a point using the

Step Description Display
softkeys step-by-step
1. Refer to "30.5.1 MapView in Map Mode" to access
MANAGE Data: Job Name, Map page.
) If no point field is highlighted on the previous page when

the Map page is accessed, then any point that is selected
will be assigned to the first point field on the previous page,
the second point to the second point field, etc.
If a point field is highlighted when the Map page is
accessed then the point selected will be assigned to that
field.
2. FOCUS (F2) to activate the focus tool. The focus tool is
made up of a square placed at the centre of dashed cross-
hairs. The focus tool always starts at the centre of the
screen area.
3. Use the arrow keys to navigate the focus tool to the point
to select. A point is available for selection when the square
is centred around the point symbol.
4. Press ENTER to select the point. The point parameter text,
as defined in XX MapView Configuration, Points page, is
highlighted.
) When there are multiple points within the same area and
the precise selection is unclear, pressing ENTER will
access XX Select Point.
5. Have multiple points been selected?
6. XX Select Point
Point ID The ID of the points within range of the point
selection.
Point Code The code of the points within range of the point
selection.
Select the desired point.
) MORE (F5) to display information about the point code, the

3D coordinate quality and class, the time the point was
stored and the date the point was stored.
7. CONT (F1) returns to MANAGE Data: Job Name, Map
page with the focus on the selected point.


8. DONE (F2) exits the focus tool.
Selecting a point using

the touch screen step-
by-step 1. Refer to "30.5.1 MapView in Map Mode" to access
MANAGE Data: Job Name, Map page.
) If no point field is highlighted on the previous page when

the Map page is accessed, then any point that is selected
will be assigned to the first point field on the previous page,
the second point to the second point field, etc.
If a point field is highlighted when the Map page is
accessed then the point selected will be assigned to that
field.
2. Tap on the point to be selected.
) When there are multiple points within the same area and
the precise selection is unclear, tapping on the point will
access XX Select Point.
3. Have multiple points been selected?
4. XX Select Point
Point ID The ID of the points within range of the point
selection.
Point Code The code of the points within range of the point
selection.
Select the desired point.
) MORE (F5) to display information about the point code, the

3D coordinate quality and class, the time the point was
stored and the date the point was stored.
5. CONT (F1) returns to MANAGE Data: Job Name, Map
page with the focus on the selected point.
6. A square is centred on the selected point and the point
parameter text, as defined in XX MapView Configuration,
Points page, is highlighted.

30.6 Plot Mode - MapView Screen Area
Description The plot mode of MapView is available as the Plot page in an application program and can
be used to view the results of the application program. Results are shown in black, all other
information, that is displayable, is shown in grey.
Access Refer to "30.2 Accessing MapView" paragraph "Example access for plot mode:".
OR
As a part of an application program, for example, COGO.
) The COGO XX Results, Plot page is used as the example below. The functions described
are the same for all Plot pages.
COGO The softkeys described below are specific to MapView in plot mode. Refer to "30.4.1
XX Results, Softkeys" for descriptions of the standard softkeys.
Plot page
SHIFT FACE (F1) and SHIFT PLAN (F1)

Available in REFPLANE XX Reference
Plane, Plot page. To change between the face
and the plane view of the plane.
SHIFT FIT R (F4)
To fit the results in the screen area.
SHIFT RFRSH (F5)
To refresh the screen.
Key Touch Equivalent
SHIFT FIT R (F4) Tap on fit results touch icon. Refer to "30.4.3
Toolbar"
Example of results
Application Display Description
displayed in MapView
on Plot page COGO Intersec- Intersecting lines
tion, Bearing - with known bear-
Bearing ings from known
points
COGO line Points defining the

calculation, line and those
Segmentation created on the line


COGO Shift, Original points in
Rotate & Scale grey, calculated
COGO points in
black
Hidden Point, Line between

Bearing and known point and
Distance hidden point
Reference Line, Reference line or

Edit Reference arc with target point
Line as offset from refer-
ence line
Reference A dashed rectangle
Plane, Edit indicates the face
Reference view of the plane.
Plane
Update Setups Points from the job

in grey, setup
points and updated
backsight points in
black

30.7 Survey Mode

30.7.1 MapView in Survey Mode 30-30
30.7.2 MapView in Staking Out Survey Mode 30-32
30.7.1 MapView in Survey Mode
Description The survey mode of MapView is available as the Map page in Survey and is used to display
the positions of the reference station and the rover during a survey. It is also used by the
Stakeout, Reference Line and Reference Plane application programs to assist in the staking
out/measuring of points.
Refer to "30.7.2 MapView in Staking Out Survey Mode" for more information about using
MapView when staking out points.
Access Refer to "30.2 Accessing MapView" paragraph "Example access for survey mode:".
) The SURVEY Survey: Job Name, Map page is used as the example below. The functions
described are the same for all Map pages in survey mode.
SURVEY The softkeys described below are specific to MapView in survey mode. Refer to "30.4.1
Survey: Job Name, Softkeys" for descriptions of the standard softkeys.
Map page

SHIFT FACE (F1) and SHIFT PLAN (F1)

Available in REFPLANE Measure Point on
Plane, Map page. To change between the
face and the plane view of the plane.
SHIFT CENTR (F4)
To centre the screen around the point with the
current focus or the focus tool, if FOCUS (F2)
is active.
SHIFT RFRSH (F5)
To refresh the screen.

Key Touch equivalent
SHIFT FIT (F3) Tap on fit touch icon. Refer to "30.4.3 Toolbar".
30.7.2 MapView in Staking Out Survey Mode
Description When staking out a point in the Stakeout or Reference Line application programs, the Map
page is available. The MapView survey mode is provided for this operation, with some differ-
ences.
In the Stakeout application program, active points can be selected using the touch
screen, as points to be staked.
An arrow indicating the direction from the current position to the point to be staked is
provided.
A box provides information such as the distance to the stakeout point and the CUT/FILL
value so the point to be staked can be found.
Data displayed For Stakeout application program.

From <Job:>, all points and displayable lines and areas are shown in grey.
From <Stakeout Job:>, all points, according to filter settings, are displayed in black; lines
and areas are not displayed.
For Reference Line application program.

From <Job:>, all points and displayable lines and areas are shown in grey.
The point to be staked is displayed in black.
The reference line/arc is displayed in black.
) The STAKEOUT XX Stakeout, Map page is used as the example below. The functions
described are the same for all Map pages available when staking out.

Access step-by-step Example access for MapView in survey mode, Stakeout
Step Description
1. Select Main Menu: Programs...\Stakeout.
OR
Press PROG. Highlight Stakeout. CONT (F1). Refer to "34.2 Accessing the
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin.
OR
OR
Press STAKE (F5) from another application program, for example COGO.
2. CONT (F1) to access STAKEOUT XX Stakeout.
3. PAGE (F6) until STAKEOUT XX Stakeout, Map page is active.
STAKEOUT The softkeys described below are specific to MapView in survey mode, staking out. Refer to
XX Stakeout, "30.4.1 Softkeys" for descriptions of the standard softkeys.
Map page
SHIFT CENTR (F4)
To centre the screen around the rover.
<DIST:> Output Horizontal distance from the current position to the
point to be staked.
<CUT:> Output The negative height difference from the height of the
current position to the height of the point to be staked.
<FILL:> Output The positive height difference from the height of the

Update Setups GPS1200 31-1
31 Update Setups

31.1 Terminology 31-2
31.2 Procedure of Updating Setups 31-4
31.1 Terminology
Description This chapter describes technical terms related to Setup.
Setup Setup is an application program on TPS1200 instruments. It can be used to orientate the
TPS1200 instrument.
Backsight In a TPS survey, the instrument is set up over a point.

A reading onto a fixed point of reference, usually a benchmark of some sort, is taken in order
to orientate the instrument. This reading is called backsight.
Since a survey progresses from a point of known position to points of unknown position, a
backsight is a reading looking backward along the line of progress.
Unknown backsight A point with unknown coordinates used as backsight point is called unknown backsight point.
point
It may happen that at the time of a set up, the coordinates of the backsight point are not
known yet. The survey starts with wrong angles. The coordinates of the backsight point are
determined later by a COGO calculation, for example, or by GPS.
If the coordinates of the unknown backsight point are determined, the setup using this back-
sight has to be updated in order to correct the angles. Additionally, the coordinates of all TPS
measurements related to this setup must be recalculated.
Relevance for GPS

An unknown backsight point can be used to set up a TPS1200 instrument. After finishing the
TPS job, the coordinates of the unknown backsight point can be determined using GPS1200
with the CompactFlash from the TPS1200 instrument. When assigning the same point ID of
the unknown backsight point to a point measured with GPS1200, the TPS setup and all
related calculations can be updated on GPS1200.

31.2 Procedure of Updating Setups
Access XX CONFIRMATION: 1100 is automatically accessed when

a TPS1200 setup with an unknown backsight point exists on the CompactFlash card in a
GPS1200 receiver
AND
the same point ID of the unknown backsight point is assigned to a point measured with
GPS1200.
XX
CONFIRMATION: 1100
VIEW (F3)
To view all setups from TPS1200 using the
unknown backsight point whose point ID has
been assigned to a point measured with
GPS1200.
NO (F4)
was accessed without updating any setup from
TPS1200 using the unknown backsight point.
YES (F6)
To update all setups from TPS1200 using the
unknown backsight point and to return to the

Next step
VIEW (F3) views all setups using the unknown backsight and accesses GPS1200 Update
Setups with new BS. Refer to paragraph "GPS1200 Update Setups with new BS, Setups
page".
GPS1200
Update Setups with new
BS,
Setups page
CONT (F1)
To return to XX CONFIRMATION: 1100.
MORE (F5)
To change between time and date of when the
setup was stored.
PAGE (F6)
Column Description
Setup The identifier for the setup from TPS1200 using the unknown backsight point
whose point ID has been assigned to a point measured with GPS1200
Date The date the setup was stored. The format is as defined in CONFIGURE
Units & Formats, Time page.
Time The time the setup was stored.
Next step
PAGE (F6) accesses Update Setups with new BS, Plot page. Refer to paragraph
"GPS1200 Update Setups with new BS, Plot page".
GPS1200 The functionality and softkeys available are described in the MapView chapter. Refer to "30.6
Update Setups with new Plot Mode - MapView Screen Area".
BS, Points from the job are displayed in grey, setup points and updated backsight points are
Plot page displayed in black.
CONT (F1)
To update the all setups.
PAGE (F6)
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to XX CONFIRMATION: 1100 where either all or no setups can be
updated.

NTRIP via Internet GPS1200 32-1
32 NTRIP via Internet

32.1 Overview 32-2
32.2 Configuring a Real-Time Rover for Using NTRIP Service 32-6
32.3 Configuring a GRX1200 Pro for Connecting a NTRIP Server 32-16
32.1 Overview
Description Networked Transport of RTCM via Internet Protocol

is a protocol streaming real-time corrections over the Internet.
is a generic protocol based on the Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP/1.1.
is used to send differential correction data or other kinds of streaming data to stationary
or mobile users over the Internet, allowing simultaneous PC, laptop, PDA, or receiver
connections to a broadcasting host.
supports wireless Internet access through mobile IP networks like digital cellular phones
or modems.
System components NTRIP consists of three system components:

NTRIPClients NTRIPServers NTRIPCaster
NTRIPClient 1 NTRIPClient x
HTTP Streams
NTRIPCaster
HTTP Streams

NTRIPServer 1 NTRIPServer x
NTRIPSource 1 NTRIPSource x
NTRIPClient The NTRIPClient receives data streams. This could be, for example a real-time rover
receiving real-time corrections.
In order to receive real-time corrections, the NTRIPClient must first send
a user ID
a password
an identification name, the so-called MountPoint, from which real-time corrections are to
be received
to the NTRIPCaster.
NTRIPServer The NTRIPServer transfers data streams.

In order to send real-time corrections, the NTRIPServer must first send
a password
an identification name, the so-called MountPoint, where the real-time corrections come
from
to the NTRIPCaster.
Before sending real-time corrections to the NTRIPCaster for the first time, a registration form
must be completed. This is available from the NTRIPCaster administration centre. Refer to
the Internet.
NTRIPSource The NTRIPSource generates data streams. This could be, for example a GRX1200 Pro
configured as reference sending out real-time corrections.
NTRIPCaster The NTRIPCaster

is an Internet server handling various data streams to and from the NTRIPServers and
NTRIPClients.
checks the requests from NTRIPClients and NTRIPServers to see if they are registered
to receive or provide real-time corrections.
decides whether there is streaming data to be sent or to be received.
) The NTRIPServer could be the GRX1200 Classic receiver itself. This means the GPS1200
receiver is both the NTRIPSource generating the real-time data and also the NTRIPServer
transferring this data to the NTRIPCaster.

Graphic
NTRiPClient
NTRiPServer
er
NTRiPCast
rver
InternetSe
GPS12_149 NTRIP and its role in the Internet

32.2 Configuring a Real-Time Rover for Using NTRIP Service

32.2.1 Configuring an Access to the Internet 32-7
32.2.2 Configuring to Connect to a Server 32-10
32.2.3 Using the NTRIP Service with a Real-Time Rover 32-13

32.2.1 Configuring an Access to the Internet
Requirements Firmware v1.5 or higher must be loaded on the GPS1200 receiver.

Firmware v1.42 or higher must be loaded on the RX1200.
) To access to the Internet with a GPS1200 receiver, General Packed Radio System devices
will normally be used. GPRS is a telecommunication standard for transmitting data packages
using the Internet Protocol (IP).
Configure access to The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
Internet step-by-step information on screens.
chapter
2. In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight Internet.
3. EDIT (F3) to access CONFIGURE Internet Interface.
4. CONFIGURE Internet Interface 20.10
<Internet: Yes:>
<IP Address: Dynamic>
<User ID:> Some providers ask for a user ID to allow connecting to
the Internet via GPRS. Contact your provider if a user ID needs to be
used.
chapter
<Password:> Some providers ask for a password to allow
connecting to the Internet via GPRS. Contact your provider if a pass-
word needs to be used.
5. DEVCE (F5) to access CONFIGURE GPRS Internet Device.
6. CONFIGURE GPRS Internet Devices
Highlight the GPRS / Internet device to be used.
)7.
NEW (F2) to create a new GPRS / Internet device.
CONT (F1) to return to CONFIGURE Internet Interface.
21.3
8. CONT (F1) to return to CONFIGURE Interfaces.

9. CTRL (F4) to access CONFIGURE GPRS/Internet Connection.
10. CONFIGURE GPRS/Internet Connection 22.7
<APN:> Available for some devices. The Access Point Name of a
server from the network provider, which allows access to data serv-
ices. Contact your provider to get the correct APN. Mandatory for
using GPRS.
) CODES (F3) Available for digital cellular phones of GSM technology.

To enter the Personal Identification Number of the SIM card. If the
PIN is locked for any reason, for example the wrong PIN was entered,
input the Personal UnblocKing code for access to the PIN.
11. CONT (F1) to return to GPS1200 Main Menu.


chapter
) The receiver is now online to the Internet. The Internet online status
icon is displayed. But because GPRS is being used, no charges are
yet made since no data transfer from the Internet has yet taken place.
12. USER
13. STAT (F3) to access STATUS Status Menu.
14. Highlight Interfaces....
15. ENTER to access STATUS Interfaces.
16. STATUS Interfaces
Highlight Internet.
17. IFACE (F3) to access STATUS Ethernet.
18. STATUS Ethernet 29.5.5
19. Check the Internet online status.
20. CONT (F1) to return to STATUS Interfaces.
32.2.2 Configuring to Connect to a Server
Requirements The configurations from the previous chapter must have been completed. Refer to "32.2.1
Configuring an Access to the Internet".
Configure connect to a The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
server step-by-step information on screens.
chapter
1. Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces....
2. CONFIGURE Interfaces
Highlight Real-Time.
3. EDIT (F3) to access CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
<R-Time Mode: Rover>
<R-Time Data:> Select the type of data to be received from the
Internet.
<Port: NETx>
6. Highlight Real-Time.
8. CONFIGURE Set NET Port 22.8
<User: Client>


chapter
<IP Address:> Type in the IP address of the server to be accessed
in the Internet.
<TCP/IP Port:> The port of the Internet server through which the data
is provided. Each server has several ports for various services.
<Auto CONEC: Yes> Allows for automatic connection between the
rover and the Internet when a point is occupied during a survey.
Ending the point occupation also ends the Internet connection.
) Once the receiver is connected to the server a message is displayed

in the message line.
11. USER
12. STAT (F3) to access STATUS Status Menu.
13. Highlight Interfaces....
14. ENTER to access STATUS Interfaces.
15. STATUS Interfaces
Highlight Real-Time.
16. DEVCE (F5) to access STATUS Device: Internet.
17. STATUS Device: Internet
Check the Internet online status.
chapter
18. CONT (F1) to return to STATUS Interfaces.

32.2.3 Using the NTRIP Service with a Real-Time Rover
Requirements The configurations from the previous chapter must have been completed. Refer to "32.2.2
Configuring to Connect to a Server".
Use NTRIP service step-

Step Description
by-step
2. In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight Real-Time.
4. CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode
<Port: NETx> must be selected.
5. ROVER (F2) to access CONFIGURE Additional Rover Options.
6. PAGE (F6) to access CONFIGURE Additional Rover Options, NTRIP page.
7. CONFIGURE Additional Rover Options, NTRIP page
8. <Use NTRIP: Yes>
<User ID:> A user ID is required to receive data from to the NTRIPCaster. Contact
the NTRIP administrator for information.
<Password:> A password is required to receive data from the NTRIPCaster.
Contact the NTRIP administrator for information.
9. SRCE (F5) to access CONFIGURE NTRIP Source-Table.
10. CONFIGURE NTRIP Source-Table
All MountPoints are listed. MountPoints are the NTRIP servers sending out real-
time data. This screen consists of two columns:
Step Description
First column MountPoint:
The abbreviations for the MountPoints.
Second column Identifier:
The city where the MountPoint is located.
Highlight a MountPoint about which more information is required. This information
helps to configure the receiver to use the selected MountPoint as a reference.
11. INFO (F3) to access CONFIGURE MountPoint: XX.
12. CONFIGURE MountPoint: XX, General page
<Format:> The real-time data format sent out by the MountPoint.
<FormatDet:> Details about <Format:>, for example the RTCM message types
including update rates in seconds displayed in brackets.
<Authentic:> The type of password protection required for the authorisation to the
NTRIPServer. <Authentic: None> if no password is required. <Authentic:
Basic> if the password need not be encrypted. <Authentic: Digest> if the pass-
word must be encrypted.
<NMEA:> Indicates if the MountPoint must receive GGA NMEA data from the
rover in order to compute VRS information.
<Charges:> Indicates if charges are currently made for the connection.
<Carrier:> The type of carrier message sent out.
<System:> The type of satellite system supported by the MountPoint.
13. PAGE (F6) to access CONFIGURE MountPoint: XX, Location page.
14. CONFIGURE MountPoint: XX, Location page

Step Description
Detailed information about the location of the MountPoint is displayed.
15. PAGE (F6) to access CONFIGURE MountPoint: XX, Miscell page.
16. CONFIGURE MountPoint: XX, Miscell page
<Generator:> The hard- or software generating the data stream.
<Compress:> The name of the compression / encryption algorithm.
<Info:> Miscellaneous information if available.
) PREV (F2) to display information about the previous MountPoint in the list.
)
17.
NEXT (F3) to display information about the next MountPoint in the list.
CONT (F1) to return to CONFIGURE NTRIP Source-Table.
18. CONT (F1) to return to CONFIGURE Additional Rover Options.
) SHIFT CONEC (F3) and SHIFT DISCO (F3) are now available in all applications
to connect to and disconnect from the NTRIPServer.
32.3 Configuring a GRX1200 Pro for Connecting a NTRIP Server
Description A NTRIPServer is built into the GRX1200 Pro. It is part of the instrument firmware.
Using port NET, a GRX1200 Pro can be set up as a real-time reference connected to the
Internet. Real-time data can be sent to the NTRIPCaster.
LEICA GPS Spider is needed to start the GRX1200 Pro and connect it to the NTRIPCaster
since a GRX1200 Pro cannot be started using the RX1200. Once the sensor is started,
LEICA GPS Spider can be disconnected and is no longer needed. All functionality needed
from LEICA GPS Spider to start the GRX1200 Pro does not require a dongle and can be
downloaded from the Leica website download area.
Configure a GRX1200 The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
Pro step-by-step information on screens.
chapter
) The following steps describe the configuration for connecting from

LEICA GPS Spider.
1. Configure the NET parameters. 18.5
3. Highlight Remote.
4. EDIT (F3) to access CONFIGURE Remote.
5. CONFIGURE Remote
Highlight NET2. This port is to connect from LEICA GPS Spider.


chapter
7. CONFIGURE Set NET Port
<User: Server>
) The configuration for the connection from LEICA GPS Spider is

finished.
In the following steps describe the configuration to access the NTRIP-
Caster via Internet.
9. Highlight Real-Time.
11. CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode
<Port: NET1> This port is to connect to the NTRIPCaster.
12. REF (F2) to access CONFIGURE Additional Reference Options.
13. PAGE (F6) to change to CONFIGURE Additional Reference
Options, NTRIP page.
14. CONFIGURE Additional Reference Options, NTRIP page
<Use NTRIP: Yes>
Type in password and MountPoint.
15. CONT (F1) to return to CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
17. CONFIGURE Interfaces
chapter
Highlight Real-Time and check that NET1 is displayed for the Real-
Time interface.
19. CONFIGURE Set NET Port
<User Client>
<Auto CONEC: Yes>
) The configuration to access the NTRIPCaster via Internet is finished.
) Ensure that the GRX1200 Pro is in GPS1200 Main Menu when

connecting from LEICA GPS Spider else uploading the settings or
starting the receiver may fail.
) The receiver is now prepared for streaming real-time data to the

NTRIPCaster.
) LEICA GPS Spider is needed to connect the receiver to the NRIP-

caster. Real-time parameters can also be configured using LEICA
GPS Spider.
21. Install LEICA GPS Spider.
22. Start LEICA GPS Spider.
23. Create a site. online help
in LEICA
GPS Spider


chapter
24. Connect to the receiver.
25. Configure the real-time output settings as required.
26. Select port NET1 which has previously been configured as Client.
27. Upload the settings to the GRX1200 Pro.
28. Press Start.
) The GRX1200 Pro connects automatically to the NTRIPCaster.

Streaming of real-time data starts and continues until the site is
stopped again.
A message on the RX controller will indicate if the connection to the
NTIPCaster is successful.
) In case of connection interruptions, which could be caused by power

or network outages, the GRX1200 Pro will automatically reconnect to
the NTRIPCaster.
) LEICA GPS Spider can be closed.

Reference Station GPS1200 33-1
33 Reference Station
Description The GRX1200 Series
are designed to operate for specific reference station applications using remote control
software, for example LEICA GPS Spider reference station software.
support internal logging of raw observations which can be downloaded using an external
remote control software package such as LEICA GPS Spider.
support streaming output of GPS raw observations and status information.
can log or stream out data from specific external devices approved by Leica Geosystems,
such as meteo and tilt, which can be directly output to an external remote control software
package.
can be used, with a suitable radio, digital cellular phone or modem attached, to transmit
data for real-time operations using proprietary as well as standard RTCM, CMR and
CMR+ formats. The GRX1200 Series cannot receive reference station broadcasts and
therefore cannot be used as a real-time rover receiver.
have the same receiver and measurement performance as the other GPS1200 receivers.
Special features To operate for specific reference station applications, the GRX1200 Series is, when
compared with the other GPS1200 receivers, equipped with some special features.
Specific to the GRX1200 Series: Controllable dual external power supply

Support of external devices such as meteo and
tilt
Additional features for GRX1200 Classic Ring buffer logging
and GRX1200 Pro:
Additional features for GRX1200 Pro: One Ethernet port including three logical NET
ports
One port to output PPS
One port to input event messages
One port for input from an external oscillator
) Refer to the GPS1200 User Manual for more information on the equipment setup and getting
started.
) Refer to the other chapters in this manual for information on functionality.
Reference Station GPS1200 33-2

Application Programs - General GPS1200 34-1
34 Application Programs - General

34.1 Overview 34-2
34.2 Accessing the Application Programs Menu 34-4
34.1 Overview
Description Application programs are software packages supporting specific tasks. Available are:
COGO Reference Line Survey
Determine Coordinate Reference Plane Wake-Up
System RoadRunner Customised application
DTM Stakeout Stakeout programs
For an explanation of the application programs refer to the relevant chapters. The RoadRu-
nner application program is explained in a separate manual.
Loadable and non-load- Loadable application programs: Can be loaded onto the receiver.
able application Can be deleted from the receiver.
programs Non-loadable application program: Are always available on the receiver.
Survey and Wake-Up are a non-loadable application
programs. To get an update for the programs, the
system software has to be reloaded.
Licence key Some loadable application programs are protected. They are activated through a specific
licence key. This can either be typed in in Main Menu: Tools...\Licence Keys or the first
time the application program is started. Refer to "28 Tools...\Licence Keys" for information
on how to type in or upload a licence key. A licence key is required for:
Reference Line DTM Stakeout RoadRunner
Reference Plane

Customised application Customised application programs can be developed locally using the GeoC++ development
programs environment. Information on the GeoC++ development environment is available on request
from the Leica Geosystems representative.
Customised application programs always run in the language they were developed in.
34.2 Accessing the Application Programs Menu
Description The application programs menu contains all loaded application programs including Survey.
They are listed in the order in which they were loaded. Selecting an option in the menu starts
the application program assigned to the option. Configurations and measurements that can
be performed depend on the application program.
The screen of the application programs menu is called GPS1200 Programs.
Access to the applica- Select Main Menu: Programs....

tion programs menu OR
Press PROG.
GPS1200
Programs
CONT (F1)
To start the highlighted application program.

Next step
Select an option in the menu to open the application. Refer to the chapter on the individual
application programs.
) Four application programs can be open at one time. XX Begin is shown for the application
program opened first, but not for the following application programs.
Survey - General GPS1200 35-1
35 Survey - General

35.1 Accessing Survey 35-2
35.2 GPS Surveying Techniques 35-5
35.3 Surveying Points 35-9
35.4 Adding Annotations for All Types of Operations 35-29
35.5 Timed Occupations for All Types of Operations 35-31
35.6 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations 35-34
35.1 Accessing Survey
Access Select Main Menu: Survey.

OR
Select Main Menu: Programs...\Survey.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen SURVEY Survey Begin. Refer to "5.1
OR
OR
Press PROG. Highlight Survey. CONT (F1). Refer to "34.2 Accessing the Application
Programs Menu" for information on the PROG key.
SURVEY
Survey Begin
CONT (F1)
To accept changes and access the subsequent
screen. The chosen settings become active.
CONF (F2)
Available for <R-Time Mode: None> and <R-
Time Mode: Rover>. To configure auto points
and hidden point measurements. Accesses
SURVEY Configuration. Refer to "36 Survey -
Auto Points" and "37 Survey - Hidden Points"
for information on the fields and keys.
CSYS (F6)

<Job:> Choicelist The active job. All jobs from Main Menu:
Manage...\Jobs can be selected.
<Coord Output The coordinate system currently attached to the
System:> selected <Job:>.
<Codelist:> Choicelist No codes are stored in the selected <Job:>. All
codelists from Main Menu: Manage...\Codelists can
be selected.
Output Codes have already been stored in the selected
<Job:>. If codes had been copied from a System
RAM codelist, then the name of the codelist is
displayed. If codes have not been copied from a
System RAM codelist but typed in manually, then the
name of the active job is displayed.
<Config Set:> Choicelist The active configuration set. All configuration sets
from Main Menu: Manage...\Configuration Sets
can be selected.
The selection for <R-Time Mode:> in the configura-
tion set determines the subsequent screen.
<Antenna:> Choicelist The antenna currently defined in the selected config-
uration set. All antennas from Main Menu:
Manage...\Antennas can be selected.
Next step
IF surveying THEN
points with <R-Time CONT (F1) accepts the changes and accesses SURVEY Survey:
Mode: None> Job Name. Refer to "35.3.1 Post-Processed Kinematic and Static
Operations".
points with <R-Time CONT (F1) accepts the changes and accesses SURVEY Set Up
Mode: Reference> Reference Station. Refer to "35.3.2 Real-Time Reference Opera-
tions".
points with <R-Time CONT (F1) accepts the changes and accesses SURVEY Survey:
Mode: Rover> Job Name. Refer to "35.3.3 Real-Time Rover Operations".
lines or areas Refer to "8.4 Line/Area Management".

35.2 GPS Surveying Techniques
Description Depending on the surveying task and the receivers being used, certain GPS surveying tech-
niques are possible. The three existing types of GPS surveying techniques are:
Static
Post-processed kinematic, rover
Real-time, reference and rover
GPS surveying tech- The following table explains the three existing GPS surveying techniques.
niques
GPS surveying Characteristic Description
technique
Static Way of working Reference set up over a point with accurately
known coordinates.
Rover set up over a point with known or unknown
coordinates.
Data recorded at both receivers simultaneously
at the same data rate, typically 15, 30 or 60 s.
Post-processing is compulsory.
Use For long baselines, geodetic networks, tectonic plate
studies.
Accuracy High over long and very long baselines.
Working speed Slow
technique
Post-proc- Way of working Reference set up as static over a point with accu-
essed kine- rately known coordinates.
matic
Rover moves from one point to another. The
receiver remains turned on while moving.
Static and moving raw observations are
collected.
Post-processing is compulsory.
Use For detail surveys and measuring many points in
quick succession.
Accuracy High for baselines up to 30 km.
Working speed Very efficient for surveying many points that are
close together.
Real-time, Way of working Reference set up as static over a point with accu-
reference and rately known coordinates in WGS 1984.
rover
Rover equipment is set up on a pole and moves
from one unknown point to another.
A data link, for example a radio or digital cellular
phone, transmits satellite data from the reference
to the rover.


technique
Data coming from the reference and GPS signals
received on the rover are processed together on
the rover as the survey is carried out in real time.
Ambiguities are solved, coordinates of the
surveyed points are calculated and displayed.
Application programs as on a conventional instru-
ments like stakeout or COGO can be performed.
Post-processing is optional.
Use For surveying detail with many points in one area.
Accuracy High for baselines up to 30 km.
Working speed Very efficient as the results are generated in the
field.
)
GPS surveying tech-
Refer to standard surveying literature for more details on GPS surveying techniques.
The type of receiver in use determines the GPS surveying techniques that can be carried out.
niques depending on
receivers Receiver Static Post-processed kinematic Real-time DGPS Real-time
GX1210 x x - -
initialisation while static
GX1210 with x x x -
DGPS/RTCM initialisation while static
vX.X option
Receiver Static Post-processed kinematic Real-time DGPS Real-time
GX1220 x x - -
initialisation while moving
GX1220 with x x x -
DGPS/RTCM initialisation while moving
vX.X option
GX1230 x x x x
initialisation while moving

35.3 Surveying Points

35.3.1 Post-Processed Kinematic and Static Operations 35-10
35.3.2 Real-Time Reference Operations 35-14
35.3.3 Real-Time Rover Operations 35-24
35.3.1 Post-Processed Kinematic and Static Operations
Description Refer to "35.2 GPS Surveying Techniques" for information on static and post-processed
kinematic surveying techniques.
Requirements A typical configuration set for a static or post-processed kinematic operation is used.
<R-Time Mode: None> in CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
Access step-by-step The table describes the main access to SURVEY Survey: Job Name.
Access is possible from other screens where individual point measurements are needed, for
example from COGO Inverse with SURVY (F5).
Step Description
1. Refer to "35.1 Accessing Survey" to access SURVEY Survey Begin.
2. In SURVEY Survey Begin select a job.
3. Select a typical configuration set with <R-Time Mode: None>.
4. Select an antenna.
) The position mode icon is the moving icon. This indicates that the antenna can be
moved around and that no static observations are being recorded.
) If configured for post-processed kinematic operations, the logging of moving

observations begins. This is also indicated in the position mode icon.
SURVEY The fields shown are those from a typical configuration set for static or post-processed kine-
Survey: Job Name, matic operations. The screen described consists of the Survey page and the Map page. The
Survey page

explanations for the softkeys given below are valid for the Survey page. Refer to "30
MapView Interactive Display Feature" for information on the keys on the Map page.
The fields and functionality of this screen vary slightly when accessed from other application
programs where individual point measurements are needed.
OCUPY (F1)
To start logging of static observations. The
position mode icon changes to the static icon.
(F1) changes to STOP.
STOP (F1)
To end logging of static observations when
enough data is collected. When <Auto STOP:
Yes> in CONFIGURE Point Occupation
Settings, logging of static observations ends
automatically as defined by the stop criteria.
The position mode icon changes to the moving
icon. (F1) changes to STORE.
STORE (F1)
To store the measured point. When <Auto
STORE: Yes> in CONFIGURE Point Occupa-
tion Settings, the measured point is stored
automatically. (F1) changes to OCUPY.
It may happen that a point with the same point
ID exists in the job. If the codes and/or attribute
values of the new and the existing point do not
match, a screen opens where they can be
corrected. Refer to "10.5 Code and Attribute
Mismatch".
H PNT(F5)
To measure a hidden point. Refer to "37
Survey - Hidden Points".
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT CONF (F2)
To configure auto points and hidden point
measurements. Accesses SURVEY Configu-
ration. Refer to "36 Survey - Auto Points".
Refer to "37 Survey - Hidden Points" for infor-
mation on the fields and keys.
SHIFT INDIV (F5) and SHIFT RUN (F5)
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template and
the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "17.1 ID Templates".
<Point ID:> User input The identifier for manually occupied points. The
configured point ID template is used. The ID can be
changed:
To start a new sequence of point IDs overtype the
point ID.


For an individual point ID independent of the ID
template SHIFT INDIV (F5). SHIFT RUN (F5)
changes back to the next ID from the configured
ID template. Refer to "17.1 ID Templates".
<Antenna Ht:> User input The default antenna height as defined in the active
configuration set is suggested. Refer to "3 Antenna
Heights". Changing the antenna height here does not
update the default antenna height as defined in the
active configuration set. The changed antenna height
is used until the application program is exited.
<3D CQ:> Output The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed
position.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to another page on this screen.
35.3.2 Real-Time Reference Operations
Description Refer to "35.2 GPS Surveying Techniques" for information on the real-time reference
surveying technique.
Requirements A typical configuration set for real-time reference operations is used.

A real-time interface is configured correctly.
The real-time device is attached to the receiver and working properly.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
3. Select a typical configuration set with <R-Time Mode: Reference>.
5. CONT (F1) to access SURVEY Set Up Reference Station.
SURVEY The settings on this screen set the reference station and its coordinates.
Set Up Reference
Station

CONT (F1)
COORD (F2)
To view other coordinate types. Local coordi-
nates are available when a local coordinate
system is active.
LAST (F3)
To use the same coordinates as when the
receiver was last used as reference station.
Available when the receiver has previously
been used as reference station and if no point
in the active job has the same point ID as the
one last used as reference station.
Refer to paragraph "Set the reference station
coordinates step-by-step".
HERE (F4)
To use the coordinates of the current naviga-
tion position as reference station coordinates.
Refer to paragraph "Set the reference station
coordinates step-by-step".
To change between the ellipsoidal and the
orthometric height. Available for local coordi-
nates.
<Point ID:> Choicelist The point selected as reference station.
Opening the choicelist opens SURVEY Data: Job
Name which is similar to MANAGE Data: Job Name.
Refer to "8.2 Accessing Data Management".
Next step
The reference station coordinates can be entered in three different ways.
IF the coordinates of the THEN
reference station
are known Refer to paragraph "Set the reference station coordinates
step-by-step", "Using a known point stored in the active job".
are those from the last used Refer to paragraph "Set the reference station coordinates
reference station step-by-step", "Using the coordinates from the last used refer-
ence station".

IF the coordinates of the THEN

reference station
are those of the current Refer to paragraph "Set the reference station coordinates
navigation position step-by-step", "Using the coordinates of the current navigation
position".
Set the reference Using a known point stored in the active job
station coordinates The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. Refer to paragraph "Access step-by-step" to access SURVEY Set Up
Reference Station.
2. SURVEY Set Up Reference Station
Select the point to be used as reference station.
) A point may already be stored in the active job either by

manual entry, by measuring or by transfer from LGO.
) If a new point is to be created, open the choicelist for <Point

ID:> and NEW (F2).
) If an existing point is to be edited, open the choicelist for

<Point ID:> and EDIT (F3).
3. Check the antenna height.
chapter
4. CONT (F1) to access SURVEY Survey: Job Name. SURVEY
Survey: Job
Name.
Using the coordinates from the last used reference station

chapter
) The receiver must have previously been used as reference station.

After turning off, the reference station coordinates are stored in the
System RAM. They can be used again the next time the receiver is
used as a reference station. This means that even if the Compact-
Flash card that previously contained the reference station coordi-
nates is formatted, the last used coordinates can still be used.
Reference Station.
2. LAST (F3)
) The point ID and coordinates of the last used reference station are
displayed in grid. When no local coordinate system is active,
WGS 1984 coordinates are displayed.
3. Check the antenna height.


chapter
Survey: Job
Name.
Using the coordinates of the current navigation position

chapter
Reference Station.
2. HERE (F4) to access SURVEY New Reference Point.
3. SURVEY New Reference Point, Coords page
The current navigation position in grid is displayed. When no local
coordinate system is active, WGS 1984 coordinates are displayed.
Type in a point ID for this new point.
) COORD (F2) views other coordinate types. Local coordinates are

available when a local coordinate system is active.
) SHIFT ELL H (F2) and SHIFT ORTH (F2). Available for local
geodetic coordinates. Changes between the ellipsoidal and the ortho-
metric height.
5. SURVEY New Reference Point, Code page 17.3
chapter
softkeys.
<Point Code:> All codes from the job codelist can be selected.
Codes for points can be typed in but not selected from a codelist.
<Point Code:> The point code to be stored with the point. A check
is performed to see if a point code of this name already exists in
the job. If so, the according attributes are shown.

code.
Survey - General
) DEFLT (F5) recalls the default attribute values for the selected code.
GPS1200 35-20

chapter
7. STORE (F1) stores the new point and all associated information and
returns to SURVEY Set Up Reference Station.
The properties stored with the point are:
Class: NAV
Sub class: GPS Code Only
Source: Survey (Static)
8. SURVEY Set Up Reference Station
The coordinates of the new point are displayed.
Check the antenna height.
Survey: Job
Name.
SURVEY The appearance and functionality of the screen is identical for all real-time reference config-
Survey: Job Name uration sets. Display masks cannot be used for real-time reference configuration sets.
STOP (F1)
To end the point occupation, store the point
and to return to GPS1200 Main Menu.
<Point ID:> Output The identifier for the reference station point.
<Antenna Ht:> Output The antenna height as entered in SURVEY Set Up
Reference Station is displayed. Refer to "3 Antenna
Heights".
<Time at Output The time from when the point is occupied until point
Point:> occupation is stopped.
<GDOP:> Output The current GDOP of the computed position.

Next step
STOP (F1) to end the point occupation, store the point and to return to GPS1200 Main Menu.
35.3.3 Real-Time Rover Operations
Description Refer to "35.2 GPS Surveying Techniques" for information on the real-time rover surveying
technique.
Requirements A typical configuration set for real-time rover operations is used.

A real-time interface is configured correctly.
The according real-time device is attached and working properly.
Step Description
3. Select a typical configuration set with <R-Time Mode: Rover>.
) The arrow at the real-time device and real-time status icon flashes when real-time
messages are being received.
) Fixing ambiguity begins. The current position status is indicated by the position
status icon. When working with code only corrections, an ambiguity solution is not
attempted.

SURVEY The fields shown are those from a typical configuration set for real-time rover operations.
Survey: Job Name, The screen described consists of the Survey page and the Map page. The explanations for
Survey page the softkeys given below are valid for the Survey page. Refer to "30 MapView Interactive
Display Feature" for information on the keys on the Map page.
The fields and functionality of this screen vary slightly when accessed from other application
programs where individual point measurements are needed.
OCUPY (F1)
To start recording positions. The position mode
icon changes to the static icon. (F1) changes to
STOP.
STOP (F1)
To end recording of positions when enough
data is collected. When <Auto STOP: Yes> in
CONFIGURE Point Occupation Settings,
recording of positions ends automatically as
defined by the stop criteria. The position mode
icon changes to the moving icon. (F1) changes
to STORE.
STORE (F1)
To store the point information. When <Auto
It may happen that a point with the same point
ID exists in the job. If the codes and/or attribute
values of the new and the existing point do not
match, a screen opens where they can be
corrected. Refer to "10.5 Code and Attribute
Mismatch".
H PNT(F5)
To measure a hidden point. Refer to "37
Survey - Hidden Points".
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT CONF (F2)
To configure auto points and hidden point
measurements. Accesses SURVEY Configu-
ration. Refer to "36 Survey - Auto Points".
Refer to "37 Survey - Hidden Points" for infor-
mation on the fields and keys.
SHIFT AVGE (F2)
To check the residuals for the averaged posi-
tion. Available for <Averaging Mode:
Average> and for more than one measured
coordinate triplet recorded for the same point.
Refer to "8.3.4 Mean Page".

SHIFT ABS (F2)
To check the absolute difference between
measurements. Available for <Averaging
Mode: Absolute Diffs> and for more than one
measured coordinate triplet recorded for the
same point. Refer to "8.3.4 Mean Page".
To dial the number of the reference station
hang up immediately after the survey is
completed. Available for real-time devices of
type digital cellular phone or modem. Available
for <Auto CONEC: No> in CONFIGURE GSM
Connection.
SHIFT INIT (F4)
To select an initialisation method and to force a
new initialisation. Available for configuration
sets allowing phase fixed solutions. Refer to
"35.6 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Opera-
tions".
<Point ID:> User input The identifier for manually occupied points. The
configured point ID template is used. The ID can be
changed:
To start a new sequence of point IDs overtype the
point ID.
For an individual point ID independent of the ID
template SHIFT INDIV (F5). SHIFT RUN (F5)
changes back to the next ID from the configured
ID template. Refer to "17.1 ID Templates".
position.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to another page on this screen.

35.4 Adding Annotations for All Types of Operations
Description Annotations can be used to add either field notes or comments to points being surveyed.
They can be added to points for all types of GPS operations and are imported into LGO.
Access Refer to "35.1 Accessing Survey" to access SURVEY Survey Begin.
Add annotations step-

Step Description
by-step
) A display mask for a page with input fields for annotations must be configured. In
this example, it is called Annot page.
1. In SURVEY Survey Begin select a job, a configuration set, an antenna and a
codelist, if configured.
3. PAGE (F6) until the Annot page is active.
4. Highlight <A1:>.
5. Type in the annotation. The annotation may be up to 16 characters long and may
include spaces.
) When the ASCII input interface is configured to be used and an annotation is

reserved for the incoming ASCII string, then no other information can be typed in
for the particular annotation.
) CE to clear the entry.
) LAST (F4) to recall all annotations entered for the previously surveyed point. Any
annotations just entered are overwritten.
6. ENTER. The next line is highlighted.
Step Description
7. Are more annotations to be typed in?
) When the seismic record is configured to be used, <A4: Seismic Record> cannot
be changed.
8. OCUPY (F1) to start the point occupation.
9. STOP (F1) to end the point occupation.
10. STORE (F1) to store the point information including the annotations.

35.5 Timed Occupations for All Types of Operations
Description Surveying regulations in some countries require that several receivers in a session start the
point occupation simultaneously at a predefined time. A start time can be specified in
SURVEY Survey: Job Name, Survey page. Timed occupations are possible for all types of
GPS operations, except for real-time reference operations.
Requirements <Auto OCCUPY: Timed> is configured in CONFIGURE Point Occupation Settings.

Refer to "17.6 Point Occupation Settings".
Time at Point is configured for one of the lines in one of the display masks. Refer to "17.2
Display Settings".
Access step-by-step The functionality for timed occupations is integrated in SURVEY Survey: Job Name.
The table describes the main access to SURVEY Survey: Job Name.
Step Description
3. Select a configuration set.
Timed occupation step- The table describes one special part of the GPS operation for individual GPS surveying tech-
by-step niques. Refer to "35.3 Surveying Points" for information on performing the individual opera-
tions.
chapter
1. Refer to paragraph "Access step-by-step" to access SURVEY
Survey: Job Name.
2. PAGE (F6) until the page displaying <Start Time:> is active.
) <Start Time:> The current local time with the seconds rounded to 00,
for example for the current local time 07:37:12 it is <Start Time:
07:38:00>.
3. Highlight <Start Time:>.
4. Type in the start time in hours, minutes and seconds when the point
occupation should begin.
5. OCUPY (F1)
) The point occupation does not start yet. This is indicated by the posi-
tion mode icon.
) <Start Time:> changes to <Time to Go:>.
) <Time to Go:> The countdown time in hours, minutes and seconds

before the point occupation starts automatically.
) The point occupation starts when <Time to Go: 00:00:00>.
) Data is logged as configured in the configuration set.

This is indicated by the position mode icon.
) Any occupation counter defined to be used in display mask is

displayed and starts incrementing.
) <Time to Go:> changes to <Time at Point:>.


chapter
) <Time at Point:> The time in hours, minutes and seconds from when
the point is occupied until point occupation is stopped.
6. When <Auto STOP: No> in CONFIGURE Point Occupation 17.6
Settings, STOP (F1) when enough data is collected.
7. When <Auto STORE: No> in CONFIGURE Point Occupation 17.6
Settings, STORE (F1) to store the point information.
) <Time at Point:> changes to <Start Time:> displaying the current

local time with the seconds rounded to 00.
8. Are more points to be surveyed?
9. Move to the next point.
10. Repeat steps 3. to 8.
11. SHIFT QUIT (F6) to return to from where SURVEY Survey: Job
Name was accessed.
35.6 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations

35.6.1 Terminology 35-35
35.6.2 Accessing Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations 35-37
35.6.3 Initialise while Moving 35-39
35.6.4 Initialise while Static 35-40
35.6.5 Initialise on Known Point 35-42

35.6.1 Terminology
Description This chapter describes technical terms related to initialisation.
Initialisation For cm positioning with GPS, the ambiguities need to be fixed. The process of fixing ambi-
guities is called initialisation. In order to carry out an initialisation, the active configuration set
must be a real-time rover configuration allowing for phase fixed solutions. A minimum of five
satellites on L1 and L2 is required.
The three existing types of initialisation methods are:

Moving Static On a known point
Description of initialisation methods

Initialisation Characteristic Description
method
Moving Principle The rover receiver is moved from the beginning of
the GPS operation on, recording data. The trajectory
of the moving rover is recorded. Ambiguities are
fixed while moving. A new initialisation starts auto-
matically when, after losing the minimum number of
required satellites, enough satellites are tracked
again.
Antenna setup On a pole.
Beginning of initialisa- Immediately.
tion
Initialisation Characteristic Description
method
Use For fast initialisations over distances up to 30 km.
Static Principle The rover receiver is kept stationary at the beginning
of the GPS operation.
Antenna setup On a pole with a quickstand.
Beginning of initialisa- Immediately.
tion
Use If it is proving difficult to initialise while moving and no
known point is available.
Known point Principle The rover receiver is kept stationary over a point with
known coordinates at the beginning of the GPS
operation.
Antenna setup On a pole with a quickstand.
Beginning of initialisa- After selecting the known point.
tion
Use If it is proving difficult to initialise while moving and to
speed up an initialistion while static.

35.6.2 Accessing Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations
Requirements The active configuration set is a real-time rover configuration.

The configured real-time data format in CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode is other than <R-
Time Data: RTCM 1,2 v2> and <R-Time Data: RTCM 9,2 v2>.
chapter
3. Select a configuration set with the configured real-time data format
other than <R-Time Data: RTCM 1,2 v2> and <R-Time Data: RTCM
9,2 v2>.
6. SHIFT INIT (F4) to access SURVEY Initialisation.
7. Highlight the required initialisation method.
) For Initialise while Static and Initialise on Known Point, the

antenna setup must be static on a pillar, a tripod or on a pole with a
quickstand.
chapter
) For Initialise on Known Point, the coordinates of the point must be 8.2
known in the WGS 1984. They must be stored in the active job either
by manual entry or by measuring.
8. CONT (F1)
9. Is Initialise while Moving selected? 35.6.3
Is Initialise while Static selected? 35.6.3
Is Initialise on Known Point selected? 35.6.5

35.6.3 Initialise while Moving
Initialise while moving

Step Description
step-by-step
1. Refer to "35.6.2 Accessing Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations" to
access the initialisation.
2. Does the receiver currently have a fixed solution?
If no, continue with the next row.
)3.
The initialisation starts automatically.
Continue with the row after step 4.
4. YES (F6) to start the initialisation. The current ambiguity solution is discarded.
) SURVEY Survey: Job Name
) The position status icon changes to the code solution icon.
) OCUPY (F1) is available but must not be pressed until the ambiguity solution is
gained.
5. The initialisation is gained when the ambiguities are solved. This is indicated by
the position status icon.
6. Continue with the surveying operation.
35.6.4 Initialise while Static
Initialise while static

step-by-step
chapter
1. Refer to "35.6.2 Accessing Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Opera-
tions" to access the initialisation.
If no, continue with the next row.
)3.
The initialisation starts automatically.
Continue with step 7.
4. YES (F6) to start the initialisation. The current ambiguity solution is
discarded.
) STOP (F1) is available but must not be pressed until the ambiguity
solution is gained.
) The initialisation is gained when the ambiguities are solved. This is

indicated by the position status icon.
5. Any configurations for <Auto STOP:> in CONFIGURE Point Occu- 17.6
pation Settings are ignored. STOP (F1) when enough data is
collected.


chapter
7. Continue with the surveying operation.
35.6.5 Initialise on Known Point
Initialise on known
point step-by-step
chapter
1. Refer to "35.6.2 Accessing Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Opera-
tions" to access the initialisation.
3. YES (F6) to start the initialisation. The current ambiguity solution is
discarded.
4. SURVEY Data: Job Name 8.2
This screen is similar to MANAGE Data: Job Name.
Highlight the known point for the initialisation.
5. CONT (F1) starts the initialisation.

<Point ID:> The ID of the selected known point is displayed.
<Antenna Ht:> The default antenna height as defined in the active
configuration set is suggested. Changing the antenna height here
does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active
configuration set. The changed antenna height is used until the appli-
cation program is exited.
Enter the correct antenna height.


chapter
) If required, add a code. 10
) If required, add an annotation. 35.4
) STOP (F1) is available but must not be pressed until the ambiguity
solution is gained.
) The initialisation is gained when the ambiguities are solved. This is

indicated by the position status icon.
6. Any configurations for <Auto STOP:> in CONFIGURE Point Occu- 17.6
pation Settings are ignored. When the initialisation is gained, the
recording of positions stops automatically.
)8.
An average is automatically calculated with the known coordinates.
Continue with the surveying operation.
Survey - Auto Points GPS1200 36-1
36 Survey - Auto Points

36.1 Overview 36-2
36.2 Configuring Auto Points 36-4
36.3 Auto Points for Post-Processed Kinematic and Real-Time Rover Operations 36-12
36.4 Offset Points of Auto Points 36-17
36.1 Overview
Description Auto points is used to automatically log points at a specific rate. Additionally, individual auto
points can be stored outside the defined rate. Auto points are used in real-time or post-proc-
essed moving applications to document the track which was walked or driven along. Auto
points are logged between starting and stopping logging of auto points form one chain. A new
chain is formed each time logging of auto points is started.
Auto points can be collected in the Survey application program. An Auto page is visible when
logging of auto points is active.
Up to two offset points related to one auto point can be logged. The offset points can be both
to the left or right and they can be coded independently of each other and of the auto points.
Refer to "36.4 Offset Points of Auto Points".
)
Coding of auto points
Logging of auto points is possible for <R-Time Mode: Rover> and <R-Time Mode: None>.
Coding of auto points is similar to coding manually occupied points. Refer to "10 Coding" for
information on coding.
The differences are:
Thematical coding: Available for <Store: DBX(Pts&Codes)> in SURVEY Configu-
ration, Auto Points page.
Free coding: Always available.
Quick coding: Not available.
Codes of auto points overwrite the codes of points existing in the active job with the same
point ID but with a different code as the auto point.
Codes of auto points can be changed when no auto points are being logged.
Up to three attributes can be stored with a code.

Properties of auto The properties stored with auto points are:
points Class: Either MEAS or NAV depending on the class of the manually occupied points.
Sub class: GPS Fixed or GPS Code Only
Source: Survey (Auto) or Survey (Auto Of)
Averaging of auto An average is never calculated for auto points even if a manually occupied point of class
points MEAS already exists with the same point ID.
36.2 Configuring Auto Points
Access Select Main Menu: Survey. In SURVEY Survey Begin press CONF (F2) to access
SURVEY Configuration.
OR
In SURVEY Survey: Job Name press SHIFT CONF (F2) to access SURVEY Configu-
ration.
SURVEY The settings on this page activate the logging of auto points and define the method of
Configuration, logging.
Auto Points page
CONT (F1)
DMASK (F3)
To configure what is viewed in the Auto page
in the Survey application program. Available
for <Log Auto Pts: Yes>. Refer to paragraph
"SURVEY Configure Auto Pts Display Mask"
below.
PAGE (F6)

<Log Auto Yes Activates the logging of auto points.
Pts:>
) All other fields on the screen are active and can
be edited.
No Deactivates logging of auto points and all fields on
this screen.
<Log By:> Time Auto points are logged according to a time interval.
The time interval is independent from the update
interval for the position on the screen.
Distance The difference in distance from the last stored auto
point, which must be reached before the next auto
point is logged. The auto point is logged with the next
available computed position.
Height Diff The height difference from the last stored auto point,
which must be reached before the next auto point is
logged. The auto point is logged with the next avail-
able computed position.
Dist or Ht Before the next auto point is logged, either the differ-
ence in distance or the difference in height must be
reached. The auto point is logged with the next avail-
able computed position.
Stop & Go An auto point is stored when the position of the
antenna does not move more than the distance
configured in <Stop Position:> within the <Stop
Time:>.
Once a point has been stored, the position from the
point just stored must change more than the distance
configured in <Stop Position:> before the routine
starts again.
User Decides An auto point is stored upon pressing OCUPY (F3) in
SURVEY Survey: Job Name, Auto page. In the
beginning, the chain to which the auto points should
be assigned must be started with START (F1). In the
end, the chain must be closed with STOP (F1).
<Log Every:> Available unless <Log By: Dist or Ht>.
User input For <Log By: Distance> and <Log By: Height Diff>.
The difference in distance or height before the next
auto point is logged.
For <Log By: For <Log By: Time>. The time interval before the
Time> from 0.05s next auto point is logged.
to 60.0s
<Min User input Available for <Log By: Dist or Ht>. The value for the
Distance:> difference in distance before the next auto point is
logged.


<Min Height:> User input Available for <Log By: Dist or Ht>. The value for the
height difference before the next auto point is logged.
<Stop Posi- User input Available for <Log By: Stop & Go>. The maximum
tion:> distance within which the position is considered
stationary.
<Stop Time:> User input Available for <Log By: Stop & Go>. The time while
the position must be stationary until an auto point is
stored.
<Store:>
) Changing this setting while auto points are
being logged stops the logging. It must then be
restarted.
File (Pts Only) Logs auto point to a measurement file. Point logging
at up to 20 Hz. Coding and logging of offset points is
not possible. Points cannot be displayed in MapView
or output via format files.
DBX(Pnts& Logs auto points to the DB-X. Point logging at up to 1
Codes) Hz. Coding and logging of offset points is possible.
Points can be displayed in MapView or output via
format files.
<Start Immediately Logging of auto points starts immediately when the
Logging:> SURVEY screen is accessed.
Controlled Logging of auto points starts upon pressing START
(F1) on the Auto page in SURVEY.
<Monitor CQ:> Yes or No Activates monitoring of the coordinate quality. Auto
points are stored when the coordinate quality is within
the defined limit. For example, only phase fixed solu-
tions can be logged by defining a CQ limit.
<3D CQ Limit:> User input Available for <Monitor CQ: Yes>.
Limit for the coordinate quality above which an auto
point is no longer automatically stored. When the CQ
of the auto point falls again below the defined value
then the storing of auto points begins again.
<Beep When:> Logging Instrument beeps when storing an auto point.
Not Logging Available for <Monitor CQ: Yes>. Instrument gives a
single alarm beep each time an auto point is not
recorded because the limit for the coordinate quality
is exceeded. For <Log By: Time> the beep is given
at the time when the point should have been
recorded. Unless <Log By: Time>, the beep is given
at 1 Hz once the auto logging has stopped due to the
exceeded coordinate quality.
Never Instrument never beeps.

Next step
IF the display mask THEN
is not to be configured CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to the screen from where
SURVEY Configuration, Auto Points page was accessed.
is to be configured DMASK (F3). Refer to paragraph "SURVEY Configure Auto Pts
Display Mask".
SURVEY
Configure Auto Pts
Display Mask
CONT (F1)
CLEAR (F4)
To set all fields to <XX. Line: Line Space
Full>.
DEFLT (F5)
To recall the default settings. Available if the
active configuration set is a default configura-
tion set.
<Fixed Lines:> From 0 to 5 Defines how many lines do not scroll in SURVEY
Survey: Job Name, Auto page when that display
mask is used.
<1st Line:> Output Fixed to <1st Line: Point ID (auto)>.
<2nd Line:> to Annot 1-4 Input field for comments to be stored with the point.
<16th Line:>
Attrib (free) 01-20 Output field for attributes for free codes.
Attrib (pt) 01-03 Input field for attributes for point codes.
Code (auto pt) Choicelist or input field for auto point codes.
Code (free) Output field for free codes.
Code Desc (free) Output field for the description of free codes.
Code Desc (pt) Output field for the description of point codes.
GDOP Output field for the current GDOP of the computed
position.
HDOP Output field for the current HDOP of the computed
position.
Line Space Full Insert full line space.
Line Space Half Insert half line space.
Moving Ant Ht Input field for antenna height for the auto point. This
is the same as the antenna height for moving obser-
vations.


Msd Auto Points Output field for the number of auto points logged after
pressing START (F1) in SURVEY Survey: Job
Name, Auto page. Counting starts again from 0 when
START (F1) is pressed again.
PDOP Output field for the current PDOP of the computed
position.
Quality 1D Output field for the current height quality of computed
position.
Quality 2D Output field for the current 2D quality of computed
position.
Quality 3D Output field for the current 3D quality of computed
position.
VDOP Output field for the current VDOP of the computed
position.
Next steps
Step Description
1. CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to SURVEY Configuration, Auto
Points page.
2. CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where SURVEY Configuration, Auto
Points page was accessed.
36.3 Auto Points for Post-Processed Kinematic and Real-Time Rover Operations
Requirements <R-Time Mode: None> or <R-Time Mode: Rover> in CONFIGURE Real-Time Mode.
<Log Auto Pts: Yes> in SURVEY Configuration, Auto Points page.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
3. Select a configuration set with <R-Time Mode: None> or <R-Time Mode:
Rover>.
) 6.
For <Start Logging: Immediately>, logging of auto points begins.
PAGE (F6) until the Auto page is visible.
SURVEY The Auto page of a typical configuration set is explained. Before logging of auto points has
Survey: Job Name, started, the page appears as shown below:
Auto page

START (F1)
To start logging of auto points and offset points
if configured or, for <Log By: User Decides>,
to start the chain to which the auto points
should be assigned. The first auto point is
stored.
For <Start Logging: Immediately> in
SURVEY Configuration, Auto Points page,
logging of auto points starts immediately when
the SURVEY screen is accessed and START
(F1) need not be pressed.
STOP (F1)
To end recording of auto points and offset
points if configured or, for <Log By: User
Decides>, to end the chain to which the auto
points are assigned.
OCUPY (F3)
Available for STOP (F1). To store an auto point
at any time.
OFST1 (F4)
To configure recording of the first type of offset
points. Available for <Store:
DBX(Pts&Codes)> in SURVEY Configura-
tion, Auto Points page. Refer to "36.4 Offset
Points of Auto Points".
OFST2 (F5)
To configure recording of a second type of
offset points. Available for <Store:
DBX(Pts&Codes)> in SURVEY Configura-
tion, Auto Points page. Refer to "36.4 Offset
Points of Auto Points".
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT CONF (F2)
To configure auto points. Refer to "36.2 Config-
uring Auto Points".
SHIFT QUIT (F6)
To exit the Survey application program. Point
information logged until pressing SHIFT QUIT
(F6) is saved in the database.
<Auto Pt ID:> User input Available unless <Auto Pts: Time & Date> in
CONFIGURE ID Templates. The identifier for auto
points. The configured ID template for auto points is
used. The ID can be changed. To start a new
sequence of point IDs overtype the point ID.
Time & Date Available for <Auto Pts: Time & Date> in
CONFIGURE ID Templates. The current local time
and date is used as identifier for auto points.


<Auto Pt The thematical code for the auto point.
Code:>
Choicelist Available for <Thematc Codes: With Codelist>. All
point codes from the job codelist can be selected. The
attributes are shown as output, input or choicelist
fields depending on their definition.
User input Available for <Thematc Codes: Without Codelist>.
Codes can be typed in but not selected from a
codelist. A check is performed to see if a point code
of this name already exists in the job. If so, the
according attributes are shown.
<Code Desc:> Output The description of the code.
<Moving Ant User input The default antenna height for auto points as defined
Ht:> in the active configuration set is suggested. Refer to
"3 Antenna Heights".
<Msd Auto Output Available after pressing START (F1). The number of
Pts:> auto points logged since START (F1) has been
pressed.
position.
Next step
IF THEN
auto points are to be START (F1). Then, for <Log By: User Decides>, OCUPY (F3)
logged whenever an auto point is to be logged.
offset points are to be OFST1 (F4) or OFST2 (F5). Refer to "36.4 Offset Points of Auto
configured Points".

36.4 Offset Points of Auto Points

36.4.1 Overview 36-18
36.4.2 Configuring Offset Points 36-21
36.4.1 Overview
Description Offset points

can be created with auto points when auto points are stored to the DB-X.
can be to the left or to the right of auto points.
are automatically computed with the logging of auto points, if configured.
form a chain relative to the chain of auto points to which they are related. Subsequently
computed chains are independent from each other.
can be coded independently of auto points.
have the same time of when they were stored as the auto points to which they are related.
have the same coding functionality, properties and averaging functionality as auto points.
Refer to "36.1 Overview".
Up to two offset points can be related to one auto point.

The screens for the configuration of offset points are identical except for the title Auto Points
- Offset 1 and Auto Points - Offset 2. For simplicity, the title Auto Points - Offset is used
in the following description.
Computation of offset The computation of offset points depends on the number of auto points in one chain.
points One auto point
No offset points are computed or stored.
Two auto points

The configured offsets are applied perpendicular to the line between two auto points.

P4
P1
P5
P0 First auto point

P1 Second auto point
P2 First offset point for P0
P2 P3 Second offset point for P0
d1 P4 First offset point for P1
P5 Second offset point for P1
P0 d1 Horizontal offset to the left
GPS12_081 d2 P3 d2 Horizontal offset to the right
Three or more auto points

The first offset points are computed perpendicular to the line between the first and the
second auto point.
The last offset point is computed perpendicular to the line between the last auto point and
the one before.
All other offset points are computed on a bearing. The bearing is half of the angle between
the last and the next measured auto point.
P7
P0 First auto point

P8 P1 Second auto point
2 P4 P3 Second offset point for P0
P4 Third auto point
P5
P9 P6 Second offset point for P1
1 P1 P7 Fourth auto point
P6 P8 First offset point for P4
P9 Second offset point for P4
P2 d1 Horizontal offset to the left
d1 d2 Horizontal offset to the right
P0 1 Angle between P0 and P4
d2 P3
GPS12_082 2 Angle between P1 and P7

36.4.2 Configuring Offset Points
Requirements <Store: DBX(Pts&Codes)> in SURVEY Configuration, Auto Points page.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "35.1 Accessing Survey" to access SURVEY Survey: Job Name.
2. PAGE (F6) until the Auto page is active.
3. OFST1 (F4) or OFST2 (F5) to access SURVEY Auto Points - Offset.
SURVEY
Auto Points - Offset,
General page
CONT (F1)
OFST2 (F2) and OFST1 (F2)
To switch between configuring offset point type
one and two.
PAGE (F6)
<Store Yes Activates logging of offset points.
Offset1:> and
<Store
Offset2:>
) All other fields on the screen are active and can
be edited with this setting.
No Deactivates logging of offset points and all fields on

this screen.
<Horiz Offset:> User input The horizontal offset between -1000 m and 1000 m at
which the offset point is collected.
<Height User input The height offset between -100 m and 100 m from the
Offset:> related auto point.
<Identifier:> User input The identifier with up to four characters is added in
front of or at the end of the ID of the auto point. This
ID is then used as the point ID for the related offset
point. This could support an automatic workflow into
CAD packages including setting symbols and
stringing lines.
<Prefix/Suffix: Prefix Adds the setting for <Identifier:> in front of the auto
> point ID.
Suffix Adds the setting for <Identifier:> at the end of the
auto point ID.

Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Code page.
SURVEY The setting for <Thematc Codes:> in CONFIGURE Coding Settings determines the avail-
Auto Points - Offset, ability of the fields and softkeys.
Code page CONT (F1)
NEW-A (F2)
To create additional attributes for the selected
<Point Code:>. Available for <Thematc
Codes: With Codelist>.
NAME (F3) or VALUE (F3)
To highlight <Attribute n:> or the field for the
attribute value. The name of <Attribute n:>
can be edited and an attribute value can be
typed in. Available for <Thematc Codes: With
Codelist>. Available for attributes for which an
attribute name can be typed in.
LAST (F4)
To recall the last used attribute values for the
selected code. Available for <Thematc Codes:
With Codelist>.
DEFLT (F5)
To recall the default attribute values for the
selected code. Available for <Thematc Codes:
With Codelist>.
PAGE (F6)
<Point Code:> The thematical code for the offset point.
Choicelist Available for <Thematc Codes: With Codelist>. All
point codes from the job codelist can be selected. The
attributes are shown as output, input or choicelist
fields depending on their definition.
User input Available for <Thematc Codes: Without Codelist>.
Codes can be typed in but not selected from a
codelist. A check is performed to see if a point code
of this name already exists in the job. If so, the
according attributes are shown.
<Code Desc:> Output Available for <Thematc Codes: With Codelist>. The
description of the code.
<Attribute n:> User input Available for <Thematc Codes: Without Codelist>.
Up to three attribute values can be stored.
Next step
IF THEN
offset point configura- CONT (F1) to return to SURVEY Survey: Job Name.
tion is finished
a second offset point PAGE (F6) and then OFST2 (F2) or OFST1 (F2) to change to
is to be configured SURVEY Auto Points - Offset for the second point.

Example for offset point The offset point ID is a combination of the auto point ID and an identifier as a prefix or suffix.
IDs The right most part of the auto point ID is incremented within the point ID. The auto point ID
is truncated from the left if the length of the auto point ID plus identifier prefix or suffix is
greater than 16 characters.
Auto point ID Identifier Prefix/Suffix Offset point ID
Auto1234 OS1 Prefix OS1Auto1234
Auto1235 OS1Auto1235

Auto1234 OS1 Suffix Auto1234OS1
Auto1235 Auto1235OS1

) Refer to "17.1 ID Templates" for more information on point IDs.

Description Application: Pick up points along the centre line, to the right and to the left of
a road.
Goal: Points are to be picked up automatically every 5 m while walking

along the centre line.
The points to the right and to the left of the road are to be picked
up automatically with those of the centre line.
The auto point IDs are CL0001, CL0002, ....
The offset point IDs are OSCL0001, OSCL0002, ... for the right
side of the road and CL0001OS, CL0002OS, ... for the left side.
The offset to the right and to the left is 3 m.
The height difference is -0.3 m to the right and 0.3 m to the left.

Diagram
a
b
c
e d f
a) Left side of the road

b) Centre line
c) Right side of the road
d) CL0001
e) OSCL0001
GPS12_080 f) CL0001OS

The default display mask for SURVEY Survey: Job Name, Auto page is used.
<Store: DBX(Pts&Codes)> in SURVEY Configuration, Auto Points page.
<Distance Unit: Metres (m)> in CONFIGURE Units & Formats, Units page.
An ID template for the auto points is configured. Refer to "17.1.6 Working Example" for
information on how to configure ID templates.

Step Description
by-step
1. Main Menu: Survey
2. SURVEY Survey Begin
Step Description
Select a job and a configuration set with the settings mentioned above.
3. CONF (F2) to access SURVEY Configuration.
4. SURVEY Configuration, Auto Points page
<Log Auto Pts: Yes>
<Log By: Distance>
<Log Every: 5.0000>
<Store: File(Pts Only)>
5. CONT (F1) to return to SURVEY Survey Begin.
7. PAGE (F6) until the Auto page is active.
8. OFST1 (F4) to configure the offset points for the right side of the road.
9. SURVEY Auto Points - Offset 1, General page
<Store Offset1: Yes>
<Horiz Offset: 3.0000>
<Height Offset: -0.3000>
<Identifier: OS>
<Prefix/Suffix: Prefix>
10. OFST2 (F2) to configure the offset points for the left side of the road.
11. SURVEY Auto Points - Offset 2, General page
<Store Offset2: Yes>

Step Description
<Horiz Offset: -3.0000>
<Height Offset: 0.3000>
<Identifier: OS>
<Prefix/Suffix: Suffix>
12. CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to SURVEY Survey: Job Name, Auto
page.
13. SURVEY Survey: Job Name, Auto page
START (F1) starts logging of auto points and offset points.
14. Walk along the centre line of the road as far as points need to be picked up.
) OCUPY (F3) to store an auto point at any time.
) OFST1 (F4) to change the offset or the height difference between the auto points
on the centre line and the right side of the road.
) OFST2 (F5) to change the offset or the height difference between the auto points
on the centre line and the left side of the road.
15. STOP (F1) ends recording of auto points and offset points.
)
16.
The stopping of auto points is indicated in the position mode icon.
After finishing the survey, import the data into a CAD package. If the offset point
IDs or codes fulfil the requirements of the CAD package, the offset points to the
right and to the left of the road are automatically strung together.
Survey - Hidden Points GPS1200 37-1
37 Survey - Hidden Points

37.1 Overview 37-2
37.2 Accessing Hidden Point Measurement 37-5
37.3 Measuring Hidden Points 37-7
37.4 Computing an Azimuth 37-32
37.5 Computing Horizontal Distances from Slope Distances 37-38
37.6 Hidden Point Measurement Including Heights 37-41
37.1 Overview
Description Hidden points cannot be measured directly by GPS. This is because they can not be physi-
cally reached or because satellites are obstructed, for example by trees or tall buildings.
A hidden point can be calculated by measuring distances and/or azimuths to the hidden
point using a hidden point measurement device. Or for distances a tape may be used.
Refer to "20.7 Hidden Point" for information on supported hidden point measurement
devices.
Additional auxiliary points may be manually occupied.
Bearings may be computed from previously occupied points.
In contrast to the COGO application program, hidden point measurements is more of a

measuring application program than a calculation application program.
Example
Application: Completing a survey of telegraph poles for a telecom-
munication company.
Aim: The telegraph poles must be surveyed to 0.3 m accu-

racy in plan but height is not of concern.
Use of hidden point measurements: For poles surrounded by heavy undergrowth where it
is not possible to directly measure the pole without
taking a lot of time to cut a path through the under-
growth.

) Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in hidden point measure-
ments does not result in the hidden point being recomputed.
) Hidden point measurements are possible for <R-Time Mode: Rover> and <R-Time Mode:
None>. For <R-Time Mode: None> the hidden point can be calculated in LGO.
Hidden point measure- A hidden point can be measured by

ment methods Bearing and distance Chainage and offset
Double bearing Backwards bearing and distance
Double distance
Magnetic declination Any magnetic declination configured for <Mag Declin:> in CONFIGURE Units & Formats,
Angle page is applied when the hidden points are computed. The azimuth must be entered
manually or it must be measured with a hidden point measurements device.
Heights Heights are taken into account if configured. Refer to "20.7 Hidden Point" for information on
configuring height offsets.
<Device Ht:> and <Target Ht:> configured in CONFIGURE Hidden Pt Device Offsets are
applied when the hidden points are computed. <Height:> in HIDDEN PT Hidden Point
Measurement is the value directly from the hidden point measuring device.
Coding of hidden points Thematical coding: Available in HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Result after the calcula-
tion of a hidden point. Thematical coding of hidden points is iden-
tical to coding of manually occupied points. Refer to "10 Coding"
for information on coding.
Free coding: Can be started while in HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Measure-
ment. The code and attributes of the last entered free code in the
active job is displayed. It cannot be changed.
Quick coding: Not available.
Properties of hidden The properties stored with hidden points are:

points Class: MEAS
Sub class: Hidden Point
Source: Bearing-Distance, Double Bearing, Double Distance, Chainage-Offset or
Backwrd Brg-Dist depending on the hidden point measurement method used
Averaging of hidden An average is calculated for hidden points if a point of class MEAS already exists with the
points same point ID.
Configure hidden point Refer to "20.7 Hidden Point" for information on how to configure hidden point measurements.
measurements
) <Azimuth:> is used throughout this chapter. This should always be considered to also mean
<Bearing:>.
Auxiliary points Auxiliary points are used to compute azimuths required for the calculation of hidden point
coordinates. Auxiliary points can be points existing in the job or they can be manually occu-
pied. The point ID template configured for <Auxil Pts:> in CONFIGURE ID Templates is
applied. Refer to "17.1 ID Templates" for information on ID templates.

37.2 Accessing Hidden Point Measurement
) Hidden point measurements are possible from the Survey application program and when the
Survey application program screen is called from another application program, for example
from Stakeout.
Access Press H PNT (F5) in SURVEY Survey: Job Name, Survey page.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Measure-
ment. Refer to "5.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys.
OR
HIDDEN PT The setting for <Method:> on this screen determines the availability of the subsequent fields
Hidden Point Measure- and softkeys. They are explained in the following chapters related to the individual methods.
ment
CALC (F1)
To calculate the hidden point and to display the
results.
SHIFT CONF (F2)
To configure hidden point measurements.
Refer to "20.7 Hidden Point".
Next step
IF THEN
<Method: Brng & Distance> Refer to "37.3.1 Bearing & Distance".
<Method: Double Bearing> Refer to "37.3.2 Double Bearing".
<Method: Double Distance> Refer to "37.3.3 Double Distance".
<Method: Chainage & Refer to "37.3.4 Chainage & Offset".
Offset>
<Method: Back Brng & Dist> Refer to "37.3.5 Backwards Bearing & Distance".
heights are to be included Refer to "37.6 Hidden Point Measurement Including
Heights".

37.3 Measuring Hidden Points

37.3.1 Bearing & Distance 37-8
37.3.2 Double Bearing 37-13
37.3.3 Double Distance 37-18
37.3.4 Chainage & Offset 37-24
37.3.5 Backwards Bearing & Distance 37-30
37.3.1 Bearing & Distance
Description One point must be known. It

may already exist in the job.
may be manually occupied during the hidden point measurements.
may be manually typed in.
The distance and the bearing from the known point to the hidden point are to be determined.
An auxiliary point helps compute the bearing which might not be known. The auxiliary point
may be measured in the direction from the known point to the hidden point.
Diagram P2
d
Known
P0 Known point, <Point:>
To be measured
P1 d Distance from P0 to P2
Bearing from P0 to P2
P1 Auxiliary point, optional
Unknown
GPS12_40 P0 P2 Hidden point
Measure a hidden point The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
with Bearing & Distance information on screens.
step-by-step


chapter
) A hidden point measurement device can be attached to the receiver 21.1.7

such that the measurements are automatically transferred to the
receiver.
1. Refer to "37.2 Accessing Hidden Point Measurement" to access
HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Measurement.
)2.
SHIFT CONF (F2) to configure hidden point measurements.
HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Measurement
21.1.7
<Method: Brng & Distance>

<Point:> The point ID of the current position. This is the known point
for the calculation of the hidden point.
Select a point stored in the job.
) SURVY (F5) when <Point:> is highlighted. To manually occupy the 35.3

known point for the calculation of the hidden point.
) To manually type in coordinates for the known point open the

choicelist when <Point:> is highlighted. Press NEW (F2) to create a
8.3.2
new point.
3. HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Measurement
<Azimuth:> The azimuth from <Point:> to the hidden point.
Type in an azimuth. When a hidden point measurement device is
attached to the receiver to measure the azimuth, the value is auto-
matically transferred.
chapter
) SUN (F3) when <Azimuth:> is highlighted. The azimuth from the

direction of the sun to <Point:> is computed.
37.4.1
) AZMTH (F4) when <Azimuth:> is highlighted. To select or manually 37.4.2

occupy an auxiliary point and to compute the azimuth.
) EAO (F2) available for <EAO Method: New for Each Point> or
<EAO Method: Permanent> in CONFIGURE Hidden Point Device
21.1.7
Offsets. To change or enter an External Angle Offset.

<Horiz Dist:> The horizontal distance from <Point:> to the hidden
point.
Type in a distance. When a hidden point measurement device is
attached to the receiver to measure the distance, the value is auto-
) DIST (F2) available for Leica DistoTM pro4 and Leica DistoTM pro4 a
when certain fields are highlighted. To measure the distance without
pressing DIST on the Disto.
) SLOPE (F5) when <Horiz Dist:> is highlighted. To measure a slope 37.5

distance and an elevation angle or percentage grade. The values are
used to compute the horizontal distance.
5. CALC (F1) calculates the hidden point and displays the results in
HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Result, Result page.
6. HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Result, Result page


chapter
<Point ID:> The identifier for the hidden point. The configured point
ID template is used. The ID can be changed.
Type in a point ID.
) SHIFT INDIV (F5) for an individual point ID independent of the ID

template. SHIFT RUN (F5) changes back to the next ID from the
17.1
configured ID template.
) NEXT (F5) to store the hidden point and to return to HIDDEN PT

Hidden Point Measurement. Another hidden point can be meas-
ured.
7. PAGE (F6) changes to Code page.
8. HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Result, Code page 10
<Point Code:> The thematical code. All codes of the job can be
selected.
<Attribute n:> The attributes for the thematical code. The behaviour
of the fields depend on their definition in the codelist.
Type in a code if required.
9. PAGE (F6) changes to the Plot page.
10. HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Result, Plot page 30.6
Measured distances are indicated by solid arrows.
Bearings are indicated by half solid and half dashed arrows.
chapter
) SHIFT QUIT (F6) to not store the hidden point and to return to the
screen from where HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Measurement was
accessed.
11. STORE (F1) to store the hidden point and to return to the screen from
where HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Measurement was accessed.

37.3.2 Double Bearing
Description Two points must be known. They

The bearings from the known points to the hidden point are to be determined. Auxiliary points
help compute the bearings which might not be known. Auxiliary points may be measured in
the direction from the known points to the hidden point.
Diagram
2
P3
P4 Known
P2
P0 First known point, <Point A:>
P3 Second known point, <Point B:>
To be measured
1 Bearing from P0 to P2
1 P1 2 Bearing from P3 to P2
P1 First auxiliary point, optional
P4 Second auxiliary point, optional
Unknown
with Double Bearing information on screens.
step-by-step
chapter

receiver.
)2.
20.7
<Method: Double Bearing>

<Point A:> The point ID of the current position. This is the first known
point for the calculation of the hidden point.
) SURVY (F5) when <Point A:> is highlighted. To manually occupy the 35.3
first known point for the calculation of the hidden point.

choicelist when <Point A:> is highlighted. Press NEW (F2) to create
8.3.2
a new point.
<Azimuth:> The azimuth from <Point A:> to the hidden point.


chapter
Type in an azimuth. When a hidden point measurement device is
attached to the receiver to measure the azimuth, the value is auto-
) SUN (F3) when <Azimuth:> is highlighted. The azimuth from the

direction of the sun to <Point A:> is computed.
37.4.1.
) AZMTH (F4) when <Azimuth:> is highlighted. To select or manually 37.4.2.

occupy an auxiliary point and to compute the azimuth.
) EAO (F2) available for <EAO Method: New for Each Point> or
<EAO Method: Permanent> in CONFIGURE Hidden Point Device
20.7
Offsets. To change or enter an External Angle Offset.

<Point B:> The point ID of the current position. This is the second
The procedure of measuring the hidden point from <Point B:> is the
same as from <Point A:>. Repeat steps 2. and 3.
<Point ID:> The identifier for the hidden point. The configured point
ID template is used. The ID can be changed.
<Check Dist AB:> The computed horizontal distance between
<Point A:> and <Point B:>.
chapter
<Check Brg AB:> The computed bearing from <Point A:> to <Point
B:>.
<Check Dist A:> The computed horizontal distance between <Point
A:> and the hidden point.
<Check Dist B:> The computed horizontal distance between <Point
B:> and the hidden point.
Check the computed distances and the bearing.
7. Are the computed distances and bearings correct?
If no, continue with the row below step 12.
8. Type in a point ID.

17.1

ured.
selected.


chapter
Bearings are indicated by half solid and half dashed arrows.
accessed.
37.3.3 Double Distance

The distances from the known points to the hidden points are to be determined. The location
of the hidden point relative to the line between the two known points is to be defined.
Diagram
P2 d2 Known
b P0 First known point, <Point A:>
P1 P2 Second known point, <Point B:>
a
d3 d3 Line from P0 to P2
d1 a Right of d3
b Left of d3
To be measured
d1 Distance from P0 to P1
P0 Unknown
GPS12_44 P1 Hidden point

with Double Distance information on screens.
step-by-step
chapter

receiver.
)2.
20.7
<Method: Double Distance>

) To manually type in coordinates for a known point open the choicelist 8.3.2
when <Point A:> is highlighted. Press NEW (F2) to create a new
point.
<Horiz Dist:> The horizontal distance from <Point A:> to the hidden
point.
chapter
Type in a distance. When a hidden point measurement device is
attached to the receiver to measure the distance, the value is auto-
) SLOPE (F5) when <Horiz Dist:> is highlighted. To measure a slope 37.5

The procedure of measuring the hidden point from <Point B:> is the
same as from <Point A:>. Repeat steps 2. and 3.
<Location:> The location of the hidden point relative to the line from
<Point A:> to <Point B:>.
Select the location.


chapter
7. HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Result, Result page paragraph
"Computed
<Point ID:> The identifier for the hidden point. The configured point distances
ID template is used. The ID can be changed. on HIDDEN
<Check Chng A:> The computed distance on the line from <Point PT Hidden
A:> to <Point B:> from <Point A:> to the point of intersection with Point
<Check Offset:>. Result,
<Check Chng B:> The computed distance on the line from <Point Result
B:> to <Point A:> from <Point B:> to the point of intersection with page"
<Check Offset:>.
<Check Offset:> The computed perpendicular distance from the
hidden point to the line from <Point> A> to <Point B:>.
<Check Dist AB:> The computed horizontal distance between
<Point A:> and <Point B:>.
Check the computed distances.
8. Are the computed distances correct?

17.1
chapter

ured.
selected.
accessed.

Computed distances on
P2
HIDDEN PT Hidden P1 d2
Point Result, Result
page d5 P0 First known point, <Point A:>
d4
d1 P1 Hidden point
P2 Second known point, <Point B:>
d6 d2 Distance from P2 to P1
d3
d3 <Check Chng A:>
d4 <Check Chng B:>
P0 d5 <Check Offset:>
GPS12_070 d6 <Check Dist AB:>
37.3.4 Chainage & Offset

The chainage from one known point along the line between the two known points must be
determined. The offset of the hidden point to the line between the two known points must be
determined.
Diagram
P1
d2 P2
Known
P0 First known point, <Point A:>
d1 P1 Second known point, <Point B:>
To be measured
d1 Chainage
d2 Offset
Unknown

with Chainage & Offset information on screens.
step-by-step
chapter

receiver.
)2.
21.1.7
<Method: Chainage & Offset>


choicelist when <Point A:> is highlighted. Press NEW (F2) to create
8.3.2
a new point.
chapter
) SURVY (F5) when <Point B:> is highlighted. To manually occupy the 35.3

choicelist when <Point B:> is highlighted. Press NEW (F2) to create
8.3.2
a new point.
<Chainage:> The chainage from one known point along the line
between the two known points. Looking from the point selected in
<Chainage From:>, a positive chainage is towards the second
known point. A negative chainage is into the opposite direction of the
second known point.
Type in a distance and select its direction. When a hidden point
measurement device is attached to the receiver to measure the
distance, the value is automatically transferred.
5. POS? (F4) to determine chainage and offset of the current position
relative to the line between the two known points. The values are
displayed in <Chainage:> and <Offset:>. The point from where the
chainage has been measured is selected in <Chainage From:>.


chapter
) SLOPE (F5) when <Chainage:> is highlighted. To measure a slope 37.5

<Offset:> The offset of the hidden point to the line between the two
known points.
<Location:> The location of the hidden point relative to the line from
<Point A:> to <Point B:>.
Type in a distance and select its location. When a hidden point meas-
urement device is attached to the receiver to measure the distance,
the value is automatically transferred.
The procedure of measuring the offset is the same as measuring the
chainage. Refer to step 4.
<Chainage From:> The point from where the chainage has been
measured.
Select the point.
chapter
<Point ID:> The identifier for the hidden point. The configured point paragraph
ID template is used. The ID can be changed. "Computed
<Check Dist A:> The computed horizontal distance between <Point distances
A:> and the hidden point. on HIDDEN
<Check Dist B:> The computed horizontal distance between <Point PT Hidden
B:> and the hidden point. Point
<Check Dist AB:> The computed horizontal distance between Result,
<Point A:> and <Point B:>. Result
page"
Check the computed distances.
10. Are the computed distances correct?

17.1

ured.


chapter
selected.
accessed.
37.3.5 Backwards Bearing & Distance
Description In order to compute the hidden point, the measurements are taken from the hidden point.
One point must be known. It
The distance and the bearing from the hidden point to the known point are to be determined.
An auxiliary point helps compute the bearing which might not be known. An auxiliary point
may be measured in the direction from the hidden point to the known point.
Diagram
P2
Known
P1 P0 Known point, <Point:>
To be measured
Bearing from P2 to P0
d d Distance from P2 to P0
P1 Auxiliary point, optional
Unknown

Measure a hidden point All steps are identical with those for measuring a hidden point using Bearing & Distance.
with Backwards The measurements are taken from the hidden point to <Point:>. Refer to "37.3.1 Bearing &
Bearing & Distance Distance".
step-by-step
37.4 Computing an Azimuth

37.4.1 Using the Sun 37-33
37.4.2 Using Auxiliary Point 37-35

37.4.1 Using the Sun
Description The azimuth for a hidden point measurement can be computed using a known point and the
sun. The known point can be manually occupied. The location of the hidden point can be
away from the sun or in the direction towards the sun. Ensure the shadow of the pole falls in
the direction of the point.
Diagram
P1
P1
P0
P0
GPS12_074
GPS12_073
P0 Known point P0 Known point

P1 Hidden point P1 Hidden point
Bearing from P0 to P1 Bearing from P0 to P1
Computing an azimuth
Step Description
using the sun step-by-
step 1. Refer to "37.2 Accessing Hidden Point Measurement" to access HIDDEN PT
Hidden Point Measurement.
Step Description
Select <Method: Brng & Distance>, <Method: Double Bearing> or <Method:
Back Brng & Dist>.
3. <Point>, <Point A> or <Point B> Select the known point.
4. Highlight <Azimuth:>.
5. SUN (F3)
6. Is the hidden point in the direction towards the sun?
If yes, TOWRD (F4).
If no, AWAY (F6).
The azimuth is computed and displayed in <Azimuth:>.

37.4.2 Using Auxiliary Point
Description The azimuth for a hidden point measurement can be computed using an auxiliary point. The
auxiliary point
The location of the auxiliary point can be in the direction towards the hidden point or away
from the hidden point.
Diagram
P2
P2
P1 P0
GPS12_071 P0
GPS12_072 P1
P0 Known point P0 Known point
P1 Auxiliary point, <Azimuth Pt:> P1 Auxiliary point, <Azimuth Pt:>
P2 Hidden point P2 Hidden point
Bearing from P2 to P0 Bearing from P0 to P2
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "37.2 Accessing Hidden Point Measurement" to access HIDDEN PT
Select <Method: Brng & Distance>, <Method: Double Bearing> or <Method:
Back Brng & Dist>.
3. AZMTH (F4) when <Azimuth:> is highlighted to access HIDDEN PT Choose
Azimuth Point.
HIDDEN PT
Choose Azimuth Point
CONT (F1)
azimuth is computed and displayed in
<Azimuth:> in HIDDEN PT Hidden Point
Measurement.
SURVY (F5)
Available for <Azimuth Pt:> being highlighted.
To manually occupy the auxiliary point for the
calculation of the azimuth. Refer to "35.3
Surveying Points".

<Azimuth Pt:> Choicelist The auxiliary point for the calculation of the azimuth.
All points from MANAGE Data: Job Name can be
selected.
<Direction:> Choicelist The location of the auxiliary point relative to the
hidden point.
Next step
CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to the screen from where HIDDEN PT Choose
Azimuth Point was accessed.
37.5 Computing Horizontal Distances from Slope Distances
Description The horizontal distance for a hidden point measurement can be computed using a slope
distance, and an elevation angle or percentage grade. The slope distance and the elevation
angle can either be typed in or measured with a hidden point measurement device.
Diagram
P1
d1
P0 Known point
d2 P1 Hidden point
d1 Slope distance
P0 d2 Horizontal distance
GPS12_87 Elevation angle
Computing horizontal
Step Description
distances from slope
distances step-by-step 1. Refer to "37.2 Accessing Hidden Point Measurement" to access HIDDEN PT
Select <Method: Brng & Distance>, <Method: Double Distance> or <Method:
Back Brng & Dist>.
3. Highlight <Horiz Dist:>.

Step Description
4. SLOPE (F5) to access HIDDEN PT Slope Distance.
5. HIDDEN PT Slope Distance
<Slope Distance:> Type in a distance from the known point to the hidden point.
When a hidden point measurement device is attached to the receiver to measure
the distance, the value is automatically transferred.
<Elev Angle:> Type in the elevation angle from the known point to the hidden
point. When a hidden point measurement device is attached to the receiver to
measure the elevation angle, the value is automatically transferred.
<Grade (%):> The grade from the known point to the hidden point is automatically
computed from the slope distance and the elevation angle.
) The value for <Grade (%):> can be typed in instead of the value for <Elev
Angle:>. Then <Elev Angle:> is computed automatically.
<Horiz Distance:> The horizontal distance from the known point to the hidden
point is automatically computed from the slope distance and the elevation angle.
<Height:> Available if using heights is configured. The height difference
between the known point and the hidden point is automatically computed from the
slope distance and the elevation angle.
8. CONT (F1) to access HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Measurement.
The horizontal distance is displayed in <Horiz Dist:>.
Step Description
) If available, the value for <Height:> is displayed in the HIDDEN PT Hidden

Point Measurement.

37.6 Hidden Point Measurement Including Heights
Diagram
P0 Known point
P1 P1 Target point
P2 Hidden point
d2 a Height of P0
d3 d4 b Height of P2 = a + d1 + d4 - d3
b d1 Device height: Height of hidden point meas-
urement device above P0
d2 Slope distance
d1 a P2 d3 Target height: Height of P1 above P2
d5 d4 Height difference between hidden point
P0 measurement device and P1
GPS12_058 d5 Horizontal distance
Configuration step-by- The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. <Compute Ht: Yes> in CONFIGURE Hidden Point Measurement. 21.1.7
2. <Height Offset: Device & Trgt Ht> in CONFIGURE Hidden Pt 21.1.7
Device Offsets.
Hidden point measure- The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
ments including information on screens.
heights step-by-step
chapter
<Method:> The hidden point measurement method. The setting 37.3.1,
determines the availability of the subsequent fields and softkeys. 37.3.2,
They are explained in previous chapters related to the individual 37.3.3,
methods. 37.3.4 and
<Height:> The positive or negative height difference between the 37.3.5
centre of the hidden point measurement device and the target point.
Type in the value. When a hidden point measurement device is
attached to the receiver to measure the height difference, the value
is automatically transferred.
For hidden point measurement methods using two known points,
<Height:> must be determined from each known point.
)3.
<Height:> can be computed using SLOPE (F5).
HGTS (F3) to access HIDDEN PT Device & Target Height.
37.5
4. HIDDEN PT Device & Target Height

<Device Ht at Pt A:> The height of the hidden point measurement
device above <Point:> respective <Point A:>.


chapter
<Target Ht:> The height of the target point above the hidden point
when measured from <Point:> respective <Point A:>.
<Device Ht at Pt B:> Available for hidden point measurement
methods using two known points. The height of the hidden point
measurement device above <Point B:>.
<Target Ht:> Available for hidden point measurement methods using
two known points. The height of the target point above the hidden
point when measured from <Point B:>.
5. CONT (F1) to close the screen and to return to HIDDEN PT Hidden
Point Measurement.
) <Height:> in HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Measurement still

displays the positive or negative height difference between the centre
of the hidden point measurement device and the target point. The
height of the hidden point measurement device above the ground and
the height of the target point above the hidden point are applied when
the hidden point is computed.
Continue with the hidden point measurements. Follow the instruc- 37.3.1,
tions in the chapter relevant to the setting for <Method:>. 37.3.2,
37.3.3,
37.3.4 and
37.3.5
chapter
) When STORE (F1) is pressed in HIDDEN PT Hidden Point Meas-

urement, the height of the hidden point is computed and stored.
For hidden point measurement methods using two known points, this
is done for each known point. In this case, the height of the hidden
point is the average.

Stakeout GPS1200 38-1
38 Stakeout

38.1 Overview 38-2
38.2 Accessing Stakeout 38-6
38.3 Configuring Stakeout 38-9
38.4 Staking Out 38-18
38.1 Overview
Description The Stakeout application program is used to place marks in the field at predetermined points.
These predetermined points are the points to be staked. The points to be staked may
have been uploaded to a job on the receiver using LGO.
already exist in a job on the receiver.
have been uploaded from an ASCII file to a job on the receiver using Main Menu:
Convert...\Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job.
A staked point can be manually occupied as a check.
Diagram
P1
P0 Current position
d2
P1 Point to be staked
d1 Stake out distance
d1 d2 Height difference between current position
P0 and point to be staked
GPS12_50 Stake out direction
Stakeout modes Points can be staked using different modes:

Polar mode. Orthogonal mode.

) Staking out is possible for <R-Time Mode: Rover> and <R-Time Mode: None>.
)
Coordinate system
The points to be staked must exist in a job on the active memory device.
Points cannot be staked if the active coordinate system is different to that in which the points
to be staked are stored. For example, the points to be staked are stored with local coordi-
nates and the active coordinate system is WGS 1984.
Point types It is possible to stake:

Position only points. Height only points. Points with full sets of coordinates.
Height types Height type of the point to be staked: Orthometric OR ellipsoidal

Height type computed for current position: Orthometric OR ellipsoidal depending on the
configured transformation,
availability of a geoid model,
height type of the point to be staked.
If possible, the height type of the point to be
staked is computed for the current position.
Height source Heights can be taken into account from

the vertical component of a coordinate triplet. a Digital Terrain Model.
DTM Stakeout must be activated via a licence key. Refer to "28 Tools...\Licence Keys" for
information on how to type in the licence key.
If activated, the height of the points to be staked can be edited in the field.
Coding of manually Codes can be attached to manually occupied staked points. Refer to "10 Coding" for infor-
occupied staked points mation on coding. The behaviour of the coding functionality depends on the
selected <Stakeout Job:> as the job with the points to be staked.
selected <Job:> as the active job.
definition of a display mask with input fields for coding and attributes.
IF <Stakeout Job:> and AND a display mask THEN

<Job:> for point codes and
attributes
are identical is used the point code and attributes
attached to the point to be staked
are suggested for the manually
occupied staked point. They can
be changed.
are identical is not used the manually occupied staked point
is stored with the point code and
attributes attached to the point to
be staked.
are not identical is used <Point Code: <None>> is
suggested. It can be changed and
attributes can be entered. After a
point has been stored with a code
different to <Point Code:
<None>> then the last used point
code is suggested the next time.
are not identical is not used the manually occupied staked point
is stored with <Point Code:
<None>>.

It may happen that the codes and/or attributes of the manually occupied staked point and the
point to be staked do not match. In this case, a screen opens where they can be corrected.
Refer to "10.5 Code and Attribute Mismatch" for information on solving a code and/or
attribute mismatch.
Properties of staked The properties stored with staked points are:

points Class: Either MEAS or NAV depending on the position status when the staked point was
occupied.
Source: Stakeout
Averaging of staked The principles for averaging are identical to those of the Survey application program. Refer
points to "8.3.4 Mean Page" for information on averaging.
38.2 Accessing Stakeout
Access Select Main Menu: Programs...\Stakeout.

OR
Press PROG. Highlight Stakeout. CONT (F1). Refer to "34.2 Accessing the Application
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin. Refer to
OR
OR
Press STAKE (F5) from another application program, for example COGO.
STAKEOUT
Stakeout Begin
CONT (F1)
CONF (F2)
To configure Stakeout application program.
Accesses STAKEOUT Configuration. Refer
to "38.3 Configuring Stakeout".
CSYS (F6)

<Stakeout Choicelist The job containing the points to be staked. All jobs
Job:> from Main Menu: Manage...\Jobs can be selected.
Manage...\Jobs can be selected. Determines the
active coordinate system. Points which are occupied
after staking out are stored in this job. The original
points to be staked are not copied to this job.
The data from this job is shown in MANAGE Data:
Job Name.
be selected.
<DTM Job:> Choicelist Available for <Use DTM: DTM only> and <Use DTM:
DTM & Stake Job> in STAKEOUT Configuration,
Heights page. To select a DTM to be staked and to
select the active DTM layer to be used. Heights are
then staked out relative to the selected DTM. Refer to
"38.4.4 Staking Out a DTM".
can be selected. Configuration sets with <R-Time
Mode: Reference> cannot be used in the Stakeout
application program.
<Antenna:> Choicelist The antenna currently defined to be used in the
selected configuration set. All antennas from Main
Menu: Manage...\Antennas can be selected.
Next step
IF the Stakeout THEN
application program
is to be accessed CONT (F1) accepts the changes and accesses Stakeout application
program. Refer to "38.4 Staking Out".
is to be configured CONF (F2). Refer to "38.3 Configuring Stakeout".

38.3 Configuring Stakeout
Access Select Main Menu: Programs...\Stakeout. In STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin press CONF
(F2) to access STAKEOUT Configuration.
OR
Press PROG. Highlight Stakeout. CONT (F1). In STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin press
CONF (F2) to access STAKEOUT Configuration.
OR
Press SHIFT CONF (F2) in STAKEOUT XX Stakeout.
STAKEOUT This screen consists of the General page, the Checks page, the Heights page and the
Configuration, Logfile page. The explanations for the softkeys given below are valid for all pages, unless
General page otherwise stated.
CONT (F1)
DMASK (F3)
To edit the display mask currently being
displayed in this field. Accesses CONFIGURE
Define Display Mask n. Available for
<Display Mask:> being highlighted on
General page. Refer to "17.2 Display
Settings".
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT ABOUT (F5)
To display information about the program
name, the version number, the date of the
version, the copyright and the article number.
<Orientate:> The reference direction to be used to stakeout points.
The stakeout elements and the graphical display
shown in the Stakeout application program are based
on this selection.
To North The North direction shown in the graphical display
based on the active coordinate system.
To Sun The position of the sun calculated from the current
position, the time and the date.
To Last Point Timewise the last recorded point. If no points are yet
staked, <Orientate: To North> is used for the first
point to be staked.
To Point(Stake) A point from <Stakeout Job:> selected in
STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin.
To Point(Store) A point from <Job:> selected in STAKEOUT
Stakeout Begin.


To Line(Stake) The direction of the orientation is parallel to a refer-
ence line from <Stakeout Job:> selected in
STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin. Open the listbox to
create, edit or delete a reference line.
To Line(Store) The direction of the orientation is parallel to a refer-
ence line from <Job:> selected in STAKEOUT
Stakeout Begin. Open the listbox to create, edit or
delete a reference line.
To Arrow The direction of the orientation is from the current
position to the point to be staked. The graphical
display shows an arrow pointing in the direction of the
point to be staked.
<To:> Choicelist Available for <Orientate: To Point(Stake)>, <Orien-
tate: To Point(Store)>, <Orientate: To
Line(Stake)> and <Orientate: To Line(Store)>. To
select the point or line to be used for orientation.
Refer to "8.2 Accessing Data Management" for infor-
mation on creating, editing and deleting a known
point. Refer to "41.4 Managing Reference
Lines/Arcs" for information on creating, editing and
deleting a line.
<Stake Mode:> The method of staking out.
Polar The direction from the orientation reference, the hori-
zontal distance and the cut/fill is displayed.
Orthogonal The distance forwards to/backwards from the point,
the distance right/left to the point and the cut/fill is
displayed.
<Display Choicelist The user defined display mask to be shown in
Mask:> STAKEOUT XX Stakeout. All display masks of the
active configuration set defined in CONFIGURE
Display Settings can be selected.
<Closest The order of the points suggested for staking out.
Point:>
Yes After staking and storing a point, the next point
suggested for staking out is the point closest to the
point which was staked. If there are many points in
<Stakeout Job:>, the search may take a few
seconds.
No After staking and storing one point, the next point
suggested for staking out is the subsequent one in
<Stakeout Job:>.
<Store Pt ID:> Same as Stake Pt The manually occupied staked points are stored with
the same point IDs as the points to be staked.
Prefix Adds the setting for <Prefix/Suffix:> in front of the
original point IDs.
Suffix Adds the setting for <Prefix/Suffix:> at the end of the
original point IDs.


<Prefix/Suffix: User input Available for <Store Pt ID: Prefix> and <Store Pt ID:
> Suffix>. The identifier with up to four characters is
added in front of or at the end of the ID of the manu-
ally occupied staked point.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Checks page. Refer to paragraph "STAKEOUT Configuration,
Checks page".
STAKEOUT Description of fields

Configuration,
Checks page
<Pos Check:> Yes or No Allows a check to be made on the horizontal coordi-
nate difference between the manually occupied
staked point and the point to be staked. If the defined
<Pos Limit:> is exceeded, the stakeout can be
repeated, skipped or stored.
<Pos Limit:> User input Available for <Pos Check: Yes>. Sets the maximum
horizontal coordinate difference accepted in the posi-
tion check.
<Height Yes or No Allows a check to be made on the vertical difference
Check:> between the manually occupied staked point and the
point to be staked. If the defined <Height Limit:> is
exceeded, the stakeout can be repeated, skipped or
stored.
<Height User input Available for <Height Check: Yes>. Sets the
Limit:> maximum vertical difference accepted in the height
check.
<Beep near Yes or No The receiver beeps when the horizontal radial
Pt:> distance from the current position to the point to be
staked is equal to or less than defined in <Dist from
Pt:>.
<Dist from Pt:> User input Available for <Beep near Pt: Yes>. The horizontal
radial distance from the current position to the point to
be staked when a beep should be heard.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Heights page. Refer to paragraph "STAKEOUT Configuration,
Heights page".

Configuration,
Heights page Field Option Description
<Height User input Allows a constant height offset to be applied to the
Offset:> height of the points or DTM being staked.
<Edit Height:> Yes The field <D Ht:> for the design height is displayed in
STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout, Stake page and
STAKEOUT Polar Stakeout, Stake page. The
design height is the height of the point to be staked.
The value for <D Ht:> can be changed.


No The field <Ht:> for the height of the current position is
displayed in STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout,
Stake page and STAKEOUT Polar Stakeout, Stake
page. The value for <Ht:> cannot be changed.
<Use DTM:> Available if DTM Stakeout has been activated via a
licence key. Refer to "28 Tools...\Licence Keys" for
information on how to type in or upload the licence
key. Available unless STAKEOUT Configuration,
Heights page was accessed while being within the
Stakeout application program.
No No DTM file is used. The positions and heights of
points in the selected <Stakeout Job:> are staked
out.
DTM only Activates the stakeout of heights without positions.
Heights relative to the selected <DTM Job:> are
staked out.
DTM & Stake Job The positions of points in the selected <Stakeout
Job:> are staked out. Heights to be staked out are
taken from <DTM Job:>.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Logfile page. Refer to paragraph "STAKEOUT Configuration,
Logfile page".
Configuration,
Logfile page
<Write Yes or No To generate a logfile when the application program is
Logfile:> exited.
A logfile is a file to which data from an application
program is written to. It is generated using the
selected <Format File:>.
<File Name:> Choicelist Available for <Write Logfile: Yes>. The name of the
file to which the data should be written. A logfile is
stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory
device. The data is always appended to the file.
Opening the choicelist accesses XX Logfiles where
a name for a new logfile can be created and an
existing logfile can be selected or deleted.
<Format File:> Choicelist Available for <Write Logfile: Yes>. A format file
defines which and how data is written to a logfile.
Format files are created using LGO. A format file
must first be transferred from the CompactFlash card
to the System RAM before it can be selected. Refer
to "24 Tools...\Transfer Objects..." for information on
how to transfer a format file.
Opening the choicelist accesses MANAGE XX where
an existing format file can be selected or deleted.
Next step

38.4 Staking Out

38.4.1 Elements of the Graphical Display in the Stakeout 38-19
38.4.2 Staking Out in Orthogonal Mode 38-21
38.4.3 Staking Out in Polar Mode 38-31
38.4.4 Staking Out a DTM 38-35
38.4.5 Stakeout Difference Limit Exceeded 38-39

38.4.1 Elements of the Graphical Display in the Stakeout
Description A graphical display provides a guide to find the point to be staked out. The elements of the
graphical display used within the Stakeout application program screens are explained in this
chapter. Some of the elements depend on the selection for <Orientate:> in STAKEOUT
Configuration, General page. Other elements are commonly displayed.
The Map page provides an interactive display of the data. Refer to "30.5 Map Mode" for infor-
mation on the functionality and softkeys available.
Elements of graphical Rover Arrow; short arrow when within 1 m of

display the point to be staked
Point to be staked North arrow
North Current scale

Sun
Last or known point
Line within scale. The orientation of the

line is from the first to the second point.
This is from the bottom to the top of
screen.
Line, out off scale
Graphical display If the antenna is to far away and the scale is >1000 m, the antenna is not shown and the point
to be staked circle is grey.
Standard graphical display Reversed graphical display For scale 0.5 m

38.4.2 Staking Out in Orthogonal Mode
Description The stakeout elements are a horizontal distance forwards/backwards, a horizontal distance
right/left and a cut/fill. The values are calculated from the current position to the point to be
staked.
Diagram The diagram shows an example for stake out in orthogonal mode with <Orientate: To
North>.
P1
d2 d3
P0 Current position
d1 P1 Point to be staked
d1 <FORW:> or <BACK:>
d2 <RGHT:> or <LEFT:>
GPS12_52 P0 d3 <FILL:> or <CUT:>
) <Stake Mode: Orthogonal> is configured in STAKEOUT Configuration, General page.

Refer to "38.3 Configuring Stakeout".
Access Refer to "38.2 Accessing Stakeout" to access STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout.
STAKEOUT The pages shown are those from a typical configuration set. An additional page is available
Orthogonal Stakeout, when a user defined display mask is used.
Stake page
OCUPY (F1)
To start measuring the point being staked. The
(F1) changes to STOP. The difference
between the current position and the point
being staked is still displayed.
STOP (F1)
To end measuring the point being staked.
When <Auto STOP: Yes> in CONFIGURE
Point Occupation Settings, recording of posi-
tions ends automatically as defined by the stop
criteria. The position mode icon changes to the
moving icon. (F1) changes to STORE. After
ending the measurements, the differences
between the measured point and the point to
be staked are displayed.
STORE (F1)

NEAR (F2)
To search <Stakeout Job:> for the point
nearest to the current position when the key is
pressed. The point is selected as the point to
be staked and is displayed in the first field on
the screen. After staking and storing the
nearest point, the next point suggested for
staking out is the one which was suggested
before the key was pressed.
Available when OCUPY (F1) is displayed.
REVRS (F3)
To reverse the graphical display top to bottom.
A reversed graphical display can be used when
the point to be staked lies behind the current
position.
SURVY (F5)
To survey additional points which may be
needed during staking out. To return to
Stakeout application program, press SHIFT
QUIT (F6) or ESC.
Available for OCUPY (F1) being displayed.
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT CONF (F2)
To configure the Stakeout application program.
Available for OCUPY (F1) being displayed.
Refer to "38.3 Configuring Stakeout".
hang up immediately after the survey is
completed. Available for OCUPY (F1) or
STORE (F1) being displayed and for real-time
devices of type digital cellular phone or
modem. Available for <Auto CONEC: No> in
CONFIGURE GSM Connection.
SHIFT INIT (F4)
To select an initialisation method and to force a
new initialisation. Available for OCUPY (F1) or
STORE (F1) being displayed and for configura-
tion sets allowing phase fixed solutions. Refer
to "35.6.2 Accessing Initialisation for Real-
Time Rover Operations".
SHIFT QUIT (F6)
To exit Stakeout application program. Avail-
able for OCUPY (F1) being displayed.
First field on the Choicelist The point ID of the point to be staked. Accesses
screen STAKEOUT Data: Job Name where points are
shown according to sort and filter settings and staked
points are indicated by the staked out symbol .


<hA:> User input The default antenna height as defined in the active
configuration set is suggested. Refer to "3.3 Deter-
mining Antenna Heights". Changing the antenna
height here does not update the default antenna
height as defined in the active configuration set. The
changed antenna height is used until the application
program is exited.
<FORW:> Output The horizontal distance from the current position to
the point to be staked in the direction of the orienta-
tion.
<BACK:> Output The horizontal distance from the current position to
the point to be staked in the reverse direction of the
orientation.
<RGHT:> Output Horizontal distance from the current position to the
point to be staked orthogonal to the right of the orien-
tation direction.
<LEFT:> Output Horizontal distance from the current position to the
point to be staked orthogonal to the left of the orien-
tation direction.
The value for <Height Offset:> configured in
STAKEOUT Configuration, Heights page is taken
into account. To move down.
into account. To move up.
<Ht:> Output Available for <Edit Height: No> in STAKEOUT
Configuration, Heights page.
The height of the current position is displayed as
orthometric height. If the orthometric height cannot be
displayed, the ellipsoidal height is displayed. If it is not
possible to display the ellipsoidal height, the
WGS 1984 height is displayed. The value for <Height
Offset:> configured in STAKEOUT Configuration,
Heights page is taken into account.
<D Ht:> User input Available for <Edit Height: Yes> in STAKEOUT
The design height, which is the height of the point to
be staked, is displayed as orthometric height. If the
orthometric height cannot be displayed, the ellip-
soidal height is displayed. If it is not possible to
display the ellipsoidal height, the WGS 1984 height is
displayed. The value for <Height Offset:> configured
in STAKEOUT Configuration, Heights page is not
taken into account.


Changing the value for <D Ht:> changes the values
displayed for <CUT:> and <FILL:>.
<3DCQ:> Output Available for code and phase fixed solutions. The
current 3D coordinate quality of the computed posi-
tion.
<PDOP:> Output Available for autonomous solutions or if no solution is
available. The current PDOP of the autonomous solu-
tion.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Map page. Refer to paragraph "STAKEOUT Orthogonal
Stakeout, Map page".
STAKEOUT The Map page provides an interactive display of the data. Refer to "30 MapView Interactive
Orthogonal Stakeout, Display Feature" for information on the functionality and softkeys available.
Map page
Next step
Stake out in orthogonal In the Stakeout application program, the behaviour of the icons is as for a real-time survey.
mode step-by-step The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
1. Set up all equipment as for a real-time operation. 2
2. Start the Stakeout application program. 38.2
3. STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin 38.2
Check the settings.
4. CONF (F2)
5. STAKEOUT Configuration, General page 38.3
<Stake Mode: Orthogonal>
) This step-by-step instruction uses typical settings in all other fields on 38.3
all pages in STAKEOUT Configuration.
6. CONT (F1)
7. CONT (F1) to access STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout.
8. STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout, Stake page
Check the point ID and the antenna height.
) NEAR (F2) to search <Stakeout Job:> for the point nearest to the
current position when the key is pressed.
9. Wait until the ambiguities are solved. This is indicated by the position
status icon.
) When working with code only corrections, an ambiguity solution is not

attempted.
10. Orientate to North.


chapter
11. Move to the point to be staked either by following the values in the
fields <FORW:>, <BACK:>, <RGHT:> and <LEFT:> or the graphical
display.
) When the value is at or nearly zero, the current position is the point
to be staked.
12. Mark the current position for example with a peg.
) The height difference from <CUT:> or <FILL:> may be written on the

peg.
13. Hold the antenna steady over the marker.
14. OCUPY (F1) starts measuring the point.
) The value for the stakeout elements still show the difference between
the current position and the point to be staked.
15. When <Auto STOP: No> in CONFIGURE Point Occupation 17.6.1
Settings, STOP (F1) when enough data is collected. At least one
epoch of data must be recorded.
) For <Pos Check: Yes> and/or <Height Check: Yes> in STAKEOUT 38.4.5
Configuration, Checks page, a check is made on the horizontal
and/or vertical coordinate distance from the manually occupied
staked point to the point to be staked. If either of the configured differ-
ence limits are exceeded, STAKEOUT Difference Limit Exceeded
is accessed.
chapter
16. When <Auto STORE: No> in CONFIGURE Point Occupation 17.6.1
17. Are more points to be staked?
18. STAKEOUT Polar Stakeout, Stake page
According to sort and filter settings, the subsequent point in
<Stakeout Job:> is suggested for staking out.
20. SHIFT QUIT (F6) to return to the screen from where STAKEOUT
Stakeout Begin was accessed.

38.4.3 Staking Out in Polar Mode
Description The stakeout elements are a direction from the orientation reference, a horizontal distance
and a cut/fill. The value is calculated from the current position to the point to be staked.
Diagram This diagram shows an example for stake out in polar mode with <Orientate: To North>.
P1
d2
P0 Current position
d1 P1 Point to be staked
d1 <DIST:>
d2 <CUT:> or <FILL:>
GPS12_53 P0 <DIRC:>
) <Stake Mode: Polar> is configured in STAKEOUT Configuration, General page. Refer to

"38.3 Configuring Stakeout".
Access Refer to "38.2 Accessing Stakeout" to access STAKEOUT Polar Stakeout.
STAKEOUT The pages shown are those from a typical configuration set. An additional page is available
Polar Stakeout, when a user defined display mask is used.
Stake page The keys are identical with those in STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout, Stake page. Refer
to "38.4.2 Staking Out in Orthogonal Mode" for information on the keys.
First field on the Choicelist The point ID of the point to be staked. Accesses
screen STAKEOUT Data: Job Name where points are
shown according to sort and filter settings and staked
points are indicated by the staked out symbol .
program is exited.
<DIRC:> Output The bearing from the direction of the orientation to the
point to be staked seen from the current position.
point to be staked.
into account. To move down.


into account. To move up.
<Ht:> Output Available for <Edit Height: No> in STAKEOUT
WGS 1984 height is displayed. The value for <Height
Offset:> configured in STAKEOUT Configuration,
Heights page is taken into account.
<D Ht:> User input Available for <Edit Height: Yes> in STAKEOUT
displayed. The value for <Height Offset:> configured
in STAKEOUT Configuration, Heights page is not
taken into account.
tion.
<PDOP:> Output Available for autonomous solutions or if no solution is
available. The current PDOP of the autonomous solu-
tion.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Map page. Refer to paragraph "STAKEOUT Orthogonal
Stakeout, Map page".
STAKEOUT The Map page provides an interactive display of the data. Refer to "30 MapView Interactive
Polar Stakeout, Display Feature" for information on the functionality and softkeys available.
Map page
Next step
Stake out in polar mode The steps are identical to those of staking out in orthogonal mode. Refer to "38.4.2 Staking
step-by-step Out in Orthogonal Mode". Follow the instructions in paragraph "Stake out in orthogonal mode
step-by-step" using <Stake Mode: Polar>. The values are displayed as <DIRC:> and
<DIST:>.

38.4.4 Staking Out a DTM
Description With the Stakeout application program a Digital Terrain Model can be staked. The heights of
the current positions are compared against those of a selected DTM job. The height differ-
ences are calculated and displayed.
Staking a DTM may be used for

staking out where the DTM represents the surface to be staked.
quality control purposes where the DTM represents the final project surface.
DTM jobs are created in LGO. DTM jobs are stored in the \DBX directory on the active
memory device.
Diagram
d2
P1
d1
P1 Point to be staked
d1 Antenna height
GPS12_108 d2 <CUT:> or <FILL:>
Stake out a DTM step- The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
chapter
) DTM Stakeout must be activated via a licence key. 28
) The DTM job to be used must be stored in the \DBX directory on the
active memory device.
1. Start the Stakeout application program. 38.2
2. STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin
CONF (F2) to access STAKEOUT Configuration.
3. PAGE (F6) until the Heights page is active.
4. STAKEOUT Configuration, Heights page 38.3
<Use DTM: DTM only>
) <Use DTM: DTM & Stake Job> is not covered in this step-by-step
instruction. The stake out procedure is identical as for the polar or
38.3
orthogonal mode but the heights to be staked are taken from the
selected <DTM Job:> defined in STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin.
) This step-by-step instruction uses typical settings in all other fields on 38.3
all pages in STAKEOUT Configuration.
The selection for <Stake Mode:> is irrelevant since no positions are
staked.
5. CONT (F1)
6. STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin 38.2
<DTM Job:> Select a DTM job.
Check the other settings.


chapter
7. CONT (F1) to access STAKEOUT DTM Stakeout.
8. STAKEOUT DTM Stakeout, Stake page
Check the suggested antenna height.
9. Wait until the ambiguities are solved. This is indicated by the position
status icon.
) When working with code only corrections, an ambiguity solution is not

attempted.
10. STAKEOUT DTM Stakeout, Stake page
<CUT:> or <FILL:> The negative or positive height differences from
the current position to the equivalent point in the selected DTM job is
calculated and displayed. Height offsets apply.
11. Mark the current position for example with a peg.
) The height difference from <CUT:> or <FILL:> may be written on the

peg.
12. OCUPY (F1) starts collecting data.
)
13.
The height difference is still shown.
When <Auto STOP: No> in CONFIGURE Point Occupation 17.6.1
chapter
) For <Height Check: Yes> in STAKEOUT Configuration, Checks 38.4.5

page, a check is made on the vertical coordinate distance from the
manually occupied staked point to the point to be staked. If the config-
ured difference limit is exceeded, STAKEOUT Difference Limit
Exceeded is accessed.
15. Are more heights to be staked?
If yes, move to the next position and repeat steps 8. to 15.
16. SHIFT QUIT (F6) to return to the screen from where STAKEOUT
Stakeout Begin was accessed.

38.4.5 Stakeout Difference Limit Exceeded
Description If configured a check is made on the horizontal and/or vertical coordinate distance from the
manually occupied staked point to the point to be staked. Refer to "38.3 Configuring
Stakeout" for information on configuring the check and the limits.
Access The screen shown below is accessed automatically when the point is stored if either of the
configured difference limits are exceeded.
STAKEOUT The availability of the fields depends on the configured <Stake Mode:> and <Use DTM:>.
Difference Limit For example for <Use DTM: DTM only>, position relevant fields are unavailable.
Exceeded
The limits that have been exceeded are shown in bold and indicated by a .
BACK (F1)
To return to STAKEOUT XX Stakeout without
storing the point. Staking out of the same point
continues.
STORE (F3)
To accept the coordinate differences, store the
point information and return to STAKEOUT XX
Stakeout.
SKIP (F4)
To return to STAKEOUT XX Stakeout without
storing the point. According to filter and sort
settings the subsequent point in <Stakeout
Job:> is suggested for staking out.
<Point ID:> Output The point ID of the point to be staked.
<Store ID:> User input The unique number which is used to store the manu-
ally occupied staked point. Allows a different point ID
to be typed in if needed.
< BEARING:> Output The bearing from the manually occupied staked point
to the point to be staked.
< Output Horizontal distance from the manually occupied
DISTANCE:> staked point to the point to be staked.
tion.
orientation.
<RGHT:> Output Horizontal distance from the manually occupied
staked point to the point to be staked orthogonal to
the right of the orientation direction.


<LEFT:> Output Horizontal distance from the manually occupied
staked point to the point to be staked orthogonal to
the left of the orientation direction.
manually occupied staked point to the height of the
point to be staked. To move down.
manually occupied staked point to the height of the
point to be staked. To move up.
<2D-Diff:> Output Displays the horizontal difference from the manually
occupied staked point to the point to be staked.
<3D-Diff:> Output Displays the spatial difference from the manually
occupied staked point to the point to be staked.
Next step
IF the exceeded THEN
difference limit
is not to be accepted BACK (F1) to stake the same point again.
is to be accepted STORE (F3) to store the point and to stake out the next point.
is not to be accepted SKIP (F4) to skip staking this point and to stake out the next point.
but cannot be
improved
COGO GPS1200 39-1
39 COGO

39.1 Overview 39-2
39.2 Accessing COGO 39-4
39.3 Configuring COGO 39-11
39.4 COGO Calculation - Inverse Method 39-16
39.5 COGO Calculation - Traverse Method 39-20
39.6 COGO Calculation - Intersections Method 39-31
39.7 COGO Calculation - Line Calculations Method 39-51
39.8 COGO Calculation - Arc Calculations Method 39-65
39.9 COGO Calculation - Shift, Rotate & Scale Method 39-76
39.10 Selecting a Result from Previous COGO Inverse Calculations 39-91
39.11 Modifying Values for Azimuths, Distances and Offsets 39-93
39.1 Overview
Description COGO is an application program to perform coordinate geometry calculations such as

coordinates of points. bearings between points. distances between points.
The calculations can be made from

existing point data in the job, known distances or known azimuths.
manually occupied points.
entered coordinates.
In contrast to hidden point measurements within the Survey application program, COGO is
more of a calculation program than a measuring program.
) Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in COGO does not result
in the point being recomputed.
COGO calculation The COGO calculation methods are:

methods Inverse. Line calculations.
Traverse. Arc calculations.
Intersections. Shift, Rotate & Scale
Distances and azimuths Type of distances: The choices are

Ground
Grid
Ellipsoidal
Type of azimuths: The azimuths are grid azimuths relative to the local grid.
COGO GPS1200 39-2

COGO GPS1200 39-3
Coding of COGO points Thematical coding is available in COGO XX Results after the COGO calculation.
Thematical coding of COGO points is identical to coding manually occupied points. Refer
to "10 Coding" for information on coding.
For the COGO calculation shift, rotate & scale, the codes from the original points are
taken over for the calculated COGO points.
Properties of COGO The properties stored with COGO points are:

points Class: Either MEAS or CTRL depending on the COGO calculation method.
Sub class: COGO
Source: Arc Base Pt, Arc Centre Pt, Arc Offset Pt, Arc Segmt Pt, COGO Traverse,
Intsct (Brg Brg), Intsct (Brg Dst), Intsct (Dst Dst), Intsct (4 Pts), Line Base Pt, Line
Offset Pt, Line Segmt Pt or Shift Rotate Pt depending on the COGO calculation method
used
39.2 Accessing COGO
Access Select Main Menu: Programs...\COGO.

OR
Press PROG. Highlight COGO. CONT (F1). Refer to "34.2 Accessing the Application
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen COGO COGO Begin. Refer to "5.1 Hot
OR
) The screens for each COGO calculation method can be accessed directly by pressing a
configured hot key or USER where COGO COGO Begin is not accessed. The currently
active configuration set and job are used.
COGO GPS1200 39-4

COGO GPS1200 39-5
COGO
COGO Begin
CONT (F1)
CONF (F2)
To configure the COGO application program.
Accesses COGO Configuration. Refer to
"39.3 Configuring COGO".
CSYS (F6)
be selected.
System RAM codelist but typed in, then the name of
the active job is displayed.
can be selected.
Next step
CONT (F1) accepts changes and accesses COGO COGO Menu.
COGO The COGO menu lists all COGO calculation methods and the option to end COGO.
COGO Menu
COGO GPS1200 39-6

COGO GPS1200 39-7
CONT (F1)
SHIFT CONF (F2)
Description of the COGO menu options

COGO menu options Description Refer to
chapter
Inverse To calculate the direction, the distance and the 3D 39.4
coordinate differences between two known points.
Points with full coordinate triplets, position only
points and height only points can be used.
Traverse To calculate the position of new points using 39.5
the azimuth/bearing and the distance from a
known point. Offset optional.
the angle and the distance from a known point.
Offset optional.
chapter
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only
points can be used.
Intersections To calculate the position of an intersection point 39.6
using
bearings from two known points.
a bearing and a distance from two known points.
distances from two known points.
four points.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only
points can be used.
Line Calculations To calculate the base point of the line using 39.7
two known points and an offset point.
a bearing and a distance from a known point and
an offset point.
To calculate the offset point of the line using
two known points that define the line, a distance
along the line and an offset.
a distance along a bearing from a known point
and and offset.
To calculate new points on a line using
COGO GPS1200 39-8

COGO GPS1200 39-9

chapter
two known points that define the line and either
the segment length or the number of segments.
a bearing and distance from a known point that
define the line and either the segment length or
the number of segments.
Arc Calculations To calculate the arc centre using 39.8
three points.
a radius to two known points.
To calculate the base point of the arc using
three points and an offset point.
a radius to two known points and an offset point.
To calculate the offset point of the arc using
three known points that define the arc and an
offset.
two known points with a radius and and an
offset.
To calculate new points on an arc using
three known points that define the arc and either
the segment length or the number of segments.
chapter
a radius to two known points that define an arc
and either the segment length or the number of
segments.
Shift, Rotate & Scale To calculate the position of new points using 39.9
coordinates of known points
shifts.
rotation.
scale. Heights are not scaled.
Points with full coordinate triplets, position only
points and height only points can be used.
End COGO To end COGO and return to the screen from where
COGO was accessed.
Next step
IF THEN
a COGO calculation highlight the relevant option and press CONT (F1). Refer to the
method is to be started chapters stated above.
COGO is to be configured SHIFT CONF (F2). Refer to "39.3 Configuring COGO".
COGO is to be ended highlight End COGO and CONT (F1).
COGO GPS1200 39-10

COGO GPS1200 39-11
39.3 Configuring COGO
Access Select Main Menu: Programs...\COGO. In COGO COGO Begin press CONF (F2) to
access COGO Configuration.
OR
Press PROG. Highlight COGO. CONT (F1). In COGO COGO Begin press CONF (F2) to
access COGO Configuration.
OR
Press SHIFT CONF (F2) in COGO COGO Menu. Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO".
OR
Press SHIFT CONF (F2) in COGO XX.
COGO This screen consists of the Parameters page and the Logfile page. The explanations for the
Configuration, softkeys given below are valid for all pages.
Parameters page
CONT (F1)
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT ABOUT (F5)
To display information about the program
name, the version number, the date of the
version, the copyright and the article number.
<Use Offsets:> Yes or No Activates the use of offsets in the COGO calculations.
Input fields for the offsets are available in COGO XX.
<Distance The type of distances and offsets to be accepted as
Type:> input or shown as output, and used in the calculation.
Grid Distances are calculated as the trigonometric
distance between the position of two points. The
distance field is <HDist-Grid:>.
Ground Distances are horizontal distances between two
points at the mean elevation parallel to the ellipsoid of
the active coordinate system. The distance field is
<HDist-Grnd:>.
Ellipsoid Distances are reduced to the ellipsoid. They are
calculated as the shortest distance between the two
points on the ellipsoid. A scale factor is applied. The
distance field is <HDist-Ell:>.
) In the attached coordinate system, a projec-

tion, an ellipsoid and a transformation have to
be defined to calculate grid, ground and ellip-
soid coordinates.
COGO GPS1200 39-12

COGO GPS1200 39-13
a Ellipsoid
P1 Known
d1 P1 First known point
P2 Second known point
Unknown
P2 d1 Ground distance
d2 d2 Ellipsoid distance
a d3 Grid distance
d3
TPS12_170
<Est Pos User input The estimated value for the position quality assigned
Qlty:> to all calculated COGO points which is used for the
averaging calculation.
<Est Ht Qlty:> User input The estimated value for the height quality assigned to
all calculated heights which is used for the averaging
calculation.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Logfile page. Refer to paragraph "COGO Configuration, Logfile
page".
COGO Description of fields
Configuration,
Logfile page
Logfile:> exited.
A logfile is a file to which data from an application program
is written to. It is generated using the selected <Format
File:>.
<File Name:> Choicelist Available for <Write Logfile: Yes>. The name of the file to
which the data should be written. A logfile is stored in the
\DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is
always appended to the file.
Opening the choicelist accesses XX Logfiles where a
name for a new logfile can be created and an existing
logfile can be selected or deleted.
<Format File:> Choicelist Available for <Write Logfile: Yes>. A format file defines
which and how data is written to a logfile. Format files are
created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred
from the CompactFlash card to the System RAM before it
can be selected. Refer to "24 Tools...\Transfer Objects..."
for information on how to transfer a format file.
Opening the choicelist accesses XX Format Files where
Next step
COGO GPS1200 39-14

COGO GPS1200 39-15
<Bearing:>.
39.4 COGO Calculation - Inverse Method
Description The coordinates of two points must be known. The points

may be taken from the active job.
may be manually occupied during the COGO calculation.
may be entered.
The direction, the distance and the coordinate differences between the two known points can
be calculated depending on the data available for the known points. Points with full coordi-
nate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used.
Diagram
P1
Known
P0 First known point
d P1 Second known point
Unknown
Direction from P0 to P1
d1 Slope distance between P0 and P1
P0 d2 Horizontal distance between P0 and P1
GPS12_062 d3 Height difference between P0 and P1
Inverse COGO calcula- The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
tion step-by-step information on screens.
COGO GPS1200 39-16

COGO GPS1200 39-17

chapter
1. Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO" to access COGO Inverse.
) COGO Inverse, Inverse page

SHIFT CONF (F2) to configure the COGO application program. 39.3
2. COGO Inverse, Inverse page
<From:> The point ID of the first known point for the COGO calcula-
tion.
<To:> The point ID of the second known point for the COGO calcula-
tion.
Select the points to be used.
) SURVY (F5) when <From:> or <To:> is highlighted. To manually

occupy a known point for the COGO calculation.
35.3
) For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page 30.5
can be used to select the desired point.
) To type in coordinates for a known point open the choicelist when

<From:> or <To:> is highlighted. Press NEW (F2) to create a new
8.3.2
point.
3. COGO Inverse, Inverse page 39.3
The COGO calculation results are displayed on the same page.
chapter
The horizontal distance values which are displayed depend on the
configuration for <Distance Type:> in COGO Configuration,
Parameters page.
----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example if a position
only point is used, < Height:> cannot be calculated.
<Azimuth:> The direction from the first to the second known point.
<HDist-XX:> The horizontal distance between the two known points.
< Height:> The height difference between the two known points.
<Slope Dist:> The slope distance between the two known points.
<Grade:> The grade between the two known points.
< Easting:> The difference in Easting between the two known
points.
< Northing:> The difference in Northing between the two known
points.
4. PAGE (F6) changes to the Map page.
5. COGO Inverse, Map page 30.5
The calculated distance between the two known points is indicated.
) SHIFT QUIT (F6) does not store the calculation results and exits
COGO calculation.
6. STORE (F1) to store the result.
COGO GPS1200 39-18

COGO GPS1200 39-19

chapter
) For <Write Logfile: Yes> in COGO Configuration, Logfile page the

result is written to the logfile.
7. Are more inverse COGO calculations to be made?
8. SHIFT QUIT (F6) to exit COGO calculation.
39.5 COGO Calculation - Traverse Method

39.5.1 Overview 39-21
39.5.2 Traverse with Azimuth/Bearing 39-24
39.5.3 Traverse with Angle Right 39-29
COGO GPS1200 39-20

COGO GPS1200 39-21
39.5.1 Overview
Description Elements that must be known are

the coordinates of one point.
the direction from the known point to the COGO point.
the distance from the known point to the COGO point.
offsets, if required and configured.
The coordinates of the known point

may be entered.
The direction from the known point to the COGO point can be an azimuth or an angle.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. Position only is calcu-
lated, height can be typed in.
A COGO traverse calculation can be calculated for

a single point.
multiple points. Several single points are calculated in one sequence.
sideshots.
Diagram COGO traverse calculation with offset for a single point
P2 d3
Known
d2
P0 Known point
P1 Direction from P0 to P1
d1 Distance between P0 and P1
d1 d2 Positive offset to the right
d3 Negative offset to the left
Unknown
P1 COGO point without offset
P0
P2 COGO point with positive offset
GPS12_106 P3 COGO point with negative offset
COGO traverse calculation without offset for multiple points
Known
P0 Known point
2 P4 1 Direction from P0 to P1
d4 2 Direction from P1 to P2
4 3 Direction from P2 to P3
1 P1 d2 3 4 Direction from P2 to P4
P2 d1 Distance between P0 and P1
d1
d3 d2 Distance between P1 and P2
P0 d3 Distance between P2 and P3
GPS12_063 P3 d4 Distance between P2 and P4
COGO GPS1200 39-22

COGO GPS1200 39-23
Unknown
P1 First COGO point
P2 Second COGO point
P3 Third COGO point - sideshot
P4 Fourth COGO point
39.5.2 Traverse with Azimuth/Bearing
COGO traverse calcula- The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
tion with information on screens.
azimuth/bearing step-
by-step
chapter
1. Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO" to access COGO Traverse Input.
) COGO Traverse Input, Input page

2. COGO Traverse Input, Input page
<Method: Azimuth>
<From:> The point ID of the known point for the COGO calculation.
Select a point to be used.
) SURVY (F5) when <From:> is highlighted. To manually occupy a

known point for the COGO calculation.
35.3

<From:> is highlighted. Press NEW (F2) to create a new point.
8.3.2
3. COGO Traverse Input, Input page

<Azimuth:> The direction from the known point to the COGO point.
<HDist-XX:> The horizontal distance between the known point and
the COGO point.
COGO GPS1200 39-24

COGO GPS1200 39-25

chapter
<Offset:> Available for <Use Offsets: Yes> in COGO Configura-
tion, Parameters page. The offset of the COGO point from the line
of direction. A positive offset is to the right, a negative offset is to the
left.
Type in the azimuth, the distance and the offset, if required.
) The values for the azimuth, the distance and the offset can be calcu- 39.4
lated from two existing points.
INV (F2) when <Azimuth:>, <HDist-XX:> or <Offset:> is highlighted.
To perform a COGO inverse calculation.
) Upon pressing STORE (F1) in COGO Inverse, the result from

the COGO inverse calculation is copied to the field which was
highlighted when INV (F2) was pressed.
) For <Write Logfile: Yes> in COGO Configuration, Logfile

page the result of the COGO inverse calculation is written to
the logfile.
) The values for the azimuth, the distance and the offset can be
selected from previous COGO inverse calculations.
39.10
LAST (F4) when <Azimuth:>, <HDist-XX:> or <Offset:> is high-

lighted. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations.
Upon pressing CONT (F1) in COGO Last Inverse Calculations, the
selected result is copied to the field which was highlighted when
LAST (F4) was pressed.
chapter
) The values for the azimuth, the distance and the offset can be math- 39.11
ematically modified.
SHIFT MODIF (F4) when <Azimuth:>, <HDist-XX:> or <Offset:> is
highlighted. To add, subtract, multiply and divide values.
4. Is the COGO point a foresight?
If yes, CALC (F1).
The result is calculated and displayed in COGO Traverse
Results. After storing the result and returning to COGO Traverse
Input, Input page, the point displayed in <From:> is the newly
calculated COGO point. The next COGO calculation can be
continued from this new point.
If no, SSHOT (F3).
The result is calculated and displayed in COGO Traverse
Results. After storing the result and returning to COGO Traverse
Input, Input page, the point originally selected in <From:> is still
displayed. The next COGO calculation can be continued from that
same point.
5. COGO Traverse Results, Result page
<Point ID:> The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point 17.1
ID template configured for <Survey Pts:> in CONFIGURE ID
Templates. The point ID can be changed.
COGO GPS1200 39-26

COGO GPS1200 39-27

chapter
<Ortho Ht:> or <Local Ell Ht:> are input fields. They display -----
when entering the Result page. A height value to be stored with the
calculated point can be typed in.
The calculated coordinates are displayed.
Type in a point ID.
) STAKE (F5) to access the Stakeout application program and stake

out the calculated COGO point.
38.4
After staking, measuring and storing the COGO point, COGO

Traverse Results, Result page is displayed.
) SHIFT ELL H (F2) and SHIFT ORTH (F2). Available for local coordi-

17.1
7. COGO Traverse Results, Code page 10, 8.3.2
selected.
chapter
9. COGO Traverse Results, Plot page 30.6
An arrow points from the known point to the calculated COGO point.
) SHIFT QUIT (F6) does not store the COGO point and exits COGO
calculations.
10. STORE (F1) to store the result and return to COGO Traverse Input,
Input page.

11. Are more COGO traverse calculations to be made?
COGO GPS1200 39-28

COGO GPS1200 39-29
39.5.3 Traverse with Angle Right
Access Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO" to access COGO Traverse Input.
COGO
CALC (F1)
Traverse Input,
To calculate the COGO point.
Input page
INV (F2)
To calculate the values for the distance and the
offset from two existing points. Available if
<HDist-XX:> or <Offset:> is highlighted.
SSHOT (F3).
To calculate the point as a sideshot.
LAST (F4)
To select the values for the distance and the
offset from previous COGO inverse calcula-
tions. Available if <HDist-XX:> or <Offset:> is
highlighted.
SURVY (F5)
To manually occupy a point for the COGO
calculation. Available if <From:> or <Back-
sight:> is highlighted.
SHIFT CONF (F2)
SHIFT MODIF (F4)
To mathematically modify the values for the
angle right, the distance and the offset. Avail-
able if <Angle Right:>, <HDist-XX:> or
<Offset:> is highlighted.
<Method:> Angle Right The direction from the known point to the COGO point
is an angle.
<From:> Choicelist The point ID of the known point for the COGO calcu-
lation.
<Backsight:> Choicelist The point ID of a point used as backsight.
<Angle Right:> User input The angle between <Backsight:> and the new
COGO point to be calculated from the point selected
as <From:>. A positive value is for clockwise angles.
A negative value is for counterclockwise angles.
<Azimuth:> Output The direction from the known point to the COGO point
calculated from <Angle Right:>.
<HDist-XX:> User input The horizontal distance between the known point and
the COGO point.
<Offset:> User input The offset of the COGO point from the line of direc-
tion. A positive offset is to the right, a negative offset
is to the left.
Next step
The work flow is very similar to a COGO traverse calculation with azimuth/bearing. Refer to
"39.5.2 Traverse with Azimuth/Bearing".
COGO GPS1200 39-30

COGO GPS1200 39-31
39.6 COGO Calculation - Intersections Method

39.6.1 Intersection with Bearing - Bearing 39-32
39.6.2 Intersection with Bearing - Distance 39-38
39.6.3 Intersection with Distance - Distance 39-43
39.6.4 Intersection with By Points 39-46
39.6.1 Intersection with Bearing - Bearing
Description The COGO intersection calculation bearing - bearing calculates the intersection point of two
lines. A line is defined by a point and a direction.
Elements that must be known are

the coordinates of two points.
the direction from these known points to the COGO point.
offsets if required and configured.
The coordinates of the known points

may be entered.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. Position only is calcu-
lated, height can be typed in.
COGO GPS1200 39-32

COGO GPS1200 39-33
Diagram
P2
1
Known
P1 Second known point
P0 2 1 Direction from P0 to P2
2 Direction from P1 to P2
P1 Unknown
GPS12_064 P2 COGO point
COGO intersection The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
calculation with bearing information on screens.
- bearing step-by-step
chapter
1. Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO" to access COGO Intersection
Input.
) COGO Intersection Input, Input page

SHIFT CONF (F2) to configure the COGO application program.
39.3
2. COGO Intersection Input, Input page

<Method: Brng - Brng>
<1st Point:> The point ID of the first known point for the COGO
calculation.
chapter
Select the point stored in the job.
) SURVY (F5) when <1st Point:> is highlighted. To manually occupy 35.3

a point for the COGO calculation.

<1st Point:> is highlighted. Press NEW (F2) to create a new point.
8.3.2

<Azimuth:> The direction from the first known point to the COGO
point.
tion, Parameters page. The offset of the COGO point from the line
of direction. A positive offset is to the right, a negative offset is to the
left.
Type in the azimuth and the offset, if required.
) The values for the azimuth and the offset can be calculated from two 39.4
existing points.
INV (F2) when <Azimuth:> or <Offset:> is highlighted. To perform a
COGO inverse calculation.

COGO GPS1200 39-34

COGO GPS1200 39-35

chapter

the logfile.
) The values for the azimuth and the offset can be selected from
previous COGO inverse calculations.
39.10
LAST (F4) when <Azimuth:> or <Offset:> is highlighted. To recall

previous results from COGO inverse calculations.
selected result is copied to the field which was highlighted when
LAST (F4) was pressed.
) The values for the azimuth and the offset can be mathematically
modified.
39.11
SHIFT MODIF (F4) when <Azimuth:> or <Offset:> is highlighted. To

add, subtract, multiply and divide values.
The procedure to input the second known point and the azimuth is
identical to the procedure for the first known point. Repeat steps 2.
and 3.
5. CALC (F1) to calculate the result.
6. COGO Brng - Brng Results, Result page
chapter
<Point ID:> The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point 17.1
ID template configured for <Survey Pts:> in CONFIGURE ID
Templates. The point ID can be changed.
<Ortho Ht:> or <Local Ell Ht:> are input fields. They display ----
when entering the Result page. A height value to be stored with the
Type in a point ID.

38.4
After staking, measuring and storing the COGO point COGO Brng -
Brng Results, Result page is displayed.

17.1
8. COGO Brng - Brng Results, Code page 10, 8.3.2
selected.
COGO GPS1200 39-36

COGO GPS1200 39-37

chapter
10. COGO Brng - Brng Results, Plot page 30.6
Arrows point from the known points to the calculated COGO point.
) SHIFT QUIT (F6) does not store the COGO point and exits COGO
calculation.
11. STORE (F1) to store the result and return to COGO Intersection
Input, Input page.

12. Are more COGO intersection calculations to be made?
If yes, repeat steps 2. to 12. 39.6.2,
<Method:> in COGO Intersection Input, Input page can be 39.6.3 or
changed. Refer to the relevant chapters for the other COGO inter- 39.6.4
section calculation methods.
39.6.2 Intersection with Bearing - Distance
Description The COGO intersection calculation bearing - distance calculates the intersection point of a
line and a circle. The line is defined by a point and a direction. The circle is defined by the
centre point and the radius.

the direction from one known point to the COGO point.
the distance from the second known point to the COGO point.
offsets if required and configured.

may be entered.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used.
COGO GPS1200 39-38

COGO GPS1200 39-39
Diagram
P2
r Known
P1 P0 First known point
P3 P1 Second known point
Direction from P0 to P2
r Radius, as defined by the distance from P1 to
P2
Unknown
P0
P2 First COGO point
GPS12_065 P3 Second COGO point
calculation with bearing information on screens.
- distance step-by-step
chapter
1. The procedure of a COGO intersection calculation with bearing -
distance is similar to a COGO intersection calculation with bearing -
bearing.
Follow the steps 1. to 5. in paragraph "COGO intersection calculation 39.6.1
with bearing - bearing step-by-step". The differences are:
<Method: Brng - Dist> is to be selected in COGO Intersection
Input, Input page.
For the second known point <HDist-XX:> is used instead of
<Azimuth:>. The keys and advice mentioned are still valid.
chapter
2. CALC (F1) to calculate the COGO points.
)3.
Two results are calculated.
COGO Brng - Dist Results, Result1 page
<Point ID:> The identifier for the first result of the COGO point 17.1
depending on the point ID template configured for <Survey Pts:> in
CONFIGURE ID Templates. The point ID can be changed.
<Ortho Ht:> or <Local Ell Ht:> are input fields. They display ----
when entering the Result1 page. A height value to be stored with the
Type in a point ID.

38.4
After staking, measuring and storing the COGO point COGO Brng -
Brng Results, Result1 page is displayed.

17.1
COGO GPS1200 39-40

COGO GPS1200 39-41

chapter
) PAGE (F6) changes to the Code page where a code and attributes 10
can be selected.
) Pressing PAGE (F6) twice changes to the Plot page.

Both COGO points and known points are displayed.
30.6
) SHIFT QUIT (F6) does not store the COGO points and exits COGO
calculations.
)4.
RSLT1 (F3) or RSLT2 (F3) to view the first and second result.
COGO Brng - Dist Results, Result1 page
Is the first result to be stored?
If yes, STORE (F1) to store the result and activate the Result2
page. For <Write Logfile: Yes> in COGO Configuration, Logfile
page the result is written to the logfile.
If no, RSLT2 (F3) to activate the Result2 page.
5. COGO Brng - Dist Results, Result2 page
Repeat step 3.
6. COGO Brng - Dist Results, Result2 page
Is the second result to be stored?
If yes, STORE (F1) to store the result and return to COGO Inter-
section Input, Input page. For <Write Logfile: Yes> in COGO
Configuration, Logfile page the result is written to the logfile.
chapter
If no, ESC does not store the COGO point and returns to COGO
Intersection Input, Input page.
7. Are more COGO intersection calculations to be done?
If yes, repeat steps 1. to 7. 39.6.1,
<Method:> in COGO Intersection Input, Input page can be 39.6.3 or
changed. Refer to the relevant chapters for other COGO intersec- 39.6.4
tion calculation method than <Method: Brng - Dist>.
8. SHIFT QUIT (F6) exit COGO calculation.
COGO GPS1200 39-42

COGO GPS1200 39-43
39.6.3 Intersection with Distance - Distance
Description The COGO intersection calculation distance - distance calculates the intersection point of
two circles. The circles are defined by the known point as the centre point and the distance
from the known point to the COGO point as the radius.

the distance from the known points to the COGO point.

may be entered.
Diagram
Known
r1 P2 P1 Second known point
P0 r1 Radius, as defined by the distance from P0 to
r2 P2
P3 r2 Radius, as defined by the distance from P1 to
P2
P1
Unknown
GPS12_066 P2 First COGO point
P3 Second COGO point
calculation with information on screens.
distance - distance
step-by-step Step Description Refer to
chapter
1. The procedure for a COGO intersection calculation with distance -
distance is very similar to a COGO intersection calculation with
bearing - bearing.
with bearing - bearing step-by-step" The differences are:
<Method: Dist - Dist> is to be selected in COGO Intersection
Input, Input page.
COGO GPS1200 39-44

COGO GPS1200 39-45

chapter
For both known points <HDist-XX:> is used instead of
<Azimuth:>. The keys and advice mentioned are still valid.
<Offset:> is unavailable.
2. The remaining procedure is identical to a COGO intersection calcula-
tion with bearing - distance. The screen is called COGO Dist - Dist
Results.
with bearing - distance step-by-step".
39.6.4 Intersection with By Points
Description The COGO intersection calculation by points calculates the intersection point of two lines. A
line is defined by two points.

the coordinates of four points.
offsets of the lines if required and configured.

may be entered.
COGO GPS1200 39-46

COGO GPS1200 39-47
Diagram
P1
a
P3
Known
b
P4 P1 Second known point
P2 P2 Third known point
P3 Fourth known point
a Line from P0 to P1
P0 b Line from P2 to P3
Unknown
GPS12_107 P4 COGO point
calculation with by information on screens.
points step-by-step
chapter
1. Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO" to access COGO Intersection
Input.
) COGO Intersection Input, Input page

SHIFT CONF (F2) to configure the COGO application program.
39.3

<Method: By Points>
chapter
<1st Point:> The point ID of the known start point of the first line for
the COGO calculation.
<2nd Point:> The point ID of the known end point of the first line for
the COGO calculation.
Select the points stored in the job.
) SURVY (F5) when <1st Point:> or <2nd Point:> is highlighted. To

manually occupy a known point for the COGO calculation.
35.3

<1st Point:> or <2nd Point:> is highlighted. Press NEW (F2) to
8.3.2
create a new point.

tion, Parameters page. The offset of the line in the direction <1st
Point:> to <2nd Point:>. A positive offset is to the right, a negative
offset is to the left.
Type in the offset if required.
) The value for the offset can be calculated from two existing points.
INV (F2) when <Offset:> is highlighted. To perform a COGO inverse
39.4
calculation.
COGO GPS1200 39-48

COGO GPS1200 39-49

chapter


the logfile.
) The value for the offset can be selected from previous COGO inverse 39.10
calculations.
LAST (F4) when <Offset:> is highlighted. To recall previous results
from COGO inverse calculations.
selected result is copied to the field.
) The value for the offset can be mathematically modified.

SHIFT MODIF (F4) when <Offset:> is highlighted. To add, subtract,
39.11
multiply and divide values.

The procedure for the third and fourth known point and the offset is
identical to the procedure for the first and second known point.
Repeat steps 2. and 3.
chapter
5. The remaining procedure is identical to a COGO intersection calcula-
tion with bearing - bearing. The screen is called COGO By Points
Results. On the Plot page two solid lines are displayed.
Follow the steps 5. to 13. in paragraph "COGO intersection calcula- 39.6.1
tion with bearing - bearing step-by-step".
COGO GPS1200 39-50

COGO GPS1200 39-51
39.7 COGO Calculation - Line Calculations Method

39.7.1 Line Calculation - Base Point 39-52
39.7.2 Line Calculation - Offset Point 39-59
39.7.3 Line Calculation - Segmentation 39-61
39.7.1 Line Calculation - Base Point
Description The COGO line calculation base point calculates the base point, station and offset of a point
in relation to a line.

coordinates of two points and an offset point.
OR
coordinates of one point and an offset point
bearing and distance from one point

may be measured during the COGO calculation.
may be entered.
Diagram
P1
P3
d1 P0 <Start Point:>
d2 P2 P1 <End Point:>
P2 <Offset Point:>
P3 Base point
d1 <Offset-XX:>
GPS12_119 P0 d2 <Line-XX:>
COGO GPS1200 39-52

COGO GPS1200 39-53
)
Access
Line management is not available for COGO line calculations.
Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO" to access COGO Line Calculations Input.
COGO
Line Calculations Input,
Input page
CALC (F1)
To calculate COGO point.
INV (F2)
To calculate the values for the distance and the
offset from two existing points. Available if
<Azimuth:> or <HDist-XX:> is highlighted.
LAST (F4)
To select the values for the distance and the
offset from previous COGO inverse calcula-
tions. Available if <Azimuth:> or <HDist-XX:>
is highlighted.
SURVY (F5)
calculation. Available if <Start Point:> or <End
Point:> is highlighted.
SHIFT CONF (F2)
SHIFT MODIF (F4)
To mathematically modify the values. Available
if <Azimuth:>, <Line-XX:> or <HDist-XX:>
is highlighted.
<Task:> Calc Base Point Calculates the base point, the station and offset of a
point in relation to a line.
Calc Offset Point Calculates the coordinates of a new point after input
of station and offset values in relation to a line.
Segmentation Calculates the coordinates of new points on a line
either equally spaced or with defined segments.
<Method:> The method by which the line will be defined.
2 Points Uses two known points to define the line.
Pt/Brg/Dist Defines the line using a known point, a distance and
an azimuth of the line.
<Start Point:> Choicelist The start point of the line. All points from COGO
Data: Job Name can be selected.
<End Point:> Choicelist Available for <Method: 2 Points>. The end point of
the line. All points from COGO Data: Job Name can
be selected.
<Azimuth:> User input Available for <Method: Pt/Brg/Dist>. The azimuth of
the line.
<HDist-XX:> User input Available for <Method: Pt/Brg/Dist>. The horizontal
distance from the start point to the end point of the
line.
<Line-XX:> User input Available for <Task: Calc Offset Point>. Horizontal
distance from start point to base point.
COGO GPS1200 39-54

COGO GPS1200 39-55

<Offset Point:> Choicelist Available for <Task: Calc Offset Point>. The offset
point.
<Offset-XX:> User input Available for <Task: Calc Offset Point>. Offset from
base point to offset point. Positive to the right and
negative to the left of the line.
Next step
PAGE (F6) accesses Map page. Refer to paragraph "COGO Line Calculations Input, Map
page".
COGO The Map page provides an interactive display of the data. Refer to "30 MapView Interactive
Line Calculations Input, Display Feature" for information on the functionality and softkeys available.
Map page
Next step
IF THEN
<Task: Calc Base CALC (F1) accesses COGO Base Point Results. Refer to para-
Point> graph "COGO XX Point Results, Result page".
<Task: Calc Offset CALC (F1) accesses COGO Offset Point Results. Refer to para-
Point> graph "COGO XX Point Results, Result page".
<Task: Segmenta- CALC (F1) accesses COGO Define Segmentation. Refer to para-
tion> graph "39.7.3 Line Calculation - Segmentation".
COGO The result screens for base point and offset point are very similar. The explanations given
XX Point Results, for the softkeys below are valid for the Result page.
Result page
STORE (F1)
To store result and to return to COGO Line
Calculations Input.
COORD (F2)
To view other coordinate types.
STAKE (F5)
To access the Stakeout application program
and stake out the calculated COGO point.
PAGE (F6)
To change between the ellipsoidal and the
orthometric height.
COGO GPS1200 39-56

COGO GPS1200 39-57
<Point ID:> User input The identifier for the COGO point depending on the
point ID template configured for <Survey Pts:> in
CONFIGURE ID Templates.
<Ortho Ht:> or User input A height value to be stored with the calculated point
<Local Ell Ht:> can be typed in.
<Offset Point:> Output Point ID of offset point. Available for <Task: Calc
Base Point>.
<Line-XX:> Output Horizontal distance from start point to base point.
Available for <Task: Calc Base Point>.
<Offset-XX:> Output Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to the
right and negative to the left of the line. Available for
<Task: Calc Base Point>.
<Line Length:> Output Length of line from start point to end point.
<Line Brng:> Output Bearing of line from start point to end point.
<Offs Pt Output Bearing of offset point from base point to offset point.
Brng:>
Next step
COGO The functionality of the Code page is similar to COGO Traverse Result, Code page.
XX Point Results,
Code page Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Plot page.
COGO The functionality of the Plot page is similar to COGO Traverse Results, Plot page.
XX Point Results,
Plot page Next step
STORE (F1) stores the result and accesses COGO Line Calculations Input, Input page.
COGO GPS1200 39-58

COGO GPS1200 39-59
39.7.2 Line Calculation - Offset Point
Description The COGO line calculation offset point calculates the coordinates of a new point after input
of station and offset values in relation to a line.

coordinates of two points.
offsets.
OR
coordinates of one point.
bearing and distance from one point.
offsets.

may be entered.
)
COGO line calculation
Line management is not available for COGO line calculations.
The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
offset point step-by- information on screens.
step
chapter
1. Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO" to access COGO Line Calcula-
tions Input.
chapter
) COGO Line Calculations Input, Input page

2. COGO Line Calculations Input, Input page 39.7.1
<Task: Calc Offset Point>
3. CALC (F1) calculates the results.
4. COGO Offset Point Results, Result page 39.7.1
STORE (F1) stores the results.
COGO GPS1200 39-60

COGO GPS1200 39-61
39.7.3 Line Calculation - Segmentation
Description The COGO line calculation segmentation calculates the coordinates of new points on a line.

coordinates of the start and the end point of the line
OR
a bearing and distance from a known point that define the line
AND EITHER
the number of segments dividing the line
OR
a segment length for the line.

may be entered.
Diagram d d d d Line divided by <Method: No. of Segments>
P0 P1 P0 <Start Point:>
GPS12_144 P1 <End Point:>
d Equally spaced segments result from
dividing a line by a certain number of points.
d1 d1 d1 d2 Line divided by <Method: Segment Length>
P0 P1 P0 <Start Point:>
GPS12_145 P1 <End Point:>
d1 <Seg Length:>
d2 Remaining segment
COGO line calculation The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
segmentation step-by- information on screens.
step
chapter
1. Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO" to access COGO Line Calculation
Input.
) COGO Line Calculation Input, Input page

2. COGO Line Calculation Input, Input page 39.7.1
<Task: Segmentation>
3. CALC (F1) to access COGO Define Segmentation.
4. COGO Define Segmentation
<Method:> How the line is to be divided. Refer to paragraph
"Diagram". Depending on the selection, the following fields are user
input or output fields.
<Line Length:> Calculated line length between the selected <Start
Point:> and <End Point:>.
COGO GPS1200 39-62

COGO GPS1200 39-63

chapter
<No. of Segs:> For <Method: No. of Segments> type in the number
of segments for the line. For <Method: Segment Length> type in the
segment length for the line. A remaining segment may result from this
method.
<Seg Length:> For <Method: No. of Segments> this is the calcu-
lated length of each segment. For <Method: Segment Length> type
in the required segment length.
<Last Seg Lgth:> Available for <Method: Segment Length>. The
length of the remaining segment.
<Start PtID:> The point ID to be assigned to the first new point on the
line. The selected point ID templates from CONFIGURE ID
Templates are not applied.
<PtID Inc:> <Start PtID:> is incremented numerically for the second,
third, etc. point on the line.
5. CALC (F1) to access COGO Segmentation Results.
) The coordinates of the new points are calculated. The heights are
computed along the line assuming a linear slope between <Start
Point:> and <End Point:>.
6. COGO Segmentation Results, Result page
<Number of Segments:> Describes the number of resulting
segments for the line including the remaining segment, if it applies.
chapter
<Last Segment Lgth:> Available for <Method: Segment Length>.
The length of the remaining segment.
7. PAGE (F1) to access COGO Segmentation Results, Plot page 30.6
The known points defining the line and those created on the line are
shown in black.
8. CONT (F1) returns to COGO Line Calculations Input.
COGO GPS1200 39-64

COGO GPS1200 39-65
39.8 COGO Calculation - Arc Calculations Method

39.8.1 Arc Calculation - Arc Center 39-66
39.8.2 Arc Calculation - Base Point 39-71
39.8.3 Arc Calculation - Offset Point 39-73
39.8.4 Arc Calculation - Segmentation 39-75
39.8.1 Arc Calculation - Arc Center
Description The COGO arc calculation arc center calculates the coordinates of the centre of the arc.

coordinates of three points
OR
coordinates of two points
radius to the two points

may be entered.
Diagram d2
P1
P0 <Start Point:>
P1 <End Point:>
d1 P2 Arc center
P0 P2 d1 <Arc Radius:>
GPS12_158 d2 <Arc Length:>
)
Access
Arc management is not available for COGO arc calculations.
Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO" to access COGO Arc Calculations Input.
COGO GPS1200 39-66

COGO GPS1200 39-67
COGO The softkeys are similar to line calculation. Refer to "39.7.1 Line Calculation - Base Point" for
Arc Calculations Input, information on softkeys.
Input page
<Task:> Calc Arc Center Calculates the coordinates of the centre of the arc.
Calc Offset Point Calculates the coordinates of a new point after input
of station and offset values in relation to an arc.
Calc Base Point Calculates the base point, the station and offset of a
point in relation to an arc.
Segmentation Calculates the coordinates of new points on an arc
either equally spaced or in a defined interval.
<Method:> The method by which the arc will be defined.
3 Points Uses three known points to define the arc.
2 Points/Radius Defines the arc using two known points and a radius
of the arc.
<Start Point:> Choicelist The start point of the arc. All points from COGO Data:
Job Name can be selected.
<Second Choicelist Available for <Method: 3 Points>. The second point
Point:> of the arc. All points from COGO Data: Job Name
can be selected.
<End Point:> Choicelist The end point of the arc. All points from COGO Data:
<Radius:> User input Available for <Method: 2 Points/Radius>. The
radius of the arc.
<ArcDist- User input Available for <Task: Calc Offset Point>. Horizontal
XX:> distance along the arc from start point to base point.
<Offset-XX:> User input Available for <Task: Calc Offset Point>. Offset from
<Offset Point:> Choicelist Available for <Task: Calc Base Point>. The offset
point.
Next step
IF THEN
<Task: Calc Arc CALC (F1) accesses COGO Center of Arc Results. Refer to para-
Center> graph "COGO XX Results, Result page".
<Task: Calc Offset CALC (F1) accesses COGO Offset Point Results. Refer to para-
Point> graph "COGO XX Results, Result page".
<Task: Calc Base CALC (F1) accesses COGO Base Point Results. Refer to para-
Point> graph "COGO XX Results, Result page".
<Task: Segmenta- CALC (F1) accesses COGO Define Segmentation. The COGO arc
tion> calculation segmentation and the functionality of all screens and
fields are similar to those for COGO line calculation segmentation.
Refer to "39.7.3 Line Calculation - Segmentation".
COGO GPS1200 39-68

COGO GPS1200 39-69
COGO Refer to paragraph "39.7.1 Line Calculation - Base Point" for information on softkeys.
XX Results,
Result page Description of fields
<Point ID:> User input The identifier for the COGO point depending on the
point ID template configured for <Survey Pts:> in
CONFIGURE ID Templates.
<Ortho Ht:> or User input A height value to be stored with the calculated point
<Local Ell Ht:> can be typed in.
<Arc Radius:> Output Computed radius of arc.
<Arc Length:> Output Computed length of arc.
<Offs Pt Output Available for <Task: Calc Offset Point>. Bearing of
Brng:> offset point from base point to offset point.
<Offset Point:> Output Available for <Task: Calc Base Point>. Point ID of
offset point.
<ArcDist- Output Available for <Task: Calc Base Point>. Horizontal
XX:> distance along the arc from start point to base point.
<Offset-XX:> Output Available for <Task: Calc Base Point>. Offset from
Next step
COGO The functionality of the Code page is similar to COGO Traverse Results, Code page.
XX Results,
Code page Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Plot page.
COGO The functionality of the Plot page is similar to COGO Traverse Results, Plot page.
XX Results,
Plot page Next step
STORE (F1) stores the result and accesses COGO Arc Calculations Input, Input page.
COGO GPS1200 39-70

COGO GPS1200 39-71
39.8.2 Arc Calculation - Base Point
Description The COGO arc calculation base point calculates the coordinates of the base point, station
and offset of a point in relation to an arc.

coordinates of three points
coordinates of an offset point
OR
coordinates of two points
radius to the two points
coordinates of an offset point

may be entered.
Diagram
P1
P3
d1
P2
P0 <Start Point:>
d2 P1 <End Point:>
P2 <Offset Point:>
P3 Base point
P0 d1 <Offset-XX:>
GPS12_121 d2 <ArcDist-XX:>
)
COGO arc calculation
base point step-by-step information on screens.
chapter
1. Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO"to access COGO Arc Calculations
Input.
) COGO Arc Calculations Input, Input page

2. COGO Arc Calculations Input, Input page. 39.8.1
<Task: Calc Base Point>
COGO GPS1200 39-72

COGO GPS1200 39-73

chapter
4. COGO Base Point Results, Result page 39.8.1
39.8.3 Arc Calculation - Offset Point
Description The COGO arc calculation offset point calculates the coordinates of a new point after input
of arc and offset values in relation to an arc.

coordinates of three points.
offsets.
OR
coordinates of two points.
radius to the two points.
offsets.

may be entered.
)
COGO arc calculation
offset point step-by- information on screens.
step
chapter
1. Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO" to access COGO Arc Calculations
Input.
COGO GPS1200 39-74

COGO GPS1200 39-75

chapter
) COGO Arc Calculations Input, Input page.

2. COGO Arc Calculations Input, Input page. 39.8.1
<Task: Calc Offset Point>
4. COGO Offset Point Results, Result page 39.8.1
39.8.4 Arc Calculation - Segmentation
) The COGO arc calculation segmentation and the functionality of all screens and fields are
similar to those for COGO line calculation segmentation. Refer to "39.7.3 Line Calculation -
Segmentation".
COGO GPS1200 39-76

COGO GPS1200 39-77
39.9 COGO Calculation - Shift, Rotate & Scale Method
Description The COGO calculation shift, rotate & scale applies shifts and/or rotation and/or scale to one
or several known points.

The coordinates of the points to be shifted, rotated and/or scaled must be stored in the
active job.
The shift values can be defined as the direction of Easting, Northing and Height or as an
azimuth and a grid distance or as shift from one point to another.
The rotation value can be defined by a point as rotation center plus a rotation or by an
existing and new azimuth.
The scale is only applied to the position.
Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used.
Diagram a
P1
P2
Shift
b a Height
P1 b Easting
P1 Known point
P1 Shifted point
P2 Known point
GPS12_155 P2 P2 Shifted point
a
Rotation
a Height
b b Easting
P1 P0 <Rotation Pt:>
P0 P2 P1 Known point
P1 P1 Rotated point
P2 Known point
GPS12_156 P2 P2 Rotated point
COGO GPS1200 39-78

COGO GPS1200 39-79
a Scale
a Height
b Easting
P1 <Rotation Pt:>, can be held fixed, all other
points are then scaled from here
P5 P4 P2 Scaled point
P3 Known point
b
P3 Scaled point
P1 P4 Known point
P2 P3
P4 Scaled point
GPS12_157 P5 Scaled point
Access Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO" to access COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale.
COGO Listed are points which have been selected for shifting, rotating and/or scaling.
Shift, Rotate & Scale,
Points page
CALC (F1)
To perform the shift, rotation and scale calcula-
tion and to continue with the subsequent
screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet
stored.
ADD (F2)
To add several points from the active job to the
list. Accesses COGO Data: Job Name.
Selected sort and filter settings apply. CONT
(F1) adds all displayed points to the list in
COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale and returns to
that screen.
ADD 1 (F3)
To add one point from the active job to the list.
Accesses COGO Data: Job Name. Selected
sort and filter settings apply. CONT (F1) adds
the currently highlighted point to the list in
COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale and returns to
that screen.
REMOV (F4)
To remove the highlighted point from the list.
The point itself is not deleted.
COGO GPS1200 39-80

COGO GPS1200 39-81
MORE (F5)
with any point, the time and the date of when
the point was stored and the 3D coordinate
quality and the class.
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT REM A (F4)
To remove all points from the list. The points
itself are not deleted.
SHIFT RANGE (F5)
To define a range of points from the active job
to be added to the list. Refer to paragraph
"COGO Select Points by Range".
Next step
IF THEN
all points from COGO ADD (F2).
Data: Job Name are
to be added
one point from COGO ADD 1 (F3).
Data: Job Name is to
be added
a range of points from SHIFT RANGE (F5) accesses COGO Select Points by Range.
COGO Data: Job Refer to paragraph "COGO Select Points by Range".
Name is to be added
IF THEN
all points are added PAGE (F1) accesses COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale, Shift page.
Refer to paragraph "COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale, Shift page".
COGO
Select Points by Range
CONT (F1)
To add the points within the selected range to
the list in COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale, Points
page and to return to the screen from where
this screen was accessed.
NEXT (F3)
To add the points within the selected range to
the list in COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale, Points
page without quitting this screen. Another
range of point IDs can be selected.
COGO GPS1200 39-82

COGO GPS1200 39-83
<From Pt ID:> User input Numeric point IDs in both fields:
and <To Pt ID:> Points with numeric point IDs falling within the
range are selected.
Example:
<From Pt ID: 1>, <To Pt ID: 50>
Selected are point IDs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10.
49, 50 as well as 001, 01, 0000045, ...
Not selected are point IDs 100,200,300, ...
Alphanumeric point IDs in both fields:
The left most character of both entries is used as
the basis for the range. The standard ASCII
numerical range is used. Points with alphanumeric
point IDs falling within the range are selected.
Example:
<From Pt ID: a9>, <To Pt ID: c200>
Selected are point IDs a, b, c, aa, bb, cc, a1, b2,
c3, c4, c5, a610, ...
Not selected are point IDs d100, e, 200, 300, tzz
...
Next step
Step Description
1. CONT (F1) adds all points within the range to the list in COGO Shift, Rotate &
Scale and returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed.
2. PAGE (F6) accesses COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale, Shift page. Refer to "COGO
Shift, Rotate & Scale, Shift page".
COGO
Shift, Rotate & Scale,
Shift page
CALC (F1)
To perform the shift, rotation and scale calcula-
tion and to continue with the subsequent
screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet
stored.
INV (F2)
To calculate the amount of shift in Easting,
Northing and height from two existing points.
Available if < Easting:>, < Northing:> or
< Height:> is highlighted.
LAST (F4)
To select the value for the shift from previous
COGO inverse calculations. Available if
< Easting:>, < Northing:> or < Height:>
is highlighted.
COGO GPS1200 39-84

COGO GPS1200 39-85
SURVY (F5)
calculation. Available for <Method: Use 2
Points> if <From:> or <To:> is highlighted.
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT CONF (F2)
SHIFT MODIF (F4)
To mathematically modify the values. Available
if < Easting:>, < Northing:> or
< Height:> is highlighted.
<Method:> The method by which the shift in Easting,
Northing and Height will be determined.
Enter E,N,Ht Defines the shift using coordinate differences.
Enter Bng,Dst,Ht Defines the shift using an azimuth, a distance and a
height difference.
Use 2 Points Computes the shift from the coordinate differences
between two known points.
<From:> Choicelist Available for <Method: Use 2 Points>. The point ID
of the first known point for calculating the shift.
<To:> Choicelist Available for <Method: Use 2 Points>. The point ID
of the second known point for calculating the shift.
<Azimuth:> User input Available for <Method: Enter Bng,Dst,Ht>. The
azimuth defines the direction of the shift.
<HDist-XX:> User input Available for <Method: Enter Bng,Dst,Ht>. The
amount of shift from the original point to the calcu-
lated COGO points.
< Easting:> User input or output The amount of shift in East direction.
< Northing:> User input or output The amount of shift in North direction.
< Height:> User input or output The amount of shift in height.
Next step
PAGE (F6) accesses COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale, Rotate page. Refer to "COGO Shift,
Rotate & Scale, Rotate page".
COGO The softkeys are the same as on the Shift page. Refer to paragraph "COGO Shift, Rotate &
Shift, Rotate & Scale, Scale, Shift page" for information on the keys.
Rotate page
<Method:> The method by which the rotation angle will be deter-
mined.
User Entered The rotation can be manually typed in.
COGO GPS1200 39-86

COGO GPS1200 39-87

Computed The rotation will be calculated as <New Azimuth:>
minus <Existing Az:>.
<Rotation Pt:> Choicelist The point around which all points will be rotated.
<Existing Az:> User input Available for <Method: Computed>. A known direc-
tion before rotating.
<New User input Available for <Method: Computed>. A known direc-
Azimuth:> tion after rotating.
<Rotation:> User input or output The amount by which the points will be rotated.
Next step
PAGE (F6) accesses COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale, Scale page. Refer to "COGO Shift,
Rotate & Scale, Scale page".
COGO The softkeys are the same as on the Shift page. Refer to paragraph "COGO Shift, Rotate &
Shift, Rotate & Scale, Scale, Shift page" for information on the keys.
Scale page
<Method:> The method by which the scale factor will be deter-
mined.
User Entered The scale factor can be manually typed in.
Computed The scale factor will be calculated as <New Dist:>
divided by <Existing Dist:>.
<Existing User input Available for <Method: Computed>. A known
Dist:> distance before scaling. This value is used for calcu-
lating the scale factor.
<New Dist:> User input Available for <Method: Computed>. A known
distance after scaling. This value is used for calcu-
lating the scale factor.
<Scale:> User input or output The scale factor used in the calculation.
<Scale From No Scaling is performed by multiplying the original coor-
Pt:> dinates of the points by <Scale:>.
Yes <Scale:> is applied to the coordinate difference of all
points relative to <Rotation Pt:> selected on the
Rotation page. The coordinates of <Rotation Pt:>
will not change.
Next step
CALC (F1) performs the shift, rotation and scale calculation and accesses COGO Shift,
Rotate & Scale Store.
COGO GPS1200 39-88

COGO GPS1200 39-89
COGO
Shift, Rotate & Scale
Store,
General page
STORE (F1)
To to store the results and continue with the
next subsequent screen.
PAGE (F6)
<Pts Output The number of selected points having been shifted,
Selected:> rotated and/or scaled.
<Store Job:> Choicelist The calculated COGO points will be stored in this job.
All jobs from Main Menu: Manage...\Jobs can be
selected. The original points are not copied to this job.
<Add Identi- Yes or No Activates the use of identifiers for the point IDs of the
fier:> calculated COGO points.
<Identifier:> User input The identifier with up to four characters is added in
front of or at the end of the ID of the calculated COGO
points.
<Prefix/Suffix: Prefix Adds the setting for <Identifier:> in front of the orig-
> inal point IDs.
Suffix Adds the setting for <Identifier:> at the end of the
original point IDs.
Next step
IF THEN
the used parameters PAGE (F6) accesses COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale Store,
are to be viewed Summary page.
the calculated COGO PAGE (F6) accesses COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale Store, Plot
points are to be page. Original points are displayed in grey, calculated COGO points
viewed graphically are displayed in black.
the calculated COGO STORE (F1) accesses COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale Results,
points are to be Result page. Refer to paragraph "COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale
stored Results Result page".
COGO Description of fields

Shift, Rotate & Scale
Results
Result page <No. of New Output Number of new points created.
Pts:>
COGO GPS1200 39-90

COGO GPS1200 39-91

<No. of Output Number of points which were skipped either due to
Skipped Pts> not being able to convert coordinates or points with
identical point IDs already existed in <Store Job:>.
Next step
IF THEN
the stored COGO PAGE (F6) accesses COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Plot
points are to be page. Original points are displayed in grey, calculated COGO points
viewed graphically are displayed in black.
more points are to be CONT (F1) returns to COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale.
shifted, rotated and/or
scaled
COGO is to be ended SHIFT QUIT (F6).
39.10 Selecting a Result from Previous COGO Inverse Calculations
Description Azimuths, distances and offsets required within the COGO traverse and intersection calcu-
lations can be selected from previously calculated inverse results.
Select a result from

Step Description
previous COGO inverse
calculations step-by- 1. Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO" to access COGO Traverse Input or COGO
step Intersection Input.
2. COGO XX Input, Input page
Highlight <Azimuth:>, <HDist-XX:> or <Offset:>.
3. LAST (F4) to access COGO Last Inverse Calculations.
4. COGO Last Inverse Calculations
All previous COGO inverse calculations stored in the active job are displayed,
sorted by time with the most recent at the top. This screen consists of three
columns.
First column From:
The point ID of the first known point for the COGO inverse calculation.
Second column To:
The point ID of the second known point for the COGO inverse calculation.
Third column:
The information displayed can vary. ----- is displayed for unavailable informa-
tion, for example if a height only point is used, Azimuth cannot be calculated.
Azimuth: The direction from the first to the second known point.
COGO GPS1200 39-92

COGO GPS1200 39-93
Step Description
HDist-XX: The horizontal distance between the two known points.
Date and Time when the COGO inverse calculation was stored.
) VIEW (F3) to view all calculated values for the highlighted COGO inverse calcula-
tion. This includes the height difference, the slope distance, the grade and the
coordinate differences between the two known points.
) DEL (F4) to delete the highlighted COGO inverse calculation.
)5.
MORE (F5) to display other information in the third column.
Highlight the COGO inverse calculation of which a result is to be taken over into
COGO XX Input, Input page.
6. CONT (F1) to return to COGO XX Input, Input page.
) The relevant result of the highlighted COGO inverse calculation is copied into the
field which was initially highlighted in COGO XX Input, Input page.
39.11 Modifying Values for Azimuths, Distances and Offsets
Description The values for the azimuth, the distance and the offset required within the COGO traverse
and intersection calculation can be mathematically modified.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "39.2 Accessing COGO" to access COGO Traverse Input or COGO
Intersection Input.
2. COGO XX Input, Input page
Highlight <Azimuth:>, <HDist-XX:> or <Offset:>.
3. SHIFT MODIF (F4) to access COGO Modify Value.
COGO On this screen numbers can be typed in for the multiplication, division, addition and subtrac-
Modify Value tion with the original azimuth, distance or offset value. The standard rules of mathematical
operations apply.
COGO GPS1200 39-94

COGO GPS1200 39-95
CONT (F1)
To accept the modified value and to return to
accessed. The modified value is copied into the
field which was initially highlighted in COGO
XX Input, Input page.
<Azimuth:>, Output The name of the field and the value which was high-
<HDist-XX:> or lighted before accessing COGO Modify Value.
<Offset:>
<Multiply:> User input The number to multiply by.
Minimum: -3000
Maximum: 3000
----- performs a multiplication by 1.
<Divide:> User input The number to divide by.
Minimum: -3000
Maximum: 3000
----- performs a division by 1.
<Add:> User input The number to be added.
For azimuths
Minimum: 0
Maximum: Full circle
For distances and offsets
Minimum: 0 m
Maximum: 30000000 m
----- performs an addition of 0.000.
<Subtract:> User input The number to be subtracted.
For azimuths
Minimum: 0
Maximum: Full circle
For distances and offsets
Minimum: 0 m
Maximum: 30000000 m
----- performs a subtraction of 0.000.
<Azimuth:>, Output The modified value for the field in the first line. This
<HDist-XX:> or field is updated with every mathematical operation.
<Offset:> Angles greater than the full circle are reduced accord-
ingly.
COGO GPS1200 39-96

COGO GPS1200 39-97
Next step
CONT (F1) accepts the modified value and returns to the screen from where this screen was
accessed.
Example: Calculations
Step User input Value as calculated Value as displayed
for an azimuth
) 1. <Multiply: 2> 500
<Azimuth: 250.0000> g
<Azimuth: 100.0000> g
2. <Divide: 3> 166.667 <Azimuth: 166.6670> g
3. <Add: 300> 466.667 <Azimuth: 66.6670> g
4. <Subtract: 100> 366.667 <Azimuth: 366.6670> g
Example: Calculations The behaviour for an offset is identical.

for a distance
Step User input Value as calculated Value as displayed
) 1. <Multiply: 2> 500

<HDist-Grid: 250.000> m
<HDist-Grid: 500.000> m
2. <Divide: 3> 166.667 <HDist-Grid: 166.667> m
3. <Add: 300> 466.667 <HDist-Grid: 466.667> m
4. <Subtract: 100> 366.667 <HDist-Grid: 366.667> m
COGO GPS1200 39-98
Wake-Up GPS1200 40-1
40 Wake-Up

40.1 Overview 40-2
40.2 Creating a New Wake-Up Session 40-5
40.3 Editing a Wake-Up Session 40-9
40.1 Overview
Description Wake-up sessions are static point occupations

for which the receiver is preprogrammed with a start time and a duration.
where the receiver turns itself on at the preprogrammed start time and the point occupa-
tion begins.
where the receiver stops point occupation and stores the point after the preprogrammed
duration.
Up to twenty wake-up sessions can be configured which are totally independent of each
other.
) A CompactFlash card must be inserted when the receiver wakes up. If no CompactFlash
card is fitted or it is damaged, not formatted or full then the session will not be executed.
Access Select Main Menu: Programs...\Wake-Up.

OR
Press PROG. Highlight Wake-Up. CONT (F1). Refer to "34.2 Accessing the Application
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen WAKE-UP Wake-Up Sessions. Refer
OR

WAKE-UP
CONT (F1)
Wake-Up Sessions
was accessed.
NEW (F2)
To create a new wake-up session. Refer to
"40.2 Creating a New Wake-Up Session".
EDIT (F3)
To edit a wake-up session. Refer to "40.3
Editing a Wake-Up Session".
DEL (F4)
To delete a wake-up session.
SHIFT DEL-A (F4)
To delete all stored wake-up sessions.
Column Description
No. The wake-up session number, from 1 to 20.
Indicates which wake-up session is next to be activated.
Start Date The local starting date of the wake-up session.
Start Time The local starting time of the wake-up session.
Repeat The number of times the wake-up session will be repeated.
Next step
IF THEN
the wake-up sessions CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to the screen from where
do not need to be WAKE-UP Wake-Up Sessions was accessed.
changed
a wake-up session is NEW (F2). Refer to "40.2 Creating a New Wake-Up Session".
to be created
a wake-up session is highlight the wake-up session and EDIT (F3). Refer to "40.3 Editing
to be edited a Wake-Up Session".

40.2 Creating a New Wake-Up Session
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "40.1 Overview" to access WAKE-UP Wake-up Sessions.
2. NEW (F2) to access WAKE-UP New Wake-Up Session.
) A CompactFlash card must be fitted in the receiver for the wake-up session to take place. A
new wake-up session can still be created when there is no CompactFlash card fitted, though
there will be differences in the way the menu works:
<Job:> is an output field.
The options for <Pt Input:> are Manual and Pt ID Template.
.
WAKE-UP
New Wake-Up Session,
General page
STORE (F1)
TMPLT (F3)
Available for some options for <Pt Input:>. To
configure ID templates. Refer to "17.1 ID
Templates".
PAGE (F6)
<Config Set:> Choicelist The active configuration set for the wake-up session.
All configuration sets from Main Menu:
Manage...\Configurations Sets can be selected.
<Job:> Choicelist The active job for the wake-up session. All jobs from
Main Menu: Manage...\Jobs can be selected.
<Pt Input:> Determines what options are available for <Point
ID:>.
From Job Allows points from the job to be selected for <Point
ID:>.
Manual Allows the point ID to be manually entered for <Point
ID:>.
Pt ID Template Allows points from an point ID template to be entered
for <Point ID:>. TMPLT (F3) is enabled so that the ID
templates can be configured. Refer to "17.1 ID
Templates".
<Point ID:> The available options depend on the selection for <Pt
Input:>.
Choicelist Available for <Pt Input: From Job>. A point ID can
be selected from WAKE-UP Data: Job Name. Refer
to "8 Manage...\Data".
User input Available for <Pt Input: Manual>. Input a new point
ID.


Output Available for <Pt Input: Pt ID Template>. A point ID
can be selected from an ID template using TMPLT
(F3).
<Antenna Ht:> User input Height of the antenna to be used during the wake-up
session. Changing the antenna height here does not
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Timing page. Refer to paragraph "WAKE-UP New Wake-Up
Session, Timing page".
WAKE-UP
New Wake-Up Session,
Timing page
STORE (F1)
PAGE (F6)
<Start Date:> User input Local date to start wake-up session. The earliest date
that can be input is the current date.
<Start Time:> User input Local time to start wake-up session.There must be at
least one minute between consecutive wake-up
sessions. No wake-up session can coincide with
another session.
<Duration:> User input Length of time the wake-up session should last for.
The minimum time a wake-up session can run for is
three minutes and the maximum is forty-eight hours.
<End Time:> Output Time wake-up session will end calculated from the
start time and duration.
<No. of User input Number of times the wake-up session should be
Repeat:> repeated.
<Interval:> Time interval between repeated wake-up sessions.
User input Unless <No. of Repeat 1:>.
Not Available When <No. of Repeat: 1>.
Next step
STORE (F1) returns to WAKE-UP Wake-Up Sessions.

40.3 Editing a Wake-Up Session
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "40.1 Overview" to access WAKE-UP Wake-Up Sessions.
2. EDIT (F3) to access WAKE-UP Edit Wake-Up Session.
3. The editing of a wake-up session is identical to creating a new wake-up session.
Refer to "40.2 Creating a New Wake-Up Session" for a description of the softkeys
and fields.
Reference Line GPS1200 41-1
41 Reference Line

41.1 Overview 41-2
41.2 Accessing Reference Line 41-7
41.3 Configuring Reference Line 41-10
41.4 Managing Reference Lines/Arcs 41-17
41.5 Measuring to a Reference Line/Arc 41-35
41.6 Staking to a Reference Line/Arc 41-49
41.7 Gridstaking to a Reference Line/Arc 41-66
41.1 Overview
Description The Reference Line application program can be used to set out or measure points relative
to a reference line or a reference arc.
Reference line tasks The Reference Line application program can be used for the following tasks:
Measuring to a line/arc where the coordinates of a target point can be calculated from its
position relative to the defined reference line/arc.
Staking to a line/arc where the position of a target point is known and instructions to locate
the point are given relative to the reference line/arc.
Gridstaking a line/arc where a grid can be staked relative to a reference line/arc.
Other functionality available includes:

Offsetting the reference line/arc horizontally or vertically. The radius of the arc changes
with the horizontal offset.
Shifting the reference line with parallel offsets or rotating to match predefined setting out
instructions.
Activating the applica- The Reference Line application program must be activated via a licence key. Refer to "28
tion program Tools...\Licence Keys" for information on how to activate the application program.
) Measuring and staking out of points is possible for <R-Time Mode: Rover> and <R-Time
Mode: None>.
Point types Reference lines/arcs can be created from points stored as:
WGS 1984 geodetic
Local grid

Heights and positions are always taken into account. Points must have full coordinate
triplets.
Properties of measured The properties stored with staked points are:

points Class: Either MEAS or NAV depending on the position status when the staked point was
occupied.
Source: RefLine (Grid), RefLine (Meas) or RefLine (Stake)
Deleting points A point that is used to define a reference line/arc can be deleted. A reference line/arc can still
be used if one or more points defining the reference line/arc have been deleted. Within
REFLINE Edit Reference Line and REFLINE Edit Reference Arc the deleted point field is
shown in grey. Within MapView the reference line is still displayed but the deleted point or
points is/are not.
Terms Reference point: The term reference point is used in this chapter to refer to the point
from which the perpendicular offset from the reference line/arc, to the
target point, is measured. Refer to paragraph "Defining a reference
line/arc" and the diagrams for further explanation.
Target point: The design point.

For measuring to a reference line, this is the point with the coordi-
nates of the current position and the designed or calculated height.
For staking or grid staking to a reference line, this is the point to be
staked.
Measured point: The current position.
Defining a reference A reference line can be defined in the following ways:

line/arc Two known points
One known point, an azimuth, a distance and a gradient
One known point, an azimuth, a distance and a difference in height
P1
P0 Start point
P1 End point
d1 d2 d1 Known distance
d2 Difference in height, Ht
Azimuth
Elevation angle between the start point and
GPS12_112 P0 the end point
A reference arc can be defined in the following ways:

Two known points and a radius
Three known points

P2
P1
r P0 Start point
P1 End point
P0 P2 Known point
GPS12_113 r Radius of arc
)
Coordinate systems
It is possible to define an arc that has an opening angle of more than 180o.
It is possible to use a valid coordinate system but have the line or part of the line lying outside
of the projection or CSCS model being used.
In these cases the output fields of all prompts relating to the difference in coordinates
between the point being staked and the current position are shown as -----.
<Bearing:>.
) When describing screens with a title that changes depending on whether a line or an arc was
chosen, the terms line and arc are replaced by XX.
Direction of values The following diagram shows the direction of positive and negative values for distance and
height differences between the target point and the reference point for reference lines.
P1
- +
P2
+
P2 P3
-
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P0
P2 Target point
GPS12_114 P3 Reference point

41.2 Accessing Reference Line
Access Select Main Menu: Programs...\Reference Line.

OR
Press PROG. Highlight Reference Line. CONT (F1). Refer to "34.2 Accessing the Appli-
cation Programs Menu" for information on the PROG key.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen REFLINE Reference Line/Arc Begin.
OR
REFLINE
Reference Line/Arc
Begin
CONT (F1)
To confirm the selections and to continue with
the subsequent screen.
CONF (F2)
To configure the Reference Line application
program. Refer to "41.3 Configuring Refer-
ence Line".
CSYS (F6)
Manage...\Jobs can be selected. Points which are
occupied after staking out are stored in this job. The
original points to be staked are not copied to this job.
be selected.
<DTM Job:> Choicelist Available for <Heights: Use DTM Model> in
REFLINE Configuration, Heights page. To select a
DTM to be staked. Heights are then staked out rela-
tive to the selected DTM.


can be selected. Configuration sets with <R-Time
Mode: Reference> cannot be used in the Reference
Line application program.
Next step
IF the Reference THEN
Line application
program
is to be accessed CONT (F1) accepts the changes and accesses the Reference Line
application program. Refer to "41.4 Managing Reference
Lines/Arcs".
is to be configured CONF (F2). Refer to "41.3 Configuring Reference Line".
41.3 Configuring Reference Line
Description Allows options to be set which are used within the Reference Line application program.
These settings are stored within the configuration set.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "41.2 Accessing Reference Line" to access REFLINE Reference Line/Arc
Begin.
2. CONF (F2) to access REFLINE Configuration.
REFLINE This screen consists of the General page, the Checks page, the Heights page and the
Configuration, Logfile page. The explanations for the softkeys given below are valid as indicated.
General page
CONT (F1)
DMASK (F3)
To edit the display mask currently being
displayed. Accesses CONFIGURE Define
Display Mask n. Available when <Display
Mask:> is highlighted on General page. Refer
to "17.2 Display Settings".
PAGE (F6)

SHIFT ABOUT (F5)
To display information about the application
program name, the version number, the date
of the version, the copyright and the article
number.
<Orientate:> The reference direction to be used to stakeout points.
The stakeout elements and the graphical display
shown in the Reference Line application program are
based on this selection.
To North The North direction shown in the graphical display
based on the active coordinate system.
To Sun The position of the sun calculated from the current
position, the time and the date.
To Last Point Timewise the last recorded point. If no points are yet
staked, <Orientate: To North> is used for the first
point to be staked.
To Known Point A point from <Job:> selected in REFLINE Reference
Line/Arc Begin.
To Line/Arc The direction of the orientation is parallel to the refer-
ence line or the reference arc.
To Arrow The direction of the orientation is from the current
position to the point to be staked. The graphical
display shows an arrow pointing in the direction of the
point to be staked.
<To:> Choicelist Available for <Orientate: To Known Point>. To
select the point to be used for orientation. Refer to
"8.2 Accessing Data Management" for information on
creating, editing and deleting a known point.
<Stake Mode:> The method of staking out.
Polar The direction from the orientation reference, the hori-
zontal distance and the cut/fill is displayed.
Orthogonal The distance forwards/backwards to the point, the
distance right/left to the point and the cut/fill is
displayed.
<Display Choicelist The user defined display mask to be shown in
Mask:> REFLINE XX Points. All display masks of the active
configuration set defined in CONFIGURE Display
Settings can be selected.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Checks page. Refer to paragraph "REFLINE Configuration,
Checks page".

REFLINE Description of fields
Configuration,
Checks page
<Pos Check:> Yes or No Allows a check to be made on the horizontal coordi-
nate difference between the manually occupied
staked point and the point to be staked. If the defined
<Pos Limit:> is exceeded, the stakeout can be
repeated, skipped or stored.
<Pos Limit:> User input Available for <Pos Check: Yes>. Sets the maximum
horizontal coordinate difference which is accepted in
the position check.
<Height Yes or No Allows a check to be made on the vertical difference
Check:> between the manually occupied staked point and the
point to be staked. If the defined <Height Limit:> is
exceeded, the stakeout can be repeated, skipped or
stored.
<Height User input Available for <Height Check: Yes>. Sets the
Limit:> maximum vertical difference accepted in the height
check.
<Beep near Yes or No The receiver beeps when the horizontal radial
Pt:> distance from the current position to the point to be
staked is equal to or less than defined in <Dist from
Pt:>.
<Dist from Pt:> User input Available for <Beep near Pt: Yes>. The horizontal
radial distance from the current position to the point to
be staked when a beep should be heard.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Heights page. Refer to paragraph "REFLINE Configuration,
Heights page".

Configuration,
Heights page
<Heights:> Choicelist Available if this screen was accessed from REFLINE
Reference Line/Arc Begin. Depending on the task
chosen this parameter controls the following:
When measuring to a line/arc, it determines the
delta height value which is displayed when points
are being measured.
When staking to or gridstaking a line/arc, it deter-
mines the height value to be staked out.
Use Ref Line Available unless <Orientate: To Line/Arc>. Heights
are computed along the reference line/arc.
Use Start Point Heights are computed relative to the height of the
starting point.
Use DTM Model The stake out height is computed from the DTM being
used.
Output Available unless this screen was accessed from
REFLINE Reference Line/Arc Begin.


<Edit Height:> No The field <Height:> for the height of the current posi-
tion is displayed in REFLINE Measure Points, Ref
XX page and REFLINE Enter Offset Values and as
<Ht:> in REFLINE XX Stakeout, Ref XX page and
REFLINE +yyy.yy +xxx.xx, Ref XX page. The
values for <Height:> and <Ht:> cannot be changed.
Yes The field <Design Ht:> is displayed in REFLINE
Measure Points, Ref XX page and REFLINE Enter
Offset Values and as <D Ht:> in REFLINE XX
Stakeout, Ref XX page and REFLINE +yyy.yy
+xxx.xx, Ref XX page. The design height is the
height of the point to be staked. The initial value is as
configured in the <Heights:> field. The values for
<Design Ht:> and <D Ht:> can be changed.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Logfile page. Refer to paragraph "REFLINE Configuration,
Logfile page".

Configuration,
Logfile page Field Option Description
Logfile:> exited.
program is written to. It is generated using the
selected <Format File:>.
<File Name:> Choicelist Available for <Write Logfile: Yes>. The name of the
file to which the data should be written. A logfile is
stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory
device. The data is always appended to the file.
Opening the choicelist accesses XX Logfiles where
a name for a new logfile can be created and an
existing logfile can be selected or deleted.
<Format File:> Choicelist Available for <Write Logfile: Yes>. A format file
defines which and how data is written to a logfile.
Format files are created using LGO. A format file
must first be transferred from the CompactFlash card
to the System RAM before it can be selected. Refer
to "24 Tools...\Transfer Objects..." for information on
how to transfer a format file.
Opening the choicelist accesses MANAGE XX where
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed.

41.4 Managing Reference Lines/Arcs

41.4.1 Overview 41-18
41.4.2 Manually Entering a Reference Line/Arc 41-19
41.4.3 Selecting a Reference Line/Arc from the Job 41-24
41.4.4 Defining Reference Line/Arc Offsets 41-31
41.4.1 Overview
Description There are two ways by which a reference line/arc can be defined.
Manually Enter
A reference line/arc can be defined by manually entering known parameters.
The line is only temporary and is not stored once the Reference Line application program
has been exited.
Select <Ref to Use: Manually Enter> in REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line,
Reference page.
Refer to "41.4.2 Manually Entering a Reference Line/Arc".
Select from Job

Reference lines/arcs can be created, edited, stored and deleted in the active job.
The reference lines/arcs can be recalled for use later.
Select <Ref to Use: Select from Job> in REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line,
Reference page.
Refer to "41.4.3 Selecting a Reference Line/Arc from the Job".

41.4.2 Manually Entering a Reference Line/Arc
Description This screen allows a reference line/arc to be temporarily defined using a number of methods.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "41.2 Accessing Reference Line" to access REFLINE Reference
Line/Arc Begin.
2. CONT (F1) to access REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line, Reference
page.
3. REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line, Reference page
Select <Ref to Use: Manually Enter>.
REFLINE This screen contains the Reference page and the Map page. The explanations for the
Choose Task & Refer- softkeys given below are valid as indicated. The fields available depend on the options
ence Line, chosen for <Task:> and <Method:> on this screen.
Reference page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select
the desired point. Refer to "30 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for more information on
the functionality and softkeys available.
CONT (F1)
To accept changes and continue with the
subsequent screen.
OFSET (F4)
To define reference line/arc offsets, shifts,
rotations, height offsets and DTM offsets.
Refer to "41.4.4 Defining Reference Line/Arc
Offsets".
SURVY (F5)
To manually occupy a point. Available when a
point field is highlighted.
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT CONF (F2)
To configure the reference line/arc. Refer to
"41.3 Configuring Reference Line".
<Task:> Defines the task to be performed.
Measure to Line or Calculates the coordinates of a point from its position
Measure to Arc relative to the reference line/arc.
Stake to Line or Allows points to be staked relative to the reference
Stake to Arc line/arc.


Gridstake Line or Allows a grid to be staked out relative to the reference
Gridstake Arc line/arc.
<Method:> The method by which the reference line/arc will be
defined.
For <Task: XX Line>
2 Points Uses two known points to define the reference line.
Pt/Brg/Dst/Grade Defines the reference line using a known point, a
distance, an azimuth and the gradient of the line.
Pt/Brg/Dst/Ht The same as above but uses the difference in height
instead of the gradient.
For <Task: XX Arc>
3 Points Defines the reference arc using three known points.
2 Points/Radius Defines the reference arc with two known points and
a known radius.
<Start Point:> Choicelist The start point of the reference line/arc. All points
from REFLINE Data: Job Name can be selected.
<Second Choicelist Available for <Method: 3 Points>. The second point
Point:> of the reference arc. All points from REFLINE Data:
<End Point:> Choicelist Available for <Method: 2 Points>, <Method: 3
Points> and <Method: 2 Points/Radius>. The end
point of the reference line/arc. All points from
REFLINE Data: Job Name can be selected.
<Line Length:> Output Available for <Ref to Use: Manually Enter> with
<Method: 2 Points>.
The horizontal grid distance between <Start Point:>
and <End Point:> of the line.
----- is displayed if the distance cannot be calculated.
<Azimuth:> User input Available for <Method: Pt/Brg/Dst/Grade> and
<Method: Pt/Brg/Dst/Ht>. The azimuth of the
reference line.
<Horiz Dist:> User input Available for <Method: Pt/Brg/Dst/Grade> and
<Method: Pt/Brg/Dst/Ht>. The horizontal grid
distance from the start point to the end point of the
reference line.
<Grade:> User input Available for <Method: Pt/Brg/Dst/Grade>. The
gradient of the line from the start point to the end point
of the reference line.
<Height:> User input Available for <Method: Pt/Brg/Dst/Ht>. The differ-
ence in height from the start point to the end point of
the reference line.
<Radius:> User input Available for <Method: 2 Points/Radius>. The
radius of the reference arc.
<Arc Dist:> Output The horizontal grid distance along the arc between
<Start Point:> and <End Point:> of the arc. ----- is
displayed if the distance cannot be calculated.


----- is displayed if the distance cannot be calculated.
Next step
PAGE (F6) to access REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line, Map page. Refer to para-
graph "REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line, Map page".
REFLINE The Map page provides an interactive display of the data. Refer to "30 MapView Interactive
Choose Task & Refer- Display Feature" for information on the functionality and softkeys available.
ence Line,
Map page Next step
IF THEN
<Task: Measure to CONT (F1) accepts the changes and accesses REFLINE Measure
XX> Points. Refer to "41.5 Measuring to a Reference Line/Arc".
<Task: Stake to XX> CONT (F1) accepts the changes and accesses REFLINE Enter
Offset Values. Refer to "41.6 Staking to a Reference Line/Arc".
<Task: Gridstake CONT (F1) accepts the changes and accesses REFLINE Define
XX> Grid. Refer to "41.7 Gridstaking to a Reference Line/Arc".
41.4.3 Selecting a Reference Line/Arc from the Job
Description New reference lines/arcs can be created, existing reference lines/arcs can be edited and
previously entered reference lines/arcs can be selected from the active job.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
Line/Arc Begin.
2. CONT (F1) to access REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line, Reference
page.
Select <Ref to Use: Select from Job>.
REFLINE This screen contains the Reference page and the Map page. The explanations for the
Choose Task & Refer- softkeys and the fields are as for manually entering a reference line. The <Method:> field is
ence Line, not available and all line definition fields are outputs, all other differences are described
Reference page below.
The fields shown depend on the options chosen for <Task:> and <Method:> in REFLINE
New Reference XX. Refer to paragraph "Create reference line/arc step-by-step".
<Ref Line:> Choicelist Available for <Task: XX Line>. The reference line to
be used. Accesses REFLINE Manage Reference
Lines.


<Ref Arc:> Choicelist Available for <Task: XX Arc>. The reference arc to
be used. Accesses REFLINE Manage Reference
Arcs.
Next step
PAGE (F6) to access REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line, Map page. Refer to para-
graph "REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line, Map page".
REFLINE The Map page provides an interactive display of the data. The reference line/arc can be
Choose Task & Refer- viewed but not defined using this page. Refer to "30 MapView Interactive Display Feature"
ence Line, for information on the functionality and softkeys available.
Map page
Next step
IF THEN
the desired reference highlight <Ref Line:> or <Ref Arc:> and press ENTER to access
line/arc needs to be REFLINE Manage Reference XX. Refer to paragraph "REFLINE
created, edited or Manage Reference XX".
selected
the desired reference for <Task: Measure to XX>
line/arc has been CONT (F1) to access REFLINE Measure Points, Ref XX page.
selected Refer to "41.5 Measuring to a Reference Line/Arc".
for <Task: Stake to XX>
CONT (F1) to access REFLINE Enter Offset Values. Refer to
"41.6 Staking to a Reference Line/Arc".
IF THEN
for <Task: Gridstake XX>
CONT (F1) to access REFLINE Define Grid. Refer to "41.7 Grid-
staking to a Reference Line/Arc".
offsets are to be OFSET (F4) to access REFLINE Define Offsets.
defined
REFLINE The screen name will be either REFLINE Manage Reference Lines for <Task: XX Line> or
Manage Reference XX REFLINE Manage Reference Arcs for <Task: XX Arc>. Apart from the screen name the
appearance of the screen and the functionality of the softkeys is the same.
CONT (F1)
To select the highlighted reference line/arc
and to return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.
NEW (F2)
To create a reference line/arc. Refer to para-
graph "Create reference line/arc step-by-step".
EDIT (F3)
To edit a reference line/arc. Refer to para-
graph "Edit reference line/arc step-by-step".
DEL (F4)
To delete a reference line/arc.

Column Description
Name Names of all the reference lines/arcs available in the active job.
Date Date that the reference line/arc was created.
Next step
IF a reference THEN
line/arc
is to be selected highlight the desired reference line/arc.
CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to REFLINE Choose
Task & Reference Line.
is to be created NEW (F2). Refer to paragraph "Create reference line/arc step-by-
step".
is to be edited highlight the reference line/arc and EDIT (F3). Refer to paragraph
"Edit reference line/arc step-by-step".
Create reference The following table explains the most common settings. Refer to the stated chapter for more
line/arc step-by-step information on screens.
chapter
1. Refer to "41.2 Accessing Reference Line" to access REFLINE Refer-
ence Line/Arc Begin.
chapter
2. CONT (F1) to access REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line,
Reference page.
Select <Ref to Use: Select from Job>.
4. Highlight <Ref Line:> or <Ref Arc:> and press ENTER to access
REFLINE Manage Reference XX.
5. NEW (F2) to access REFLINE New Reference XX, Input page.
6. REFLINE New Reference XX, Input page 41.4.2
<Ref ID:> The ID of the new reference line/arc.
The other fields available depend on the option chosen for <Task:>
in REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line, Reference page and
<Method:> on this screen.
For <Task: XX Line>
<Method:> The method by which the reference line will be
defined. <Method: 2 Points> uses two known points to define the
reference line. <Method: Pt/Brg/Dst/Grade> defines the refer-
ence line using a known point, a distance, a bearing and the
gradient of the line. <Method: Pt/Brg/Dst/Ht> is the same as
above but uses the difference in height instead of the gradient.
<Line Length:> Available for <Method: 2 Points>. The hori-
zontal grid distance between <Start Point:> and <End Point:> of
the line. ----- is displayed if the distance cannot be calculated.


chapter
For <Task: XX Arc>
<Method:> The method by which the reference arc will be
defined. <Method: 3 Points> defines the reference arc using
three known points. <Method: 2 Points/Radius> defines the
reference arc with two known points and a known radius.
<Arc Dist:> The horizontal grid distance along the arc between
<Start Point:> and <End Point:> of the arc. ----- is displayed if the
distance cannot be calculated.
Choose the method by which to define a reference line/arc and enter
the appropriate parameters.
) SURVY (F5) available for <Start Point:>, <Second Point> and

<End Point:>. To manually occupy a known point.
) For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page 30
7. PAGE (F6) to access REFLINE New Reference XX, Map page.
8. REFLINE New Reference XX, Map page 30.5
MapView displays the reference line/arc as a solid line.
9. STORE (F1) to store changes and return to REFLINE Manage
Reference XX.
Edit reference line/arc
Step Description
step-by-step
1. Refer to "41.4.3 Selecting a Reference Line/Arc from the Job" to access REFLINE
Manage Reference XX.
2. EDIT (F3) to access REFLINE Edit Reference XX, Input page.
3. All the following steps are identical with the creation of a new reference line/arc
except for the following differences.
All fields except <Ref ID:> are output fields.
SURVY (F5) is not available.
A Plot page replaces the Map page. Refer to "30 MapView Interactive Display
Feature" for information on the functionality and softkeys available.
Refer to paragraph "Create reference line/arc step-by-step". Follow the instruc-
tions from step 6. onwards.

41.4.4 Defining Reference Line/Arc Offsets
Description A reference line can be offset, shifted and rotated, a reference arc can be offset.
Diagram Reference line offsets

P1c
P1a P1b P0 Start point
P1 P1 End point
P1d P0a Start point with <Height Offset:>
P1a End point with <Height Offset:>
P0b Start point with <Offset Line:>
P1b End point with <Offset Line:>
P0c Start point with <Shift Line:>
P1c End point with <Shift Line:>
P0c P1d End point with <Rotation Line:>
P0a
d3 d1 <Height Offset:>
d1 P0b d2 <Offset Line:>
d2
P0 d3 <Shift Line:>
GPS12_127 <Rotation Line:>
Reference arc offsets
P0 Start point
P1a P1 End point
P1b P0a Start point with <Height Offset:>
d2
P1 P1a End point with <Height Offset:>
r2
r1 P0b Start point with <Offset Arc:>
P0a P0b P1b End point with <Offset Arc:>
d1 <Height Offset:>
d1
P0 d2 <Offset Arc:>
r1 Radius before offset
GPS12_128 r2 Radius after offset
Access step-by-step
Step Description
Line/Arc Begin.
2. CONT (F1) to access REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line.
3. OFSET (F4) to access REFLINE Define Offsets.
REFLINE This screen contains different fields depending on the options chosen for <Heights:> in
Define Offsets REFLINE Configuration, Heights page, and <Task:> in REFLINE Choose Task & Refer-
ence Line, Reference page.

CONT (F1)
To confirm the selections and to return to the
previous screen.
SHIFT CONF (F2)
<Offset Line:> User input Distance to horizontally offset reference line/arc to
or <Offset the left or right.
Arc:>
) When an offset is applied to an arc the radius
of the arc changes.
<Shift Line:> User input Available for <Task: XX Line> unless <Heights: Use
Ref Line> in REFLINE Configuration, Heights
page. Distance to horizontally shift reference line
forward or back.
<Height User input Available for <Heights: Use Start Point> and
Offset:> <Heights: Use Ref Line>. The vertical offset of the
reference line/arc.
<DTM Offset:> User input Available for <Heights: Use DTM Model>. The
vertical offset of the DTM model.
<Rotate Line:> User input Available for <Task: XX Line> unless <Heights: Use
Ref Line> in REFLINE Configuration, Heights
page. Angle by which to rotate the reference line.
Next step
CONT (F1) closes the screen and returns to REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line.

41.5 Measuring to a Reference Line/Arc

41.5.1 Measure Points 41-36
41.5.1 Measure Points
Description The horizontal and vertical position of a manually occupied point can be calculated relative
to the defined reference line/arc.
Access Select <Task: Measure to XX> in REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line, Refer-
ence page and press CONT (F1) to access REFLINE Measure Points. Refer to "41.4.4
Defining Reference Line/Arc Offsets" to access REFLINE Choose Task & Reference
Line.
OR
Press SURVY (F5) in REFLINE XX Stakeout to access REFLINE Measure Points.
Refer to "41.6 Staking to a Reference Line/Arc" to access REFLINE XX Stakeout.
Measure to line - hori-

zontal measurements P1
d3 P0 Start point
P3 d5 P1 End point
P2 Measured point
d1 P3 Reference point
d2 P2 d1 <Offset:>
d4
d2 <Line:>
d3 <Line-End:>
d4 <Check Dist 1:>
GPS12_115 P0 d5 <Check Dist 2:>

Measure to line -
P1
vertical measurements
P3
P0 Start point
d2 P1 End point
d3 P2 Measured point
P2 d1
P3 Reference point
d4 d1 <Ht-Line:>
d2 <Perp Dist:>
P0
d3 <Spat Dist:>
GPS12_116 d4 <Ht-Start:>
Measure to arc - hori- Target point inside arc

zontal measurements
d3
d2 P3 P1
d1 d5 P0 Start point
P1 End point
d4 P2 Measured point
P2
P3 Reference point
d1 <Offset:>
P0 d2 <Arc:>
d3 <Arc-End:>
d4 <Check Dist 1:>
GPS12_117a d5 <Check Dist 2:>
Target point outside arc
d3
d2
P0 Start point
P1 P1 End point
P2 Measured point
d5
P3 Reference point
d4 P3 d1 <Offset:>
P0 d2 <Arc:>
d3 <Arc-End:>
d1 P2 d4 <Check Dist 1:>
GPS12_117b d5 <Check Dist 2:>
Measure to arc - vertical

measurements P1
P3
P2
d2 P0 Start point
d1
P1 End point
P2 Measured point
P3 Reference point
P0 d1 <Ht-Start:>
GPS12_122 d2 <Ht-Arc:>

REFLINE The pages shown are those from a typical configuration set. An additional page is available
Measure Points, when a user defined display mask is used.
Ref XX page
OCUPY (F1)
To start measuring the point. The position
mode icon changes to the static icon. (F1)
changes to STOP. The difference between the
current position and the point being staked is
still displayed.
STOP (F1)
To end measuring the point. When <Auto
STOP: Yes> in CONFIGURE Point Occupa-
tion Settings, recording of positions ends
automatically as defined by the stop criteria.
The position mode icon changes to the moving
icon. (F1) changes to STORE.
STORE (F1)
STORE: Yes> in CONFIGURE Point Occu-
pation Settings, the measured point is stored
LINE (F4)
To define/select a reference line/arc.
Accesses REFLINE Choose Task & Refer-
ence Line, Reference page.
STAKE (F5)
To define reference line offsets to be staked
out in relation to the reference line. Accesses
REFLINE Enter Offset Values. Refer to "41.6
Staking to a Reference Line/Arc".
SHIFT CONF (F2)
To configure the reference line/arc. Available
for OCUPY (F1) being displayed. Refer to
configured in the active configuration set and
to hang up immediately after the survey is
SHIFT INIT (F4)
To select an initilisation method and to force a
STORE (F1) being displayed and for configu-
ration sets allowing phase fixed solutions.
Refer to "35.6.2 Accessing Initialisation for
Real-Time Rover Operations".
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
SHIFT QUIT (F6)
To exit Reference Line application program.

The fields available depend on the options chosen for <Heights:> and <Edit Height:> in
REFLINE Configuration, Heights page and <Task:> in REFLINE Choose Task & Refer-
ence Line, Reference page. The following fields are always available:
<Point ID:> User input The point ID of the point to be measured.
<Antenna Ht:> User input The height of the antenna that is being used.
Changing the antenna height here does not update
the default antenna height as defined in the active
configuration set. The changed antenna height is
used until the application program is exited.
<Offset:> Output Perpendicular offset from the reference line/arc
measured from the reference point to the measured
point.
For reference arcs, <Offset:>, <Arc:> and
<Arc-End:> values are always calculated so as to
produce the smallest <Offset:> possible. To ensure
this the arc will be extended if necessary. Refer to
paragraph "Measure to arc - horizontal measure-
ments".
<Check Dist Output Horizontal distance from start point to measured
1:> point.
<Check Dist Output Horizontal distance from end point to measured point.
2:>
For <Task: Measure to Line>
<Line:> Output Horizontal distance along the reference line from the
start point to the reference point.
<Line-End:> Output Horizontal distance along the reference line from the
end point to the reference point.
For <Task: Measure to Arc>

<Arc:> Output Horizontal distance along the reference arc from the
start point to the reference point.
<Arc-End:> Output Horizontal distance along the reference arc from the
reference point to the end point.
For <Task: Measure to XX>, <Heights: Use Start Point> and <Edit Height: No>
<Ht-Start:> Output Height difference between the start point and the
measured point.


<Height:> Output Height of measured point.
For <Task: Measure to Line>, <Heights: Use Ref Line> and <Edit Height: No>
<Ht-Line:> Output Height difference between the reference point on the
line and the measured point.
<Perp Dist:> Output Slope distance between the reference point and the
measured point, perpendicular to the reference line.
<Spatial Output Slope distance between the start point and the refer-
Dist:> ence point.
For <Task: Measure to Arc>, <Heights: Use Ref Line> and <Edit Height: No>
<Ht-Arc:> Output Height difference between the reference point on the
arc and the measured point.
For <Task: Measure to XX>, <Heights: Use DTM Model> and <Edit Height: No>
<Ht-DTM:> Output Height difference between the measured point and
the DTM.
For <Task: Measure to XX>, <Heights: XX> and <Edit Height: Yes>
<Design Ht:> User input Allows input of the design height of the target point.
The suggested value for the <Design Ht:> is as
configured in the <Heights:> field in REFLINE
<Ht-Design:> Output Height difference between the <Design Ht:> and the
height of the measured point.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Map page. Refer to paragraph "REFLINE Measure Reference,
Map page".
REFLINE The Map page provides an interactive display of the data. Displayed is also
Measure Reference, the horizontal distance along the reference line/arc from the start point to the reference
Map page point.

the perpendicular offset from the reference line/arc measured from the reference point to
the measured point.
Refer to "30 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for information on the functionality and
softkeys available.
Next step
Description Application: The positions of stakes, indicating the corners of a house that is
to be built, need to be measured relative to the title boundary of
the property that the house is to be built on.
This is done to check that the house is not being built too close
to the title boundary in keeping with council regulations.
Reference line/arc: The title boundary is used to define a reference line.
Diagram
P0 Start point
P1 End point
d1 S1 P2 Reference point
S1 Point to be measured
P1 P2 d2 P0 d1 <Offset:>
GPS12_131 d2 <Line:>
Requirements The reference line does not need to be stored.

<Write Logfile: Yes> in REFLINE Configuration, Logfile page.
A real-time reference is running.

chapter
2. REFLINE Reference Line/Arc Begin 41.2
Select a job and a configuration set with the settings mentioned
above.
3. CONT (F1)
4. REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line, Reference page 41.4.2
<Task: Measure to Line>
<Ref to Use: Manually Enter>
<Method: 2 Points>
5. Highlight <Start Point:>.
6. SURVY (F5) to manually occupy P1.
7. Highlight <End Point:>.
8. SURVY (F5) to manually occupy P2.
) The Map page provides an interactive display of the defined refer-

ence line.
30
9. CONT (F1)
10. Walk to the first point to be measured.
chapter
11. REFLINE Measure Points 41.5
<Point ID: S1>
13. If required, check information, for example on the satellites, the
memory or the battery.
) The results are displayed on the screen. The values in the fields indi-
cate the position of the point being occupied relative to the reference
line.
) It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job. If
) Do not turn off the receiver.


chapter
16. PAGE (F6) to access the Map page which provides an interactive 30
display of the defined reference line and the points measured relative
to it. Displayed is also
the horizontal distance along the reference line/arc from the start
point to the reference point.
the perpendicular offset from the reference line/arc measured
from the reference point to the measured point.
17. Are more points to be measured?
18. Walk to the next point
20. SHIFT QUIT (F6) returns to GPS1200 Main Menu.
) The results are written to the logfile.

41.6 Staking to a Reference Line/Arc

41.6.1 Stakeout Points 41-50

41.6.1 Stakeout Points
Description Allows for the position of a point to be defined relative to a reference line/arc and then staked.
Access Select <Task: Stake to XX> in REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line, Reference
page and press CONT (F1) to access REFLINE Enter Offset Values. Refer to "41.4
Managing Reference Lines/Arcs" to access REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line.
OR
Press STAKE (F5) in REFLINE Measure Points. Refer to "41.5 Measuring to a Refer-
ence Line/Arc" to access REFLINE Measure Points.
Stake to line - horizontal

measurements P1
P3
d1 P0 Start point
d2 P2 P1 End point
P2 Target point
P3 Reference point
d1 <Stake Offset:>
GPS12_119 P0 d2 <Along Line:>
Stake to line - vertical
measurements
P1
P3 P2
P0 Start point
d2 P1 End point
P2 Target point
d1
P3 Reference point
d1 <Height Offset:>, for <Heights: Use Start
Point>
P0
d2 <Height Offset:>, for <Heights: Use Ref
GPS12_120 Line>
Stake to arc - horizontal P3

d1
measurements
P2
P0 Start point
d2 P1 End point
P2 Target point
P3 Reference point
P0 d1 <Stake Offset:>
GPS12_121 d2 <Along Arc:>

Stake to arc - vertical
measurements P1
P3
P2
d2
d1 P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Target point
P3 Reference point
P0
d1 <Height Offset:>, for <Heights: Use Start
GPS12_122 Point>
REFLINE This screen is for typing in the stakeout values for a point relative to the reference line/arc.
Enter Offset Values The screen contains different fields depending on the options chosen for <Heights:> and
<Edit Height:> in REFLINE Configuration, Heights page and <Task:> in REFLINE
Choose Task & Reference Line, Reference page. The explanations for the softkeys given
below are valid in all cases.
CONT (F1)
LINE (F4)
ence Line. Refer to "41.4 Managing Refer-
ence Lines/Arcs".
SURVY (F5)
To measure a point relative to the reference
line/arc.
SHIFT CONF (F2)
<Point ID:> User input The point ID of the target point to be staked.
<Stake User input The offset from the reference point to the target point.
Offset:>


<Along Line:> User input Available for <Task: Stake to Line>. Horizontal
distance from the start point to the reference point
along the reference line.
<Along Arc:> User input Available for <Task: Stake to Arc>. Horizontal
distance from the start point to the reference point
along the reference arc.
<Height User input Available for <Edit Height: No> unless <Heights:
Offset:> Use DTM Model> in REFLINE Configuration. The
height offset of the target point.
For <Heights: Use Start Point>
The height of the target point is calculated as the
height of the start point plus <Height Offset:>.
For <Heights: Use Ref Line>
The height of the target point is calculated as the
height of the reference point plus <Height
Offset:>.
<Design Ht:> User input Available for <Edit Height: Yes> in REFLINE
Configuration, Heights page. The design height of
the target point.
For <Heights: Use Start Point>
The suggested height is the height of the start
point.
For <Heights: Use Ref Line>
The suggested height is the height of the refer-
ence point.
Next step
CONT (F1) to accept changes and continue to REFLINE XX Stakeout.
REFLINE The pages shown are those from a typical configuration set. An additional page is available
XX Stakeout, when a user defined display mask is used.
Ref XX page Refer to "38.4.1 Elements of the Graphical Display in the Stakeout" for an explanation of the
appearance of the elements of the graphical display within this screen. The display changes
depending on what option is chosen for <Orientate:> in REFLINE Configuration, General
page.
This screen contains different fields depending on the options chosen for <Stake Mode:> in
REFLINE Configuration, General page. The explanations for the fields and softkeys given
below are valid as indicated.

OCUPY (F1)
To start measuring the point being staked. The
(F1) changes to STOP. The difference
between the current position and the point
being staked is still displayed.
STOP (F1)
To end measuring the point being staked.
When <Auto STOP: Yes> in CONFIGURE
Point Occupation Settings, recording of
positions ends automatically as defined by the
stop criteria. The position mode icon changes
to the moving icon. (F1) changes to STORE.
STORE (F1)
STORE: Yes> in CONFIGURE Point Occu-
pation Settings, the measured point is stored
REVRS (F3)
To reverse the graphical display top to bottom.
A reversed graphical display can be used
when the point to be staked lies behind the
current position.
SURVY (F5)
To measure a point relative to the reference
line/arc.
PAGE (F6)
SHIFT CONF (F2)
To configure the reference line/arc. Available
for OCUPY (F1) being displayed. Refer to
configured in the active configuration set and
to hang up immediately after the survey is
SHIFT INIT (F4)
To select an initilisation method and to force a
STORE (F1) being displayed and for configu-
ration sets allowing phase fixed solutions.
Refer to "35.6.2 Accessing Initialisation for
Real-Time Rover Operations".
SHIFT QUIT (F6)
To exit Reference Line application program.

First field on the Choicelist The point ID of the point to be staked.
screen
program is exited.
To move down.
To move up.
<Ht:> Output Available for <Edit Height: No> in REFLINE Config-
uration, Heights page.
WGS 1984 height is displayed.
<D Ht:> User input Available for <Edit Height: Yes> in REFLINE
displayed.
tion.
<PDOP:> Output Available for autonomous solutions. The current
PDOP of the autonomous solution.
For <Stake Mode: Polar>

<DIRC:> Output The bearing from the direction of the orientation to the
point to be staked seen from the current position.
point to be staked.

For <Stake Mode: Orthogonal>

tion.
orientation.
<RGHT:> Output Horizontal distance from the current position to the
point to be staked orthogonal to the right of the orien-
tation direction.
<LEFT:> Output Horizontal distance from the current position to the
point to be staked orthogonal to the left of the orien-
tation direction.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Map page. Refer to paragraph "REFLINE XX Stakeout, Map
page".
XX Stakeout, the horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked.
Map page the height difference from the height of the current position to the height of the point to be
staked.
softkeys available.
Next step

Description Application: A curb is to be defined using offsets from the centreline of a road
that is being built.
Reference line/arc: The defined centre line of the curve is used as a reference arc.
Diagram
P0
d2
d1
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P1 d1 <Along Arc:>
TPS12_132 d2 <Stake Offset:>
Requirements The reference arc is already defined and saved in a job.

chapter
above.
3. CONT (F1).
<Task: Stake to Arc>
<Ref to Use: Select from Job>
5. Highlight <Ref Arc:>.
6. Open the choicelist to access REFLINE Manage Reference Arcs.
7. REFLINE Manage Reference Arcs 41.4
Select the correct reference arc.
8. CONT (F1) returns to REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line,
Reference page.

ence arc.
30
9. CONT (F1).


chapter
10. REFLINE Enter Offset Values 41.6
<Point ID: CL1>
<Stake Offset: 5.2000>
<Along Arc: 2.0000>
<Height Offset: 0.0000>
11. CONT (F1)
12. REFLINE XX Stakeout, Ref XX page
Depending on the configuration of the staking options in REFLINE
Configuration, General page, the graphical display and the values
in the fields indicate how to find the point to be staked.
) The results are displayed on the screen.

chapter
)
17.
Do not turn off the receiver.
PAGE (F6) to access the Map page which provides an interactive 30
display of the defined reference arc and the points staked relative to
it. Displayed is also
the horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be
staked.
the height difference from the height of the current position to the
height of the point to be staked.
18. Are more points to be staked?
19. REFLINE Enter Offset Values 41.6
Enter the parameters of the next point to be staked.
22. The results are written to the logfile.

41.7 Gridstaking to a Reference Line/Arc

41.7.1 Gridstaking Points 41-67
41.7.1 Gridstaking Points
Description A grid can be defined relative to a reference line/arc and points staked out in that defined
grid.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
Line/Arc Begin.
2. CONT (F1) to access REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line.
<Task: Gridstake XX>.
4. CONT (F1) to access REFLINE Define Grid.
Gridstake line methods Start at Begin

P1
d1
P0 Start point
d3 P1 End point
P0 d2
d1 <Begin Grid At:>
d2 <Increment By:>
GPS12_123 d3 <Line Offsets:>

Current Grid Pt
P1
d1
P0 Start point
d3 P1 End point
P0 d2
d1 <Begin Grid At:>
d2 <Increment By:>
Gridstake arc methods Start at Begin

P1
d3 d2
P0 Start point
P1 End point
d1 d1 <Begin Grid At:>
P0 d2 <Increment By:>
Current Grid Pt
P1
d3 d2
P0 Start point
P1 End point
d1 d1 <Begin Grid At:>
P0 d2 <Increment By:>
REFLINE
Define Grid
CONT (F1)
LINE (F4)
ence Line. Refer to "41.4 Managing Refer-
ence Lines/Arcs".
SHIFT CONF (F2)

<Begin Grid User input Distance along the reference line/arc from the start
at:> point to the first target point to be staked.
<Increment User input Spacing between points on the grid line.
by:>
<Line User input Spacing between grid lines.
Offsets:>
<Next Line:> Method by which the grid will be staked out.
Start at Begin Each new grid line is started at the same end as
where the previous grid line started.
Current Grid Pt Each new grid line is started at the same end as
where the previous grid line finished.
<Point ID:> Determines the format of the point ID for grid points.
Grid ID Point ID is shown as the position of the grid being
staked where +yyy.yy is the station position along the
grid line and +xxx.xx is the grid line offset.
Pt ID Template The point ID template as defined in the active config-
uration set is used. The point ID template can be
defined for <Survey Pts:> in CONFIGURE ID
Templates. Refer to "17.1 ID Templates".
Next step
CONT (F1) to accept changes and continue to REFLINE Stake +yyy.yy +xxx.xx, Ref XX
page.
REFLINE The title of this screen indicates the position of the grid being staked where +yyy.yy is the
Stake +yyy.yy +xxx.xx, station position along the grid line and +xxx.xx is the grid line offset.
Ref XX page The functionality of this screen is very similar to REFLINE XX Stakeout, Ref XX page. Differ-
ences between the two screens are outlined below. Refer to paragraph "REFLINE XX
Stakeout, Ref XX page" for all other key and field explanations.
SKIP (F4)
To skip the currently displayed station and
increment to the next station. Available for
OCUPY (F1) being displayed.
LINE+ (F5)
To start staking the next grid line. The position
of the first point on the new line is determined
by the option selected for <Next Line:>. Avail-
able for OCUPY (F1) being displayed.

First field on the User input The point ID of the grid point to be staked. The point
screen ID is based on the selection for <Point ID:> in
REFLINE Define Grid. If a different point ID is typed
in, the next point ID will still be shown as the next
automatically computed point ID.
<Ht:> Output Available for <Edit Height: No> in REFLINE Config-
uration, Heights page.
WGS 1984 height is displayed.
<D Ht:> User input Available for <Edit Height: Yes> in REFLINE
The design height, which is the height of the target
point to be staked, is displayed as orthometric height.
If the orthometric height cannot be displayed, the
ellipsoidal height is displayed. If it is not possible to
displayed.
If a design height has been entered and SKIP (F4) or
LINE+ (F5) is used the true grid height for the next
point is shown as the suggested height.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Map page. Refer to paragraph "REFLINE Stake +yyy.yy +xxx.xx,
Map page".
Stake +yyy.yy +xxx.xx, the horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked.
Map page the height difference from the height of the current position to the height of the point to be
staked.
softkeys available.
Next step

Description Application: The positions of bore-holes need to be staked out in a regular

grid over the area of a site to be used for landfill.
Reference line/arc: Two known points on the site can be used to define the reference
line.
Diagram
P1 d2
d1
P0 Start point
P0
P1 End point
d1 <Increment By:>
Requirements A new reference line needs to be created and saved with the job.
chapter
above.
3. CONT (F1)
<Task: Gridstake Line>
<Ref to Use: Select from Job>
5. Highlight <Ref Line:>.
6. Open the choicelist to access REFLINE Manage Reference Lines.
7. NEW (F2) to access REFLINE New Reference Line, Input page.
8. REFLINE New Reference Line, Input page 41.4.3
<Ref ID: Line001>
<Method: 2 Points>
Select the appropriate points from the choicelist.


chapter

ence line.
30
9. STORE (F1)
10. CONT (F1) returns to REFLINE Choose Task & Reference Line,
Reference page.

ence line.
30
11. CONT (F1)

12. REFLINE Define Grid 41.7
<Begin Grid At: 0>
<Increment By: 20.0000>
<Line Offsets: 20.0000>
<Next Line: Current Grid Pt>
<Point ID: Grid ID>
13. CONT (F1)
14. REFLINE Stake +yyy.yy +xxx.xx, Ref XX page 41.7
Depending on the configuration of the staking options in REFLINE
Configuration, General page, the graphical display and the values
in the fields indicate how to find the point to be staked.
chapter
) The results are displayed on the screen.
19. PAGE (F6) to access the Map page which provides an interactive 30
display of the defined reference line and the grid points staked rela-
tive to it. Displayed is also
the horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be
staked.
the height difference from the height of the current position to the
height of the point to be staked.
20. Repeat steps 14. to 18. including the advice until all grid points have
been staked.
22. The results are written to the logfile.

Reference Plane GPS1200 42-1
42 Reference Plane

42.1 Overview 42-2
42.2 Accessing Reference Plane 42-7
42.3 Configuring Reference Plane 42-10
42.4 Managing Reference Planes 42-14
42.5 Measuring Points on a Reference Plane 42-22
42.1 Overview
Description The Reference Plane application program can be used to measure points relative to a refer-
ence plane.
Reference plane tasks The Reference Plane application program can be used for the following tasks:
Measuring points to calculate and store the perpendicular distance to the plane.
Viewing and storing the instrument and/or local coordinates of the measured points.
Viewing and storing the height difference from the measured points to the plane.
)
Activating the applica-
Planes can only be computed with grid coordinates.
The Reference Plane application program must be activated via a licence key. Refer to "28
tion program Tools...\Licence Keys" for information on how to activate the application program.
Properties of measured The properties stored with measured points are:

points Class: Either MEAS or NAV depending on the position status when the point was occu-
pied.
Source: Ref Plane (Meas)

Defining a reference
plane
P1 P3
P4
P2
P5 P1 Point defining reference plane

P2 Point defining reference plane
GPS12 146
Reference planes are created using a right hand system. For two points defining a plane, a
vertical plane is used. A reference plane is defined with the X axis and the Z axis of the plane.
The Y axis of the plane defines the positive direction of the plane. A reference plane can be
defined in the following ways:
vertical
horizontal
tilted
) For GPS1200 the Reference Plane application program is only applicable for horizontal
and tilted plane definitions.
For TPS1200, the Reference Plane application program is also applicable for vertical
plane definitions.
Horizontal plane A horizontal reference plane is, by definition, horizontal. All points of the plane have the same
height. The axis of the horizontal reference plane are:
X axis: Horizontal and parallel to the plane; the X axis is in the direction of the coor-
dinate system easting.
Z axis: Horizontal and parallel to the plane.
Y axis: Defined by a point and perpendicular to the plane.
) a
Offsets are applied in the direction of the Y axis.
a
Y
Z
P1 P1
X X
Z
b b
TPS12_166 TPS12_166a
a Height a Height
b Easting b Easting
N Northing N Northing
P1 Origin of plane P1 Origin of plane
X X axis of plane X X axis of plane
Y Y axis of plane Y Y axis of plane
Z Z axis of plane Z Z axis of plane

Tilted plane Any number of points define the plane. The axis of the tilted reference plane are:
X axis: Horizontal and parallel to the plane
Z axis: Defined by steepest direction of the plane
Y axis: Perpendicular to the plane; increases in the direction as defined
) Offsets are applied in the direction of the Y axis.
a Z a Z
P1 X P1
X
b b
GPS12_147 GPS12_148
a Height a Height
b Easting b Easting
N Northing N Northing
P1 Origin of plane P1 Origin of plane
X X axis of plane X X axis of plane
Y Y axis of plane Y Y axis of plane
Z Z axis of plane Z Z axis of plane
) With four or more points a least squares adjustment is calculated resulting in a best fit plane.
Origin The origin of the reference plane can be defined to be in the plane coordinates or in relation
to the national coordinate system.
Positive direction of The positive direction of the plane is defined by the direction of the Y axis. The direction can
plane be changed by selecting a point which defines the positive direction of the Y axis.
Offset of the plane

Z Z
P2
d1
P2'
Y
d1
P1 X Y
d2
P1 X
TPS12_164 TPS12_164a
P1 Origin of plane
P1 Origin of plane P2 Point defining offset of plane
X X axis of plane P2 P2 projected on original plane
Y Y axis of plane d1 Offset defined by P2
Z Z axis of plane X X axis of plane
d1 Positive offset Y Y axis of plane
d2 Negative offset Z Z axis of plane

42.2 Accessing Reference Plane
Access Select Main Menu: Programs...\Reference Plane.

OR
Press PROG. Highlight Reference Plane. CONT (F1). Refer to "34.2 Accessing the
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen REFPLANE Reference Plane Begin.
OR
REFPLANE
Reference Plane Begin
CONT (F1)
CONF (F2)
To configure the Reference Plane application
program. Refer to "42.3 Configuring Refer-
ence Plane".
CSYS (F6)
<Codelist:> Choicelist No codes are stored in the selected job. All codelists
from Main Menu: Manage...\Codelists can be
selected.
can be selected.
<Antenna:> Choicelist Antennas in the receivers System RAM or as defined
in Main Menu: Manage...\Antennas.

Next step
IF the Reference THEN
Plane application
program
is to be accessed CONT (F1) accepts the changes and accesses the Reference Plane
application program.
is to be configured CONF (F2). Refer to "42.3 Configuring Reference Plane".
42.3 Configuring Reference Plane
Description Allows options to be set which are used within the Reference Plane application program.
These settings are stored within the configuration set.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "42.2 Accessing Reference Plane" to access REFPLANE Reference
Plane Begin.
2. CONF (F2) to access REFPLANE Configuration.
REFPLANE This screen consists of the Parameters page and the Logfile page.
Configuration,
Parameters page
CONT (F1)
DMASK (F3)
To edit and display mask currently being
displayed. Accesses CONFIGURE Define
Display Mask n. Available when <Display
Mask:> is highlighted on Parameters page.
Refer to "17.2 Display Settings".
PAGE (F6)

SHIFT ABOUT (F5)
To display information about the application
program name, the version number, the date
of the version, the copyright and the article
number.
<Display Choicelist The user defined display mask is shown in
Mask:> REFPLANE Measure Points on Plane. All display
masks of the active configuration set defined in
CONFIGURE Display Settings can be selected.
<Max d for User input The maximum perpendicular deviation of a point from
Plane Def.:> the calculated plane.
<Display:> This parameter defines the points displayed in the
Plot and Map pages of the Reference Plane applica-
tion program in the plan view.
All Points <Display: All Points> displays all points in the plan
view.
Points in Slice <Display: Points in Slice> displays points within the
defined <Slice Width:> in the plan view.
<Slice Width:> User input Available for <Display: Points in Slice>.
This parameter defines the distance from the plane in
which points are displayed. This distance is applied to
both sides of the plane. If lines and areas are to be
displayed in a particular Map page, then parts of lines
and areas falling within the defined slice are also
displayed.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Logfile page. Refer to paragraph "REFPLANE Configuration,
Logfile page".
REFPLANE Description of fields

Configuration,
Logfile page
Logfile:> exited.
program is written to. It is generated using the selected
<Format File:>.
<File Name:> Choicelist Available for <Write Logfile: Yes>. The name of the file
to which the data should be written. A logfile is stored in
the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The
data is always appended to the file.


Opening the choicelist accesses XX Logfiles where a
name for a new logfile can be created and an existing
logfile can be selected or deleted.
<Format File:> Choicelist Available for <Write Logfile: Yes>. A format file defines
which and how data is written to a logfile. Format files
are created using LGO. A format file must first be trans-
ferred from the CompactFlash card to the System RAM
before it can be selected. Refer to "24 Tools...\Transfer
Objects..." for information on how to transfer a format
file.
Opening the choicelist accesses XX Format Files
where an existing format file can be selected or deleted.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed.
42.4 Managing Reference Planes
Description A reference plane is used to measure points relative to the plane.
Measure to plane
Reference planes can be created, edited, stored and deleted in the active job.
The reference planes can be recalled for later use.
The plane can be shifted through a point or a defined offset.
REFPLANE
Choose Task & Refer-
ence Plane
CONT (F1)
To accept changes and to continue with the
subsequent screen.
SHIFT CONF (F2)
To configure the reference plane. Refer to
"42.3 Configuring Reference Plane".

<Task:> Measure to Plane The coordinates of measured points are calculated
relative to the reference plane.
<Plane to Create New Plane Defines a new reference plane.
Use:>
Select From Job Reference plane is selected in <Ref Plane:>.
<Ref Plane:> Choicelist Available for <Plane to Use: Select From Job>. The
reference plane to be used. Accesses REFPLANE
Manage Reference Planes.
<No. of Output Available for <Plane to Use: Select From Job>.
Points:> Number of points used for plane definition for the
plane shown in the <Ref Plane:>.
<Std Devia- Output Standard deviation of used points for plane definition.
tion:> ----- is displayed for less than four points.
<Max d:> Output Maximum distance between a point and the calcu-
lated plane. ----- is displayed for less than four points.
<Offset:> Output The offset method used as defined in REFPLANE XX
Reference Plane, Offset page.
<Origin:> Output The origin method used as defined in REFPLANE XX
Reference Plane, Origin page.
Next step
IF THEN
a new plane is to be CONT (F1) accesses REFPLANE New Reference Plane, General
created page. Refer to paragraph "Create reference plane step-by-step".
points are to be CONT (F1) accessses REFPLANE Measure Points on Plane,
measured to a plane Reference page. Refer to "42.5 Measuring Points on a Reference
Plane".
Create reference plane

step-by-step
chapter
1. Refer to "42.2 Accessing Reference Plane" to access REFPLANE
Reference Plane Begin.
2. CONT (F1) to access REFPLANE Choose Task & Reference
Plane.
3. REFPLANE Choose Task & Reference Plane
Select <Plane to Use: Create New Plane>.
4. CONT (F1) to access REFPLANE New Reference Plane, General
page.
) NEW (F2) in REFPLANE Manage Reference Planes to

access REFPLANE New Reference Plane, General page.
5. REFPLANE New Reference Plane, General page
<Ref Plane:> The ID of the new reference plane.
<No. of Points:> Number of points used for plane definition.


chapter
<Std Deviation:> Standard deviation of used points for plane defini-
tion. ----- is displayed unless more than four points are used to define
the plane.
<Max d:> Maximum distance between measured point and defined
plane. ----- is displayed unless more than four points are used to
define the plane.
6. PAGE (F6) to change to the Points page.
7. REFPLANE New Reference Plane, Points page
An * is shown to the right of the point for a point which will be used as
origin of the plane.
An is shown to the left of the point if the point is outside maximum
distance between a point and the calculated plane as defined in
REFPLANE Configuration, Parameters page.
The column d(m) displays the perpendicular distance of the point
from the definition of the plane.
) ADD (F2) to add points from REFPLANE Data: Job Name to define
the reference plane.
) USE (F3) to change between Yes and No for the highlighted point.
) DEL (F4) to remove the highlighted point from the list.
) ) SURVY (F5) to measure a point to be used for the plane.

DONE (F4) to return to REFPLANE New Reference Plane.
chapter
) SHIFT ORIGN (F4) to use the highlighted point as the origin of the
plane.
8. PAGE (F6) to change to the Origin page.
9. REFPLANE New Reference Plane, Origin page
<Use As Origin: Plane Coords> Point results are additionally stored
with X, Y, Z coordinates based on the local plane coordinate system.
<Use As Origin: Instrumnt Coords> Points on the plane are trans-
formed into the national coordinate system.
<X-coord:> Available for <Use As Origin: Plane Coords>. Enter
local X coordinate of origin. The origin is defined as the projection of
the measured point onto the calculated plane.
<Z-coord:> Available for <Use As Origin: Plane Coords>. Enter
local Z coordinate of origin. The origin is defined as the projection of
the measured point onto the calculated plane.
<Point:> Defines the positive direction of the Y axis.
) DIREC (F5) Available for <Point:> being hightlighted. To access

REFPLANE Survey: XX. Measure a point to define the positive plane
direction.
10. PAGE (F6) to change to the Offset page.
11. REFPLANE New Reference Plane, Offset page
<Define Offset:> An offset can be defined by a point or a distance.
The defined plane is shifted along the Y axis by the offset.


chapter
<Offset PtID:> Available for <Define Offset: By Point ID>. Point ID
of offset point.
<Offset:> Distance by which to offset the plane along the Y axis.
For <Define Offset: By Distance> the distance can be entered.
For <Define Offset: By Point ID> the calculated distance to the
adjusted plane is displayed. <Offset:-----> if no values are available.
) OFSET (F5) Available for <Offset PtID:> being highlighted. To

access REFPLANE Survey: XX, Survey page. Measure a point to
define the offset point.
12. PAGE (F6) to change to the Plot page.
13. REFPLANE New Reference Plane, Plot page
Points displayed depend on the settings in REFPLANE Configura- 42.3
tion, Parameters page. Points defining the plane are displayed in
black, the other points are displayed in grey.
) ) SHIFT FACE (F1) to access the face view of the plane.

SHIFT PLAN (F1) to access the plan view of the plane.
14. STORE (F1) to compute and store the reference plane.
Edit a reference plane

Step Description
step-by-step
Plane Begin.
Step Description
2. CONT (F1) to access REFPLANE Choose Task & Reference Plane.
Select <Plane to Use: Select From Job>.
Highlight <Ref Plane:>.
4. ENTER to access REFPLANE Manage Reference Planes.
5. REFPLANE Manage Reference Planes
EDIT (F3) to access REFPLANE Edit Reference Plane, General page.
6. REFPLANE Edit Reference Plane, General page
Continue with step 5. from paragraph "Create reference plane step-by-step".
Select a reference plane

Step Description
from the job step-by-
step 1. Refer to "42.2 Accessing Reference Plane" to access REFPLANE Reference
Plane Begin.
Select <Plane to Use: Select From Job>.
4. Highlight <Ref Plane:>.
5. ENTER to access REFPLANE Manage Reference Planes.
6. REFPLANE Manage Reference Planes
Select a reference plane.

Step Description
) MORE (F5) displays information about date and time of when the reference plane
was created and the number of points defining the plane.
7. CONT (F1) to access REFPLANE Measure Points on Plane, Reference page.
42.5 Measuring Points on a Reference Plane
Measure points on
Step Description
plane step-by-step
Plane Begin.
Select a reference plane. Refer to paragraph "Select a reference plane from the
job step-by-step".
4. CONT (F1) to access REFPLANE Measure Points on Plane, Reference page.
5. REFPLANE Measure Points on Plane, Reference page
<Offset d:> The perpendicular distance between current position and adjusted
plane.
<Offset Ht:> The vertical distance between current position and adjusted plane.
For <Use As Origin: Plane Coords>
<X Coordinate:>, <Y Coordinate:> and <Z Coordinate:> are displayed.
For <Use As Origin: Instrumnt Coords>
<Easting:>, <Northing:> and <Height:> are displayed.
) CMPR (F4) to calculate offsets to previously measured points.
) STORE (F1) to store the results for the point currently being displayed.
) DONE (F4) to return to REFPLANE Measure Points on Plane, Reference

page.

Step Description
) PLANE (F5) to edit the selected reference plane.
) SHIFT INDIV (F5) for an individual point ID independent of the ID template. SHIFT
RUN (F5) changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template.
6. PAGE (F6) to change to the Map page.
7. REFPLANE Measure Points on Plane, Map page.
) ) SHIFT FACE (F1) to access the face view of the plane.

SHIFT PLAN (F1) to access the plan view of the plane.
8. OCUPY (F1) to measure points on the plane.
Determine Coordinate System - General GPS1200 43-1
43 Determine Coordinate System - General

43.1 Overview 43-2
43.2 Accessing Determine Coordinate System 43-14
43.3 Configuring Determine Coordinate System 43-17
43.1 Overview
Description GPS measured points are always stored based on the global geocentric datum known as
WGS 1984. Most surveys require coordinates in a local grid system, for example, based on
a countrys official mapping datum or an arbitrary grid system used in a particular area such
as a construction site. To convert the WGS 1984 coordinates into local coordinates a coor-
dinate system needs to be created. Part of the coordinate system is the transformation used
to convert coordinates from the WGS 1984 datum to the local datum.
The Determine Coordinate System application program allows:

the parameters of a new transformation to be determined.
the parameters of an existing transformation to be recomputed.
Transformations A transformation is the process of converting coordinates from one geodetic datum to
another.
Requirements
Transformation parameters.
In some cases a local ellipsoid.
In some cases a map projection.
In some cases a geoid model.
Transformation parameters
A transformation consists of a number of shifts, rotations and scale factors, depending on the
type of transformation used. Not all of these parameters are always required. These param-
eters may already be known, or may need to be computed.

Description of transformations
Three different transformations are provided:
Classic 3D, also called Helmert transformation
Onestep
Twostep
Transforma- Characteristic Description

tion
Classic 3D Principle Transforms coordinates from WGS 1984 cartesian
to local cartesian coordinates and vice versa. A map
projection can then be applied to obtain grid coordi-
nates. As a similarity transformation, it is the most
rigorous transformation type and keeps the full
geometrical information.
Positions and heights Positions and heights are linked. The accuracy is
fully maintained and does not distort the measure-
ments.
Use When measurements are to be kept totally homoge-
nous.
Requirements The positions and heights are known in
WGS 1984 and in the local system for at least
three points. Four points or more are recom-
mended in order to obtain higher redundancy.
Parameters of the local ellipsoid.
tion
Parameters of the local map projection in order to
convert between grid coordinates and geodetic
coordinates.
Parameters of the local geoid model in order to
convert between orthometric and ellipsoidal
heights. This is not compulsory.
Area Especially wide networks with large height differ-
ences. Local grid coordinates must be accurate.
Advantage Accuracy of the measurements is maintained.
It may be used over any area as long as the local
coordinates, including heights, are accurate.
Disadvantage The local ellipsoid and map projection must be
known for the local grid coordinates.
In order to obtain accurate ellipsoidal heights the
geoid separation at the measured points must be
known. This may be determined from a geoid
model. Refer to "11.2 Terminology".
Onestep Principle Transforms coordinates directly from WGS 1984 to
local grid and vice versa without knowledge about
the local ellipsoid or the map projection. Procedure:


tion
1. The WGS 1984 coordinates are projected onto a
temporary Transverse Mercator projection. The
central meridian of this projection passes
through the centre of gravity of the common
control points.
2. The results of 1. are preliminary grid coordinates
for the WGS 1984 points.
3. These preliminary grid coordinates are matched
with the local grid control points in order to
compute the Easting and Northing shifts, the
rotation and the scale factor between these two
sets of points. This is known as a classic 2D
transformation.
4. The height transformation is a single dimension
height approximation.
Positions and heights The position and height transformations are sepa-
rated.
Use When measurements are to be forced to tie in with
local existing control. For example:
tion
A site where the coordinates of the control points are
based on a purely local grid. The coordinate values
within this grid are totally arbitrary and are in no way
connected with any ellipsoid or map projection. Obvi-
ously a Classic 3D transformation cannot be used
here, as cartesian coordinates cannot be calculated
from such a grid.
Requirements The position is known in WGS 1984 and in the
local system for at least one point. Three or more
points are recommended in order to obtain
redundancy.
Additional height information for one point
enables the transformation of heights.
Parameters of the local geoid model. This is not
compulsory.
No parameters of the local ellipsoid.
No parameters of the local map projection.
Area Limited to about 10 x 10 km because no projec-
tion scale factor is applied and a standard Trans-
verse Mercator projection is used to compute the
preliminary WGS 1984 grid coordinates.
For areas without large height differences.


tion
Points and transfor- The transformation parameters determined depend
mation parameters on the number of available points with position infor-
mation.
One point: Classic 2D with shift in X and Y.
Two points: Classic 2D with shift in X and Y, rota-
tion about Z and scale.
More than two points: Classic 2D with shift in X
and Y, rotation about Z, scale and residuals.
Points and height The type of height transformation performed
transformation depends on the number of available points with
height information.
No point: No height transformation.
One point: Heights are shifted to fit to the height
control point.
Two points: Average height shift between the two
height control points.
Three points: Tilted plane through the three
height control points to approximate the local
heights.
More than three points: Best fitting average
plane.
tion
Advantage Errors in height do not propagate into errors in
position since the height and position transforma-
tions are separated.
If local heights have low accuracy or do not exist,
a transformation of position can still be calculated
and vice versa.
The height points and position points do not have
to be the same points.
No parameters of the local ellipsoid and map
projection is required.
Parameters may be computed with a minimum of
points. Care should be taken when computing
parameters using just one or two local points as
the parameters calculated are valid in the vicinity
of the points used for the transformation.
Disadvantage Restriction in the area over which the transforma-
tion can be applied. This is mainly due to the fact
that there is no provision for scale factor in the
projection.
The accuracy in height depends on the undula-
tion of the geoid. The bigger the geoid variations
the less accurate the results are.


tion
Twostep Principle Combines the advantages of the Onestep and the
Classic 3D transformation. It allows treating position
and height separately, but is not restricted to smaller
areas. Procedure:
1. The WGS 1984 coordinates of the common
control points are shifted closely to the local
datum using a given Classic 3D pre-transforma-
tion. This is typically a rough transformation valid
for the country of the local datum.
2. The coordinates are projected onto a preliminary
grid, but this time using the true map projection
of the local points.
3. A 2D transformation is applied, exactly as with
the Onestep transformation.
Positions and heights The position and height transformations are sepa-
rated.
Use When measurements are to be forced to tie in with
local existing control in areas larger than 10 x 10 km.
Requirements The position is known in WGS 1984 and in the
local system for at least one point. Four points or
more are recommended in order to obtain higher
redundancy.
Parameters of the local ellipsoid.
tion
Parameters of the local map projection.
Parameters of a pre-transformation.
Area Virtually any area as long as the local coordinates
are accurate.
Points and transfor- Identical with the Onestep transformation.
mation parameters
Points and height Identical with the Onestep transformation.
transformation
Advantage Errors in height do not propagate into errors in
position since the height and position transforma-
tions are separated.
If local heights have low accuracy or do not exist,
a transformation of position can still be calculated
and vice versa.
The height points and position points do not have
to be the same points.
Fits much better over larger areas than a
Onestep transformation. Reason:


tion
The first step of a Twostep transformation avoids
any distortions due to the fact that the preliminary
grid coordinates are built on a different ellipsoid
than the local points. The second step ensures
that the influence of the scale factor of the map
projection is equally taken into account before the
final 2D transformation is computed.
Disadvantage The local ellipsoid must be known.
The map projection must be known.
A pre-transformation must be known. A null trans-
formation can be used.
In order to obtain accurate ellipsoidal heights, the
geoid separation at the measured points must be
known. This may be determined from a geoid
model.
) With one common control point, it is still possible to calculate a Classic 3D transformation,
as long as the rotations and the scale parameter are fixed. Such a transformation fits
perfectly in the vicinity of the common control point, but is degraded by the distance from that
point, because neither the orientation of the local reference frame nor any scale factor within
the local datum can be taken into account.
Requirements to deter- To determine a transformation it is necessary to have common control points whose posi-
mine a transformation tions are known in both WGS 1984 coordinates and local coordinates. The more points that
are common between datums the more accurately the transformation parameters can be
calculated. Depending on the type of transformation used, details about the map projection,
the local ellipsoid and a local geoidal model program may also be needed.
Requirements for The control points used for the transformation should surround the area for which the
control points transformation is to be applied. It is not good practice to survey or convert coordinates
outside of the area covered by the control points as extrapolation errors may be intro-
duced.
When a geoid field file and/or a CSCS field file is used in the determination of a coordinate
system, the control points for the calculation must fall within the areas of the field files.
Coordinate system Two different methods for determining a coordinate system are available:
determination methods
Coordinate system deter- Characteristic Description
mination method
Normal Number of control points One or more control points for
needed both the WGS 1984 and the
local datum.
Transformation to use Onestep, Twostep or Classic
3D, depending on number of
control points and available
information.
One point localisation Number of control points One control point for both the
needed WGS 1984 and the local
datum.

Coordinate system deter- Characteristic Description

mination method
Transformation to use Onestep or Twostep when
information about the
necessary rotations and
scale factor is known.
Classic 3D when the rota-
tions are to be set to zero
and the scale factor to
one.
43.2 Accessing Determine Coordinate System
Access Select Main Menu: Programs...\Determine Coordinate System.

OR
Press PROG. Highlight Determine Coordinate System. CONT (F1). Refer to "34.2
Accessing the Application Programs Menu" for information on the PROG key.
OR
Press a hot key configured to access the screen DET C SYS Determine Coord System
Begin. Refer to "5.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys.
OR
DET C SYS
Determine Coord
System Begin
CONT (F1)
CONF (F2)
To configure the coordinate system determina-
tion method selected in <Method:>.
CSYS (F6)
Available for <Method: Normal>. To access
DET C SYS Coordinate Systems and choose
a coordinate system to edit. Refer to "11.4.2
Editing a Coordinate System".

<Name:> User input A unique name for the coordinate system. The name
may be up to 16 characters in length and may include
spaces. Input is mandatory.
) Entering the name of a coordinate system will

allow that existing system to be updated. Refer
to "11.4.2 Editing a Coordinate System".
<WGS84 Pts Choicelist The job from which the points with WGS84 coordi-
Job:> nates will be taken. Opening the choicelist accesses
MANAGE Jobs (Device). Refer to "7
Manage...\Jobs".
<Local Pts Choicelist The job from which the points with local coordinates
Job:> will be taken. Opening the choicelist accesses
MANAGE Jobs (Device). Refer to "7
Manage...\Jobs".
<Method:> Normal or One Pt Method used to determine the coordinate system.
Localistn
Next step
IF AND THEN
<Method: the DET C SYS CONF (F2) to access DET C SYS Configuration.
Normal> application Refer to "43.3.1 Configuring Determine Coordinate
program needs System - Normal".
configuring
<Method: One the DET C SYS CONF (F2) to access DET C SYS Configuration.
Pt Localistn> application Refer to "43.3.2 Configuring Determine Coordinate
program needs System - One Point Localisation".
configuring
<Method: the DET C SYS CONT (F1) to access DET C SYS Step 1: Choose
Normal> application Transform Type. Refer to "44 Determine Coordinate
program does not System - Normal".
need configuring
<Method: One the DET C SYS CONT (F1) to access DET C SYS Step 1: Choose
Pt Localistn> application Transform Type. Refer to "45 Determine Coordinate
program does not System - One Point Localisation".
need configuring

43.3 Configuring Determine Coordinate System

43.3.1 Configuring Determine Coordinate System - Normal 43-18
43.3.2 Configuring Determine Coordinate System - One Point Localisation 43-24
43.3.1 Configuring Determine Coordinate System - Normal
Description The configuration of DET C SYS, normal method, allows options to be set which are used as
the default options within the Determine Coordinate System application program when using
the normal method. These settings are stored within the active configuration set.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "43.2 Accessing Determine Coordinate System" to access DET C SYS
Determine Coord System Begin.
2. CONF (F2) to access DET C SYS Configuration, Method page.
3. Select <Default Method: Normal>.
DET C SYS This screen consists of the Method page, the Residuals page and the Classic 3D page.
Configuration, The explanations for the softkeys given below are valid for all pages, unless otherwise
Method page stated.

CONT (F1)
FIX (F4) or ADJST (F4)
Available for Classic 3D page unless <Transf
Model:> is highlighted. To define which
parameters are computed or fixed in the
Classic 3D transformation. Refer to paragraph
"DET C SYS Configuration, Classic 3D page".
PAGE (F6)
<Default Normal or One Pt Method used to determine the coordinate system.
Method:> Localistn
) The fields and pages available are different if
<Default Method: One Pt Localistn> is
selected. Refer to "43.3.2 Configuring Deter-
mine Coordinate System - One Point Localisa-
tion" for information on how to configure DET C
SYS using the one point localisation method.
<Default Onestep, Twostep The default transformation to be used when deter-
Transforma- or Classic 3D mining the coordinate system. Refer to "43.1 Over-
tion:> view".
<Default Orthometric or The default height type to be used when determining
Height Mode:> Ellipsoidal the coordinate system.
<Default Pos & Height, Pos Options available depend on the choice made for
Match:> Only, Height Only <Default Transformation:>. Point parameters to be
or <None> matched between points in both datums.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Residuals page. Refer to paragraph "DET C SYS Configuration,
Residuals page".
DET C SYS Description of fields

Configuration,
Residuals page Field Option Description
<Easting:> User input The limit above which Easting residuals will be
flagged as possible outliers.
<Northing:> User input The limit above which Northing residuals will be
flagged as possible outliers.
<Height:> User input The limit above which Height residuals will be flagged
as possible outliers.
<Default The method by which the residuals of the control
Residual points will be distributed throughout the transforma-
Distbtn:> tion area.
None No distribution is made. Residuals remain with their
associated points.


XX
1/Distance Distributes the residuals according to the distance
between each control point and the newly trans-
formed point.
Multiquadratic Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic inter-
polation approach.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Classic 3D page. Refer to paragraph "DET C SYS Configuration,
Classic 3D page".
DET C SYS The settings on this page define the parameters to be used in a Classic 3D transformation.
Configuration, Refer to "11.2 Terminology" for more information about how many transformation parame-
Classic 3D page ters are computed, based on the number of points common to both datums.
IF the value for a THEN the value for this parameter will be
field is
----- calculated.
any number fixed to that value.
<Transf Bursa Wolf or The transformation model to be used. Refer to
Model:> Molodensky-Bad standard surveying literature for details on the
models.
<Shift dX:> User input Shift in X direction.
<Shift dY:> User input Shift in Y direction.
<Shift dZ:> User input Shift in Z direction.
<Rotation X:> User input Rotation around the X axis.
<Rotation Y:> User input Rotation around the Y axis.
<Rotation Z:> User input Rotation around the Z axis.
<Scale:> User input Scale factor.
Next step
IF AND THEN
a field displays the parameter highlight the field. FIX (F4). Enter the value of the
----- needs to be fixed to parameter.
a value
a field displays the parameter highlight the field. ADJST (F4).
a value needs to be calcu-
lated

IF AND THEN
all parameters - CONT (F1) to return to DET C SYS Determine
are configured Coord System Begin.
43.3.2 Configuring Determine Coordinate System - One Point Localisation
Description The configuration of DET C SYS, one point localisation method, allows options to be set
which are used as the default options within the Determine Coordinate System application
program when using the one point localisation method. These settings are stored within the
active configuration set.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
2. CONF (F2) to access DET C SYS Configuration, Method page.
3. Select <Default Method: One Pt Localistn>.
DET C SYS This screen consists of the Method page, the Onestep page, the Twostep page and the
Configuration, Classic 3D page. The explanations for the softkeys given below are valid for all pages.
Method page

CONT (F1)
PAGE (F6)
<Default Normal or One Pt Method used to determine the coordinate system.
Method:> Localistn
) The fields and pages available are different if
<Default Method: Normal> is selected. Refer
to "43.3.1 Configuring Determine Coordinate
System - Normal" for information on how to
configure DET C SYS using the normal
method.
<Default Onestep, Twostep The default transformation to be used when deter-
Transforma- or Classic 3D mining the coordinate system. Refer to "11.2 Termi-
tion:> nology".
<Default Orthometric or The default height mode to be used when deter-
Height Mode:> Ellipsoidal mining the coordinate system.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Onestep page. Refer to paragraph "DET C SYS Configuration,
Onestep page".

Configuration,
Onestep page
<Default Rota- The default rotation method to be used in the trans-
tion:> formation process.
Use WGS84 North Rotate to North as defined by WGS 1984.
User Entered Rotation can be manually typed in.
Convergnce Angle between grid North and geodetic North at a
Angle certain point. Refer to "45.2 Determine Coordinate
System - Onestep Transformation" paragraph "DET
C SYS Step 4: Determine Rotation" for a diagram.
Two WGS84 Rotation defined by two points on the WGS 1984
Points datum. Refer to "45.2 Determine Coordinate System
- Onestep Transformation" paragraph "DET C SYS
Step 4: Determine Rotation" for a diagram.
<Default The default method for determining the height scale
Height SF:> factor to be used in the transformation process.


User Entered Height scale factor can be manually typed in.
Known WGS84 Pt Height scale factor defined by a known point on the
WGS 1984 datum.
Known WGS84 Ht Height scale factor defined by the known height of a
point on the WGS 1984 datum.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Twostep page. Refer to paragraph "DET C SYS Configuration,
Twostep page".

Configuration,
Twostep page Field Option Description
<Default Rota- The default rotation method to be used in the trans-
tion:> formation process.
Use WGS84 North Rotate to North as defined by WGS 1984.
User Entered Rotation can be manually typed in.
Convergnce Angle between grid North and geodetic North at a
Angle certain point. Refer to "45.2 Determine Coordinate
System - Onestep Transformation" paragraph "DET
C SYS Step 4: Determine Rotation" for a diagram.
Two WGS84 Rotation defined by two points on the WGS 1984
Points datum. Refer to "45.2 Determine Coordinate System
- Onestep Transformation" paragraph "DET C SYS
Step 4: Determine Rotation" for a diagram.
<Default The default method for determining the scale factor to
Scale:> be used in the transformation process.
User Entered Scale factor can be manually typed in
Compute CSF Compute the combined grid and height scale factor.
<Deflt Grid User Entered or Available for <Default Scale: Compute CFS>.
SF:> Known Local Pt Default method for computing the grid scale factor of
the known point.
<Deflt Ht SF:> User Entered, Available for <Default Scale: Compute CFS>.
Known Local Pt or Default method for computing the height scale factor
Known Local Ht of the known point.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Classic 3D page. Refer to paragraph "DET C SYS Configuration,
Classic 3D page".

Configuration,
Classic 3D page Field Option Description
<Default Local Use WGS84 Pt Ht Source of height information to use.
Height:> or Use Local Pt Ht

Next step
CONT (F1) returns to DET C SYS Determine Coord System Begin.
Determine Coordinate System - Normal GPS1200 44-1
44 Determine Coordinate System - Normal

44.1 Overview 44-2
44.2 Determining a New Coordinate System 44-3
44.3 Updating a Coordinate System 44-16
44.4 Matching Points 44-17
44.5 Transformation Results 44-21
44.1 Overview
Description The Determine Coordinate System application program allows a new coordinate system to
be determined or a coordinate system to be updated. The coordinate system is defined by
the transformation used to convert coordinates from one geodetic datum to another.
Onestep, Twostep or Classic 3D transformations are available. Refer to "43 Determine Coor-
dinate System - General" for more information.
Next step
IF THEN
a new coordinate Refer to "44.2 Determining a New Coordinate System".
system is to be deter-
mined
a coordinate system Refer to "44.3 Updating a Coordinate System".
is to be updated

44.2 Determining a New Coordinate System
Access step-by-step
Step Description
2. Select <Method: Normal>.
3. CONT (F1) to access DET C SYS Step 1: Choose Transform Type.
DET C SYS
Step 1: Choose Trans-
form Type
CONT (F1)
<Transfrm User input A unique name for the transformation. The name may
Name:> be up to 16 characters in length and may include
spaces. If a coordinate system is being updated then
its name is displayed.
<Transfrm The type of transformation to be used when deter-
Type:> mining a coordinate system.
Onestep, Twostep Available when determining a new coordinate
or Classic 3D system.
Output Available when updating a coordinate system. The
transformation type shown is the same as the trans-
formation used in the existing system.
<Height The height mode to be used in the determination of a
Mode:> coordinate system.
Orthometric or Available when determining a new coordinate
Ellipsoidal system.
Output Available when updating a coordinate system. The
height mode shown is the same as the mode used in
the existing system.
Next step
CONT (F1) continues to DET C SYS Step 2: Choose Parameters.

) If a coordinate system was chosen to be edited in DET C SYS Determine Coord System
Begin, pressing CONT (F1) accesses DET C SYS Step 3: Match Points (n). Pressing ESC
does not re-access DET C SYS Determine Coord System Begin but accesses DET C SYS
Step 2: Choose Parameters and DET C SYS Step 1: Choose Transform Type.
DET C SYS This screen contains different fields, depending on what transformation type was chosen in
Step 2: Choose Parame- DET C SYS Step 1: Choose Transform Type.
ters
CONT (F1)
For <Transfrm Type: Onestep>

<Geoid Choicelist The geoid model to be used in the transformation.
Model:> Geoid models from MANAGE Geoid Models can be
selected.
For <Transfrm Type: Twostep>
<Pre Trans- Choicelist The pre-transformation to use for the preliminary 3D
form:> transformation. All 3D transformations from
MANAGE Transformations can be selected.
<Ellipsoid:> Choicelist The ellipsoid to use in the transformation. All ellip-
soids from MANAGE Ellipsoids can be selected.
Output The ellipsoid being used by a hard wired projection
when selected in <Projection:>.
<Projection:> Choicelist The projection to use in the transformation. All projec-
tions from MANAGE Projections can be selected.
selected.
For <Transfrm Type: Classic 3D>

<Ellipsoid:> Choicelist The ellipsoid to use in the transformation. All ellip-
soids from MANAGE Ellipsoids can be selected.


<Projection:> Choicelist The projection to use in the transformation. All projec-
tions from MANAGE Projections can be selected.
<Geoid Choicelist The geoid model to use in the transformation. Geoid
Model:> models from MANAGE Geoid Models can be
selected.
<CSCS Choicelist The CSCS model to use in the transformation. All
Model:> CSCS models from MANAGE CSCS Models can be
selected.
Next step
CONT (F1) continues to DET C SYS Step 3: Match Points (n).
DET C SYS This screen provides a list of points chosen from <WGS84 Pts Job:> and <Local Pts Job:>.
Step 3: Match Points (n) The number of control points matched between both jobs is indicated in the title, for example
DET C SYS Step 3: Match Points (4). Unless there is no pair of matching points in the list
all softkeys are available. Refer to "44.4 Matching Points" for information on how to match
points.
CALC (F1)
To confirm the selections, compute the trans-
formation and continue with the subsequent
screen.
NEW (F2)
To match a new pair of points. This pair is
added to the list. A new point can be manually
occupied. Refer to "44.4.2 Selecting a New
Pair of Matching Points".
EDIT (F3)
To edit the highlighted pair of matched points.
Refer to "44.4.3 Editing a Pair of Matching
Points".
DEL (F4)
To delete the highlighted pair of matched
points from the list.
MATCH (F5)
To change the type of match for a highlighted
pair of matched points. Refer to "Description of
columns".
AUTO (F6)
To scan both jobs for points that have the
same point ID. Points with matching point IDs
are added to the list.

SHIFT PARAM (F5)
Available for <Transfrm Type: Classic 3D> in
DET C SYS Step 1: Choose Transform
Type. To configure Classic 3D transformation
parameters. Refer to "43.3.1 Configuring
Determine Coordinate System - Normal" para-
graph "DET C SYS Configuration, Classic 3D
page".
Column Description
WGS84 Pts The point ID of the points chosen from <WGS84 Pts Job:>.
Local Pts The point ID of the points chosen from <Local Pts Job:>.
Match The type of match to be made between the points. This information is used
in the transformation calculation. Position & Height, Position only, Height
only or None.
For <Transfrm Type: Onestep> or <Transfrm Type: Twostep>
possible options are P & H, P only, H only or None.
For <Transfrm Type: Classic 3D> possible options are P & H or
None.
None removes matched common points from the transformation calcula-
tion but does not delete them from the list. This can be used to try and
improve the residuals that are obtained when calculating the transforma-
tion, when the point that is the problem is not known.
Next step
CALC (F1) computes the transformation and continues to DET C SYS Step 4: Check Resid-
uals. Refer to paragraph "DET C SYS Step 4: Check Residuals".
) If a coordinate system to be updated contains a point that was deleted from the active job
and a new point was created in that job with the same point ID but different coordinates, the
coordinates of the old point will still be used for the calculation. Pressing EDIT (F3) to edit a
highlighted pair of matched points containing the deleted point, will overwrite the coordinates
of the old point and the coordinates of the new point will be used in the calculation.
DET C SYS Displays a list of the matched points used in the transformation calculation and their associ-
Step 4: Check Resid- ated residuals.
uals
CONT (F1)
To accept the residuals and to continue with
RESLT (F3)
To view results of the transformation.
Accesses DET C SYS Transformation
Results. Refer to "44.5 Transformation
Results".
MORE (F5)
To display information about height residuals.

Column Description
WGS84 Pts The point ID of the points chosen from <WGS84 Pts Job:>.
East The Easting residual. If positions were not used in the transformation
calculation then ----- will be displayed.
North The Northing residual. If positions were not used in the transformation
calculation then ----- will be displayed.
Height The Height residual. If heights were not used in the transformation calcu-
lation then ----- will be displayed.
Indicates residuals that exceed the residual limit defined in DET C SYS
Configuration, Residuals page.
Indicates the largest residual in East, North and Height.
Next step
IF the residuals are THEN
unacceptable ESC returns to DET C SYS Step 3: Match Points (n). Matched
points can be edited, deleted or temporarily removed from the list
and the transformation recalculated.
acceptable CONT (F1) continues to DET C SYS Step 5: Store Coord System.
DET C SYS This screen consists of the Summary page and the Coord System page. The Coord
Step 5: Store Coord System page contains different fields, depending on what transformation type was chosen
System, in DET C SYS Step 1: Choose Transform Type. The explanations for the softkeys given
Summary page below are valid for all pages.
STORE (F1)
To store the coordinate system to the DB-X
and return to GPS1200 Main Menu.
PAGE (F6)
<Name:> User input The name of the coordinate system can be changed.
The name may be up to 16 characters in length and
may include spaces.
<Transfrm Output The type of transformation used, as defined in DET C
Type:> SYS Step 1: Choose Transform Type.


<Matched Output Number of matched points, as defined in DET C SYS
Pts:> Step 3: Match Points (n).
<Easting:> Output Largest Easting residual from the transformation
calculation.
<Northing:> Output Largest Northing residual from the transformation
calculation.
<Height:> Output Largest Height residual from the transformation
calculation.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Coord System page. Refer to paragraph "DET C SYS Step 5:
Store Coord System, Coord System page".
DET C SYS For <Transfrm Type: Onestep>

Step 5: Store Coord Description of fields
System,
Coord System page Field Option Description
<Residuals:> None, The method by which the residuals of the control
1/DistanceXX or points will be distributed throughout the transforma-
Multiquadratic tion area. Refer to "43.3.1 Configuring Determine
Coordinate System - Normal" paragraph "DET C SYS
Configuration, Residuals page".
<Geoid Output Name of geoid model used, as defined in DET C SYS
Model:> Step 2: Choose Parameters.
For <Transfrm Type: Twostep>
<Pre Trans- Output Name of the pre-transformation used, as defined in
form:> DET C SYS Step 1: Choose Transform Type.
<Ellipsoid:> Output Name of ellipsoid used, as defined in DET C SYS
Step 2: Choose Parameters.
<Projection:> Output Name of projection used, as defined in DET C SYS

For <Transfrm Type: Classic 3D>
<Transform:> Output Name of transformation used, as defined in DET C
SYS Step 1: Choose Transform Type.
<Ellipsoid:> Output Name of ellipsoid used, as defined in DET C SYS
<Projection:> Output Name of projection used, as defined in DET C SYS
<CSCS Output Name of CSCS model used, as defined in DET C
Model:> SYS Step 2: Choose Parameters.
Next step
STORE (F1) stores the coordinate system to the DB-X and attaches it to the <WGS84 Pts
Job:> selected in DET C SYS Determine Coord System Begin, replacing any coordinate
system attached to this job. <WGS84 Pts Job:> becomes the active job.
44.3 Updating a Coordinate System
Access step-by-step
Step Description
2. Select <Method: Normal>.
3. Enter the name of a coordinate system in <Name:>.
OR
CSYS (F6) to select a coordinate system.
4. CONT (F1) to access DET C SYS Step 3: Match Points (n).
5. All the following steps are identical with the determination of a new coordinate
system from DET C SYS Step 3: Match Points (n) onwards.
Refer to "44.2 Determining a New Coordinate System". Follow the instructions

from paragraph "DET C SYS Step 3: Match Points (n)" onwards.
]

44.4 Matching Points

44.4.1 Overview 44-18
44.4.2 Selecting a New Pair of Matching Points 44-19
44.4.3 Editing a Pair of Matching Points 44-20
44.4.1 Overview
Description Before calculating a transformation, it must be defined which points in <WGS84 Pts Job:>
and <Local Pts Job:> are to be matched. Pairs of matched points are displayed in one line
in DET C SYS Step 3: Match Points (n). New pairs of matched points can be created,
existing pairs of matched points can be edited and pairs of matched points can be deleted.

44.4.2 Selecting a New Pair of Matching Points
Match points step-by-

Step Description
step
1. Refer to "44.2 Determining a New Coordinate System" to access DET C SYS Step
3: Match Points (n).
2. NEW (F2) to access DET C SYS Choose Matching Points.
3. DET C SYS Choose Matching Points
<WGS84 Point:> A WGS 1984 control point. All WGS 1984 stored points from
MANAGE Data: Job Name can be selected.
<Known Point:> A local control point. All local stored points from MANAGE Data:
Job Name of any class, except NONE, can be selected.
<Match Type:> The type of match to be made between the points selected in
<WGS84 Point:> and <Known Point:>. Position and Height, Position Only,
Height Only or None.
For <Transfrm Type: Onestep> or <Transfrm Type: Twostep> possible
options are Pos & Ht, Pos Only, Height Only or None.
For <Transfrm Type: Classic 3D> possible options are Pos & Ht or None.
Select a control point from both jobs that occupy the same position on the different
datums.
) SURVY (F5). Available when <WGS84 Point:> is highlighted. To manually occupy

a point and store it in <WGS84 Pts Job:>.
4. CONT (F1) returns to DET C SYS Step 3: Match Points (n) and adds a new line
of matched points to the matched points list.
44.4.3 Editing a Pair of Matching Points
Edit matching points

Step Description
step-by-step
1. Refer to "44.2 Determining a New Coordinate System" to access DET C SYS Step
3: Match Points (n).
2. DET C SYS Step 3: Match Points (n)
Highlight the pair of matching points to be edited.

3. EDIT (F3) to access DET C SYS Edit Matching Points.
4. All the following steps are identical with the selecting of new matching points.
Refer to "44.4.2 Selecting a New Pair of Matching Points". Follow the instructions
from step 3. onwards.

44.5 Transformation Results

44.5.1 Accessing Transformation Results 44-22
44.5.2 Results for Onestep and Twostep Transformations 44-23
44.5.3 Results for Classic 3D Transformation 44-26
44.5.1 Accessing Transformation Results
Access step-by-step
Step Description
) The results of a transformation can be displayed during the process of determining

or updating a coordinate system.
1. Refer to "44.2 Determining a New Coordinate System". Follow the instructions to
access DET C SYS Step 4: Check Residuals.
2. RESLT (F3) to access DET C SYS Transformation Results.
Next step
IF THEN
<Transfrm Type: Refer to "44.5.2 Results for Onestep and Twostep Transformations".
Onestep> or
<Transfrm Type:
Twostep>
<Transfrm Type: Refer to "44.5.3 Results for Classic 3D Transformation".
Classic 3D>

44.5.2 Results for Onestep and Twostep Transformations
DET C SYS Results of the transformation between the WGS 1984 datum and the local datum are shown
Transformation for each of the transformation parameters. This screen consists of the Position page and
Results, the Height page. The explanations for the softkeys given below are valid for the pages as
Position page indicated.
CONT (F1)
To return to DET C SYS Step 4: Check Resid-
uals.
SCALE (F4) or PPM (F4)
Available on the Position page. To switch
between <Scale:> displaying the true scale
and displaying the ppm.
RMS (F5) or PARAM (F5)
To switch between the root mean square
values of the parameters and the actual
parameter values. The name of the screen
changes to DET C SYS Transformation
Results rms when displaying rms values.
PAGE (F6)
<Shift dX:> Output Shift in X direction.
<Shift dY:> Output Shift in Y direction.
<Rotation:> Output Rotation of transformation.
<Scale:> Output Scale factor used in transformation. Either true scale
or ppm.
<Rot Orig X:> Output Position in the X direction of the origin of rotation.
<Rot Orig Y:> Output Position in the Y direction of the origin of rotation.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Height page. Refer to paragraph "DET C SYS Transformation
Results, Height page".

Transformation
Results, Field Option Description
Height page <Slope in X:> Output Tilt of the transformation in the X direction.
<Slope in Y:> Output Tilt of the transformation in the Y direction.
<Height Shift:> Output Shift in height between WGS 1984 datum and local
datum.

Next step
CONT (F1) returns to DET C SYS Step 4: Check Residuals.
44.5.3 Results for Classic 3D Transformation
DET C SYS Results of the transformation between the WGS 1984 datum and the local datum are shown
Transformation for each of the transformation parameters. This screen consists of the Parameters page and
Results, the Rotn Origin page. The explanations for the softkeys given below are valid for the pages
Parameters page as indicated.
CONT (F1)
To return to DET C SYS Step 4: Check Resid-
uals.
Available on the Parameters page. To switch
between <Scale:> displaying the true scale
and displaying the ppm.
RMS (F5) or PARAM (F5)
To switch between the root mean square
values of the parameters and the actual
parameter values.
PAGE (F6)
<Shift dZ:> Output Shift in Z direction.
<Rotation X:> Output Rotation around the X axis.


<Rotation Y:> Output Rotation around the Y axis.
<Rotation Z:> Output Rotation around the Z axis.
<Scale:> Output Scale factor used in transformation. Either true scale
or ppm.
Next step
PAGE (F6) changes to the Rotn Origin page. Refer to paragraph "DET C SYS Transforma-
tion Results, Rotn Origin page".

Transformation
Results, Field Option Description
Rotn Origin page <Transf Output Classic 3D transformation model used for the trans-
Model:> formation as defined in DET C SYS Configuration,
Classic 3D page.
<Rot Orig X:> Output Available for <Transf Model: Molodensky-Bad>.
Position in the X direction of the origin of rotation.
<Rot Orig Y:> Output Available for <Transf Model: Molodensky-Bad>.
Position in the Y direction of the origin of rotation.
<Rot Orig Z:> Output Available for <Transf Model: Molodensky-Bad>.
Position in the Z direction of the origin of rotation.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to DET C SYS Step 4: Check Residuals.

Determine Coordinate System - One Point
Localisation GPS1200 45-1
45 Determine Coordinate System - One Point Localisation

45.1 Accessing Determine Coordinate System - One Point Localisation 45-2
45.2 Determine Coordinate System - Onestep Transformation 45-4
45.3 Determine Coordinate System - Twostep Transformation 45-16
45.4 Determine Coordinate System - Classic 3D Transformation 45-35
45.5 Computing Required Azimuth 45-39
45.1 Accessing Determine Coordinate System - One Point Localisation
Access step-by-step
Step Description
2. Select <Method: One Pt Localistn>.
3. CONT (F1) to access DET C SYS Step 1: Choose Transform Type.
DET C SYS
Step 1: Choose Trans-
form Type
CONT (F1)
Determine Coordinate System - One Point GPS1200 45-2

Localisation
<Transfrm User input A unique name for the coordinate system. The name
Name:> may be up to 16 characters in length and may include
spaces.
<Transfrm Onestep, Twostep The type of transformation to be used when deter-
Type:> or Classic 3D mining a coordinate system.
<Height Orthometric or The height mode to be used in the determination of a
Mode:> Ellipsoidal coordinate system
Next step
IF THEN
<Transfrm Type: CONT (F1) to access DET C SYS Step 2: Choose Parameters.
Onestep> Refer to "45.2 Determine Coordinate System - Onestep Transforma-
tion".
Twostep> Refer to "45.3 Determine Coordinate System - Twostep Transforma-
tion".
Classic 3D> Refer to "45.4 Determine Coordinate System - Classic 3D Transfor-
mation".
<Bearing:>.
45.2 Determine Coordinate System - Onestep Transformation
Access step-by-step
Step Description
1. Refer to "45.1 Accessing Determine Coordinate System - One Point Localisation"
to access DET C SYS Step 1: Choose Transform Type.
2. DET C SYS Step 1: Choose Transform Type
<Transfrm Type: Onestep>
3. CONT (F1) to access DET C SYS Step 2: Choose Parameters.
DET C SYS
Step 2: Choose Parame-
ters
CONT (F1)

Localisation
selected.
Next step
CONT (F1) continues to DET C SYS Step 3: Choose Common Point.
DET C SYS
Step 3: Choose
Common Point
CONT (F1)
SURVY (F5)
Available for <WGS84 Point:> being high-
lighted. To manually occupy a point and store
it in <WGS84 Pts Job:>.
<Match Type:> How the horizontal and vertical shifts of the transfor-
mation should be computed.
Pos & Height Position and height are taken from the same pair of
matching points.
Pos Only Position is taken from one pair of matching points.
The height can be taken from another pair of
matching points.
<WGS84 Choicelist The point ID of the horizontal and/or vertical control
Point:> point chosen from <WGS84 Pts Job:>. All
WGS 1984 points from MANAGE Data: Job Name
can be selected.
<Known Choicelist The point ID of the horizontal and/or vertical control
Point:> point chosen from <Local Pts Job:>. All local points
from MANAGE Data: Job Name can be selected.
<Match Yes or No Available for <Match Type: Pos Only>. Activates the
Height:> determination of the vertical shift from a separate pair
of matching points.
Next step
CONT (F1) continues to DET C SYS Step 4: Determine Rotation.

Localisation
DET C SYS This screen contains different fields, depending on the <Method:> selected. The explana-
Step 4: Determine Rota- tions for the softkeys given below are valid as indicated.
tion
CONT (F1)
INV (F2)
Available for <Method: Two WGS84 Points>
and <Method: User Entered>. To compute an
azimuth between two local points. Refer to
"45.5 Computing Required Azimuth".
SURVY (F5)
Available when <Point 1:> or <Point 2:> are
highlighted for <Method: Two WGS84
Points> or when <WGS84 Point:> is high-
lighted for <Method: Convergnce Angle>. To
manually occupy a point and store it in
<WGS84 Pts Job:>.
Description of common fields
<Method:> Use WGS84 Method by which the rotation angle for the transfor-
North, mation is determined.
User Entered,
Convergnce
Angle or Two
WGS84 Points
For <Method: Use WGS84 North>

<Rotation:> Output Transformation will be rotated to North as defined by
the WGS 1984 datum. North is 0.00000o.
For <Method: User Entered>

<Rotation:> User input Allows the orientation of the transformation to be
manually typed in or calculated in DET C SYS
Compute Required Azimuth.

Localisation
For <Method: Convergnce Angle>
c
d

e a WGS 1984 coordinate system

b b Local coordinate system, <Coord System:>
c Geodetic North
f d Grid North
e Point on WGS 1984 datum, <WGS84
a Point:>
f Meridian
GPS12_109 Convergence angle, <Rotation:>
<Coord Choicelist Coordinate system to provide the direction of grid
System:> North in the area where the control point used for
determining the local coordinate system, is located.
All coordinate systems from Main Menu:
Manage...\Coordinate Systems can be selected.
<WGS84 Choicelist WGS 1984 point of which the convergence angle will
Point:> be calculated. All points from <WGS84 Pts Job:>
selected in DET C SYS Determine Coord System
Begin can be selected.
<Rotation:> Output The rotation of the transformation calculated as
0.00000o minus the computed convergence angle.
The field is updated as <Coord System:> and
<WGS84 Point:> are changed.
For <Method: Two WGS84 Points>
b
c
d

a WGS 1984 coordinate system
b Local coordinate system
a c Line between two WGS 1984 points.
d Line between two local points
Azimuth of two WGS 1984 points,
<Azimuth:>
b Known azimuth or azimuth of two local
GPS12_110 points, <Reqd Azimuth:>

Localisation
<Point 1:> Choicelist First point to use for computation of <Azimuth:>. All
points from <WGS84 Pts Job:> chosen in DET C
SYS Determine Coord System Begin can be
selected.
<Point 2:> Choicelist Second point to use for computation of <Azimuth:>.
All points from <WGS84 Pts Job:> chosen in DET C
selected.
<Azimuth:> Output Computed azimuth between <Point 1:> and <Point
2:>.
<Reqd User input The required grid azimuth, computed between two
Azimuth:> local points. Refer to "45.5 Computing Required
Azimuth".
<Reqd Azimuth> minus <Azimuth>. The field is
updated as <Point 1:>, <Point 2:> and <Reqd
Azimuth:> are changed.
Next step
CONT (F1) continues to DET C SYS Step 5: Determine Scale.
Step 5: Determine Scale tions for the softkeys given below are valid as indicated. The scale is calculated using the
formula (r + h)/r where r is the distance from the centre of the ellipsoid to the WGS 1984 point
selected in DET C SYS Step 3: Choose Common Point and h is the height of this point
above the WGS 1984 ellipsoid.
CONT (F1)
To switch between <Scale:> displaying the
true scale and displaying the ppm.
SURVY (F5)
Available for <Method: Known WGS84 Pt:>
when <WGS84 Point:> is highlighted. To
<WGS84 Pts Job:>.

<Method:> User Entered, Method of determining the scale factor of the transfor-
Known WGS84 Pt mation.
or Known WGS84
Ht

Localisation
<Scale:> User input Allows the scale factor to be typed in manually.
For <Method: Known WGS84 Pt>

<WGS84 Choicelist WGS 1984 point from which the scale factor will be
Point:> calculated. The scale factor is calculated using the
height of the known WGS 1984 point.
All points from the <WGS84 Pts Job:> chosen in
DET C SYS Determine Coord System Begin can be
selected.
<Scale:> Output The calculated scale factor.
For <Method: Known WGS84 Ht>

<Known User input The WGS 1984 height of a point can be typed in. The
Height:> scale factor is calculated using this height.
<Scale:> Output The calculated scale factor.
Next step
CONT (F1) continues to DET C SYS Step 6: Store Coord System.
DET C SYS
Step 6: Store Coord
System
STORE (F1)
To store the coordinate system to the DB-X,
attach the system to <WGS84 Pts Job:> that
was selected in DET C SYS Determine Coord
System Begin and return to GPS1200 Main
Menu.
spaces.

Localisation

<Scale:> Output Scale factor of transformation.
Next step
STORE (F1) stores the coordinate system and returns to GPS1200 Main Menu.
45.3 Determine Coordinate System - Twostep Transformation

45.3.1 Twostep Transformation 45-17
45.3.2 Computing the Grid Scale Factor 45-30
45.3.3 Computing the Height Scale Factor 45-32

Localisation
45.3.1 Twostep Transformation
Access step-by-step
Step Description
<Transfrm Type: Twostep>
DET C SYS
ters
CONT (F1)
<Pre Trans- Choicelist The pre-transformation to be used for the preliminary
form:> 3D transformation. All 3D transformations from
MANAGE Transformations can be selected.
<Ellipsoid:> Choicelist The ellipsoid to be used in the transformation. All
ellipsoids from MANAGE Ellipsoids can be selected.
<Projection:> Choicelist The projection to be used in the transformation. All
projections from MANAGE Projections can be
selected.
selected.
Next step

Localisation
DET C SYS
Step 3: Choose
Common Point
CONT (F1)
SURVY (F5)
Available for <WGS84 Point:> being high-
lighted. To manually occupy a point and store
it in <WGS84 Pts Job:>.
<Match Type:> How the horizontal and vertical shifts of the transfor-
mation should be computed.
Pos & Height Position and height are taken from the same pair of
matching points.
Pos Only Position is taken from one pair of matching points.
The height can be taken from another pair of
matching points.
<WGS84 Choicelist The point ID of the horizontal and/or vertical control
Point:> point chosen from <WGS84 Pts Job:>. All
WGS 1984 points from MANAGE Data: Job Name
can be selected.
<Known Choicelist The point ID of the horizontal and/or vertical control
Point:> point chosen from <Local Pts Job:>. All local points
from MANAGE Data: Job Name can be selected.
<Match Yes or No Available for <Match Type: Pos Only>. Activates the
Height:> determination of the vertical shift from a separate pair
of matching points.
Next step
CONT (F1) continues to DET C SYS Step 4: Determine Rotation.
Step 4: Determine Rota- tions for the softkeys given below are valid as indicated.
tion

Localisation
CONT (F1)
INV (F2)
Available for <Method: Two WGS84 Points>
and <Method: User Entered>. To compute an
azimuth between two local points. Refer to
"45.5 Computing Required Azimuth".
SURVY (F5)
Available when <Point 1:> or <Point 2:> are
highlighted for <Method: Two WGS84
Points> or when <WGS84 Point:> is high-
lighted for <Method: Convergnce Angle>. To
<WGS84 Pts Job:>.
<Method:> Use WGS84 Method by which the rotation angle for the transfor-
North, mation is determined.
User Entered,
Convergnce
Angle or Two
WGS84 Points
For <Method: Use WGS84 North>

<Rotation:> Output Transformation will be rotated to North as defined by
the WGS 1984 datum. North is 0.00000o.

<Rotation:> User input Allows the orientation of the transformation to be
manually typed in or calculated in DET C SYS
Compute Required Azimuth.

Localisation
For <Method: Convergnce Angle>
c
d

e a WGS 1984 coordinate system

b b Local coordinate system, <Coord System:>
c Geodetic North
f d Grid North
e Point on WGS 1984 datum, <WGS84
a Point:>
f Meridian
GPS12_109 Convergence angle, <Rotation:>
<Coord Choicelist Coordinate system to provide the direction of grid
System:> North in the area where the control point used for
determining the local coordinate system, is located.
All coordinate systems from Main Menu:
Manage...\Coordinate Systems can be selected.
<WGS84 Choicelist WGS 1984 point of which the convergence angle will
Point:> be calculated. All points from <WGS84 Pts Job:>
chosen in DET C SYS Determine Coord System
Begin can be selected.
0.00000o minus the computed convergence angle.
The field is updated as <Coord System:> and
<WGS84 Point:> are changed.
For <Method: Two WGS84 Points>
b
c
d

a WGS 1984 coordinate system
b Local coordinate system
a c Line between two WGS 1984 points.
d Line between two local points
Azimuth of two WGS 1984 points,
<Azimuth:>
b Known azimuth or azimuth of two local
GPS12_110 points, <Reqd Azimuth:>

Localisation
<Point 1:> Choicelist First point to use for computation of <Azimuth:>. All
points from <WGS84 Pts Job:> chosen in DET C
selected.
<Point 2:> Choicelist Second point to use for computation of <Azimuth:>.
All points from <WGS84 Pts Job:> chosen in DET C
selected.
<Azimuth:> Output Computed azimuth between <Point 1:> and <Point
2:>.
<Reqd User input The required grid azimuth, computed between two
Azimuth:> local points. Refer to "45.5 Computing Required
Azimuth".
<Reqd Azimuth> minus <Azimuth>. The field is
updated as <Point 1:>, <Point 2:> and <Reqd
Azimuth:> are changed.
Next step
CONT (F1) continues to DET C SYS Step 5: Determine Scale.
Step 5: Determine Scale tions for the softkeys given below are valid as indicated. The scale is calculated using the
formula (r + h)/r where r is the radius of the ellipsoid at the position of the WGS 1984 point
selected in DET C SYS Step 3: Choose Common Point and h is the height of this point
above the local ellipsoid.
CONT (F1)
GRID (F2)
Available for <Method: Compute CSF>. To
compute the grid scale factor. Accesses DET
C SYS Compute Grid Scale Factor. Refer to
"45.3.2 Computing the Grid Scale Factor".
HIGHT (F3)
Available for <Method: Compute CSF>. To
compute the height scale factor. Accesses
DET C SYS Compute Height Scale Factor.
Refer to "45.3.3 Computing the Height Scale
Factor".

Localisation
<Method:> User Entered or The default method for determining the Combined
Compute CSF Scale Factor to be used in the transformation
process.
<Grid SF:> Output Available for <Method: Compute CSF>. The grid
scale factor as computed in DET C SYS Compute
Grid Scale Factor.
<Height SF:> Output Available for <Method: Compute CSF>. The height
scale factor as computed in DET C SYS Compute
Height Scale Factor.
<Combined The combined scale factor of the transformation.
SF:>
User input Available for <Method: User Entered>. The scale
factor can be typed in.
Output Available for <Method: Compute CSF>. The product
of the grid scale factor and the height scale factor.
Next step
DET C SYS
Step 6: Store Coord
System
STORE (F1)
Menu.
spaces.
<Scale:> Output Scale factor of transformation.

Localisation
Next step
45.3.2 Computing the Grid Scale Factor
Description Calculates the grid scale factor. The grid scale factor is the scale factor of the point chosen
relative to the projection being used.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
2. Select <Transfrm Type: Twostep>.
3. Continue to DET C SYS Step 5: Determine Scale.
4. Select <Method: Compute CSF>.
5. GRID (F2) to access DET C SYS Compute Grid Scale Factor.
DET C SYS
Compute Grid Scale
Factor
CONT (F1)
To confirm the selections and return to the

Localisation
<Method:> Method by which the grid scale factor is to be calcu-
lated.
User Entered Grid scale factor can be manually typed in.
Known Local Pt Grid scale factor is computed using the position of a
known local point.
<Local Point:> Choicelist Available for <Method: Known Local Pt>. The point
ID of the point chosen from <Local Pts Job:> from
which the grid scale factor is computed using the
projection selected in DET C SYS Step 2: Choose
Parameters. All local points from MANAGE Data:
<Grid SF:> The grid scale factor.
User input Available for <Method: User Entered>. To type in
the grid scale factor.
Output Available for <Method: Known Local Pt>. The
computed grid scale factor.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to DET C SYS Step 5: Determine Scale.
45.3.3 Computing the Height Scale Factor
Description Calculates the height scale factor of the point chosen.
Access step-by-step
Step Description
2. Select <Transfrm Type: Twostep>.
3. Continue to DET C SYS Step 5: Determine Scale.
4. Select <Method: Compute CSF>.
5. HIGHT (F3) to access DET C SYS Compute Height Scale Factor.
DET C SYS
Compute Height Scale
Factor
CONT (F1)
To confirm the selections and return to the

Localisation
<Method:> Method by which the height scale factor is to be
calculated.
User Entered Height scale factor can be manually typed in.
Known Local Pt Height scale factor is computed using the height of a
known local point.
Known Local Ht Height scale factor is computed using the known
height of a local point.
<Known Choicelist Available for <Method: Known Local Pt>. The point
Point:> ID of the point chosen from <Local Pts Job:> from
which the height scale factor is computed. All local
points from MANAGE Data: Job Name can be
selected.
<Known User input Available for <Method: Known Local Ht>. A known
Height:> local height.
<Height SF:> The height scale factor.
User input Available for <Method: User Entered>. To type in
the height scale factor.
Output Available for <Method: Known Local Pt> and
<Method: Known Local Ht>. The computed height
scale factor.
Next step
CONT (F1) returns to DET C SYS Step 5: Determine Scale.

Localisation
45.4 Determine Coordinate System - Classic 3D Transformation
Access step-by-step
Step Description
<Transfrm Type: Classic 3D>
DET C SYS
ters
CONT (F1)
<Ellipsoid:> Choicelist The ellipsoid to be used in the transformation. All
ellipsoids from MANAGE Ellipsoids can be selected.
<Projection:> Choicelist The projection to be used in the transformation. All
projections from MANAGE Projections can be
selected.
selected.
<CSCS Choicelist The CSCS model to be used in the transformation. All
Model:> CSCS models from MANAGE CSCS Models can be
selected.
Next step

Localisation
DET C SYS
Step 3: Choose
Common Point
CONT (F1)
SURVY (F5)
To manually occupy a point and store it in
<WGS84 Pts Job:>.
<WGS84 Choicelist The point ID of the control point chosen from
Point:> <WGS84 Pts Job:>. All WGS 1984 points from
MANAGE Data: Job Name can be selected.
<Known Choicelist The point ID of the control point chosen from <Local
Point:> Pts Job:>. All local points from MANAGE Data: Job
Name can be selected.
<Local Use WGS84 Pt Ht The source of the height information to use in the
Height:> or Use Local Pt Ht transformation.
Next step
DET C SYS
Step 4: Store Coord
System
STORE (F1)
Menu.
COORD (F2)
To view other coordinate types.
<Shift dZ:> Output Shift in Z direction.
Next step

Localisation
45.5 Computing Required Azimuth
Description Available for <Method: Two WGS84 Points> and <Method: User Entered> in DET C SYS
Step 4: Determine Rotation.
Allows two local points to be chosen from <Local Pts Job:> selected in DET C SYS Deter-
mine Coord System Begin between which the required azimuth will be computed. This
azimuth is then used with an azimuth computed between two WGS 1984 points chosen from
<WGS84 Pts Job:> selected in DET C SYS Determine Coord System Begin, to calculate
the rotation of the transformation.
The computed required azimuth appears in the <Reqd Azimuth:> field for <Method: Two
WGS84 Points> and the <Rotation:> field for <Method: User Entered> in DET C SYS
Step 4: Determine Rotation.
Compute azimuth step-

Step Description
by-step
2. Select <Transfrm Type: Onestep> or <Transfrm Type: Twostep>.
3. Continue to DET C SYS Step 4: Determine Rotation.
4. Select <Method: Two WGS84 Points> or <Method: User Entered>.
5. INV (F2) to access DET C SYS Compute Required Azimuth.
6. DET C SYS Compute Required Azimuth
<From:> The point ID of the first known point for the azimuth calculation.
<To:> The point ID of the second known point for the azimuth calculation.
Select the points stored in the <Local Pts Job:>.
Step Description
7. CONT (F1) to calculate the required azimuth and return to DET C SYS Step 4:
Determine Rotation.

Localisation
Menu Tree GPS1200 A-1
Appendix A Menu Tree

Menu tree MAIN MENU
|
| SURVEY
|
|
| PROGRAMS...
|
|
| MANAGE...
|
| |
| | JOBS
| |
| | DATA
| |
| | CODELISTS
| |
| | COORDINATE SYSTEMS
| |
| | CONFIGURATION SETS
| |
| | ANTENNAS
|
|
| CONVERT...
|
| |
| | EXPORT DATA FROM JOB
| |
| | IMPORT ASCII/GSI DATA TO JOB
| |
| | COPY POINTS BETWEEN JOBS
|
|
| CONFIG...
|
| |
| | SURVEY SETTINGS...
| |
| | |
| | | ID TEMPLATES
| | |
| | | DISPLAY SETTINGS
| | |
| | | CODING SETTINGS
| | |
| | | QUALITY CONTROL SETTINGS
| | |
| | | LOGGING OF RAW OBS
| | |
| | | POINT OCCUPATION SETTINGS
| | |
| | | SEISMIC RECORDING
| | |
| | | RING BUFFER
| |
| |
| | INSTRUMENT SETTINGS...
| |
| | |
| | | ANTENNA & ANTENNA HEIGHTS
| | |
| | | SATELLITE SETTINGS
| | |
| | | TIME ZONE
| | |
| | | INSTRUMENT ID
| | |
| | | SET NET PARAMETERS, for GRX1200 Pro
| |
| |
| | GENERAL SETTINGS...
| |
| | |
| | | WIZARD MODE
| | |
| | | HOT KEYS & USER MENU
| | |
| | | UNITS & FORMATS
| | |
| | | LANGUAGE
| | |
| | | DISPLAY, BEEPS, TEXT
| | |
| | | START UP & POWER DOWN
| |
| |
| | INTERFACES...
|
| |

| | REAL-TIME
| |
| | ASCII INPUT
| |
| | NMEA OUT 1
| |
| | NMEA OUT 2
| |
| | EXPORT JOB
| |
| | HIDDEN PT
| |
| | TILT
| |
| | METEO
| |
| | INTERNET, not for GRX1200 Pro
| |
| | PPS OUTPUT, for GX1200 with PPS option and GRX1200 Pro
| |
| | EVENT INPUT, for GX1200 with Event option and GRX1200 Pro
| |
| | EXTERNAL OSCILLATOR, for GRX1200 Pro
| |
| | ASCII REMOTE
| |
| | REMOTE
|
|
| TOOLS...
|
| FORMAT MEMORY DEVICE
|
|
| TRANSFER OBJECTS...
|
| |
| | CODELISTS
| |
| | CONFIGURATION SETS
| |
| | COORDINATE SYSTEMS
| |
| | GEOID FIELD FILES
| |
| | CSCS FIELD FILES
| |
| | FORMAT FILES
| |
| | JOBS, if internal memory is fitted
| |
| | SYSTEM RAM CONTENTS
| |
| | MODEM/GSM STATIONS
| |
| | ANTENNA RECORDS
|
|
| UPLOAD SYSTEM FILES...
|
| |
| | APPLICATION PROGRAMS
| |
| | SYSTEM LANGUAGES
| |
| | INSTRUMENT FIRMWARE
|
|
| CALCULATOR
|
|
| FILE VIEWER
|
|
| LICENCE KEYS

Memory Types GPS1200 B-1
Appendix B Memory Types

Types of memory avail-
CompactFlash card/Internal memory
able
Jobs
Points
Codes
Coordinate systems
Raw observations
ASCII output files
Logfiles
ASCII files to be imported (CompactFlash card)
Ring buffer files (CompactFlash card)
CSCS field files (usually on System RAM, can also be used from CompactFlash card)
Geoid field files (usually on System RAM, can also be used from CompactFlash card)
The information is managed in the job database DB-X and in the measurement database.
Application programs memory, 8 MB System RAM, 1 MB
System language Codelists
Font files Coordinate systems
Application programs Configuration sets
Language files Antenna files
Font files Format files
CSCS models/CSCS field files
Geoid models/Geoid field files
Almanac
ID templates
Memory Types GPS1200 B-2

Directory Structure of the Memory Device GPS1200 C-1
Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device

Description On the memory device, files are stored in certain directories. The following diagram of the
directory structure refers to both CompactFlash card and internal memory if fitted.
Backwards compatible with Leica GPS System500 are geoid field files, CSCS field files and
GSI files.
Directory structure | CODE Codelists, various files

|
|
| CONFIG GPS configuration files (*.xfg)
|
|
| CONVERT Format files (*.frt)
|
|
| DATA ASCII files for import/export to/from job
| (*.*)
| |
| |
| | Logfiles created from application programs
| |
| | GPS Almanac file (Almanac.sys)
|
| |
| | CSCS CSCS field files (*.csc)
| |
| |
| | GEOID Geoid field files (*.gem)
| |
| |
| | RINGBUF Ring buffer files
| |
|
| DBX Job files, various files
|
| DTM jobs, various files
|
| System 1200 coordinate system file
|
| (Trfset.dat)
|
| GPS Antenna file (List.ant)
|
| GSM/Modem station list (Stations1200.fil)
|
|
| GSI GSI files (*.gsi)
|
| ASCII files for export from job (*.*)
|
| SYSTEM Application program files (*.a*)
Firmware files (*.fw)
Language files (*.s*)
Licence file (*.key)
System files (System.ram)
Directory Structure of the Memory Device GPS1200 C-2

Pin Assignments and Sockets GPS1200 D-1
Appendix D Pin Assignments and Sockets

D.1 Receiver D-2
D.2 SmartAntenna D-8
D.1 Receiver
Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the receiver ports.
In this chapter, the pin assignments and sockets for the ports of the receiver front panel are
explained.
Ports at the receiver GX1210, GX1220, GX1230, GX1200 with PPS/Event option, GTX1230, GRX1200 Classic
front panel and GRX1200 Lite
a h
b i
c
d
P
P
E1 E2 S
e R
j
P
3 X
f k
P
W P
R 2
g l
A
N P
T 1
GPS12_001a

a) Port E2: Event input 2, on GX1200 with g) Port ANT: GPS antenna in. 8 pin LEMO for
PPS/Event option GTX1230.
b) Port E1: Event input 1, on GX1200 with h) Battery compartment B, not for GRX1200 Pro
PPS/Event option
c) Battery compartment A i) Port PPS: PPS output, on GX1200 with
with CompactFlash card compartment PPS/Event option
in/out. 8 pin LEMO
e) Port P3: Power out, data in/out, or remote inter-k) Port P2: Power out, data in/out, or remote inter-
face in/out. 8 pin LEMO face in/out. 8 pin LEMO
f) Port PWR: Power in. 5 pin LEMO l) Port P1: Power out, data in/out, or remote inter-
face in/out. 8 pin LEMO
GRX1200 Pro
a h
b i
c
d
P
P
E1 OSC S
e P
j
R
3 X
f k
P
W P
R 2
g l
A
N P
T 1
GPS12_001b
a) Port OSC: External oscillator, in g) Port ANT: GPS antenna in

b) Port E1: Event input h) Port NET: Ethernet/LAN data in/out, or remote
interface.
c) Battery compartment i) Port PPS: PPS out
with CompactFlash card compartment

in/out. 8 pin LEMO
e) Port P3: Power out, data in/out, or remote inter-k) Port P2: Power out, data in/out, or remote inter-
face in/out. 8 pin LEMO face in/out. 8 pin LEMO
f) Port PWR: Power in. 5 pin LEMO l) Port P1: Power out, data in/out, or remote inter-
face in/out. 8 pin LEMO
Pin assignments for

Pin Name Description Direction
port P1, port P2 and
port P3 1 RTS RS232, ready to send Out
2 CTS RS232, clear to send In
3 GND Signal ground -
4 RxD RS232, receive data In
5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out
6 ID Identification pin In
7 GPIO RS232, configurable function In or out
8 +12 V 12 V power supply out Out
Pin assignments for

port RX
1 - Do not use -
2 - Do not use -
6 ID Identification pin In
7 GPIO RS232, configurable function In or out
8 TRM_PWR Power out, unregulated, 5 - 28 V -
Pin assignments for

port PWR
1 PWR1 Power input, 11 - 28 V In
2 ID1 Identification pin In
4 PWR2 Power input, 11 - 28 V In
5 ID2 Identification pin In
Pin assignments for

port ANT on GTX1230
1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out
2 USB_D- USB data line In or out
4 - Do not connect -
8 ATX_PWR Power input, 6 - 28 V Out

Pin assignments for

port NET
1 TX+ Transmit data + Out
2 TX- Transmit data - Out
3 RX+ Receive data + In
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 RX- Receive data - In
7 - - -
8 - - -
Sockets Port P1, port P2 and port P3: LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO HMA.1B.308.CLNP
Port RX: LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO HM, Code New.1B.308.CLNP
Port PWR: LEMO-1, 5 pin, LEMO HMG.1B.305.CLNP
Port E1 and port E2: LEMO HGP.00.250.CTL
Port PPS: LEMO ERN.0S.250.CTL
Port OSC: 24QMA-50-2-3/133
Port NET: RJ-45
Port ANT on GTX1230: LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO HMI.1B.308.CLNP
D.2 SmartAntenna
Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the SmartAntenna ports.
In this chapter, the pin assignments and sockets for the ports of the SmartAntenna are
explained.
Ports at the SmartAn-

tenna
a
b
a) Clip-on-contacts for connecting SmartAntenna

to SmartAntenna Adapter on TPS1200
TPS12_216 b) 8 pin LEMO-1 to connect antenna cable
Pin assignments for

8 pin LEMO-1
1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out
2 USB_D- USB data line In or out


6 ID Identification pin In or out
7 PWR Power input, 5 -28 V In
8 ATX_ON ATX on control signal, RS232 levels In
Sockets 8 pin LEMO-1: LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO HMI.1B.308.CLNP

Cables GPS1200 E-1
Appendix E Cables
Description Some applications require the connection of instruments, devices or accessories to the
GPS1200. In this chapter, the required cables and their use are listed.
Cables connecting The table shows which instruments, devices or accessories can be connected using cables.
instruments, devices or The numbers in the table represent different Leica cables. Refer to paragraph "Cables and
accessories product numbers" for a full description of these cables.
Instrument, device,
SmartAntenna
GRX1200 Pro
accessory
GPS1200
TPS1200
TCPS27
RX1200
AX1200 14, 15, - 14, 15, - - -
16, 17, 16, 17,
18, 19, 20 18, 19, 20
or 21 or 21
GTX1230 - 32, 33 or - - - -
34
GEB70 or GEB171 4, 5, 4+6, 35+4, 4, 5, 4+6, 27 4, 5 -
5+6 35+5 5+6
Car battery 4+7, 5+7 - 4+7, 5+7 27+7 23+7, 23+7,
25+7 25+7
Instrument, device,
SmartAntenna
GRX1200 Pro
accessory
GPS1200
TPS1200
TCPS27
RX1200
Power supply for GPS 6 35 6 - - -
receiver, 12 V DC
RX1200 8 or 9 - 8 or 9 22 or 23 - 28
TCPS27 28 - 28 23 28 -
DISTO 10 - 10 - - -
Laser Locator 11 - 11 - - -
Modem 12 - 12 - - -
Satelline radio 13 - 13 - - -
System500 GFU 31 - 31 - - -
RS232 9 pin on PC 1 or 2 35 1 or 2 24 or 26 1 or 25 25
USB on PC 3 - 3 - - -
Ethernet communica- - - 29 - - -
tion device
External oscillator - - 30 - - -
Cables and product The numbers in the above tables are explained in detail below.
numbers
Cables GPS1200 E-2

Cables GPS1200 E-3
GPS data transfer cables
Number Description Product name
1 Cable 2.8 m, data transfer GX COM to RS232 GEV160
2 Cable 2.8 m, data transfer GX RX to RS232 GEV162
3 Cable 2.8 m, data transfer GX USB GEV161
35 Y-cable 2.8 m, SmartAntenna to PC for data transfer and GEV197
to power supply
GPS power cables

4 Cable 0.5 m, GX power cable GEV121
5 Cable 1.8 m, GX power cable GEV97
6 Cable 2.8 m, dual external power input GEV172
35 Y-cable 2.8 m, SmartAntenna to PC for data transfer and GEV197
to power supply
GPS RX1200 cables

8 Cable 1.8 m, RX to GX GEV163
9 Cable 1.0 m, RX to GX, all-on-pole setup GEV164
GPS device cables
10 Cable 1.8 m, GX to DISTO GEV165
11 Cable 1.8 m, GX to Laser Locator GEV166
12 Cable, GX com to modem GEV113
13 Cable, Satelline without housing to GX GEV125
29 Cable 5.0 m, GX to ethernet communication device GEV168
30 Cable 2.0 m, GX to external oscillator GEV169
31 Cable 0.5 m, GX to System500 GFU housings GEV167
GPS antenna cables

14 Cable 1.2 m, GPS antenna GEV141
15 Cable 1.6 m, GPS antenna, extension GEV142
16 Cable 2.8 m, GPS antenna GEV120
17 Cable 1.8 m, GPS antenna, all-on-pole setup GEV194
18 Cable 10 m, GPS antenna GEV119
19 Cable 30 m, GPS antenna -
20 Cable 50 m, GPS antenna GEV134
21 Cable 70 m, GPS antenna -
32 Cable 1.2 m, SmartAntenna to GTX1230 GEV173
Cables GPS1200 E-4

Cables GPS1200 E-5

33 Cable 1.6 m, SmartAntenna to GTX1230, extension GEV174
34 Cable 1.8 m, SmartAntenna to GTX1230, all-on-pole GEV176
setup
TPS communication and power cables

22 Cable 1.8 m, TPS1200 to RX1200 GEV185
23 Y-cable 1.8 m, RX1200/TCPS27 to TPS1200 with power GEV186
24 Y-cable 2.0 m, TPS1200 to RS232 with power GEV187
25 Y-cable 2.0 m, RX1200/TCPS27 to RS232 with power GEV188
26 Cable 2.0 m, TPS1200 to RS232 GEV102
27 Cable 1.8 m, TPS1200 to battery GEV52
28 Y-cable 1.8 m, RX1200 to TCPS27 with power GEV190
Adapter cable
7 Cable 4.0 m, LEMO to 12 V DC power supply GEV71
It allows a connection to a 12 V DC power supply for
example a car battery. Cables used to connect to a
GEB70 or GEB171 battery can be connected to adapter
cable number 7.
Cables GPS1200 E-6
NMEA Message Formats GPS1200 F-1
Appendix F NMEA Message Formats

F.1 Overview F-2
F.2 Used symbols for describing the NMEA formats F-3
F.3 GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data F-8
F.4 GGK - Real-Time Position with DOP F-10
F.5 GGK(PT) - Real-Time Position with DOP, Trimble Proprietary F-12
F.6 GGQ - Real-Time Position with CQ F-14
F.7 GLL - Geographic Position Latitude/Longitude F-16
F.8 GNS - GNSS Fix Data F-18
F.9 GSA - GNSS DOP and Active Satellites F-20
F.10 GSV - GNSS Satellites in View F-22
F.11 LLK - Leica Local Position and GDOP F-24
F.12 LLQ - Leica Local Position and Quality F-26
F.13 VTG - Course Over Ground and Ground Speed F-28
F.14 ZDA - Time and Date F-30
F.1 Overview
Description National Marine Electronics Association is a standard for interfacing marine electronic
devices. This chapter describes all NMEA-0183 messages which can be output by the
receiver.
Access To set the output of NMEA messages on the receiver
Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces...\NMEA Out.

OR
Within the configuration set wizard. Refer to "12 Manage...\Configuration Sets".
Steer from a connected Use a query message. Refer to the interface control documents for GPS1200 for information
device on this query message. The firmware CD contains these documents in electronic format.
) A Talker ID appears at the beginning of the header of each NMEA message.

This is normally GP for GPS but can be changed in CONFIGURE NMEA Output 1 or
CONFIGURE NMEA Output 2.

F.2 Used symbols for describing the NMEA formats
Description NMEA messages consist of various fields. The fields are:
Header
Special format fields
Numeric value fields
Information fields
Null fields
Certain symbols are used as identifier for the field types.

These symbols are described in this section.
Header
Symbol Field Description Example
$ - Start of sentence $
--ccc Address -- = alphanumeric characters identifying GPGGA
the talker
Options:
GP = GPS only
GL = GLONASS only
GN = Global Navigation Satellite System
like WAAS and EGNIOS
ccc = alphanumeric characters identi-
fying the data type and string format of
the successive fields. This is usually the
name of the message.
Special format fields

A Status A = Yes, Data Valid, Warning Flag Clear V
V = No, Data Invalid, Warning Flag Set
llll.ll Latitude Degreesminutes.decimal 4724.538950
Two fixed digits of degrees, two fixed
digits of minutes and a variable number
of digits for decimal fraction of minutes.
Leading zeros are always included for
degrees and minutes to maintain fixed
length.
yyyyy.yy Longitude Degeesminutes.decimal 00937.046785
Three fixed digits of degrees, two fixed
digits of minutes and a variable number
of digits for decimal fraction of minutes.
degrees and minutes to maintain fixed
length.


eeeeee.eee Grid Easting At the most six fixed digits for metres and 195233.507
three fixed digits for decimal fractions of
metres.
nnnnnn.nnn Grid Northing At the most six fixed digits for metres and 127223.793
three fixed digits for decimal fractions of
metres.
hhmmss.ss Time hoursminutesseconds.decimal 115744.00
Two fixed digits of hours, two fixed digits
of minutes, two fixed digits of seconds
and a variable number of digits for
decimal fraction of seconds.
hours, minutes and seconds to maintain
fixed length.
mmddyy Date Monthdayyear - two fixed digits of 093003
month, two fixed digits of day, two fixed
digits of year.
Leading zeros always included for
month, day and year to maintain fixed
length.
No specific Defined field Some fields are specified to contain M
symbol predefined constants, most often alpha
characters.
Such a field is indicated by the presence
of one or more valid characters.
Excluded from the list of valid characters
are the following that are used to indi-
cate other field types: A, a, c, x, hh,
hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, yyyyy.yy.
Numeric value fields

x.x Variable Integer or floating numeric field 73.10 = 73.1
numbers = 073.1 = 73
Optional leading and trailing zeros.
Decimal point and associated decimal-
fraction are optional if full resolution is not
required.
hh_ Fixed HEX field Fixed length HEX numbers 3F
Information fields
c--c Variable text Variable length valid character field A
aa_ Fixed alpha Fixed length field of upper case or lower N
field case alpha characters
xx_ Fixed number Fixed length field of numeric characters 1
field

Null fields
No symbol Information Null fields do not contain any information at ,,
unavailable for all.
output
) Fields are always separated by a comma. Before the Checksum field there is never a colon.
) When information for a field is not available, the position in the data string is empty.
F.3 GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data
Syntax $--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx*hh<CR><LF>
Field Description
$--GGA Header including Talker ID
hhmmss.ss UTC time of position
llll.ll Latitude
a Hemisphere, North or South
yyyyy.yy Longitude
a East or West
x GPS quality indicator
0 = Fix not available or invalid
1 = No real-time position, navigation fix
2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed
3 = Valid fix for GPS Precise Positioning Service mode, for example WAAS
4 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed
xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 12.
x.x HDOP

Field Description
x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no ortho-
metric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported. If the
local ellipsoidal height is not available either, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal
height will be exported.
M Units of altitude as fixed text M
x.x Geoidal separation in metres. This is the difference between the WGS 1984
earth ellipsoid surface and mean sea level.
M Units of geoidal separation as fixed text M
x.x Age of differential GPS data, empty when DGPS not used
xxxx Differential reference station ID, 0000 to 1023
*hh Checksum
<CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed
Example $GPGGA,115744.00,4724.5389504,N,00937.0467858,E,1,07,1.4,476.920,M,,,,*3F
F.4 GGK - Real-Time Position with DOP
Syntax $--GGK,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,EHTx.x,M*hh<CR><LF>
Field Description
$--GGK Header including Talker ID
mmddyy UTC date
llll.ll Latitude
yyyyy.yy Longitude
a East or West
x.x GDOP
EHT Ellipsoidal height
x.x Altitude of position marker as local ellipsoidal height. If the local ellipsoidal
height is not available, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal height will be exported.

Field Description
*hh Checksum
<LF> Line Feed
Example $GPGGK,123053.00,093003,4724.5399275,N,00937.0472825,E,1,06,4.8,EHT1174.656,M
*2B
F.5 GGK(PT) - Real-Time Position with DOP, Trimble Proprietary
Syntax $PTNL,GGK,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,EHTx.x,M*hh<CR><LF>
Field Description
$PTNL $ = Start of sentence delimiter, talker ID fixed with PTNL
GGK GGK sentence formatter
mmddyy UTC date
llll.ll Latitude
yyyyy.yy Longitude
a East or West
2 Not existing
x.x PDOP
EHT Ellipsoidal height

Field Description
x.x Altitude of position marker as local ellipsoidal height. If the local ellipsoidal
height is not available, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal height will be exported.
*hh Checksum
<LF> Line Feed
Example $PTNL,GGK,123128.00,093003,4724.5399453,N,00937.0472652,E,1,06,4.7,EHT470.756,
M*70
F.6 GGQ - Real-Time Position with CQ
Syntax $--GGQ,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M*hh<CR><LF>
Field Description
$--GGQ Header including talker ID
mmddyy UTC date
llll.ll Latitude
yyyyy.yy Longitude
a East or West
x.x Coordinate quality

Field Description
*hh Checksum
<LF> Line Feed
Example $GPGGQ,123208.00,093003,4724.5400344,N,00937.0472306,E,1,06,14.195,1174.674,M
*0
F.7 GLL - Geographic Position Latitude/Longitude
Syntax $--GLL,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh<CR><LF>
Field Description
$--GLL Header including talker ID
llll.ll Latitude
yyyyy.yy Longitude
a East or West
A Status
A = Data valid
V = Data not valid
a Mode indicator
A = Autonomous mode
D = Differential mode
N = Data not valid
*hh Checksum
<LF> Line Feed

) The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field is set to A for the
Mode indicators A and D. The Status field is set to V for the Mode indicator N.
Example $GPGLL,4724.5400808,N,00937.0472041,E,123243.00,A,A*61
F.8 GNS - GNSS Fix Data
Syntax $--GNS,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,c--c,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,xxxx*hh<CR><LF>
Field Description
$--GNS Header including talker ID
llll.ll Latitude
yyyyy.yy Longitude
a East or West
c--c Mode indicator
N = Satellite system not used in position fix or fix not valid
A = Autonomous; navigation fix, no real-time fix
D = Differential; real-time position, ambiguities not fixed
R = Real-time kinematic; ambiguities fixed
xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 99
x.x HDOP

Field Description
x.x Geoidal separation in metres
x.x Age of differential GPS data
xxxx Differential reference station ID, 0000 to 1023
*hh Checksum
<LF> Line Feed
Example $GPGNS,122615.00,4724.5397461,N,00937.0472743,E,A,06,1.7,1175.198,,,*2A
F.9 GSA - GNSS DOP and Active Satellites
Syntax $--GSA,a,x,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
Field Description
$--GSA Header including talker ID
a Mode
M = Manual, forced to operate in 2D or 3D mode
A = Automatic, allowed to automatically change between 2D and 3D
x Mode
1 = Fix not available
2 = 2D
3 = 3D
xx Numbers of the satellites used in the solution. This field is repeated 12 times.
1 to 32 = PRN numbers of GPS satellites
33 to 64 = Numbers of WAAS and WAAS like satellites
x.x PDOP
x.x HDOP
x.x VDOP
*hh Checksum
<LF> Line Feed

Example $GPGSA,A,3,08,10,23,26,28,29,,,,,,,3.9,1.9,3.4*3A
F.10 GSV - GNSS Satellites in View
Syntax $--GSV,x,x,xx,xx,xx,xxx,xx,.....*hh<CR><LF>
Field Description
$--GSV Header including talker ID
x Total number of messages, 1 to 4
x Message number, 1 to 4
xx Number of theoretically visible satellites according to the current almanac.
xx PRN number of satellite
xx Elevation in degrees, 90 maximum, empty when not tracking
xxx Azimuth in degrees true North, 000 to 359, empty when not tracking
xx Signal to Noise Ration C/No in dB, 00 to 99 of L1 signal, null field when not
tracking.
... Repeat set PRN number, elevation, azimuth and SNR up to four times
*hh Checksum
<LF> Line Feed
) Satellite information may require the transmission of multiple messages, specified by the
total number of messages and the message number.
) The fields for the PRN number, Elevation, Azimuth and SNR form one set. A variable number
of these sets are allowed up to a maximum of four sets per message.

Example $GPGSV,3,1,11,02,51,230,48,03,69,299,50,08,05,330,,15,56,056,50*77
$GPGSV,3,2,11,17,25,058,41,18,52,090,48,23,32,050,47,26,07,033,*7F
$GPGSV,3,3,11,27,08,312,,29,03,019,,31,36,297,47,,,,*4C
F.11 LLK - Leica Local Position and GDOP
Syntax $--LLK,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,eeeeee.eee,M,nnnnnn.nnn,M,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M*hh<CR><LF>
Field Description
$--LLK Header including talker ID
mmddyy UTC date
eeeeee.eee Grid Easting in metres
M Units of grid Easting as fixed text M
nnnnnn.nnn Grid Northing in metres
M Units of grid Northing as fixed text M
x GPS quality
xx Number of satellites used in computation
x.x GDOP
metric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported.

Field Description
*hh Checksum
<LF> Line Feed
Example $GPLLK,120620.00,093003,764337.507,M,252970.793,M,1,07,3.6,1180.026,M*15
F.12 LLQ - Leica Local Position and Quality
Syntax $--LLQ,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,eeeeee.eee,M,nnnnnn.nnn,M,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M*hh<CR><LF>
Field Description
$--LLQ Header including talker ID
mmddyy UTC date
eeeeee.eee Grid Easting in metres
M Units of grid Easting as fixed text M
nnnnnn.nnn Grid Northing in metres
M Units of grid Northing as fixed text M
x GPS quality
xx Number of satellites used in computation
x.x Coordinate quality
metric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported.

Field Description
*hh Checksum
<LF> Line Feed
Example $GPLLQ,123436.00,093003,764337.861,M,252972.956,M,1,06,14.003,1174.573,M*3D
F.13 VTG - Course Over Ground and Ground Speed
Syntax $--VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,a*hh<CR><LF>
Field Description
$--VTG Header including talker ID
x.x Course over ground in degrees true North, 0.0 to 359.9
T Fixed text T for true North
x.x Course over ground in degrees magnetic North, 0.0 to 359.9
M Fixed text M for magnetic North
x.x Speed over ground in knots
N Fixed text N for knots
x.x Speed over ground in km/h
K Fixed text K for km/h
a Mode Indicator
A = Autonomous mode
D = Differential mode
N = Data not valid
*hh Checksum
<LF> Line Feed

) The Magnetic declination is set in the receiver in CONFIGURE\Units & Formats, Angle
page.
Example $GPVTG,242.3628,T,242.3628,M,0.001,N,0.002,K,A*20
F.14 ZDA - Time and Date
Syntax $--ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh<CR><LF>
Field Description
$--ZDA Header including talker ID
hhmmss.ss UTC time
xx UTC day, 01 to 31
xx UTC month, 01 to 12
xxxx UTC year
xx Local zone description in hours, 00 to 13
xx Local zone description in minutes, 00 to +59
*hh Checksum
<LF> Line Feed
) This message is given high priority and is output as soon as it is created. Latency is therefore
reduced to a minimum.
Example $GPZDA,091039.00,01,10,2003,-02,00*4B

Event Input Notify Message Format GPS1200 G-1
Appendix G Event Input Notify Message Format

Description With GPS1200, a message can be created. This message provides information about
the fact that an event was detected by the receiver
the time when the event was detected.
The message can be in ASCII or in binary format. It is sent to a connected device, for
example a PC.
Refer to "20.12 Event Input" for configuring the event input interface.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces...\Event Input to activate the notify message.
Syntax in binary format In binary, the notification message format is Leica Binary v2. Documentation for LB2 is avail-
able on request from the Leica Geosystems representative.
Syntax in ASCII $PLEIR,EIX,sssssssss,tttttttt,nnnn,cccc,dddd*hh<CR><LF>
Description of the fields

Field Description
$PLEIR Header
EIX Message identifier.
X = 1 for port E1
X = 2 for port E2
ssssssssss GPS time of week of event in ms
tttttttt GPS time of week of event in ns
nnnn GPS week number
Field Description
cccc Event count
dddd Event pulse count
This is the count of all pulses including those violating the specified time
guard boundary conditions set in CONFIGURE Event Input. This allows
determination of missed events.
*hh Checksum
<CR> Carriage return
<LF> Line feed
Example $PLEIR,EI2,292412000,28932,1203,203,1*70
Event Input Notify Message Format GPS1200 G-2

Seismic Record Format GPS1200 H-1
Appendix H Seismic Record Format

Description With GPS1200, seismic records may be generated. They are stored along with the point as
an annotation. They can be exported directly from the receiver or imported into LGO.
Refer to "20.4.3 Configuration of Annotations" for activating the recording of the seismic
record format.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Survey\Seismic Recording to activate the recording of

seismic record formats.
Syntax @GSEVMgg.gpp.phh.hvv.vaaa.aaasseeeiiRECRSN

Field Description
@ Record Flag, stored automatically
GSE Record Type, GPS SEismic
V Version number of this record, one digit
M Position type, one digit
0 = position not available
1 = navigated position
2 = differential code position
3 = differential phase, float solution
4 = differential phase, fixed solution
gg.g GDOP, four digits including decimal point, 0.0 to 99.9
pp.p PDOP, four digits including decimal point, 0.0 to 99.9
Field Description
hh.h HDOP, four digits including decimal point, 0.0 to 99.9
vv.v VDOP, four digits including decimal point, 0.0 to 99.9
aaa.aaa Antenna height as sum of instrument height and antenna offset, six digits
including decimal point and minus, -99.99 to 999.99
ss Number of satellites used for solution, two digits, 0 to 12
eee Number of epochs spent on point, three digits, 0 to 999
ii Length of interval between epochs in seconds, two digits, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
10, 12, 15, 30, 60
REC Receiver type, six digits, SR299, SR399, SR299E, SR399E, SR9400,
SR9500, SR510, SR520, SR530, GS50, GX1210, GX1220, GX1230
RSN Receiver serial number, six digits, 0 - 999999
Example @GSE14 2.4 2.0 1.1 1.7 2.000 8 7 1SR530 040000
) When information for a value field of a seismic record is unavailable, the default value is
written instead. This is 0.0 for the DOP values and the antenna height and 0 for all other
fields.
) All fields of a seismic record succeed without a separator. When the value for one field
consists of less than the maximum number of digits, then blanks are written for the missing
digits to keep the length of the field consistent.
) Numbers are right aligned, text receiver type is left aligned.
Seismic Record Format GPS1200 H-2

PPS Output Notify Message Format GPS1200 I-1
Appendix I PPS Output Notify Message Format

Description With GPS1200, a message can be created. This message informs about the output of a PPS
pulse. The message can be in ASCII or in binary format. It is sent to a connected device, for
example a PC.
The message is sent at least 0.5 s prior to the next pulse. For this reason, notify messages
are sent when the PPS output rate is greater than 1 s.
Refer to "20.11 PPS Output" for configuring the PPS output interface.
Access Select Main Menu: Config...\Interfaces...\PPS Output to activate the notify message.
Syntax in binary format In binary, the notification message format is Leica Binary v2. Documentation for LB2 is avail-
able on request from the Leica Geosystems representative.
Syntax in ASCII $PLEIR,HPT,sssssssss,nnnn*hh<CR><LF>

Field Description
$PLEIR Header
HPT Message identifier, High Priority Time
sssssssss GPS time of week of next PPS output in ms
nnnn GPS week number
*hh Checksum
<CR> Carriage return
<LF> Line feed
Example $PLEIR,HPT,134210000,1203*17
PPS Output Notify Message Format GPS1200 I-2

AT Commands GPS1200 J-1
Appendix J AT Commands
AT commands Hayes Microcomputer Products is a leading manufacturer of modems that has developed a
language called the AT command set for controlling digital cellular phones and modems that
has become the de facto standard.
List of selected AT The characters in the table below are the most commonly used AT commands when config-
commands uring a digital cellular phone or modem. Refer to the manual of the used digital cellular phone
or modem for information on which AT commands to use.
General commands
AT command Description
^M Inserts a carriage return and send command.
^# Inserts the phone number as defined in digital cellular phone connection.
~ Inserts a delay of 1/4 second.
^^ Insert character ^.
GSM commands
AT command Description
^C Bearer Service: Connection Element.
^S Bearer Service: Speed including Protocol and NetDataRate.
AT Commands GPS1200 J-2
Index GPS1200 i-1
Index
Symbols ADD1 ....................................................................... 39-80
DEC ....................................................................... 26-15 ADJ, class ................................................................. 8-10
DMS ....................................................................... 26-15 ADJST ..................................................................... 43-19
AirLink CDMA ............................................................ 21-7
Numerics Akasaka Tech .......................................................... 21-10
1/X ........................................................................... 26-16 Almanac file, directory .................................................C-1
10^X ........................................................................ 26-16 Almanac.sys ................................................................C-1
3D transformation ...................................................... 43-3 Angle, display format ................................................. 19-9
A ANNOT .................................................................... 20-35
ABS ........................................................................... 8-29 Annotations
Absolute coordinate difference Add ..................................................................... 35-29
Configuration ...................................................... 20-37
Display ................................................................. 8-31
Recall ................................................................. 35-29
Limit exceeded ..................................................... 8-31
Antenna ..................................................................... 18-2
Absolute difference between two points .................... 8-28
Calibration .............................................................. 3-4
Access Point Name ................................................. 21-15
Create .................................................................. 13-5
ACCNT .................................................................... 29-12
Edit ....................................................................... 13-7
Activate Recall deleted default ........................................... 13-4
Code filter ............................................................. 8-60 Set default height ................................................. 18-3
Code group .......................................................... 8-59 Antenna file, directory ..................................................C-2
Ring buffer .......................................................... 17-56 Antenna height ............................................................ 3-1
Adapter cable .............................................................. E-5
Determine ............................................................... 3-7
Adapter, screw-to-stub .............................................. 3-11
Antenna management, access .................................. 13-3
ADD ......................................................................... 39-80 Antennas, default ...................................................... 13-2
Add point to line ........................................................ 8-41
aNUM ...................................................................... 19-20 Application programs memory ..................................... B-1
APN ......................................................................... 21-15 Formating ............................................................. 23-1
Application program Arc Calculations
COGO .................................................................. 39-1 COGO calculation method ................................. 39-65
Customised .......................................................... 34-3 Arc, reference ............................................................ 41-2
Delete ................................................................... 25-2 Area
Description ........................................................... 34-2 Code ....................................................................... 9-4
Determine coordinate system Filter ................................................................ 8-59
General ........................................................... 43-1 Create .................................................................. 8-36
Normal ............................................................ 44-1 Delete ..................................................................... 8-6
One point localisation ...................................... 45-1 Edit ....................................................................... 8-40
Loadable and non-loadable .................................. 34-2 Quick coding ...................................................... 10-22
Reference line ...................................................... 41-1 Area management ..................................................... 8-34
Reference Plane .................................................. 42-1 Areas
Stakeout ............................................................... 38-1 Sorting and filter ................................................... 8-50
Survey Arrow, orientate to
Auto points ...................................................... 36-1 Reference Line ................................................... 41-12
General ........................................................... 35-1 Stakeout ............................................................. 38-11
Hidden points .................................................. 37-1 ASCII
Wake-up ............................................................... 40-1 Export format ........................................................ 14-2
Application program file, directory ...............................C-2 Import format ........................................................ 15-2
Application programs ASCII file
General information .............................................. 34-1 Directory for import/export to/from job ....................C-1
Maximum number open ....................................... 34-5 ASCII input
Menu
Interface ............................................................. 20-33
Access .............................................................. 6-5
Status ................................................................. 29-38
Description ...................................................... 34-4
ASCII Remote, interface .......................................... 20-83
Upload .................................................................. 25-2
Index GPS1200 i-2

Index GPS1200 i-3
ATCMD ................................................................... 21-20 Limit, exceeded .................................................... 8-32
AT-RXM500, Akasaka Tech .................................... 21-10 Offset points ....................................................... 36-18
Attribute Staked points ....................................................... 38-5
Add for Averaging mode
Free code ...................................................... 10-13 Define ................................................................... 8-27
Thematical code .............................................. 10-7 Description ........................................................... 8-27
Description ............................................................. 9-4 AVGE ........................................................................ 8-29
Type in new .......................................................... 9-18 AVGE, class .............................................................. 8-10
Attribute mismatch .................................................. 10-26 AWAY ...................................................................... 37-34
Attribute type ............................................................... 9-5 Azimuth, compute
Attribute value region .................................................. 9-6 Determine coordinate system ............................ 45-39
Attribute value type ..................................................... 9-5 Hidden point measurements .............................. 37-32
Auto points Azimuth/bearing fields ............................................. 19-11
Averaging ............................................................. 36-3 AZMTH .................................................................... 37-36
Coding .................................................................. 36-2
B
Configure .............................................................. 36-4
Properties ............................................................. 36-3 Backsight ................................................................... 31-2
Store ..................................................................... 36-7 Backsight point, unknown .......................................... 31-2
Auxiliary points Backwards Bearing & Distance
Azimuth computation .......................................... 37-35 Hidden point measurements .............................. 37-30
Hidden point measurements ................................ 37-4 Backwards compatible with GPS System500 .............C-1
Average ..................................................................... 8-28 Battery, status ......................................................... 29-30
Averaging .................................................................. 8-27 Bearing .................................................................... 19-11
Auto points ........................................................... 36-3 Bearing & Distance
Configure ................................................................ 7-7 Hidden point measurements ................................ 37-8
Hidden points ....................................................... 37-4 Bearing/azimuth fields ............................................. 19-11
Include/exclude coordinate triplet ......................... 8-30 Beep ........................................................................ 19-17
Auto points ........................................................... 36-8 CLR X ...................................................................... 26-14
Screen ................................................................ 19-18 CLR ....................................................................... 26-14
Bluetooth, identification number ................................ 22-5 CMND ............................................................. 20-35, 22-7
CMR/CMR+, data format ........................................... 20-9
C
Code
Cables ......................................................................... E-1
Area ........................................................................ 9-4
Calculator .................................................................. 26-1
Create .................................................................. 9-17
Operating mode ................................................... 26-2 Description ............................................................. 9-2
Calibration, antennas .................................................. 3-4 Edit ....................................................................... 9-20
Carrier ....................................................................... 3-11 Free ................................................................. 9-3, 9-4
Cassini projection .................................................... 11-30 Line ........................................................................ 9-4
CDMA ........................................................................ 22-3 Point ....................................................................... 9-4
Connection, configure .......................................... 22-8 Quick ...................................................................... 9-4
CH+1 ....................................................................... 22-28 Thematical .............................................................. 9-3
CH-1 ........................................................................ 22-28 Code filter for lines and areas ................................... 8-59
Chainage & Offset Code group .................................................................. 9-2
Hidden point measurements .............................. 37-24 Activate/deactivate ............................................... 8-59
Change Manage ................................................................ 9-21
Coordinate system ................................................. 6-4 Code mismatch ....................................................... 10-24
Radio channel, requirements ............................. 22-13 Code type ........................................................... 9-4, 9-17
Channel changing, requirements ............................ 22-13 Codelist
Circular level, adjust .................................................. 2-54 Description ............................................................. 9-7
Class ........................................................................... 8-9 Elements ................................................................ 9-7
Classic 3D transformation ......................................... 43-3 Job ......................................................................... 9-8
Results ............................................................... 44-26 System RAM .......................................................... 9-8
Classification of points, hierarchy ................................ 8-9 Codelist, directory ........................................................C-1
Clear To Send ......................................................... 21-22 Codelists ...................................................................... 9-1
Index GPS1200 i-4

Index GPS1200 i-5
Codes Modify values ..................................................... 39-94
Manage Shift, Rotate & Scale .......................................... 39-10
Job codes ........................................................ 7-12 Traverse ............................................................... 39-7
Point, line, area codes .................................... 9-13 COGO points
Sort Coding .................................................................. 39-3
Codelist management ..................................... 9-15 Properties ............................................................. 39-3
Data management .......................................... 8-60 Combined Scale Factor ........................................... 45-27
Coding Command, send to device ....................................... 20-39
Auto points ........................................................... 36-2 Compatbile with Leica GPS System500 ......................C-1
COGO points ........................................................ 39-3 Computation, offset point ........................................ 36-18
Configure settings .............................................. 17-23 Config... ....................................................................... 6-3
Free Configuration file, directory ..........................................C-1
Direct input .................................................... 10-17 Configuration set
Using codelist ................................................ 10-13
Default .................................................................. 12-2
Hidden points ....................................................... 37-3
Description ........................................................... 12-2
Offset points ....................................................... 36-18
Recall deleted default ........................................... 12-4
Staked points ....................................................... 38-3
Turn into user defined default .............................. 12-4
Thematical
User defined ......................................................... 12-2
With codelist .................................................... 10-6
Wizard .................................................................. 12-2
Without codelist ............................................. 10-10
Configuration, SBAS ............................................... 20-31
COGO ....................................................................... 39-2
Connect equipment and ports ..................................... 2-5
Arc Calculations ................................................... 39-9
Contrast, screen ...................................................... 19-18
Configure ............................................................ 39-11
Distance input/output ......................................... 39-12 Control points .......................................................... 43-12
End ..................................................................... 39-10 Convert... ..................................................................... 6-3
Intersections ......................................................... 39-8 Coordinate geometry calculations ............................. 39-2
Inverse ................................................................. 39-7 Coordinate quality ..................................................... 8-14
Line Calculations .................................................. 39-8 Coordinate system .................................................... 11-1
Active ................................................................... 11-4 Geoid model ....................................................... 11-39
Change ................................................................... 6-4 Line ...................................................................... 8-36
Create ................................................................ 11-12 Point ..................................................................... 8-18
Default .................................................................. 11-4 Projection ........................................................... 11-32
Determine .................................................... 43-1, 44-3 Reference arc ..................................................... 41-17
Edit Reference line .................................................... 41-17
Determine coordinate system ....................... 43-14 Reference plane ................................................. 42-16
Management ................................................. 11-14 Transformation ................................................... 11-19
Recall deleted default ........................................... 11-9 Criterion ................................................................... 21-14
Turn into user defined default .............................. 11-9 csc file ..................................................................... 11-40
Update ................................................................ 44-16 CSCS field file ......................................................... 11-40
Coordinate system file, directory .................................C-2 CSCS field file, directory .............................................C-1
Coordinate system management, access ................. 11-8 CSCS model ............................................................ 11-40
Coordinate triplet ......................................................... 8-9 Create from CompactFlash card ........................ 11-40
Coordinate types, display .......................................... 8-22 Description ........................................................... 11-6
Coordinates, set for real-time reference .................. 35-17 Types ................................................................... 11-6
Copy CSF ......................................................................... 45-27
Points between jobs ............................................. 16-1 CSYS ........................................................................... 6-4
Country Specific Coordinate System models ............ 11-6 CTRL
CQ ............................................................................. 8-14 CDMA ................................................................... 22-8
Create Class .................................................................... 8-11
Area ...................................................................... 8-36 Configure station to dial ..................................... 22-31
Code ..................................................................... 9-17 GSM ..................................................................... 22-5
Codelist ................................................................ 9-12 Internet ............................................................... 22-22
Coordinate system ............................................. 11-12 Modem ............................................................... 22-11
CSCS models ..................................................... 11-40 NET port ............................................................. 22-25
Ellipsoid .............................................................. 11-25 Radio .................................................................. 22-14
RS232 ..................................................... 22-16, 22-20
Index GPS1200 i-6

Index GPS1200 i-7
Smartgate ........................................................... 22-19 Coordinate system ............................................... 11-9
CTS ......................................................................... 21-22 Devices .............................................................. 21-18
CURNT .................................................................... 10-26 Display mask settings ........................................ 17-19
Current position, status ........................................... 29-19 Ellipsoid .............................................................. 11-24
Customised application program ............................... 34-3 Instrument ID ...................................................... 18-11
Cut off angle .............................................................. 18-5 Projection ........................................................... 11-29
Transformation ................................................... 11-18
D DEL-A ........................................................................ 40-3
D -> R ...................................................................... 26-15 Delete
Data ............................................................................. 8-2 Antenna ................................................................ 13-3
Export ................................................................... 14-1 Application program ............................................. 25-2
Directory .......................................................... 14-5 Code ..................................................................... 9-15
Import ................................................................... 15-1 Code group .......................................................... 9-21
Data format, real-time ............................................... 20-9 Codelist ................................................................ 9-10
Data management ....................................................... 8-1 Configuration set .................................................. 12-3
Access .................................................................... 8-3 Coordinate system ............................................... 11-9
Database ..................................................................... B-1 Coordinate triplet .................................................. 8-31
Ellipsoid .............................................................. 11-23
Date, local ................................................................. 18-9
File ....................................................................... 27-2
DB-X ............................................................................ B-1
Format file
Deactivate COGO ........................................................... 39-14
Code filter ............................................................. 8-60 Data export ...................................................... 14-6
Code group .......................................................... 8-59 Reference Line .............................................. 41-16
Ring buffer .......................................................... 17-56 Reference Plane ........................................... 42-13
Default, recall Stakeout ........................................................ 38-16
Antenna ................................................................ 13-4 From Data Log ..................................................... 8-47
Auto points, display mask settings ....................... 36-9 Geoid model ....................................................... 11-38
Configuration set .................................................. 12-4 ID template ......................................................... 17-13
Inverse COGO calculation ................................. 39-93 Device ....................................................................... 21-3
Job ......................................................................... 7-3 Configure ............................................................ 21-20
Language Create ................................................................ 21-20
Configuration ................................................. 19-15 Description ........................................................... 20-2
From System RAM .......................................... 25-4 Edit ..................................................................... 21-24
Line/area ................................................................ 8-6 Device height
Logfile ................................................................. 39-14 Hidden point measurements .............................. 37-41
Reference Line .............................................. 41-16 Devices
Reference Plane ........................................... 42-13 Access CONFIGURE ......................................... 21-17
Stakeout ........................................................ 38-16 Configuration ........................................................ 21-1
Matched points ..................................................... 44-8 Control .................................................................. 22-1
Observation files automatically .......................... 17-33 For Internet, configure ........................................ 21-17
Point ....................................................................... 8-4 Overview .............................................................. 21-2
Point from line ...................................................... 8-41 Recall deleted default ......................................... 21-18
Projection ........................................................... 11-28 Difference limit exceeded in Stakeout ..................... 38-39
Raw data of ring buffer ....................................... 17-56 Digital cellular phone
Transformation ................................................... 11-17 Control .................................................................. 22-2
DESCR .................................................................... 29-39 User defined ......................................................... 21-5
Determine coordinate system Version ............................................................... 29-13
Access ................................................................ 43-14 Digital cellular phones ............................................... 21-4
Configure ............................................................ 43-17 Requirements for using ........................................ 21-4
Normal .......................................................... 43-18 Supported ............................................................. 21-5
One point localisation .................................... 43-24 Dimensions, carrier and adapter ............................... 3-11
One point localisation
Directory structure of memory device ..........................C-1
Classic 3D transformation ............................. 45-35
Display ..................................................................... 19-17
Onestep transformation .................................. 45-4
Coordinate types .................................................. 8-22
Twostep transformation ................................ 45-16
Settings .............................................................. 17-17
DEVCE .................................................................... 21-17
Index GPS1200 i-8

Index GPS1200 i-9
Display mask ........................................................... 17-17 Codelist ................................................................ 9-12
Auto points ........................................................... 36-9 Coordinate system
Distance Determine coordinate system ....................... 43-14
Input/output in COGO ........................................ 39-12 Management ................................................. 11-14
Disto ........................................................................ 21-14 Ellipsoid .............................................................. 11-26
Distribution Job ......................................................................... 7-9
Residuals throughout transformation area ......... 43-20 Line ...................................................................... 8-40
DMASK Measured coordinate triplet .................................. 8-30
Point ..................................................................... 8-22
Auto points ........................................................... 36-4
Projection ........................................................... 11-33
General .............................................................. 17-18
Transformation ................................................... 11-21
Documentation ............................................................ 1-4
EGNOS, real-time data format ................................ 20-21
Double Bearing
Elevation mask .......................................................... 18-5
Hidden point measurements .............................. 37-13
Ellipsoid
Double Distance
Create ................................................................ 11-25
Hidden point measurements .............................. 37-18
Delete ................................................................. 11-23
Double Stereographic projection ............................. 11-30
Edit ..................................................................... 11-26
DTM job, directory .......................................................C-2
Recall deleted default ......................................... 11-24
DTM layer, select ...................................................... 38-8
Ellipsoid distance in COGO ..................................... 39-12
E Ellipsoid management, access ................................ 11-23
e^X .......................................................................... 26-17 Ellipsoidal height ....................................................... 11-5
EAO Ellipsoids ................................................................. 11-22
Configure ............................................................ 20-61 End date, line/area .................................................... 8-41
Hidden point measurements .............................. 37-10 End time, line/area .................................................... 8-41
Edit Equipment setup ......................................................... 2-1
Area ...................................................................... 8-40 EST, class ................................................................... 8-9
Code ..................................................................... 9-20 Ethernet, control ...................................................... 22-24
European Geostationary Navigation F
Overlay Service .................................................. 20-21 FACE ............................................................ 30-31, 42-19
Event input Field file
Interface ............................................................. 20-77 CSCS ................................................................. 11-40
Notification message format ...................................G-1 Geoid .................................................................. 11-35
Status ................................................................. 29-44 Field record sheet ........................................................ 4-3
Exceeded limit Fields ........................................................................... 1-1
Absolute coordinate difference ............................. 8-31 File, delete ................................................................. 27-2
Auto points ........................................................... 36-8 FILES ...................................................................... 17-30
Average ................................................................ 8-32 FILT
Coordinate quality .............................................. 17-27
Areas ...................................................................... 8-6
Difference in Stakeout ........................................ 38-39
Export ................................................................... 14-6
DOP ................................................................... 17-27
Height smoothing ............................................... 20-20
Height
Lines ....................................................................... 8-6
Reference Line .............................................. 41-13
Management .......................................................... 8-4
Stakeout ........................................................ 38-13
Filter
Position
Activate/deactivate for codes ............................... 8-60
Reference Line .............................................. 41-13
Point, line and area codes .................................... 8-59
Stakeout ........................................................ 38-13
Points, lines and areas ......................................... 8-50
Exclude
Filter setting, define ..................................................... 8-4
Coordinate triplet from averaging ......................... 8-30
Filter symbol .............................................................. 8-50
Expiry date, software maintenance ......................... 29-34
FILTR ...................................................................... 30-20
Export format ............................................................. 14-2
Firmware file, directory ................................................C-2
Export Job, interface ............................................... 20-54
Firmware, version .................................................... 29-34
EXPRT ...................................................................... 7-10
FIX ........................................................................... 43-19
External oscillator, interface .................................... 20-80
Flashing LED on receiver ............................................ 4-3
Index GPS1200 i-10

Index GPS1200 i-11
Format Geoid model ............................................................ 11-34
Event input notify message ....................................G-1 Create from CompactFlash card ........................ 11-39
Export ................................................................... 14-2 Delete ................................................................. 11-38
Import ................................................................... 15-2 Description ........................................................... 11-5
Memory device ..................................................... 23-1 View ................................................................... 11-38
Method ................................................................. 23-2 Geoid model management, access ......................... 11-37
NMEA message ..................................................... F-1 Geoid separation ....................................................... 11-5
PPS output notify message ..................................... I-1 Geoid, height above .................................................. 11-5
Seismic record .......................................................H-1 GETID ..................................................................... 20-23
Format file, export ASCII ........................................... 14-2 GGA ............................................................................ F-8
Format files, directory ..................................................C-1 GGK .......................................................................... F-10
Formats ..................................................................... 19-7 GGK(PT) ................................................................... F-12
Free code ............................................................. 9-3, 9-4 GGQ .......................................................................... F-14
Delete ................................................................... 8-47 GLL ............................................................................ F-16
Free coding ............................................................... 10-3 GNS ........................................................................... F-18
Frequency, change for radio ................................... 22-13 GPRS ...................................................................... 21-15
Front panel .................................................................. 2-2
GPRS device
Functions, main menu ................................................. 6-2 Requirements for using ...................................... 21-15
G Supported ........................................................... 21-16
User defined ....................................................... 21-16
Gateway .................................................................. 18-15
Graph, showing satellites .......................................... 29-7
gem file .................................................................... 11-35
Graphical display
General settings ........................................................ 19-1
Elements in Stakeout application program ......... 38-19
GeoC++ ..................................................................... 34-3
Grid distance in COGO ........................................... 39-12
Geoid field file ......................................................... 11-35
Ground distance in COGO ...................................... 39-12
Directory .................................................................C-1
GROUP Height smoothing .................................................... 20-27
Codes ................................................................... 9-15 Height type
Coding Current position .................................................... 38-3
Free ............................................................... 10-14 Point to be staked ................................................ 38-3
Thematical ...................................................... 10-7 Heights
Job codes ............................................................. 7-13 Hidden point measurement ................................ 37-41
GSA ........................................................................... F-20 HELTH ....................................................................... 18-4
GSI file, directory .........................................................C-2 Hidden point measurement devices ........................ 21-13
GSI16 ........................................................................ 15-3 Supported ........................................................... 21-14
GSI8 .......................................................................... 15-3 Hidden point measurement, heights ........................ 37-41
GSM .......................................................................... 22-3 Hidden point, interface ............................................ 20-57
GSM connection, configure ....................................... 22-5 Hidden points ............................................................ 37-2
GSV ........................................................................... F-22 Averaging ............................................................. 37-4
Coding .................................................................. 37-3
H Measure ............................................................... 37-7
H PNT ....................................................................... 37-5 Properties ............................................................. 37-4
Heating, screen ....................................................... 19-18 Hot keys
Height Configure .............................................................. 19-4
Ellipsoidal ............................................................. 11-5 Description ............................................................. 5-2
Geoid .................................................................... 11-5 HTS ........................................................................... 15-8
Levelled ................................................................ 11-5
Mean sea level ..................................................... 11-5 I
Orthometric .......................................................... 11-5 ID ................................................................................. 8-2
Pole ...................................................................... 3-17 ID templates .............................................................. 17-2
Height filter .............................................................. 20-20 Identification number ............................................... 18-11
Height mode ............................................................ 11-20 Bluetooth .............................................................. 22-5
Height offset, stakeout ............................................ 38-14
Index GPS1200 i-12

Index GPS1200 i-13
IFACE Moving ................................................................ 35-39
Data export ........................................................... 14-8 On known point .................................................. 35-42
Export ASCII ...................................................... 20-54 Static .................................................................. 35-40
Status Instrument firmware, upload ...................................... 25-6
ASCII input .................................................... 29-38 Instrument ID ........................................................... 18-11
Event input .................................................... 29-44 Recall default ..................................................... 18-11
Internet .......................................................... 29-43 Instrument settings .................................................... 18-1
Meteo ............................................................ 29-42 Instrument source ...................................................... 8-14
Real-time input .............................................. 29-37 Interface
Remote ......................................................... 29-46 Configure .............................................................. 20-3
Tilt ................................................................. 29-40 Description ........................................................... 20-2
Illumination Remote port ........................................................... 2-3
Keyboard ............................................................ 19-18 Interfaces... ................................................................ 20-1
Screen ................................................................ 19-18 Status ................................................................. 29-36
Import, format ............................................................ 15-2 Interference ............................................................. 22-13
IMPRT ....................................................................... 7-10 Internet
Include Control ................................................................ 22-24
Coordinate triplet in averaging ............................. 8-30 Interface ............................................................. 20-70
Increase point ID ....................................................... 17-7 Status ................................................................. 29-43
Increasing NE, SE, SW, NW ................................... 19-11 Internet device
Incrementation .......................................................... 17-8 Requirements for using ...................................... 21-15
Point IDs .............................................................. 17-7 Supported ........................................................... 21-16
Indicators, LED ............................................................ 4-2 User defined ....................................................... 21-16
INDIV ....................................................................... 35-12 Internet protocol ...................................................... 18-14
Initialisation ............................................................. 35-35 Intersections
Access ................................................................ 35-37 COGO calculation method ................................. 39-31
Methods ............................................................. 35-35 INV .......................................................................... 39-25
Inverse Configuration ................................................. 19-15
COGO calculation method ................................. 39-16 From System RAM .......................................... 25-4
Select ................................................................. 19-15
J Language file, directory ...............................................C-2
Job Laser
Active ..................................................................... 7-2 Ace 300 .............................................................. 21-14
Create .................................................................... 7-5 Locator ............................................................... 21-14
Default .................................................................... 7-2 Last point, orientate to
Edit ......................................................................... 7-9 Reference Line ................................................... 41-11
Management .......................................................... 7-1 Stakeout ............................................................. 38-10
Job codelist ................................................................. 9-8 LASTX ..................................................................... 26-17
Job file, directory .........................................................C-2 Layer, DTM, select .................................................... 38-8
K LED ............................................................................. 4-2
Description ............................................................. 4-3
Keyboard, illumination ............................................. 19-18
Leica
Keys ............................................................................ 1-2
Data format .......................................................... 20-9
Configure ................................................................ 5-1
Disto ................................................................... 21-14
Fixed ...................................................................... 1-2
Laser Locator ..................................................... 21-14
Softkeys ................................................................. 1-2
Vector ................................................................. 21-14
Known point
Length ....................................................................... 8-40
Initialisation method ........................................... 35-36
Levelled height .......................................................... 11-5
Orientate to reference line .................................. 41-11
LGO
L Creation
Lambert 1 Parallel projection .................................. 11-30 Antenna records ................................................ 3-4
Lambert 2 Parallel projection .................................. 11-30 Attributes ........................................................... 9-5
Language Codes ................................................................ 9-4
CSCS field files ............................................. 11-40
Delete
Index GPS1200 i-14

Index GPS1200 i-15
DTM jobs ....................................................... 38-35 Line code ..................................................................... 9-4
Geoid field files ............................................. 11-35 Filter ..................................................................... 8-59
Quick codes .................................................... 10-4 Line management ...................................................... 8-34
Download Line style
Coordinate systems ........................................ 11-2 Coding .................................................................. 9-17
Jobs .................................................................. 7-2 For line/area code ................................................ 7-15
Upload New line ............................................................... 8-37
Codelist to receiver ........................................... 9-9 LINE+ ...................................................................... 41-72
Coordinate systems ........................................ 11-2 Lines
Firmware ......................................................... 25-6 Sorting and filter ................................................... 8-50
Jobs .................................................................. 7-2 LIST ........................................................................... 19-2
Licence file, directory ..................................................C-2
List reference stations ............................................. 22-27
Licence key ...................................................... 28-1, 34-2
LLK ............................................................................ F-24
Light Emitting Diode .................................................... 4-2
LLQ ............................................................................ F-26
Limit, exceeded
LN ............................................................................ 26-16
Absolute coordinate difference ............................. 8-31
Loadable application program ................................... 34-2
Average ................................................................ 8-32
Local
Line
Date .................................................................... 18-10
Create .................................................................. 8-36
Time ................................................................... 18-10
Delete ..................................................................... 8-6
LOG ................................................................ 8-46, 26-16
Edit ....................................................................... 8-40
Orientate to Log of messages ..................................................... 20-86
Reference line ............................................... 41-11 Log raw observations .............................................. 17-29
Stakeout ........................................................ 38-11 Logfile, create name
Quick coding ...................................................... 10-22 COGO ................................................................ 39-14
Reference ............................................................. 41-2 Reference Line ................................................... 41-16
Line calculations Reference Plane ................................................ 42-13
COGO calculation method ................................. 39-51 Stakeout ............................................................. 38-16
Logfile, directory ..........................................................C-1 Description ...................................................... 30-2
Logging status ......................................................... 29-23 Map ............................................................... 30-18
Plot ................................................................ 30-25
M Survey ........................................................... 30-29
Main menu .................................................................. 6-1 North arrow ........................................................ 30-14
Manage... .................................................................... 6-2 Overview .............................................................. 30-2
Management Point symbols ..................................................... 30-17
Antennas .............................................................. 13-1 Point with focus, symbol ..................................... 30-15
Area ...................................................................... 8-34 Scale bar ............................................................ 30-14
Codelists ................................................................ 9-1 Screen area ........................................................ 30-14
Configuration sets ................................................ 12-1 Select point ........................................................ 30-21
Coordinate systems ............................................. 11-1 Softkeys ............................................................. 30-12
Data ........................................................................ 8-1 Symbol rover ...................................................... 30-15
Jobs ........................................................................ 7-1 Toolbar
Line ...................................................................... 8-34 Description .................................................... 30-16
Points ..................................................................... 8-8 Symbol .......................................................... 30-15
Reference plane ................................................. 42-14 MATCH ...................................................................... 44-8
Manual Match
GPS1200 Point parameters ................................................ 43-20
Application Programs Field ............................... 1-4 Points ................................................................... 44-8
System Field ..................................................... 1-4 Matching points
User .................................................................. 1-4 Choose ............................................................... 44-17
How to use this ....................................................... 1-1 Edit ..................................................................... 44-20
MapView ................................................................... 30-1 Maximum
Access .................................................................. 30-4 Number of open application programs ................. 34-5
Configure .............................................................. 30-7 Mean page ................................................................ 8-27
Example of results in plot mode ......................... 30-26 Access .................................................................. 8-28
Mode Mean sea level, height .............................................. 11-5
Index GPS1200 i-16

Index GPS1200 i-17
MEAS, class .............................................................. 8-10 Minipack .................................................................... 2-51
Measure antenna height ............................................. 3-2 Mismatch
Measure to Attribute .............................................................. 10-26
Arc ...................................................................... 41-20 Code ................................................................... 10-24
Line .................................................................... 41-20 Mode, Calculator ....................................................... 26-2
Measured point ......................................................... 41-4 Modem ...................................................................... 21-7
Measured points, properties Configure connection ......................................... 22-11
Reference line ...................................................... 41-3 Control ................................................................ 22-11
Reference plane ................................................... 42-2 Requirements for using ........................................ 21-7
Mechanical Reference Plane ...................................... 3-5 Supported ............................................................. 21-7
Memory User defined ......................................................... 21-8
Device to be formatted ......................................... 23-1 MODIF ..................................................................... 39-29
Status ................................................................. 29-30 Modify values in COGO ........................................... 39-94
Memory device, directory structure .............................C-1 Molodensky-Badekas .............................................. 11-20
Memory LED ............................................................... 4-2 MountPoint .............................................................. 32-14
Memory types .............................................................. B-1 Moving initialisation method .................................... 35-35
Menu tree .................................................................... A-1 MRP ............................................................................ 3-5
Description ............................................................. 1-3 MSAS, real-time data format ................................... 20-21
Menu, application programs MTSAT
Access .................................................................... 6-5 Satellite-based Augmentation System ............... 20-21
Description ........................................................... 34-4 MultiTech MTMMC-C ................................................ 21-5
Mercator projection ................................................. 11-30
N
MESGS ................................................................... 20-47
Message log ............................................................ 20-86 National Marine Electronics Association ..................... F-2
Meteo NAV, class ................................................................... 8-9
Interface ............................................................. 20-69 Negative offset, COGO ........................................... 39-22
Status ................................................................. 29-42 New version, upload .................................................. 25-1
Next available point ID Offset
Real-time rover operations ................................. 35-28 Antenna
Static operations ................................................ 35-12 Input ................................................................ 13-5
NMEA .......................................................................... F-1 Vertical ..................................................... 3-2, 3-14
NMEA out, interface ................................................ 20-46 External angle .................................................... 20-61
NONE, class ................................................................ 8-9 Hidden point measurements .............................. 20-60
None, coordinate system .......................................... 11-4 Devices ......................................................... 20-64
Non-loadable application program ............................ 34-2 Reference line .................................................... 41-31
Reference plane ................................................... 42-6
North, orientate to
Stakeout, height ................................................. 38-14
Reference Line ................................................... 41-11
Type in
Stakeout ............................................................. 38-10
COGO intersection ........................................ 39-34
NPORT
COGO traverse ............................................. 39-25
PPS output ......................................................... 20-75
Offset point
Tilt ...................................................................... 20-65
Computation ....................................................... 36-18
NTRIP ....................................................................... 32-2
Configure ............................................................ 36-21
Number of satellites, used in solution ..................... 29-10 Description ........................................................... 36-2
O ID ........................................................................ 36-25
Examples ...................................................... 36-25
- ............................................................................. 26-14
ON button .................................................................... 4-1
+ ............................................................................ 26-14
Onestep transformation ............................................. 43-4
Object
Results ............................................................... 44-23
Delete ................................................................... 8-47
Options ........................................................................ 1-1
Description ............................................................. 8-2
Orientate
Oblique Mercator projection .................................... 11-29
Reference Line ................................................... 41-11
Occupation information, status ................................ 29-27
Stakeout ............................................................. 38-10
Occupy staked point ................................................ 38-29
Origin, reference plane .............................................. 42-6
OFF button .................................................................. 4-1
ORIGN ..................................................................... 42-18
Index GPS1200 i-18

Index GPS1200 i-19
Orthogonal mode, stakeout ..................................... 38-21 Azimuth computation .......................................... 37-35
Orthometric height ..................................................... 11-5 COGO .................................................................. 39-3
Overwrite Create .................................................................. 8-18
Code for auto points ............................................. 36-2 Delete ..................................................................... 8-4
Point during import ............................................... 15-4 Delete from line .................................................... 8-41
OWI commands, status ........................................... 29-34 Edit ....................................................................... 8-22
Hidden .................................................................. 37-1
P Measured
Pacific Crest Reference line ................................................. 41-3
PDL GFU .............................................................. 21-9 Reference plane .............................................. 42-2
RFM96W ............................................................ 21-10 Occupation settings ............................................ 17-35
Page ............................................................................ 1-1 Orientate to, Stakeout ........................................ 38-10
Parameters, set for transformation .......................... 43-21 Staked, Stakeout .................................................. 38-5
Path ............................................................................. 1-1 Point code ................................................................... 9-4
Personal Identification Number ................................. 22-7 Filter ..................................................................... 8-59
Point ID
Personal Unblocking code ........................................ 22-7
Incrementation ..................................................... 17-7
Phase center variations, vertical ................................. 3-4
Next available
PI ............................................................................. 26-15
Real-time rover operations ............................ 35-28
Pillar setup .................................................................. 3-8 Static operations ........................................... 35-12
PIN ............................................................................ 22-7 Point management ...................................................... 8-8
Pin assignment ............................................................D-1 Point symbols, MapView ......................................... 30-17
PLAN ............................................................ 30-31, 42-19 Points
PLANE .................................................................... 42-23 Copy between jobs ............................................... 16-1
Point Quick coding ...................................................... 10-20
Add to line ............................................................ 8-41 Points, sorting and filter ............................................. 8-50
Auto ............................................................. 36-1, 36-2 Polar mode, stakeout .............................................. 38-31
Auxiliary ................................................................ 37-4 Polar Stereographic projection ................................ 11-30
Pole Create ................................................................ 11-32
Height ................................................................... 3-17 Delete ................................................................. 11-28
Setup .................................................................... 3-16 Double Stereographic ........................................ 11-30
Ports Edit ..................................................................... 11-33
Connect equipment ................................................ 2-5 Lambert 1 Parallel .............................................. 11-30
Description ........................................................... 20-2 Lambert 2 Parallel .............................................. 11-30
On receiver front panel ........................................... 2-2 Mercator ............................................................. 11-30
POS? ....................................................................... 37-26 Oblique Mercator ................................................ 11-29
Positive offset, COGO ............................................. 39-22 Polar Stereographic ........................................... 11-30
Post-processed kinematic ......................................... 35-6 Recall deleted default ......................................... 11-29
RSO ................................................................... 11-30
Power down ............................................................ 19-21
Transverse Mercator .......................................... 11-29
Power LED .................................................................. 4-2
UTM ................................................................... 11-29
ppm, transformation results ..................................... 44-23 Projection management, access ............................. 11-28
PPS output ................................................................... I-1
Projections ............................................................... 11-27
Interface ............................................................. 20-74 Properties
PRED ...................................................................... 20-20
Auto points ........................................................... 36-3
Prediction COGO points ........................................................ 39-3
Advantages ........................................................ 20-27 Hidden points ....................................................... 37-4
Description ......................................................... 20-26 Manually occupied point ..................................... 35-21
Recommended settings ..................................... 20-27 Measured points
PREV ...................................................................... 32-15 Reference line ................................................. 41-3
PRN ........................................................................... 29-6 Reference plane .............................................. 42-2
PROG ........................................................................ 34-4 Offset points ....................................................... 36-18
Programs... .................................................................. 6-2 Staked points ....................................................... 38-5
PROGS ..................................................................... 23-1 Pseudorandom Noise ................................................ 29-6
Projection PUK ........................................................................... 22-7
Cassini ............................................................... 11-30
Index GPS1200 i-20

Index GPS1200 i-21
Q Recall
Quadrant ................................................................. 19-11 Annotations ........................................................ 35-29
Quick access to screens ASCII import settings ........................................... 15-8
Configure .............................................................. 19-4 Default
Quick code .................................................................. 9-4 Attribute values ............................................... 8-20
Quick coding ............................................................. 10-3 Auto points, display mask settings .................. 36-9
Display mask settings ................................... 17-19
Line/area ............................................................ 10-22
Instrument ID ................................................. 18-11
Points ................................................................. 10-20
Deleted default
R Antenna ........................................................... 13-4
R -> D ...................................................................... 26-15 Configuration set ............................................. 12-4
Radio ......................................................................... 21-9 Coordinate system .......................................... 11-9
Devices ......................................................... 21-18
Change channels ............................................... 22-13
Ellipsoid ......................................................... 11-24
Interference ........................................................ 22-13
Projection ...................................................... 11-29
Supported ............................................................. 21-9
Transformation .............................................. 11-18
User defined ....................................................... 21-10
Last used attribute values .................................... 8-20
Version ............................................................... 29-14
Previous result, COGO ...................................... 39-25
Radio down, log raw observations .......................... 17-31
Receive
Radio Link Protocol ................................................... 22-6
Data from third party device ............................... 20-34
RANGE ................................................................... 39-81
Receiver status ............................................................ 4-2
Raw observations, log ............................................. 17-29
RECT ....................................................................... 26-16
RCL ......................................................................... 26-17
Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic projection ............. 11-30
Real-time ................................................................... 20-5
REF, class ................................................................. 8-10
Reference ............................................................. 35-6
Reference arc
Rover .................................................................... 35-6
Define ................................................................. 41-19
Status ................................................................... 29-9
Define offsets ..................................................... 41-31
Delete ................................................................. 41-26
Enter manually ................................................... 41-19 Residual
Manage .............................................................. 41-17 Distribution throughout transformation area ....... 43-20
Measure to ......................................................... 41-35 Results, hidden point measurements
Select from job ................................................... 41-24 Bearing and distance ......................................... 37-10
Stake to .............................................................. 41-50 Chainage and offset ........................................... 37-27
Reference line Double bearing ................................................... 37-15
Configure ............................................................ 41-10 Double distance ................................................. 37-20
Define ................................................................. 41-19 Resurvey staked point ............................................. 38-39
Define offsets ..................................................... 41-31 Ring buffer ............................................................... 17-53
Delete ................................................................. 41-26 Activate .............................................................. 17-56
Enter manually ................................................... 41-19 Configure ............................................................ 17-56
Manage .............................................................. 41-17 Deactivate .......................................................... 17-56
Measure to ......................................................... 41-35 Use ..................................................................... 17-56
Select from job ................................................... 41-24 Ring buffer file, directory .............................................C-1
Stake to .............................................................. 41-50 RLP ........................................................................... 22-6
Reference plane RMS .......................................................................... 8-16
Application program ............................................. 42-1
Root Mean Square .................................................... 8-16
Horizontal ............................................................. 42-4
Rotations, set for transformation ............................. 43-22
Management ...................................................... 42-14
RPN mode ................................................................. 26-2
Tilted .................................................................... 42-5
Reference point ......................................................... 41-3 RS232 ..................................................................... 21-11
Reference stations, list ............................................ 22-27 RS232, standard ..................................................... 21-11
REM A ..................................................................... 39-81 RSLT1 ..................................................................... 39-41
Remote interface RSLT2 ..................................................................... 39-41
Configure ............................................................ 20-86 RSO projection ........................................................ 11-30
Port ......................................................................... 2-3 RT-1 ........................................................................ 20-17
Request To Send .................................................... 21-22 RT-2 .......................................................................... 20-8
Index GPS1200 i-22

Index GPS1200 i-23
RTCM Settings ................................................................ 18-4
Data format .......................................................... 20-9 SBAS
V3 ......................................................................... 20-9 Description ......................................................... 20-31
RTS ......................................................................... 21-22 Key ..................................................................... 20-31
RUN ........................................................................ 35-12 Scale
RX1200 Set for transformation ......................................... 43-22
Cables .................................................................... E-2 Transformation results ....................................... 44-23
Control key beep ................................................ 19-19 Scale factor, combined ............................................ 45-27
Exchange ........................................................... 19-17 SCAN ...................................................................... 22-27
Use GPS1200 without RX1200 .............................. 4-1 Screen ......................................................................... 1-1
With/without touch screen ...................................... 1-3 Contrast .............................................................. 19-18
RX1200 firmware, upload .......................................... 25-6 Heating ............................................................... 19-18
Illumination ......................................................... 19-18
S SDEV ....................................................................... 26-14
S/N ............................................................................ 29-6 Seismic record .............................................................H-1
SAPOS .................................................................... 21-12 Seismic recording .................................................... 17-50
Satelline Select DTM layer ....................................................... 38-8
2ASx ................................................................... 21-10 Serial number .......................................................... 29-34
3AS ...................................................................... 21-9 SET-D
Satellite Positioning Service .................................... 21-12
Configuration set .................................................. 12-4
Satellite status ........................................................... 29-5 Coordinate system ............................................... 11-9
Satellites Ellipsoid .............................................................. 11-24
Health ................................................................... 18-5 Projection ........................................................... 11-29
Number used in solution .................................... 29-10 Transformation ................................................... 11-18
Setup .................................................................. 2-1, 31-2 Signal to noise ratio ................................................... 29-6
Post-processed Single Point Position ............................................... 30-17
Reference on pillar ............................................ 2-6 Skip point in Stakeout .............................................. 38-40
Static, reference on tripod ............................... 2-10 Skyplot ....................................................................... 29-7
Post-processed kinematic Slope
All-on-pole Antenna height, measure ..................................... 3-18
Option 1 ..................................................... 2-19 Distance
Option 2 ..................................................... 2-23 Hidden point measurements ......................... 37-38
Pole and minipack ........................................... 2-14 SmartAntenna firmware, upload ................................ 25-6
Real-time reference Smartgate ................................................................ 21-12
Single tripod .................................................... 2-26
Control ................................................................ 22-18
Two tripods ..................................................... 2-30
Smoothing heights ................................................... 20-20
Real-time rover
Socket .........................................................................D-1
All-on-pole
Option 1 ..................................................... 2-45 Software upload ........................................................ 25-1
Option 2 ..................................................... 2-48 Soldner Cassini projection ....................................... 11-30
Pole and minipack ........................................... 2-34 Sort
Pole, minipack and SmartAntenna .................. 2-40 Codes
Shift, Rotate & Scale Codelist management ..................................... 9-15
COGO calculation method ................................. 39-77 Data management ........................................... 8-60
Shifts, set for transformation ................................... 43-22 Points, lines and areas ......................................... 8-50
Sideshot Sort settings, define ..................................................... 8-4
Traverse COGO calculation ............................... 39-29 Source ....................................................................... 8-12
Siemens Space-Based Augmentation System ....................... 20-31
M20 ...................................................................... 21-5 SPP ......................................................................... 30-17
MC45 ......................................................... 21-5, 21-16 SRCE ...................................................................... 20-25
S25/S35i ............................................................... 21-5 SSHOT .................................................................... 39-29
TC35 .................................................................... 21-5
Index GPS1200 i-24

Index GPS1200 i-25
Stake Station to dial
Arc, grid .............................................................. 41-21 Configure ............................................................ 22-29
Line, grid ............................................................ 41-21 Create ................................................................ 22-33
Stake to Edit ..................................................................... 22-35
Arc ...................................................................... 41-20 Status ........................................................................ 29-1
Line .................................................................... 41-20 OWI commands ................................................. 29-34
Staked points Receiver ................................................................. 4-2
Average ................................................................ 38-5 STO ......................................................................... 26-17
Coding .................................................................. 38-3 STORD .................................................................... 10-26
Properties, Stakeout ............................................. 38-5 Store, auto points ...................................................... 36-7
Stakeout Sub class ................................................................... 8-11
Configure .............................................................. 38-9 SUN ......................................................................... 37-34
Difference limit exceeded ................................... 38-39 Sun
DTM ................................................................... 38-35 Azimuth computation .......................................... 37-33
Elements of graphical display ............................ 38-19 Orientate to
Orthogonal mode ............................................... 38-21 Reference Line .............................................. 41-11
Polar mode ......................................................... 38-31 Stakeout ........................................................ 38-10
Standard deviation .................................................... 8-15 Survey ......................................................................... 6-2
Standard mode .......................................................... 26-2 Access .................................................................. 35-2
Standard RS232 ...................................................... 21-11 Auto points ........................................................... 36-1
Start date ................................................................... 8-41 Hidden points ....................................................... 37-1
Start time ................................................................... 8-41 Points ................................................................... 35-9
Start up .................................................................... 19-21 Post-processed kinematic operations ................ 35-10
STAT ......................................................................... 29-2 Real-time
Static ......................................................................... 35-5 Reference operations .................................... 35-14
Initialisation method ........................................... 35-36 Rover operations ........................................... 35-24
Static operations ................................................ 35-10
Survey Settings... ...................................................... 17-1 Time slicing ............................................................. 20-13
Survey..., status ........................................................ 29-4 Time stamp ................................................................ 10-3
Surveying techniques ................................................ 35-5 Time zone .................................................................. 18-9
SV health ................................................................... 18-5 Time, local ................................................................. 18-9
Symbols, for points in MapView .............................. 30-17 Timed occupation .................................................... 35-31
System file, directory ...................................................C-2 TMPLT ....................................................................... 40-5
System information, status ...................................... 29-34 Tools... ......................................................................... 6-3
System language Touch screen on, off ................................................ 19-17
Select ................................................................. 19-15 TOWRD ................................................................... 37-34
Upload .................................................................. 25-4 Tracking LED ............................................................... 4-2
System languages, upload ........................................ 25-4 Transfer objects ......................................................... 24-1
System RAM ............................................................... B-1 Transformation
System RAM codelist .................................................. 9-8 Create ................................................................ 11-19
System500, backwards compatible .............................C-1 Delete ................................................................. 11-17
SYSTM ...................................................................... 23-1 Description ........................................................... 43-2
Edit ..................................................................... 11-21
T Recall deleted default ......................................... 11-18
Talker ID ...................................................................... F-2 Requirements ............................................ 43-2, 43-11
Target height Set parameters ................................................... 43-21
Hidden point measurements .............................. 37-41 Transformation management, access ..................... 11-17
Target point ............................................................... 41-3 Transformation model ............................................. 11-20
Text ......................................................................... 19-17 Transformation parameters ....................................... 43-2
Thematical code .......................................................... 9-3 Transformations ...................................................... 11-16
Thematical coding ..................................................... 10-2 Transverse Mercator projection ............................... 11-29
Tilt ........................................................................... 20-65 Traverse, COGO calculation method ...................... 39-20
Interface ............................................................. 20-65 Tribrach, adjust circular level ..................................... 2-54
Status ................................................................. 29-40 Triplet .......................................................................... 8-9
Index GPS1200 i-26

Index GPS1200 i-27
Tripod setup .............................................................. 3-13 Geoid model ....................................................... 11-38
Two real-time devices ............................................... 21-6 Points, lines, areas, free code stored in job ........... 8-4
Twostep transformation ............................................. 43-9 VTG ........................................................................... F-28
Results ............................................................... 44-23 W
Type in new attribute ................................................. 9-18
WAAS, real-time data format ................................... 20-21
U Wake-up session ....................................................... 40-1
U.S. Robotics 56K ..................................................... 21-7 Create .................................................................. 40-5
Units .......................................................................... 19-7 Delete ................................................................... 40-3
Universal Transverse Mercator projection .............. 11-29 Edit ....................................................................... 40-9
Unknown backsight point .......................................... 31-2 Overview .............................................................. 40-2
Wake-Up Session, create .......................................... 40-5
Update coordinate system ...................................... 43-15
Wavecom M1200 Series ........................................... 21-5
Upload
WGS 1984 ................................................................. 11-4
Application programs ........................................... 25-2
Firmware .............................................................. 25-6 Wide Area Augmentation System ........................... 20-21
System files .......................................................... 25-1 Wildcard .................................................................... 8-53
System language ................................................. 25-4 Wizard ....................................................................... 19-2
User menu, configuration .......................................... 19-4
X
UTM projection ........................................................ 11-29
X^2 .......................................................................... 26-16
V XX ................................................................................ 1-1
Vector ...................................................................... 21-14 XY ............................................................................ 26-17
VERS ...................................................................... 29-12
Y
Versions of system firmware ................................... 29-34
Y^X .......................................................................... 26-16
Vertical offset, antenna ...................................... 3-2, 3-14
View
File ....................................................................... 27-1
Z
ZDA ........................................................................... F-30
Zoom ....................................................................... 30-12
Softkey ............................................................... 30-12
Window .............................................................. 30-16
Index GPS1200 i-28

Leica Geosystems AG, Heerbrugg, Total Quality Management -
Switzerland, has been certified as Our commitment to total customer
being equipped with a quality satisfaction.
system which meets the
International Standards of Quality Ask your local Leica Geosystems
Management and Quality Systems agent for more information about our
(ISO standard 9001) and TQM program.
Environmental Management
Systems (ISO standard 14001).
Leica Geosystems AG
733512-2.0.0en CH-9435 Heerbrugg
(Switzerland)
Printed in Switzerland - Copyright Leica
Phone +41 71 727 31 31
Geosystems AG, Heerbrugg, Switzerland 2005
Fax +41 71 727 46 73
Original text
www.leica-geosystems.com

GPS1200 - Technical Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GPS1200 - Technical Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GPS1200 - Technical Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Reference Manual

Serial No.: _________________________

) Important paragraphs which must be adhered to in practice as they enable

Trademarks Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation

Table of Contents GPS1200 II

Appendix B Memory Types B-1

Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device C-1

Appendix D Pin Assignments and Sockets D-1

Appendix E Cables E-1

Appendix F NMEA Message Formats F-1

Appendix G Event Input Notify Message Format G-1

Appendix H Seismic Record Format H-1

Table of Contents GPS1200 IV

Appendix J AT Commands J-1

1 How to Use this Manual

Main Menu: Manage...\Data stands for this working sequence:

Screen CONFIGURE General Menu describes the name of the screen.

Index The index is at the back of the manual.

How to Use this Manual GPS1200 1-2

Menu tree The menu tree helps finding a topic graphically.

Name of documentation Description

How to Use this Manual GPS1200 1-4

In this chapter Topic Page

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-2

a) Port OSC: External oscillator, in g) Port ANT: GPS antenna in

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-4

Cables Refer to "Appendix E Cables" for information on cables.

Ports to connect equip-

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-6

a) GPS antenna f) Receiver GX1210/GX1220/GX1230

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-8

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-10

a) GPS antenna AX1201/AX1202 g) Receiver GX1210/GX1220/GX1230

Equipment setup step-

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-12

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-14

a) GPS antenna AX1201/AX1202 h) 1.6 m antenna cable

Equipment setup step-

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-16

Position of cables in the

a) 1.6 m antenna cable

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-18

2.5 Post-Processed Kinematic, All-on-Pole - Option 1

a) GPS antenna AX1201/AX1202 g) Receiver GX1210/GX1220/GX1230

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-20

Equipment setup step-

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-22

2.6 Post-Processed Kinematic, All-on-Pole - Option 2

a) GPS antenna AX1201/AX1202 f) Receiver GX1210/GX1220/GX1230

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-24

Equipment set-up step-

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-26

a) Radio antenna i) RX1210 if required

Equipment setup step-

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-28

Equipment Setup GPS1200 2-30

a) GPS antenna AX1201/AX1202 j) Radio antenna arm 3 cm long

Equipment setup step-